Cat. No.

I532-E1-1

USER’S MANUAL

SYSDRIVE 3G3RV
High-function General-purpose Inverters

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 General Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the SYSDRIVE Inverters and peripheral devices.
This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order to de-
scribe the components of the product in detail. Make sure that these protective covers are on the
product before use.
Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage.

!WARNING Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Operation, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the
power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) are OFF,
and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.

!WARNING Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the cables.
Doing so may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Do not touch the rotating parts of the motor under operation. Doing so may result in
injury.

!WARNING Do not modify the product. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

!Caution Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may
result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.

• Locations subject to direct sunlight.

• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the
specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.

!Caution Do not touch the Inverter radiator, regenerative resistor, or AC Motor surface while the
power is being supplied or soon after the power is turned OFF. Doing so may result in
a skin burn due to the hot surface.

!Caution Do not conduct a dielectric strength test on any part of the Inverter. Doing so may
result in damage to the product or malfunction.

!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the fol-
lowing locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.

• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.

ii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Transportation Precautions
!Caution Do not hold by front cover or panel, instead, hold by the radiation fin (heat sink) while
transporting the product. Doing so may result in injury.

!Caution Do not pull on the cables. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunc-
tion.

!Caution Use the eye-bolts only for transporting the Inverter. Using them for transporting the
machinery may result in injury or malfunction.

Installation Precautions
!WARNING Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A hold-
ing brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in
injury.

!WARNING Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of
operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

!Caution Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clearances
between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so may result
in fire or malfunction.

!Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.

!Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or mal-
function.

Wiring Precautions
!WARNING Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been turned
OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electri-
cal shock or fire.

!WARNING Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing so
may result in injury.

!WARNING Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ω or less for the 200-V AC
class, or 10 Ω or less for the 400-V AC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may
result in electrical shock.

!Caution Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in
external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

!Caution Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power sup-
ply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.

!Caution Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.
Not doing so may result in fire.

iii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 !Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.

!Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.

!Caution Do not connect any power source to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in
damage to the product or malfunction.

!Caution Do not connect a load to the motor when performing auto-tuning. Doing so may result
in personal injury or equipment damage.

Operation and Adjustment Precautions

!WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical
shock.

!WARNING Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional
items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or
damage to the product.

!WARNING Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in elec-
trical shock.

!WARNING Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the
machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.

!WARNING Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power inter-
ruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the pro-
cessing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset). Doing so may
result in injury.

!WARNING Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator is
valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.

!WARNING Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before tuning ON the power sup-
ply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so while the
RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.

!Caution Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation
because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so may
result in damage to the product.

!Caution Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.

!Caution Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.

!Caution Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the
product.

iv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Inspection Precautions
!WARNING Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.

!WARNING Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power sup-
ply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF, and
after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in elec-
trical shock.

!WARNING Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized per-

sonnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.

!WARNING Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in elec-
trical shock or injury.

!Caution Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless han-
dling may result in malfunction.

!Caution Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or
replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury, damage to
the product, or malfunction.

v
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Warning Information and Position
There is warning information on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration.
Always heed the warnings.

Warning
information
position
Warning
information
position

Illustration shows the 3G3RV-A2004 Illustration shows the 3G3RV-B2220

Warning Information

For Europe (-E suffix) Models For ASIA Model (No suffix)

! WARNING ! WARNING
Risk of electric shock. Risk of electric shock.
ŸRead manual before installing. ŸRead manual before installing.
ŸWait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge ŸWait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge
after disconnecting power supply. after disconnecting power supply.

! AVERTISSEMENT ! AVERTISSEMENT
Risque de dØcharge Ølectrique. Risque de dØcharge Ølectrique.
ŸLire le manuel avant l’ installation. ŸLire le manuel avant l’ installation.
ŸAttendre 5 minutes aprØs la coupure de ŸAttendre 5 minutes aprØs la coupure de
l’ allmentation. Pour permettre la l’ allmentation. Pour permettre la
dØcharge des condensateurs. dØcharge des condensateurs.

vi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
• MODBUS is a trademark of the AEG Schneider Automation, Inc.

vii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Contents
1 Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1
SYSDRIVE RV Introduction..........................................................................1-2
u SYSDRIVE RV Applications ........................................................................................... 1-2
u RV-series Inverter Models ..............................................................................................1-2
Differences by Model....................................................................................1-4
u Differences in Hardware .................................................................................................1-4
u Differences in Software (Function, Factory Setting, and Setting Range) ....................... 1-4
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................1-7
u Checks............................................................................................................................1-7
u Nameplate Information ...................................................................................................1-7
u Component Names......................................................................................................... 1-9
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions.............................................................1-12
u Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ..................................................................................... 1-12
u Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA 1) ................................................................ 1-12
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ............................................1-15
u Installation Site ............................................................................................................. 1-15
u Controlling the Ambient Temperature ........................................................................... 1-15
u Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter.................................................................. 1-15
Installation Orientation and Space..............................................................1-16
u Inverter Installation Orientation and Space................................................................... 1-16
u Digital Operator Panel Cutout Dimensions ................................................................... 1-17
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover .............................................1-18
u Removing the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-18
u Attaching the Terminal Cover........................................................................................ 1-18
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................1-19
u Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less......................................................................................... 1-19
u Inverters of 22 kW or More ........................................................................................... 1-21

2 Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Wiring ...........................................................................................................2-2
Connections to Peripheral Devices ..............................................................2-3
Connection Diagrams ...................................................................................2-4
u Asian Models ..................................................................................................................2-4
u European Models............................................................................................................ 2-5
Terminal Block Configuration........................................................................2-6
u Terminal Arrangement for Asian Models.........................................................................2-6

viii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 u Terminal Arrangement for European Models.................................................................. 2-7
u Terminal Functions ......................................................................................................... 2-8
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals..................................................................... 2-14
u Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors .................................................... 2-14
u Main Circuit Configurations .......................................................................................... 2-19
u Standard Connection Diagrams ................................................................................... 2-20
u Wiring the Main Circuits................................................................................................ 2-21

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for Asian Models ..................................... 2-29

u Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors...................................................................... 2-29
u Control Circuit Terminal Connections........................................................................... 2-31
u Control Circuit Terminal Functions ............................................................................... 2-33
u Control Circuit Wiring Precautions ............................................................................... 2-36

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for European Models .............................. 2-37

u Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors...................................................................... 2-37
u Control Circuit Terminal Connections........................................................................... 2-39
u Control Circuit Terminal Functions ............................................................................... 2-41
u Control Circuit Wiring Precautions ............................................................................... 2-45

Wiring Check .............................................................................................. 2-46

u Checks ......................................................................................................................... 2-46
Installing and Wiring Option Cards............................................................. 2-47
u Option Card Models and Specifications ....................................................................... 2-47
u Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-47
u PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications................................................. 2-48
u Wiring ........................................................................................................................... 2-50
u Wiring Terminal Blocks................................................................................................. 2-54
u Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses ............................................................ 2-55

3 Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1

Digital Operator ............................................................................................ 3-2
u Digital Operator Display ................................................................................................. 3-2
u Digital Operator Keys ..................................................................................................... 3-3
Modes .......................................................................................................... 3-5
u Inverter Modes ............................................................................................................... 3-5
u Switching Modes ............................................................................................................ 3-6
u Drive Mode ..................................................................................................................... 3-7
u Quick Programming Mode.............................................................................................. 3-8
u Advanced Programming Mode....................................................................................... 3-9
u Verify Mode .................................................................................................................. 3-11
u Autotuning Mode .......................................................................................................... 3-12

4 Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1

Cautions and Warnings ................................................................................ 4-2
Trial Operation Procedure ............................................................................ 4-3

xi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedures...........................................................................4-4
u Application Confirmation.................................................................................................4-4
u Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400-V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher) 4-4
u Power ON .......................................................................................................................4-4
u Checking the Display Status ........................................................................................... 4-5
u Initializing Parameters .................................................................................................... 4-5
u Basic Settings ................................................................................................................. 4-7
u Settings for the Control Methods .................................................................................... 4-9
u Autotuning.....................................................................................................................4-11
u Application Settings ...................................................................................................... 4-16
u No-load Operation ........................................................................................................ 4-16
u Loaded Operation ......................................................................................................... 4-16
u Check and Recording Parameters................................................................................ 4-17

Adjustment Suggestions.............................................................................4-18

5 Parameters .............................................................................. 5-1

Parameter Descriptions ................................................................................5-2
u Description of Parameter Tables.....................................................................................5-2
Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels.............................................5-3
u Parameters Settable in Quick Programming Mode ........................................................5-4
Parameter Tables .........................................................................................5-9
u A: Setup Settings ............................................................................................................ 5-9
u Application Parameters: b............................................................................................. 5-11
u Tuning Parameters: C................................................................................................... 5-19
u Reference Parameters: d.............................................................................................. 5-27
u Motor Constant Parameters: E ..................................................................................... 5-31
u Option Parameters: F ................................................................................................... 5-38
u Terminal Function Parameters: H................................................................................. 5-45
u Protection Function Parameters: L ............................................................................... 5-56
u N: Special Adjustments................................................................................................. 5-67
u Digital Operator Parameters: o ..................................................................................... 5-69
u T: Motor Autotuning ...................................................................................................... 5-73
u U: Monitor Parameters.................................................................................................. 5-75
u Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) ................................... 5-83
u Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) ................................. 5-85

6 Parameter Settings by Function............................................ 6-1

Application and Overload Selections............................................................6-2
u Select the Overload to Suit the Application ....................................................................6-2
Frequency Reference ...................................................................................6-6
u Selecting the Frequency Reference Source ................................................................... 6-6
u Using Multi-Step Speed Operation ............................................................................... 6-10
Run Command ...........................................................................................6-12
u Selecting the Run Command Source ........................................................................... 6-12

x
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Stopping Methods ...................................................................................... 6-14
u Selecting the Stopping Method..................................................................................... 6-14
u Using the DC Injection Brake ....................................................................................... 6-17
u Using a Deceleration Stop from an External Input ....................................................... 6-18
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics .......................................... 6-19
u Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times............................................................... 6-19
u Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function) .................................... 6-22
u Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function)........................................................... 6-23
u Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration
(Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function) .......................................................... 6-25

Adjusting Frequency References ............................................................... 6-27

u Adjusting Analog Frequency References ..................................................................... 6-27
u Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)....................................... 6-29
u Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs........................................... 6-30
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ................................... 6-32
u Limiting Maximum Output Frequency........................................................................... 6-32
u Limiting Minimum Frequency ....................................................................................... 6-32
Improved Operating Efficiency ................................................................... 6-34
u Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function).............................. 6-34
u Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation
(Torque Compensation)................................................................................................ 6-36
u Hunting-prevention Function ........................................................................................ 6-38
u Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function) ............................................ 6-39
Machine Protection .................................................................................... 6-40
u Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function) ............................................................. 6-40
u Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ................................................................. 6-42
u Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input .................. 6-43
u Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................ 6-43
u Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input ....... 6-46
u Motor Overload Protection ........................................................................................... 6-47
u Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ....................................... 6-50
u Limiting Motor Rotation Direction ................................................................................. 6-51

Continuing Operation ................................................................................. 6-52

u Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored........................................................ 6-52
u Speed Search............................................................................................................... 6-53
u Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost ........... 6-58
u Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function) ............................ 6-58

Inverter Protection ...................................................................................... 6-60

u Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors............................. 6-60
u Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels ......................................... 6-61
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................ 6-62
u Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator
and Control Circuit Terminals ....................................................................................... 6-62

xi
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 u Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands) ...................................................... 6-63
u Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) ....... 6-64
u Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN)..... 6-65
u Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References
(+/- Speed).................................................................................................................... 6-68
u Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing............................................................ 6-69
u Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card
and Control Circuit Terminals ....................................................................................... 6-70
u Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG)............................................................................................................... 6-70
u Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Error Function) .............................................................................................. 6-71

Monitor Parameters ....................................................................................6-72

u Using the Analog Monitor Parameters.......................................................................... 6-72
u Using Pulse Train Monitor Parameters......................................................................... 6-74
Communications Functions ........................................................................6-76
u Using RS-422A/485 Communications .......................................................................... 6-76
u Communications with a Programmable Controller ....................................................... 6-92
Individual Functions.................................................................................. 6-116
u Using the Timer Function............................................................................................ 6-116
u Using PID Control ....................................................................................................... 6-117
u Energy-saving............................................................................................................. 6-125
u Setting Motor Constant Parameters ........................................................................... 6-127
u Setting the V/f Pattern................................................................................................. 6-129

Digital Operator Functions........................................................................6-135

u Setting Digital Operator Functions.............................................................................. 6-135
u Copying Parameters ................................................................................................... 6-137
u Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator........................................... 6-141
u Setting a Password..................................................................................................... 6-141
u Displaying User-set Parameters Only......................................................................... 6-142

Options .....................................................................................................6-143
u Performing Speed Control with PG............................................................................. 6-143

7 Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1

Protective and Diagnostic Functions ............................................................7-2
u Fault Detection................................................................................................................7-2
u Alarm Detection .............................................................................................................. 7-8
u Operation Errors ........................................................................................................... 7-11
u Errors During Autotuning ............................................................................................. 7-12
u Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................ 7-13

Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................7-15
u If Parameters Cannot Be Set........................................................................................ 7-15
u If the Motor Does Not Operate...................................................................................... 7-16
u If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ........................................................ 7-18
u If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration Is Slow.................................. 7-18

xii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 u If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference ....................................................... 7-18
u If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision ..................................... 7-19
u If There Is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation
in Open-loop Vector Control Mode ............................................................................... 7-19
u If Motor Deceleration Is Slow ....................................................................................... 7-19
u If the Motor Overheats.................................................................................................. 7-20
u If There Is Noise When the Inverter Is Started or From an AM Radio .......................... 7-21
u If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter Is Run ............................. 7-22
u If There Is Mechanical Oscillation ................................................................................ 7-22
u If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output Is Stopped ....................................... 7-23
u If 0 V Is Detected When the Fan Is Started, or the Fan Stalls ...................................... 7-24
u If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference...................................... 7-24
u Oscillation occurs when using energy-saving control................................................... 7-24
u An EF (Forward/Reverse Run Commands Input Together) was detected
and the Inverter will not operate, or the motor operates for only an instant
when the control equipment power supply is turned OFF. ........................................... 7-24

8 Maintenance and Inspection ..................................................8-1

Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................ 8-2
u Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2
u Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2
u Periodic Maintenance of Parts ....................................................................................... 8-2
u Cooling Fan Replacement Outline ................................................................................. 8-4
u Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card........................................... 8-6

9 Specifications ..........................................................................9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications .................................................................. 9-2
u Specifications by Model.................................................................................................. 9-2
u Common Specifications.................................................................................................. 9-4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ....................................... 9-5
Options and Peripheral Devices................................................................... 9-6
u Special Mounted Options ............................................................................................... 9-8
u Separately Installed Options .......................................................................................... 9-9

10 Appendix ................................................................................10-1
Inverter Application Precautions ................................................................ 10-2
u Selection....................................................................................................................... 10-2
u Installation .................................................................................................................... 10-3
u Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10-3
u Handling ....................................................................................................................... 10-4

Motor Application Precautions ................................................................... 10-5

u Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor........................................................ 10-5
u Using the Inverter for Special Motors ........................................................................... 10-6
u Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) ..................... 10-6

xiii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Examples.........................................................................................10-7
u Using a Braking Resistor Unit....................................................................................... 10-7
u Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit ........................................................... 10-7
u Using Braking Units in Parallel ..................................................................................... 10-8
u Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel .............................. 10-9
u Using an Analog Operator .......................................................................................... 10-10
u Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with
an Internal Power Supply............................................................................................ 10-11
u Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with
an External Power Supply .......................................................................................... 10-12
u Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs................................................................ 10-13
Parameters ...............................................................................................10-14

xiv
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1
Chapter 1
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.

SYSDRIVE RV Introduction.........................................1-2
Differences by Model ................................................... 1-4
Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-7
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions............................1-12
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ...........1-15
Installation Orientation and Space .............................1-16
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............ 1-18
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator
and Front Cover.........................................................1-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 SYSDRIVE RV Introduction

K SYSDRIVE RV Applications
The SYSDRIVE RV is ideal for the following applications.
• Fan, blower, and pump applications
• Conveyors, pushers, metal tooling machines, etc.

Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation.

K RV-series Inverter Models

RV-series Inverters have different models and specifications by the area (Asia and Europe) to support widely
used applications and different power supply situations in each area.
Be sure to confirm the models and the specifications you are going to purchase in RV-series Inverter Models
and Differences by Model, below.
In each area, only the products for the area are available (e.g., in Europe, only the models with “-E” are sold).
RV-series Inverters have two types of voltage class: 200-V class and the 400-V class. The capacity range of
applicable motors is 0.4 kW to 160 kW. All the models comply with EC Directives.

n200-V Class RV-series Inverter Models

Table 1.1 RV-series Inverter Models (200-V Class)

Protective Maximum Applied Motor Model Model
Structure Capacity (Asia) (Europe)
0.4 kW 3G3RV-A2004 3G3RV-A2004-E
0.75 kW 3G3RV-A2007 3G3RV-A2007-E
1.5 kW 3G3RV-A2015 3G3RV-A2015-E
2.2 kW 3G3RV-A2022 3G3RV-A2022-E
3.7 kW 3G3RV-A2037 3G3RV-A2037-E
5.5 kW 3G3RV-A2055 3G3RV-A2055-E
7.5 kW 3G3RV-A2075 3G3RV-A2075-E
11 kW 3G3RV-A2110 3G3RV-A2110-E
NEMA 1 type 15 kW 3G3RV-A2150 3G3RV-A2150-E
IP20 18.5 kW 3G3RV-A2185 3G3RV-A2185-E
22 kW 3G3RV-A2220-E
30 kW 3G3RV-A2300-E
37 kW 3G3RV-A2370-E
45 kW Not available 3G3RV-A2450-E
55 kW Use IP00 type 3G3RV-A2550-E
75 kW 3G3RV-A2750-E
90 kW Not available
110 kW Use IP00 type

1-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SYSDRIVE RV Introduction

Protective Maximum Applied Motor Model Model

Structure Capacity (Asia) (Europe)
22 kW 3G3RV-B2220 3G3RV-B2220-E
30 kW 3G3RV-B2300 3G3RV-B2300-E
37 kW 3G3RV-B2370 3G3RV-B2370-E
Open Chassis type 45 kW 3G3RV-B2450 3G3RV-B2450-E
IP00 55 kW 3G3RV-B2550 3G3RV-B2550-E
75 kW 3G3RV-B2750 3G3RV-B2750-E
90 kW 3G3RV-B2900 3G3RV-B2900-E
110 kW 3G3RV-B211K 3G3RV-B211K-E
Note To make IP00 Inverters satisfy the IP20 protective structure, install the Inverter into an IP20 structured box.

n400-V Class RV-series Inverter Models

Table 1.2 RV-series Inverter Models (400-V Class)

Protective Maximum Applied Motor Model Model
Structure Capacity
Asia 
Europe
0.4 kW 3G3RV-A4004 3G3RV-A4004-E
0.75 kW 3G3RV-A4007 3G3RV-A4007-E
1.5 kW 3G3RV-A4015 3G3RV-A4015-E
2.2 kW 3G3RV-A4022 3G3RV-A4022-E
3.7 kW 3G3RV-A4037 3G3RV-A4037-E
4.0 kW Not Available 3G3RV-A4040-E
5.5 kW 3G3RV-A4055 3G3RV-A4055-E
7.5 kW 3G3RV-A4075 3G3RV-A4075-E
11 kW 3G3RV-A4110 3G3RV-A4110-E
15 kW 3G3RV-A4150 3G3RV-A4150-E
NEMA1type
19 kW 3G3RV-A4185 3G3RV-A4185-E
IP20
22 kW 3G3RV-A4220-E
30 kW 3G3RV-A4300-E
37 kW 3G3RV-A4370-E
45 kW 3G3RV-A4450-E
55 kW Not available 3G3RV-A4550-E
75 kW Use IP00 type 3G3RV-A4750-E
90 kW 3G3RV-A4900-E
110 kW 3G3RV-A411K-E
132 kW 3G3RV-A413K-E
160 kW 3G3RV-A416K-E
22 kW 3G3RV-B4220 3G3RV-B4220-E
30 kW 3G3RV-B4300 3G3RV-B4300-E
37 kW 3G3RV-B4370 3G3RV-B4370-E
45 kW 3G3RV-B4450 3G3RV-B4450-E
Open Chassis
55 kW 3G3RV-B4550 3G3RV-B4550-E
type
75 kW 3G3RV-B4750 3G3RV-B4750-E
IP00
90 kW 3G3RV-B4900 3G3RV-B4900-E
110 kW 3G3RV-B411K 3G3RV-B411K-E
132 kW 3G3RV-B413K 3G3RV-B413K-E
160 kW 3G3RV-B416K 3G3RV-B416K-E
Note To make IP00 Inverters satisfy the IP20 protective structure, install the Inverter into an IP20 structured box.

1-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Differences by Model
The RV-series products differ in specifications by model. This section explains the differences.

K Differences in Hardware
For details, refer to Chapter 3 The Digital Operator and Chapter 2 Wiring.
Table 1.3 Differences in Hardware

Europe
Asia
(suffixed -E)
LED type attached LED type attached
(LCD type is sold separately.) (LCD type is sold separately.)
Digital Operator
LED type: 3G3IV-PJVOP161 LED type: 3G3IV-PJVOP161
LCD type: 3G3IV-PJVOP160 LCD type: 3G3IV-PJVOP160
M3-M4
P1-PC
Multi-function output 1 Relay contact output
Transistor output
(SPST-N.O.)
Digital outputs
M5-M6
P2-PC
Multi-function output 2 Relay contact output
Transistor output
(SPST-N.O.)
Unsigned 10 bits Unsigned 12 bits
Analog Input A1
0 V to +10 V -10 V to 10 V
Control Circuit Terminal Block M3.5 screw terminal Phoenix type

Note Abbreviations in the table have the following meanings.

SPDT: Single-pole Double-throw
a

c
b

SPST-N.O.: Single-pole Single-throw with Normally Open Contact

K Differences in Software (Function, Factory Setting, and Setting Range)

Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters for details.
Table 1.4 Differences in Software
Europe
Name Parameter Number Asia

suffixed -E



Setting range: 0 to2
Setting range: 0 or 1 0: Reverse enabled
Prohibition of reverse
b1-04 0: Reverse enabled 1: Reverse disabled
operation
1: Reverse disabled 2: Phase order changed
(Only for V/f control)
DC injection braking Factory setting Factory setting
b2-04
time at stop 0.50 s 0.00 s
Timer function ON/ b4-01 Setting range Setting range
OFF-delay time b4-02 0.0 to 300.0 s 0.0 to 3000.0 s
b5-18
PID set point setting Disabled Enable the PID set point setting
b5-19

1-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Differences by Model

Table 1.4 Differences in Software (Continued)

Europe
Name Parameter Number Asia

suffixed -E



C4-03/C4-04: Set the rated torque of
the motor.
C4-03 to C4-05: Set the time constant (ms) for
Torque value setting Disabled
C4-05 the rising start torque value.
Note: The filter is disabled if set
between 0 ms and 4 ms.
Factory setting Factory setting
Motor constant E1/E3 200-V class = 200 V 60 Hz 200-V class = 200 V 50 Hz
400-V class = 400 V 60 Hz 400-V class = 400 V 50 Hz
Factory setting Factory setting
PG constant F1-01
600 pulses/rotation 1024 pulses/rotation
Display unit selec- Setting range 0 to 1
tion for current moni- F6-05 Disabled 0: Amperage display
tor 1: 100% for 8192
Setting range: 0 to 6 A
Setting range: 0 to 68 69: JOG2
Multi-function inputs H1-01 to H1-05
69 and 6A: Disabled 6A: Drive Enable
0 to 68: Same for all models
Terminal P1 function Terminal M3-M4 function select
H2-02
Multi-function out- select (Transistor output)
puts Terminal P2 function Terminal M5-M6 function select
H2-03
select (Transistor output)
Disabled with 0 setting. Setting range: 0 or 1
Signal select termi-
H3-01 0: Voltage Limit enabled unchange- 0: Voltage Limit enabled
nal A1 (voltage)
able 1: Voltage Limit disabled
Setting range
Setting range
0.0 to 1000.0%
Gain (terminal FM) H4-02 0.0 to 2.5
Factory setting
Factory setting 1.00
100.0%
Setting range Setting range
0.0 to 2.5 0.0 to 1000.0%
Gain (terminal AM) H4-05
Factory setting Factory setting
0.50 50.0%
Setting range Setting range
Bias (terminal FM) H4-03
-10.0% to +10.0% -110.0% to +110.0%
Setting range Setting range
Bias (terminal AM) H4-06
-10.0% to +10.0% -110.0% to +110.0%
Analog output 1
H4-07 Setting range: 0 to 1 Setting range: 0 to 2
signal level selection
0: 0 to +10 V
Analog output 2 sig- 0: 0 to +10 V
H4-08 1: -10 to +10 V
nal level selection 1: -10 to +10 V
2: 4 to 20 mA
Set reference frequency for operation
Frequency reference
Uses the factory setting value (80%) when frequency lost.
for loss of frequency L4-06
and unchangeable. The output frequency is (Specified
reference
Frequency) x L4-06.
Input open-phase pro- Factory setting Factory setting
L8-05
tection selection 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
Output open-phase Factory setting Factory setting
L8-07
protection selection 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)

1-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 1.4 Differences in Software (Continued)
Europe
Name Parameter Number Asia

suffixed -E



LCD brightness Setting Range: 0 to 5
o1-05 Cannot change.
adjustment Adjusts the brightness in five steps.
Operation selection
Factory setting Factory setting
when Digital Opera- o2-06
0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled)
tor is disconnected
Factory setting = 0
Cumulative opera- Factory setting = 1
o2-08 (Cumulative time when the Inverter
tion time selection (Cumulative Inverter run time)
power is ON)
0: Disabled
(U2, U3 are held.)
Fault trace and fault
o2-12 Cannot clear 1: Initialize Enabled
history initialization
(U2, U3 are cleared and o2-12 returns
to 0.)
Four fault history records are stored. Ten fault history records are stored.
U3-01 to U3-08 are enabled. U3-01 to U3-20 are enabled.
Fault history U3-01 to U3-20 Serial communications addresses 90H Serial communications addresses
to 97H are enabled. (800H to 813H are 800H to 813H and 90H to 97H are
disabled) both enabled.

1-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Confirmations upon Delivery

Confirmations upon Delivery

K Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.

Table 1.5 Checks

Item Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
delivered?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
loose?

If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the dealer from which you purchased the Inverter or
your OMRON representative immediately.

K Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifica-
tions, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.

n Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for an Asian-model Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 37 kW, IEC IP00
standards.

Inverter model

3G3RV B2370
Input specifications INPUT AC3PH 200 220V 50Hz 160A
AC3PH 200 230V 60Hz
Output specifications OUTPUT AC3PH 0 230V 0 400Hz 145A 55kVA
Lot number MASS 57kg Mass
LOT NO
Serial number SER NO PRG

MADE IN JAPAN M
OMRON Corporation S

Fig 1.1 Nameplate

1-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nInverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specifications, voltage class, and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
3G3RV - A 2 037 -E

Specifications
None Asian model
-E European model

Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity

004 0.4 kW 055 5.5 kW 220 22 kW 750 75 kW
007 0.75 kW 075 7.5 kW 300 30 kW 900 90 kW
015 1.5 kW 110 11 kW 370 37 kW 11K 110 kW
022 2.2 kW 150 15 kW 450 45 kW 13K 132 kW
037 3.7 kW 185 18.5 kW 550 55 kW 16K 160 kW
040 4.0 kW

Voltage class
2 AC input, 3-phase, 200 V (200-V class)
4 AC input, 3-phase, 400 V (400-V class)
Installation type
A Panel mounting or closed wall-mounting (IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
B Open chassis (IEC IP00)

Series name: 3G3RV Series

Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers

Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA 1)

The Inverter is structured so that it is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the interior wall
of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the
TERMS standards of NEMA 1 in the USA.

Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)

Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Inverter is mounted in a control panel.

1-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Confirmations upon Delivery

K Component Names

n Inverter Appearance
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Figs. 1.3. and 1.4

Top protective cover

Front cover Mounting hole

Digital Operator Diecast case

Terminal cover Nameplate

Bottom protective cover

Fig 1.3 18.5 kW or Less

Mounting holes
Inverter cover

Cooling fan
Front cover

Digital Operator

Nameplate
Terminal cover

Fig 1.4 22 kW or More

1-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nTerminal Arrangement for Asian Models
Views with the terminal cover removed are shown in Figs. 1.5 and 1.6.

E (G) FM AC AM P1 P2 PC SC MP
SC A1 A2 +V AC RP R+ R- S+ S- MA MB MC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 IG M1 M2 E (G)

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminal

Fig 1.5 18.5 kW or Less

Charge indicator

Control circuit 

terminals R1/L11 S1/L21 T1/L31
1 3

R1/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

Main circuit
terminals

Ground terminal

Fig 1.6 22 kW or More

1-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Confirmations upon Delivery

nTerminal Arrangement for European Models

Views with the terminal cover removed are shown in Figs. 1.7 and 1.8.

SN SC SP A1 A2 +V AC -V MP AC RP R+ R- M5 M6 MA MB MC
E(G) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 FM AC AM IG S+ S- M3 M4 M1 M2 E(G)

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminal

Fig 1.7 18.5 kW or Less

Control circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Main circuit terminals

Ground terminal

Fig 1.8 22 kW or More

1-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

K Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)

Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.

A. 200-V class Inverters of 22 to 30 kW B. 200-V class Inverters of 37 to 110 kW

400-V class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW 400-V class Inverters of 75 to 160 kW
W0
W1
4d

H1

H
t1

H2
W D1

(5) D

Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters

K Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA 1)

Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA 1) are shown below.

C. 200-V/400-V class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW D. 200-V class Inverters of 22 to 75 kW

400-V class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW
W1 4-d W0
W1 4-d
H1

H0

H1
H

H0
H
H2

t1 t1
H3
Max.10

D1
H2

H3

W D1
W (5) D
3 D Grommet
(A 200-V class, 22-kW Inverter is shown as an example
sold only in Europe.)

Fig 1.10 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters

1-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

Table 1.6 Open Chassis Type (IP00)

Dimensions (mm) Caloric Value (W)
Mount-
Max. Motor Approx. Total
Voltage Model ing Cooling
Output Figure Mass
Class (-E included) W0 W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 Holes External Inter- Heat Method
(kW) (kg) nal Gener-
d*
ated
0.4 -
0.75 -
Natural
1.5 -
2.2 -
3.7 - Not available.
5.5 - Use NEMA1 1 type by removing the top and the bottom cover.
7.5 -
11 -
200 V 15 -
3-phase 18.5 -
22 3G3RV-B2220 345 254.2 400 195 385 21 586 274 860
A 258 7.5 100 2.3 M6 Fan
30 3G3RV-B2300 370 279.2 450 220 435 24 865 352 1217
37 3G3RV-B2370 298 100 57 1015 411 1426
470 379.2 600 250 575
45 3G3RV-B2450 328 63 1266 505 1771
13 3.2 M10
55 3G3RV-B2550 86 1588 619 2206
B 545 454.2 725 348 325 700 130
75 3G3RV-B2750 87 2019 838 997
90 3G3RV-B2900 615 505.2 850 358 370 820 108 2437 997 3434
15 4.5 M12
110 3G3RV-B211K 690 579.2 885 378 445 855 140 150 2733 1242 3975
0.4 -
0.75 - Natural
1.5 -
2.2 -
3.7 -
Not available.
4.0 -
Use NEMA1 1 type by removing the top and the bottom cover.
5.5 -
7.5 -
11 -
15 -
400 V
18.5 -
3-phase
22 3G3RV-B4220 466 259 725
370 280 450 258 220 435 100 21 Fan
30 3G3RV-B4300 678 317 995
37 3G3RV-B4370 A 7.5 2.3 M6 784 360 1144
45 3G3RV-B4450 420 329.2 550 283 260 535 105 36 901 415 1316
55 3G3RV-B4550 1203 495 1698
75 3G3RV-B4750 88 1399 575 1974
545 454.2 725 348 325 700 13 3.2 M10
90 3G3RV-B4900 89 1614 671 2285
130
110 3G3RV-B411K B 102 2097 853 2950
615 505.2 850 358 370 820
132 3G3RV-B413K 15 4.5 120 M12 2388 1002 3390
160 3G3RV-B416K 689 579.2 916 378 445 855 140 160 2791 1147 3938

1-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 1.7 NEMA 1 Type (IP20)
Dimensions (mm) Caloric Value (W)
Max. Moun
Approx. Total
Voltage Motor Model ting Cooling
Figure Mass
Class Output (-E included) W0 W H D W1 H0 H1 h2 H3 D1 t1 Holes Exter- Inter- heat Method
(kg) nal nal gener-
(kW) d*
ated
0.4 3G3RV-A2004 20 39 59
0.75 3G3RV-A2007 27 42 69
157 39 3 Natural
1.5 3G3RV-A2015 50 50 100
140 280 126 280 266 7 5 M5
2.2 3G3RV-A2022 0 70 59 129
3.7 3G3RV-A2037 112 74 186
C - 177 59 4
5.5 3G3RV-A2055 164 84 248
7.5 3G3RV-A2075 300 6 219 113 332
200 197 186 300 285 65.5
11 3G3RV-A2110 310 10 7 374 170 544
200 V 15 3G3RV-A2150 350 0 429 183 612
240 207 216 350 335 7.5 78 2.3 11 M6
3-phase 18.5 3G3RV-A2185 380 30 501 211 712
22 3G3RV-A2220 345 255 535 195 400 385 135 21 586 274 860
258 100 Fan
30 3G3RV-A2300 370 280 615 220 450 435 165 24 865 352 1217
37 3G3RV-A2370 300 100 62 1015 411 1426
D 470 380 809 250 600 575 210
45 3G3RV-A2450 330 68 1266 505 1771
13 3.2 M10
55 3G3RV-A2550 130 94 1588 619 2206
545 455 1027 350 325 725 700 305
75 3G3RV-A2750 95 2019 838 997
90 -
Not available. Use IP00 type.
110 -
0.4 3G3RV-A4004 14 39 53
0.75 3G3RV-A4007 157 39 3 17 41 58 Natural
1.5 3G3RV-A4015 36 48 84
2.2 3G3RV-A4022 140 280 126 280 266 7 5 M5 59 56 115
3.7 3G3RV-A4037 80 68 148
177 59 4
4.0 3G3RV-A4040 C - 0 90 70 160
5.5 3G3RV-A4055 127 82 209
7.5 3G3RV-A4075 193 114 307
200 300 197 186 300 285 65.5 6
11 3G3RV-A4110 252 158 410
15 3G3RV-A4150 326 172 498
400 V 240 350 207 216 350 335 78 10
18.5 3G3RV-A4185 426 208 634
3-phase
22 3G3RV-A4220 7.5 2.3 M6 466 259 725
370 280 535 258 220 450 435 100 21 Fan
30 3G3RV-A4300 85 678 317 995
37 3G3RV-A4370 635 784 360 1144
45 3G3RV-A4450 420 329.2 283 260 550 535 105 36 901 415 1316
715 165
55 3G3RV-A4550 1203 495 1698
D
75 3G3RV-A4750 88 1399 575 1974
545 454.2 1100 348 325 725 700 13 305 3.2 M10
90 3G3RV-A4900 89 1614 671 2285
130
110 3G3RV-A411K 102 2097 853 2950
615 505.2 1245 358 370 850 820 395
132 3G3RV-A413K 15 4.5 120 M12 2388 1002 3390
160 3G3RV-A416K 689 579.2 1325 378 445 916 855 400 140 160 2791 1147 3938

1-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site

Checking and Controlling the Installation Site

Install the Inverter in an installation site as described below and maintain optimum conditions.

K Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions and in a pollution degree 2 environment.

Table 1.8 Installation Site

Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity
Closed wall-mounting -10 to + 40 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis -10 to + 45 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)

Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400-V class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed
panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other
foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.

K Controlling the Ambient Temperature

To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.

K Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter

Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal powder produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.

1-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Installation Orientation and Space

!WARNING Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A hold-
ing brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in
injury.

!WARNING Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of
operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

!Caution Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clearances
between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so may result
in fire or malfunction.

!Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.

!Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or mal-
function.

K Inverter Installation Orientation and Space

Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always
provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.

50 mm min. 120 mm min.

Air

30 mm min. 30 mm min.
120 mm min.
50 mm min. Air

Horizontal Space Vertical Space

Fig 1.11 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space

1-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Installation Orientation and Space

K Digital Operator Panel Cutout Dimensions

Mounting
panel
57 Two M3
holes

120
111
120
14.5 44

2.5
Cutout

20
70 70 15.8 6.4

60

Fig 1.12 Digital Operator Panel Cutout Dimensions

1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Closed Wall-mounting (IP20, NEMA 1)and
Open Chassis (IP00) Inverters.
2. The top and bottom covers must be romoved before installing a 200 or 400-V class Inverter with an output
IMPORTANT of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400-V class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.

1-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.

K Removing the Terminal Cover

n Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc-
tions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.

Fig 1.13 Removing the Terminal Cover (3G3RV-A2055 Shown Above)

n Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.

Fig 1.14 Removing the Terminal Cover (3G3RV-B2220 Shown Above)

K Attaching the Terminal Cover

When the terminal block wiring is completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove
on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.

1-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover

Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and

Front Cover
The methods for removing and attaching the Digital Operator and front cover are described in this section.

K Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in
addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the
terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.

nRemoving the Digital Operator

Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator,
and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it as shown in the following illustration.

2
1

Fig 1.15 Removing the Digital Operator (3G3RV-A4055 Shown Above)

1-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nRemoving the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.

Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (3G3RV-A4055 Shown Above)

nMounting the Front Cover

After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order the steps to
remove the front cover.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, the Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.

nMounting the Digital Operator

After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverter using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in
the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).

A
1
B

Fig 1.17 Mounting the Digital Operator

1-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover

1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than
those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
IMPORTANT contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.

K Inverters of 22 kW or More
For Inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce-
dure to remove the Digital Operator and front cover.

nRemoving the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.

nRemoving the Front Cover

Lift up at the location labeled 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.

Fig 1.18 Removing the Front Cover (Model 3G3RV-B2220 Shown Above)

n Attaching the Front Cover

After completing the necessary work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the
front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.

nAttaching the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.

1-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2
Chapter 2
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit termi-
nal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.

Wiring...........................................................................2-2
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-3
Connection Diagrams ..................................................2-4
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-6
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ....................................2-14
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for Asian Models..... 2-29
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for
European Models........................................................2-37
Wiring Check ............................................................. 2-46
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Wiring

!WARNING Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been turned
OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electri-
cal shock or fire.

!WARNING Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing so
may result in injury.

!WARNING Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ω or less for the 200-VAC
class, or 10 Ω or less for the 400-VAC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may
result in electrical shock.

!Caution Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circulating in
external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

!Caution Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power sup-
ply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.

!Caution Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.
Not doing so may result in fire.

!Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.

!Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.

!Caution Do not connect any power source to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in
damage to the product or malfunction.

2-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Connections to Peripheral Devices

Connections to Peripheral Devices

Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.

Power supply

Molded-case
circuit breaker
or ground fault
interrupter

Magnetic con-
tactor (MC)

AC reactor for power

factor improvement

Braking resistor

Input noise filter

DC reactor for power

factor improvement

Inverter

Ground

Output noise filter

Motor

Ground

Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices

2-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Connection Diagrams
The connection diagrams for the Inverter are shown in this section.

K Asian Models
The connection diagram for Asian models is shown in Fig. 2.2.

When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.

DC reactor to improve
input power factor (optional) Braking Resistor Unit (optional)

Short-circuit bar

MCCB

3-phase power
200 to 240 V IM
50/60 Hz
Inverter
3G3RV
(Ground to 100 Ω max.)
Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop Pulse train output

0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
Default: Output
External fault
frequency

Fault reset
Ammeter adjustment
Multi-function Multi-step speed
inputs setting 1 Multi-function analog output 2
Factory -10 to 10 V 2 mA
settings Multi-step speed Default: Output current
setting 2 0 to +10 V
Ammeter adjustment
Jog frequency selection
Multi-function analog output 1
CN5 (NPN setting) 10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Output frequency
0 to +10 V

Shield terminal

Pulse train input Master speed

pulse train
Frequency setting Fault contact output
adjustment 0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input 250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VAC, 1 A max.
Frequency
setter Frequency setting power
External +15 V, 20 mA
frequency 0 to 10 V
Master speed reference
references Multi-function output
4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
250 VAC, 1 A max.
Master speed reference 30 VDC, 1 A max.
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Default: Running
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
signal

Multi-function output 1
Terminating Default: Zero
resistance speed
Multi-function
Multi-function output 2 open-collector outputs
RS-485/422 Default: 48 VDC 50 mA max.
communications Frequency
agree signal

IG

Shield Twisted-pair wires

Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram for Asian Models

2-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Connection Diagrams

K European Models
The connection diagram for the European models is shown in Fig. 2.3.

DC reactor to improve
input power factor (optional) Braking Resistor Unit (optional)
U X

Short-circuit bar

+ 1 + 2 B1 B2
MCCB

R R/L1 U/T1
3-phase power
200 to 240 V S/L2
S V/T2 IM
50/60 Hz
T T/L3 Inverter W/T3
3G3RV
(Ground to 100 W max.)
Forward Run/Stop S1

MP
Reverse Run/Stop Pulse train output
S2

AC
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 k W)
Default: Output
External fault S3
frequency

Fault reset S4 CN15

Ammeter adjustment
Multi-function Multi-step speed AM
contact inputs setting 1 Multi-function analog output 2
S5 V/I Converter
Factory 0 to 10 V
/4 to 20 mA -10 to 10 V 2 mA
settings Multi-step speed Default: Output current
setting 2 S6 0 to +10 V
CN15
Ammeter adjustment
FM
Jog frequency selection
S7
V/I Converter Multi-function analog output 1
0 to 10 V
/4 to 20 mA -10 to 10 V 2 mA
+24 V 8 mA
SP AC
FM
+ Default: Output frequency
(PNP connection) 24 V 0 to +10 V
SN -

E(G)
SC

E(G)
Shield terminal

Pulse train input Master speed pulse train

RP 0 to 32 kHz (3 k ) W MA
Error contact output
Frequency setting High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
adjustment MB 250 VAC, 1 A max.
-V Frequency setting power
-15 V, 20 mA 30 VDC, 1 A max.
Frequency
MC

setter +V Frequency setting power

External +15 V, 20 mA
0 to 10 V
frequency
A1 Master speed reference M1
references
4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V (20 k W) Multi-function contact output

A2 M2 250 VAC, 1 A max.

Master speed reference
P AC 4 to 20 mA (250 W) 30 VDC, 1 A max.
Default: Running
[0 to 10 V (20 k W) input] signal
0 V M3
Multi-function output 1
M4 250 VAC, 1 A max.
Terminating
30 VDC, 1 A max.
resistance
(Default: Zero-speed)
R+ M5
Multi-function output 2
R-
M6 250 VAC, 1 A max.
RS-422A/485
S+ 30 VDC, 1 A max.
communications
(Default: Frequency agree 1)
S-

IG

Shield P Twisted-pair wires

Fig 2.3 Connection Diagram for European (-E) Models

2-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Terminal Block Configuration

K Terminal Arrangement for Asian Models

The terminal arrangement for Asian-model Inverters is shown in Fig 2.4 and Fig 2.5.

E (G) FM AC AM P1 P2 PC SC MP
SC A1 A2 +V AC RP R+ R- S+ S- MA MB MC
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 IG M1 M2 E (G)

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminal

Fig 2.4 200-V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW

Control circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Main circuit terminals

Ground terminal

Fig 2.5 200-V class Inverter for 22 kW

2-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Terminal Block Configuration

K Terminal Arrangement for European Models

The terminal arrangement for European-model Inverters is shown in Fig 2.6 and Fig 2.7.

Control circuit terminals

Main circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Ground terminals

Fig 2.6 18.5 kW or Less

Control circuit terminals

Charge indicator

Main circuit terminals

Ground terminals

Fig 2.7 22 kW or More

2-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Terminal Functions
The functions of the main-circuit and control-circuit terminals are shown below.

nAsian Models
The terminal functions for the Asian-model Inverters are shown below.

Main-circuit Terminals
The functions for the main-circuit terminals by symbol are shown in Table 2.1. Be sure to wire correctly.
Table 2.1 Main-circuit Terminal Functions
Voltage Class 200-V Class 400-V Class
A2004 to B2370 to A4004 to B4220 to B4750 to
3G3RV B2220 to B2300
A2185 B211K A4185 B4550 B416K
Maximum
75 to 160
Applied Motor 0.4 to 18.5 kW 22 to 30 kW 37 to 110 kW 0.4 to 18.5 kW 22 to 55 kW
kW
Capacity
R/L1
Main-circuit Main-circuit Main-circuit
S/L2 Main-circuit
power supply input power supply input power supply input
T/L3 power supply input
R-R1, S-S1, T-T1 are wired
R1/L11 R-R1, S-S1, T-T1 are wired
when shipped from the factory.
S1/L21 - when shipped from the factory. -
T1/L31
U/T1
V/T2 Inverter output Inverter output
W/T3
B1 For Braking Resis- For Braking Resistor
- -
B2 tor Unit connection Unit connection
For DC reactor con- For DC reactor con-
nection ( 1 nection For DC power supply input
1 and 2) ( 1 and 2)
For DC power supply input ( 1 and ) ( 1 and )
For DC power sup- For DC power supply For Braking Unit connection
2 ply input ( 1 and For Braking Unit connection ( 3 and ) input ( 3 and )
) ( 1 and )

3 - -
/ 2 Cooling fan power -
-
r/ 1 supply input *1
Cooling fan
200/ 2200 - power supply
- input *2
400/ 2400
Ground (to resistance of 100 Ω or less) Ground (to resistance of 10 Ω or less)

Note Dashes (-) in the table indicate the absence of an item.

* 1. Cooling fan power supply input r/ 1- / 2: 200 to 220-VAC, 50-Hz input or 200 to 230-VAC, 60-Hz input (A transformer is required for 230-VAC, 50-Hz
input or 240-VAC, 50/60-Hz input.)
* 2. Cooling fan power supply input r/ 1 - 200/ 2 200: 200 to 220-VAC, 50-Hz input or 200 to 230-VAC, 60-Hz input; r/ 1- 400/ 2400: 380 to 480-VAC, 50/
60 Hz input

2-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Terminal Block Configuration

Control-circuit Terminals (Same for 200-V and 400-V Class)

The functions for the control-circuit terminals by symbol are shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2 Control-circuit Terminal Functions
Signal
Type Signal Name Terminal Function Signal Level
Symbol
S1 Forward-stop command Forward when ON, stop when OFF
S2 Reverse-stop command Reverse when ON, stop when OFF
Factory setting: External fault
S3 Multi-function input selection 1
detected when ON
Factory setting: Fault reset when
S4 Multi-function input selection 2
ON
Sequence +24 VDC, 8 mA
Factory setting: Multi-step speed
Input S5 Multi-function input selection 3 photocoupler isolation
command 1 effective when ON
Factory setting: Multi-step speed
S6 Multi-function input selection 4
command 2 effective when ON
Factory setting: Inching frequency
S7 Multi-function input selection 5
selected when ON
SC Sequence control input common -
+15-V power supply for analog ref- +15 V (20 mA maximum
+V +15-V power supply
erence allowable current)
0 to 10 V (input imped-
A1 Main speed frequency reference 0 to 10 V/100%
ance: 20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (input imped-
Analog 4 to 20 mA/100%, 0 to 10 V/100%
ance: 20 kΩ)
Input A2 Multi-function analog input Factory setting: Add to terminal A1
0 to 10 V (input imped-
(H3-09 = 0)
ance: 20 kΩ)
AC Analog common 0V -
Shield wire, optional ground con-
E (G) - -
nection
Factory setting: Zero speed
P1 Multi-function output 1 Zero level (b2-01) or below when
ON.
Factory setting: Frequency agree- Open collector output
ment detection +48 VDC, 50 mA
P2 Multi-function output 2
ON when the frequency is within
±2 Hz of the set frequency.
Sequence
PC Photocoupler output common -
Output
MA Fault output (NO contact) ON between MA and MC during
fault Relay output
MB Fault output (NC contact) ON between MB and MC during Dry contacts
fault. Contact capacity
MC Relay contact output common - 250 VAC, 1 A max.
M1 Factory setting: RUN 30 VDC, 1 A max.
Multi-function output (NO con-
ON between M1 and M2 during
M2 tact)
operation.
Factory setting: Output frequency 0
FM Multi-function analog monitor 1
Analog to 10 V/100% frequency
0 to +10 VDC ±5%
Monitor Factory setting: Current monitor 5
AM Multi-function analog monitor 2 2 mA max.
Output V/Inverter rated current
AC Analog common -
Factory setting: Frequency refer-
Pulse RP Multi-function pulse input 0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
ence input (H6-01 = 0)
Input/Out-
Factory setting: Output frequency
put MP Multi-function pulse monitor 0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
(H6-06 = 2)

2-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications-circuit Terminals (Same for 200-V and 400-V Class)
The functions for the communications-circuit terminals by symbol are shown in Table 2.3.
Table 2.3 Communications-circuit Terminal Functions
Signal
Type Signal Name Terminal Function Signal Level
Symbol
RS- R+ Differential input,
RS-422A/485 receive data
422A/ R- For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and photocoupler isolation
485 S+ S+, as well as R- and S-. Differential input,
RS-422A/485 send data
Com- S- photocoupler isolation
muni- Shield wire for communica-
IG - -
cations tions

2-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Terminal Block Configuration

nEuropean Models
The terminal functions for European model Inverters are described below.

Main-circuit Terminals

The functions of the main-circuit termina.s by symbol are shown in Table 2.4. Be sure to wire correctly.
Table 2.4 Main-circuit Terminal Functions
Voltage Class 200-V Class 400-V Class
A2004 to B2370 to A4004 to B4220 to B4750 to
3G3RV B2220 to B2300
A2185 B211K A4185 B4550 B416K
Maximum
75 to 160
Applied Motor 0.4 to 18.5 kW 22 to 30 kW 37 to 110 kW 0.4 to 18.5 kW 22 to 55 kW
kW
Capacity
R/L1
Main-circuit power Main-circuit power
S/L2 Main-circuit power supply input Main-circuit power supply input
supply input supply input
T/L3 .
R1/L11 R-R1, S-S1, T-T1 are wired R-R1, S-S1, T-T1 are wired
S1/L21 - when shipped from the factory. - when shipped from the factory.
T1/L31
U/T1
V/T2 Inverter output Inverter output
W/T3
B1 For Braking Resis- For Braking Resistor
- -
B2 tor Unit connection Unit connection
For DC reactor con- For DC reactor con-
nection
nection ( 1 and For DC power supply input
1 ( 1 and 2)
2) For DC power supply input ( 1 and ) ( 1 and )
For DC power supply
For DC power input For Braking Unit connection ( 3 and ) input For Braking Unit connection
2 ( 1 and ) ( 1 and ) ( 3 and )
3 - -
/ 2 Cooling fan power -
-
r/ 1 supply input *1
Cooling fan
200/ 2200 - power supply
- input *2
400/ 2400
Ground (to resistance of 100 Ω or less) Ground (to resistance of 10 Ω or less)

Note Dashes (-) in the table indicate the absence of an item.

* 1. Cooling fan power supply input r/ 1- / 2: 200 to 220-VAC, 50-Hz input or 200 to 230-VAC, 60-Hz input (A transformer is required for 230-VAC, 50-Hz
input or 240-VAC, 50/60-Hz input.)
* 2. Cooling fan power supply input r/ 1 - 200/ 2 200: 200 to 220-VAC, 50-Hz input or 200 to 230-VAC, 60-Hz input; r/ 1- 400/ 2400: 380 to 480-VAC, 50/
60 Hz input

2-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control-circuit Terminals (Same for 200-V and 400-V Class)
The functions for the control-circuit terminals by symbol are shown in Table 2.5.
Table 2.5 Control-circuit Terminal Functions
Signal
Type Signal Name Terminal Function Signal Level
Symbol
S1 Forward-stop command Forward when ON, stop when OFF
S2 Reverse-stop command Reverse when ON, stop when OFF
Factory setting: External fault
S3 Multi-function input selection 1
detected when ON
Factory setting: Fault reset when
S4 Multi-function input selection 2
ON
+24 VDC, 8 mA photocou-
Factory setting: Multi-step speed
S5 Multi-function input selection 3 pler isolation
command 1 effective when ON
Sequence
Factory setting: Multi-step speed
Input S6 Multi-function input selection 4
command 2 effective when ON
Factory setting: Inching frequency
S7 Multi-function input selection 5
selected when ON
SC Sequence control input common -
Isolation power supply for
SP -
sequence input +24 V
+24 VDC ±20%
Isolation power supply for
SN -
sequence input 0 V
+15-V power supply +15 V (20 mA maximum
+V +15-V power supply
for analog reference allowable current)
-15-V power supply -15 V (20 mA maximum
-V -15-V power supply
for analog reference allowable current)
0 to +10 V (input imped-
A1 Main speed frequency reference 0 to +10 V/100%
ance 20 kΩ)
Analog
4 to 20 mA (input imped-
Input 4 to 20 mA/100%, 0 to +10 V/100%
ance 20 kΩ)
A2 Multi-function analog input Factory setting: Add to terminal A1
0 to +10 V (input imped-
(H3-09 = 0)
ance 20 kΩ)
AC Analog common 0V -
Shield wire, optional ground con-
E (G) - -
nection
MA Fault output (NO contact) ON between MA and MC during
fault
MB Fault output (NC contact) ON between MB and MC during
fault
MC Relay contact output common -
M1 Factory setting: RUN
Multi-function contact output (NO
ON between M1 and M2 during
M2 contact)
operation Relay output
Dry contacts
Sequence M3 Factory setting: Zero speed
Contact capacity
Output Multi-function output 1 Zero level (b2-01) or below when
250 VAC, 1 A max.
M4 ON
30 VDC, 1 A max.

M5 Factory setting: Frequency agree-

ment detection
Multi-function output 2
ON when the frequency is within ±2
M6 Hz of the set frequency

Factory setting: Output frequency 0

FM Multi-function analog monitor 1
Analog to +10 V/100% frequency
0 to +10 VDC ±5%
Monitor Factory setting: Current monitor 5
AM Multi-function analog monitor 2 2 mA max.
Output V/Inverter rated current
AC Analog common -

2-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Terminal Block Configuration

Table 2.5 Control-circuit Terminal Functions (Continued)

Signal
Type Signal Name Terminal Function Signal Level
Symbol
Factory setting: Frequency refer-
Pulse RP Multi-function pulse input 0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
ence input (H6-01 = 0)
Input/Out-
Factory setting: Output frequency
put MP Multi-function pulse monitor 0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
(H6-06 = 2)

Communications-circuit Terminals (Same for 200-V and 400-V class)

The functions for the communications-circuit terminals by symbol are shown in Table 2.6.
Table 2.6 Communications-circuit Terminal Functions
Signal
Type Signal Name Terminal Function Signal Level
Symbol
R+ Differential input,
RS- RS-422A/485 receive data
R- photocoupler isolation
422A/ For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and
485 S+ S+, as well as R- and S-.
Differential input,
Com- RS-422A/485 send data
S- photocoupler isolation
muni-
cations Shield wire for communica-
IG - -
tions

2-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

K Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.7 to Table 2.9 (same for all countries). Refer to
USER’S MANUAL (I526-E1-o) for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.

Table 2.7 200-V class Wire Sizes

Ter- Recom-
Inverter Tightening Possible
minal mended Wire
Model Terminal Symbol Torque Wire Sizes
Scre 2
Wire Size Type
3G3RV- (N•m) mm (AWG)
ws mm2 (AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
2 to 5.5 2
A2004 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
A2007 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
A2015 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
A2022 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

3.5 to 5.5 3.5
A2037 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(12 to 10) (12)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

5.5 5.5
A2055 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10) (10)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

8 to 14 8
A2075 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
(8 to 6) (8)
Power
cables,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
14 to 22 14 e.g., 600
A2110 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
(6 to 4) (6) V vinyl
power
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 38 30 cables
M6 4.0 to 5.0
W/T3 (4 to 2) (4)
A2150 8 to 14
B1, B2 M5 2.5 -
(8 to 6)
22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 38 30
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3 (3 to 2) (3)
A2185 8 to 14
B1, B2 M5 2.5 -
(8 to 6)
22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 30 to 60 30
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (3 to 1) (3)
B2220 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 50 to 60 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (1 to 1/0) (1)
B2300 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)

2-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Recom-
Inverter Termi- Tightening Possible
mended Wire
Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes
2
Wire Size Type
3G3RV- Screws (N•m) mm (AWG)
mm2 (AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 60 to 100 60
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (2/0 to 4/0) (2/0)
5.5 to 22
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
B2370 (10 to 4)
30 to 60 30
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(2 to 2/0) (2)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 80 to 100 80
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (3/0 to 4/0) (3/0)
5.5 to 22
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
B2450 (10 to 4)
38 to 60 38
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1 to 2/0) (1)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
50 to 100 50 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
100 100
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(4/0) (4/0)
5.5 to 60
B2550 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 2/0)
30 to 60 50
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3 to 4/0) (1/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
80 to 125 80 × 2P Power
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2 cables,
(3/0 to 250) (3/0 × 2P)
80 to 100 80 × 2P e.g., 600
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5 V vinyl
(3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P)
5.5 to 60 power
B2750 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 - cables
(10 to 2/0)
100 to 200 100
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3/0 to 400) (3/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
150 to 200 150 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(250 to 400) (250 × 2P)
100 to 150 100 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(4/0 to 300) (4/0 × 2P)
5.5 to 60
B2900 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 2/0)
60 to 150 60 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 300) (2/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
200 × 2P, or 50
200 to 325
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2 × 4P (350 × 2P,
(350 to 600)
or 1/0 × 2P)
150 × 2P, or 50
150 to 325
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M12 31.4 to 39.2 × 4P (300 × 2P,
(300 to 600)
or 1/0 × 4P)
B211K
5.5 to 60
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 2/0)
150 150 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(300) (300 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, / 2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C

2-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 2.8 400-V class Wire Sizes
Recom-
Possible
Inverter Termi- Tightening mended
Wire Sizes
Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Size Wire Type
mm2
3G3RV Screws (N•m) mm 2
(AWG)
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
2 to 5.5 2
A4004 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
A4007 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
A4015 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

2 to 5.5 2
A4022 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 3.5

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 to 5.5 (12)
A4037 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) 2
(14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 3.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 to 5.5 (12)
A4040 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) 2
(14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 3.5 to 5.5 3.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (12 to 10) (12)
A4055 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5 2
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 5.5
5.5(10)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10)
A4075 M4 1.2 to 1.5 Power cables,
3.5 to 5.5 3.5
(12 to 10) (12) e.g., 600 V vinyl
power cables
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 8
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 5.5 to 14 (8)
A4110 M5 2.5
(10 to 6) 5.5
(10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 8 to 14 8
M5 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (8 to 6) (8)
A4150
M5 2.5 5.5 to 14 5.5
(M6) (4.0 to 5.0) (10 to 6) (10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/ 8 to 38 8
M6 4.0 to 5.0
T2, W/T3 (8 to 2) (8)
A4185 8 8
B1, B2 M5 2.5
(8) (8)
8 to 22 8
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(8 to 4) (8)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/ 14 to 22 14
M6 4.0 to 5.0
T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (6 to 4) (6)
B4220
14 to 38 14
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(6 to 2) (6)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/ 22 22
M6 4.0 to 5.0
T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (4) (4)
B4300
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 22 to 60 38
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (4 to 1/0) (2)
B4370 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)

2-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Recom-
Possible
Inverter Termi- Tightening mended
Wire Sizes
Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Size Wire Type
mm2
3G3RV Screws (N•m) mm 2
(AWG)
(AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 38 to 60 38
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (2 to 1/0) (2)
B4450 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 50 to 60 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (1 to 1/0) (1)
B4550 8 to 22
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
22 to 38 22
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
60 to 100 60
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 4/0) (2/0)
50 to 100 50
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0)
5.5 to 22
B4750 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 4)
38 to 60 38
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2 to 2/0) (2)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2200, 400/ 2 400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
80 to 100 100
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 4/0) (4/0)
80 to 100 100
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3/0 to 4/0) (4/0)
8 to 22
B4900 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 4)
50 to 100 50
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1 to 4/0) (1) Power cables,
0.5 to 5.5 1.25 e.g., 600 V vinyl
r/ 1, 200/ 2 200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16) power cables
50 to 100 50 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
50 to 100 50 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
8 to 60
B411K 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 2/0)
60 to 150 600
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 300) (2/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2 200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
80 to 100 80 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P)
60 to 100 60 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 4/0) (2/0 × 2P)
8 to 60
B413K 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 2/0)
100 to 150 100
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(4/0 to 300) (4/0)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2 200, 400/ 2400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
100 to 200 100 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(4/0 to 400) (4/0 × 2P)
80 to 200 80 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 400) (3/0 × 2P)
80 to 60
B416K 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150 50 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 300) (1/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5 1.25
r/ 1, 200/ 2 200, 400/ 2 400 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.

2-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 2.9 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200-V class and 400-V class)

Wire Thickness (mm2) Terminal Screws Size

M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
0.5
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
0.75
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
1.25
M4 1.25 to 4
M3.5 2 to 3.5
M4 2 to 4
2 M5 2 to 5
M6 2 to 6
M8 2 to 8
M4 5.5 to 4
M5 5.5 to 5
3.5/5.5
M6 5.5 to 6
M8 5.5 to 8
M5 8 to 5
8 M6 8 to 6
M8 8 to 8
M6 14 to 6
14
M8 14 to 8
M6 22 to 6
22
M8 22 to 8
30/38 M8 38 to 8
M8 60 to 8
50/60
M10 60 to 10
80 80 to 10
M10
100 100 to 10
100 100 to 12
150 M12 150 to 12
200 200 to 12
M12 x 2 325 to 12
325
M16 325 to 16

Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:

IMPORTANT Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3

2-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

K Main Circuit Configurations

The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in the table below.

Table 2.10 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations

200-V Class 400-V Class

3G3RV-A2004 to A2185 3G3RV-A4004 to A4185

R/L1 U/T1 R/L1 U/T1

S/L2 V/T2 S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3 T/L3 W/T3

Power Control Power Control

supply circuits supply circuits

Fan unit Fan unit

3G3RV-B2220, B2300 3G3RV-B4220 to B4550

Power Control Power Control

supply circuits supply circuits

Fan unit Fan unit

3G3RV-B2370 to B211K 3G3RV-B4750 to B416K

l l

l Power l
Fan unit Control
supply circuits Fan unit Power Control
l supply circuits

Internal Internal
fan
fan

2-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.8. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.

n3G3RV-A2004 to A2185, A4004 to A4185 n3G3RV-B2220, B2300, B4220 to B4550

Braking Resistor
Braking Resistor Unit (optional)
DC reactor Unit (optional)
(optional) Braking Unit
(optional)

3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
3-phase 200
VAC (200 VAC)

Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC The DC reactor is built in.
reactor.

n3G3RV-B2370 to B211K n3G3RV-B4750 to B416K

Braking Resistor Braking Resistor
Unit (optional) Unit (optional)
Braking Unit Braking Unit
(optional) (optional)

3-phase 3-phase
200 VAC 400 VAC

l l

Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models.
Fig 2.8 Main Circuit Terminal Connections

2-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

K Wiring the Main Circuits

This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.

nWiring Main Circuit Inputs

Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.

Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker

Always connect the power input terminals (R, S, and T) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker
(MCCB) suitable for the Inverter.
• Provide one MCCB for each Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
• If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the
power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Fig 2.9.

Inverter
Power
supply
3G3RV-A2004 to 3G3RV-B2300:
3-phase, 200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

3G3RV-B2370 to 3G3RV-B211K:
3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz

3G3RV-A4004 to 3G3RV-B4300:
3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz Fault output
(NC)

* For 400-V class Inverters, connect a 400/200-V transformer.

Fig 2.9 MCCB Installation

Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. Therefore, at the
Inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range
that is hazardous to humans and exclude high-frequency leakage current.
• For the special-purpose ground fault interrupter for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sen-
sitivity amperage of at least 10 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amper-
age of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.

2-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter,
however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop.
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after
recovery from a power interruption.
• If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by
the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.

Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.

Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the con-
verter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reac-
tor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.

Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include mag-
netic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.

Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side

Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter.
• Correct Noise Filter Installation

Power
supply MCCB 3G3RV
Noise
filter Inverter IM

MCCB Use a special-purpose noise filter for Inverters.

Other Ordinary: 3G3EV-PLNFD@/3G3IV-PFN@
controllers EMC compatible: 3G3RV-PFS@
Example:
SYSMAC

Fig 2.10 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation

2-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation

Power 3G3RV
supply MCCB

Inverter IM

MCCB
General- Other
purpose
noise filter controllers
Example:
SYSMAC

Power
supply MCCB 3G3RV
General-
purpose Inverter IM
noise filter

MCCB
Other Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No general-
controllers purpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise
generated from the Inverter.
Example:
SYSMAC

Fig 2.11 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation

nWiring the Output Side of Main Circuit

Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.

Connecting the Inverter and Motor

Connect output terminals U, V, and W to motor lead wires U, V, and W, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output termi-
nals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.

Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U, V, and W. If voltage is applied to the output terminals,
the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.

Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter cas-
ing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.

Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter

Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency
components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage
to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.

Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch

Never connect an electromangetic switch (MC) between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during
operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the
overcurrent protection in the Inverter will operate.

2-23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 When using an MC to switch to a commercial power supply, stop the Inverter and motor before operating the
MC. Use the speed search function if the MC is operated during operation. If measures for momentary power
interrupts are required, use a delayed release MC.

Installing a Thermal Overload Relay

This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal
relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The sequence
should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the
main circuit inputs.

Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side

Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.

Power MCCB 3G3RV 3G3IV-PLF

supply
Noise
Inverter filter IM

Radio noise
AM radio
Inductive
Signal line noise

Controller

Inductive Noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Radio Noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make
noise.

Fig 2.12 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side

Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise

As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the out-
put side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise. Keep-
ing the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.

Power 3G3RV Metal pipe

MCCB
supply
Inverter
IM

30 cm min.

Signal line
Controller

Fig 2.13 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise

2-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

Countermeasures Against Radio Interference

Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise,
install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.

Steel box
Power Metal pipe
supply MCCB
Noise Inverter Noise
filter filter IM

Fig 2.14 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference

Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, caus-
ing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust
the carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.11. (For details, refer to Chapter 5 Parame-
ters.)

Table 2.11 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

Cable length 50 m max. 100 m max. More than 100 m
Carrier frequency 15 kHz max. 10 kHz max. 5 kHz max.

Restriction on Using Single-phase Motors

Single-phase motors are not suited for variable-speed operation using the Inverter. There are two methods
used to determine the operating direction for a single-phase motor upon startup: Capacitor startup and split-
phase startup. With the capacitor startup method, there is a possibility that the steep charge and discharge of
the Inverter output will damage the capacitor. Likewise, with the split-phase startup method, there is a possi-
bility of damaging the starting coil because there is no centrifugal switch operation.

nGround Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200-V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that
of the 400-V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the
ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.

OK NO

Fig 2.15 Ground Wiring

2-25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nConnecting the Braking Resistor (Mounting 3G3IV-PERF)
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can be used with 200-V and 400-V Class Inverters with outputs
from 0.4 to 11 kW.
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.16.

Table 2.12

L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor) 1 (Enables overheat protection)

L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) 0 (Disables stall prevention function)
(Select either one of them.) 3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)

Inverter Braking resistor

Fig 2.16 Connecting the Braking Resistor

The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting
to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equip-
ment.
IMPORTANT

nConnecting the Braking Resistor Unit (3G3IV-PLKB@

@) and Braking Unit (3G3IV-
PCDBR@@)
Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Fig 2.17.
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can also be used with Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to 11 kW.

Table 2.13

L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor) 0 (Disables overheat protection)

L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) 0 (Disables stall prevention function)
(Select either one of them.)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)

L8-01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts (3G3IV-PERF@ mounted
to Inverter) is connected.
The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Inverter if L3-
04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration).

2-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals

To prevent the Unit from overheating, design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal over-
load relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2.17.

200-V and 400-V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output

3G3IV-PLKBo
Braking Resistor Unit

Thermal overload
Inverter relay trip contact

200-V and 400-V class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output

3G3IV-PCDBRo 3G3IV-PLKBo
Braking Unit Braking Resistor Unit

Thermal protector
Inverter trip contact

Thermal overload
relay trip contact

Fig 2.17 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit

Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in Fig 2.18.
There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for
the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).

2-27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Braking resistor overheat- Braking resistor overheat- Braking resistor overheat-
ing contacts (Thermal pro- ing contacts (Thermal pro- ing contacts (Thermal pro-
tector contacts) tector contacts)
tector contacts)

Braking Braking Braking

Resistor Resistor Resistor
Unit Unit Unit

Inverter detector
Level

Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3

Braking Unit #1
Cooling fin overheating con- Cooling fin overheating con- Cooling fin overheating con-
tacts (thermostat contacts) tacts (thermostatic contacts) tacts (thermostatic contacts)

Fig 2.18 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel

Breaking Unit Application Precautions

When using a Braking Resistor Unit, create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking resistor and turn
OFF the power supply to the Inverter.

Three-phase power: MCCB

200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz or
R/L1
380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
S/L2
T/L3

Overload relay trip contact

Inverter
of Braking Resistor Unit

MC MA
Fault contacts
* Use a transformer with 200 and 400 V outputs for the power 400 V Inverter.

Fig 2.19 Power Shutoff Sequence

2-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for Asian Models

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for Asian

Models

K Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or opera-
tion signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or
relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.

E (G) Shield terminal

Speed setting power supply, +15 V 20 mA

0 to +10 V
Master speed reference, 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
External 4 to 20 mA
frequency Master speed reference, 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)/0 to +10 V (20 Ω)
reference
Pulse input, 33 kHz max.

Fig 2.20

Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.14.

Table 2.14 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (for Asian Models)
Recom-
Termi- Tightening Possible
mended
Terminals nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Type
Wire Size
Screws (N•m) mm2(AWG)
mm2(AWG)
FM, AC, AM, P1, P2, PC,
SC, A1, A2, +V, S1, S2, S3,
M3.5 0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2*2 0.75
S4, S5, S6, S7 (20 to 14) (18)
MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, IG

Single wire*3: • Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1

0.14 to 2.5 • Shielded, polyethylene-cov-
Phoenix Stranded 0.75 ered, vinyl sheath cable
MP, RP, R+, R-, S+, S-, IG 0.5 to 0.6 (KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
type wire: (18)
0.14 to 1.5 Wire or equivalent)
(26 to 14)

E (G) M3.5 0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2*2 1.25

(20 to 14) (12)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer toTable 2.9 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200-V class and 400-V class) for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminals on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.

2-29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.

Table 2.15 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

Wire Size mm2 (AWG) Model d1 d2 L Manufacturer

0.25 (24) AI 0.25 - 8YE 0.8 2 12.5
0.5 (20) AI 0.5 - 8WH 1.1 2.5 14
0.75 (18) AI 0.75 - 8GY 1.3 2.8 14 Phoenix Contact
1.25 (16) AI 1.5 - 8BK 1.8 3.4 14
2 (14) AI 2.5 - 8BU 2.3 4.2 14

d1

d2

Fig 2.21 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

nWiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.

Thin-slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver

Control circuit
terminal block

Strip the end for

7 mm if no sold-
erless terminal is
used. Solderless terminal or wire 3.5 mm max.
without soldering
Wires Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.

Fig 2.22 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block

2-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for Asian Models

K Control Circuit Terminal Connections

Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.23.

Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop Pulse train output

0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
External fault Default: Output frequency

Fault reset
Ammeter adjustment
Multi-function Multi-step speed
inputs*1 setting 1 Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Defaults Multi-step speed Default: Output current
setting 2 0 to +10 V
Ammeter adjustment
Jog frequency selection
Multi-function analog output 1
CN5 (NPN setting) -10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Output frequency
0 to +10 V

Shield terminal

Pulse train input Master speed

Frequency setting pulse train Fault contact output
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
adjustment 250 VAC, 1 A max.
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V
input 30 VDC, 1 A max.
Frequency
setter Frequency setting power
External
+15 V 20 mA
frequency 0 to 10 V
references*3 Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Multi-function output
4 to 20 mA
250 VAC, 1 A max.
Master speed reference
30 VDC, 1 A max.
4 to 20 mA (250 W)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input] Default: Running signal

Multi-function output 1
Terminating Default: Zero
resistance speed
Multi-function transistor 
Multi-function output 2 outputs (open-collector)*2
RS-485/422 Default: 48 VAC, 50 mA
communications Frequency
agree signal

Fig 2.23 Control Circuit Terminal Connections (Asian Models)

2-31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.

IMPORTANT

2. The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20 mA.

3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set parameter L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this parameter is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during decelera-
tion.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single
circles.
5. Sequence input signals S1 to S7 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode)
for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24-V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V exter-
nal power supply, refer toTable 2.18.
6. The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal
A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
7. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, volt-
meter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
8. DC reactors to improve the input power factor built into 200-V class Inverters for 22 to 110 kW and 400-V
class Inverters for 22 to 160 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
Remove the short bar when connecting a DC reactor to Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
9. Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a Braking Resistor (3G3IV-PERF). When using a Braking Resistor
Unit, a cutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.

2-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for Asian Models

K Control Circuit Terminal Functions

The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.16. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.

Table 2.16 Control Circuit Terminals

Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
S1 Forward run/stop command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2 Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.

S3 External fault input*1 Fault when ON.

S4 Fault reset* Reset when ON

24 VDC, 8 mA
Se- Multi-step speed reference Functions are
quence Auxiliary frequency ref- Photocoupler isolation
input S5 1*1 erence when ON.
selected by set-
signals
(Master/auxiliary switch) ting H1-01 to
H1-05.
Multi-step speed reference Multi-step setting 2 when
S6
2*1 ON.

S7 Jog frequency reference*1 Jog frequency when ON.

SC Sequence input common - -

15 V
+V 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references
(Max. current: 20 mA)
A1 Frequency reference 0 to +10 V/100% 0 to +10 V(20 kΩ)

Analog
Function is
4 to 20 mA/100% 4 to 20 mA(250Ω)
input A2 Multi-function analog input selected by set-
signals 0 to +10 V/100% 0 to +10 V(20kΩ)
ting H3-09.
AC Analog reference common - -
Shield wire, optional ground
E(G) - -
line connection point

M1 Dry contacts
Running signal Multi-function Contact capacity:
Operating when ON.
(1NO contact) contact outputs 1 A max. at 250 VAC
M2
1 A max. at 30 VDC
Zero level (b2-01) or
P1 Zero speed
below when ON Multi-function Open-collector output
Se-
quence Within ±2 Hz of set fre- PHC outputs 50 mA max. at 48 V*2
output
P2 Speed agreement detection
quency when ON.
signals
Open-collector output com-
PC - -
mon
MA Dry contacts
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC Contact capacity:
MB Fault output signal (SPDT)
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC 1 A max. at 250 VAC
MC 1 A max. at 30 VDC
Multi-function analog output 0 to +10 V/100% fre- Multi-function
FM
(frequency output) quency analog monitor 1
Analog 0 to +10 V max. ±5%
output AC Analog common (copy) -
signals 2 mA max.
Multi-function analog output 5 V/Inverter's rated cur- Multi-function
AM
(current monitor) rent analog monitor 2

2-33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 2.16 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
RP Pulse input*3 H6-01 (Frequency reference input) High level voltage 3.5 to
Pulse 13.2 V
I/O 0 to 32 kHz
MP Pulse monitor H6-06 (Output frequency) +5 V output
(Load: 1.5 kΩ)
R+ MEMOBUS communica- Differential input,
R- tions input photocoupler isolation
RS- For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well
485/ S+ as R- and S-.
MEMOBUS communica- Differential input,
422 tions output photocoupler isolation
S-
IG Signal common - -
* 1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1
for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.24.
* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.

Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V

High level voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V

H duty 30% to 70%

Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz

Flywheel diode

The rating of the flywheel diode

Coil must be at least as high as the
External power:
48 V max. 50 mA max. circuit voltage.

Fig 2.24 Flywheel Diode Connection

nShunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1

The shunt connector CN 5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.

CN5 S1
O 1(( 10 Terminating resistance
F 1
F 2 8 + Analog input switch
: Factory settings

Note: Refer to Table 2.17 for S1

functions and to Table
2.18 for CN5 functions.

Fig 2.25
Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1

2-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for Asian Models

The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.

Table 2.17 DIP Switch S1

Name Function Setting
RS-485 and RS-422A terminating resis- OFF: No terminating resistance
S1-1
tance ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω

OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)

S1-2 Input method for analog input A2
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)

n Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24-V
common) if shunt connector CN5 is used. An external 24-V power supply is also supported, providing more
freedom in signal input methods.

Table 2.18 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals

Internal Power Supply External Power Supply

CN5 CN5
CN5 (NPN set) Factory setting CN5 (EXT set)

Shunt IP24V (24 V)

position IP24V (24 V) External +24 V
SC SC

Sink-
ing
Mode S1 S1

S2 S2

CN5 CN5

CN5 (PNP set) CN5 (EXT set)

External + 24 V IP24V (24 V)

IP24V (24 V)
SC SC

Sourc-
ing
Mode S1 S1

S2 S2

2-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, and M2 (contact outputs) from wiring to
other control circuit terminals.
• If using an optional external power supply, it must be a UL-listed Class 2 power supply source.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process
cable ends as shown in Fig 2.26.
• Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
• Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.

Shield sheath Armor

Do not connect here.

Connect to shield sheath ter-
minal at Inverter (terminal E Insulate with tape
(G))

Fig 2.26 Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables

2-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for European Models

Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for European

Models

K Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors

For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or opera-
tion signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or
relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.

E (G) Shield terminal

Speed setting power supply, +15 V 20 mA

0 to +10 V
Master speed reference, 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
External 4 to 20 mA
frequency Master speed reference, 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)/0 to +10 V (20 Ω)
reference
Pulse input, 33 kHz max.

Fig 2.27

Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.19.

Table 2.19 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes [For European (-E) Models]
Recom-
Termi- Tightening Possible
mended
Terminals nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Type
Wire Size
Screws (N•m) mm2(AWG)
mm2(AWG)
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7,
FM, AC, AM, IG, S+, S-,
SN, SC, SP, A1, A2, +V, -V, Phoenix 0.14 to 1.5 *3 0.75 • Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
0.5 to 0.6
MP, RP, R+, R-, M3, M4, type (26 to 16) (18) • Shielded, polyethylene-cov-
M1, M2, M5, M6, MA, ered, vinyl sheath cable
MB, MC (KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
Wire or equivalent)
E (G) M3.5 0.8 to 1.0 0.5 to 2*2 1.25
(20 to 14) (12)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.9 Close-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200-V class and 400-V class) for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.

2-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.

Table 2.20 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

Wire Size mm2 (AWG) Model d1 d2 L Manufacturer

0.25 (24) AI 0.25 - 8YE 0.8 2 12.5
0.5 (20) AI 0.5 - 8WH 1.1 2.5 14
0.75 (18) AI 0.75 - 8GY 1.3 2.8 14 Phoenix Contact
1.25 (16) AI 1.5 - 8BK 1.8 3.4 14
2 (14) AI 2.5 - 8BU 2.3 4.2 14

d1

d2

Fig 2.28 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes

nWiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.

Thin-slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver

Control circuit
terminal block

Strip the end for

7 mm if no sold-
erless terminal is
used. Solderless terminal or wire 3.5 mm max.
without soldering
Wires Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.

Fig 2.29 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block

2-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for European Models

K Control Circuit Terminal Connections

Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.30.

Forward Run/Stop S1
MP
Reverse Run/Stop S2 Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kW)
AC
External fault Default: Output frequency
S3

Fault reset S4 CN15

Ammeter adjustment
Multi-function Multi-step speed AM 20 k
*1 Multi-function analog output 2
contact inputs setting 1 S5 V/I Converter
0 to 10V -10 to 10 V 2 mA
/4 to 20mA
Defaults Multi-step speed Default: Output current
AM
setting 2 S6 0 to +10 V
CN15
Ammeter adjustment
FM 20 k
Jog frequency selection S7 V/I Converter
0 to 10V
/4 to 20mA
Multi-function analog output 1
+24 V 8 mA AC
SP FM -10 to 10 V 2 mA
+ Default: Output frequency
(PNP connection) 24V 0 to +10 V
SN -
SC E(G)

E(G)
Shield terminal

Pulse train input Master speed pulse train

RP 0 to 32 kHz (3 kW) MA
Frequency setting High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input Fault contact output
adjustment MB 250 VAC, 1 A max.
2k -V Frequency setting power
30 VDC, 1 A max.
Frequency -15 V 20 mA MC
External setter +V Frequency setting power
3 +15 V 20 mA
frequency 0 to 10 V
references* 3
2k
2 A1 Master speed reference M1
0 to 10 V (20 kW) Multi-function output
1 4 to 20 mA P
A2 M2 250 VAC, 1 A max.
Master speed reference
P 30 VDC, 1 A max.
AC 4 to 20 mA (250 W)
[0 to 10 V (20 kW) input] Default: Running signal
0V M3
Multi-function output 1
Terminating M4 250 VAC, 1 A max.
resistance 30 VDC, 1 A max.
R+ (Default: Zero-speed)
M5
R- Multi-function output 2
RS-485/422 M6 250 VAC, 1 A max.
communications S+ 30 VDC, 1 A max.
(Default: Frequency agree 1)
S-

IG

Fig 2.30 Control Circuit Terminal Connections (European (-E) Models)

2-39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.

SM SC SP A1 A2 +V AC -V MP AC RP R+ R- M5 M6 MA M8 MC
IMPORTANT E(G) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 FM AC AM IG S+ S- M3 M4 M1 M2 E(G)

2. The output current capacity of the +V and -V terminal is 20 mA.

3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set parameter L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this parameter is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during decelera-
tion.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single
circles.
5. Sequence input signals S1 to S7 are shown in Table 2.23 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals for
sourcing mode connections (+24 V common) for PNP transistor sequence and contacts for European use.

Forward Run/Stop S1

Reverse Run/Stop S2

External fault S3

Fault reset S4
Multi-function Multi-step speed
inputs setting 1 S5
Defaults Multi-step speed
setting 2 S6

Jog frequency selection S7

+24 V 8 mA
SP
+
SN -
SC

Check your system and select sinking mode or sourcing mode. Refer to Table 2.18 Sinking/Sourcing Mode
and Input Signals.
6. The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal
A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
See Chapter 6 for the bi-directional voltage input for terminal A1.
7. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, volt-
meter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
8. DC reactors to improve the input power factor built into 200-V class Inverters for 22 to 110 kW and 400-V
class Inverters for 22 to 160 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
Remove the short bar when connecting a DC reactor to Inverters for 18.5 kW or less.
9. Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a Braking Resistor (3G3IV-PERF). When using a Braking Resistor
Unit, a shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.

2-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for European Models

K Control Circuit Terminal Functions

The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.21. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.

Table 2.21 Control Circuit Terminals

Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
S1 Forward run/stop command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2 Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.

S3 External fault input*1 Fault when ON.

S4 Fault reset* Reset when ON

24 VDC, 8 mA
Multi-step speed reference Functions are
Auxiliary frequency ref- Photocoupler isolation
Se-
S5 1*1 erence when ON.
selected by set-
quence (Master/auxiliary switch) ting H1-01 to
input
signals H1-05.
Multi-step speed reference Multi-step setting 2 when
S6
2*1 ON.

S7 Jog frequency reference*1 Jog frequency when ON.

SC Sequence input common -

SP +24 V power for S1 to S7 -
SN -24 V power for S1 to S7
15 V
+V 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references
(Max. current: 20 mA)
-15 V
-V -15 V power output -15 V power supply for analog references
(Max. current: 20 mA)
0 to +10 V/100% (when H3-01 = 0)
A1 Frequency reference -10 to +10 V/-100% to +100% (when H3-01 0 to +10 V(20 kΩ)
Analog
input = 1)*4
signals
Function is
4 to 20 mA/100% 4 to 20 mA(250Ω)
A2 Multi-function analog input selected by set-
0 to +10 V/100% 0 to +10 V(20kΩ)
ting H3-09.
AC Analog reference common - -
Shield wire, optional ground
E(G) - -
line connection point

M1 Dry contacts
Running signal Multi-function Contact capacity:
Operating when ON.
(1NO contact) contact outputs 1 A max. at 250 VAC
M2
1 A max. at 30 VDC

M3
Zero level (b2-01) or
Zero speed
below when ON Dry contacts
Se- M4
quence Multi-function Contact capacity:
output contact outputs 1 A max. at 250 VAC
signals M5
Within ±2 Hz of set fre- 1 A max. at 30 VDC
Frequency agree 1
quency when ON
M6

MA Dry contacts
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC Contact capacity:
MB Fault output signal (SPDT)
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC 1 A max. at 250 VAC
MC 1 A max. at 30 VDC

2-41
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 2.21 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
Multi-function analog output 0 to +10 V/100% fre- Multi-function
FM
(frequency output) quency analog monitor 1
Analog 0 to +10 V max. ±5%
output AC Analog common (copy) -
signals 2 mA max.
Multi-function analog output 5 V/Inverter's rated cur- Multi-function
AM
(current monitor) rent analog monitor 2
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
RP Pulse input*3 H6-01 (Frequency reference input) High level voltage 3.5 to
Pulse 13.2 V
I/O 0 to 32 kHz
MP Pulse monitor H6-06 (Output frequency) +5 V output
(Load: 1.5 kΩ)
R+ RS-422A/485 communica- Differential input,
R- tions input photocoupler isolation
RS- For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well
485/ S+ as R- and S-.
RS-422A/485 communica- Differential input,
422A tions output photocoupler isolation
S-
IG Signal common - -
* 1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1
for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.31.
* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.

Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V

High level voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V

H duty 30% to 70%

Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz

Flywheel diode

The rating of the flywheel diode

Coil must be at least as high as the
External power:
48 V max. 50 mA max. circuit voltage.

Fig 2.31 Flywheel Diode Connection

2-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for European Models

nShunt Connector CN15 and DIP Switch S1

The shunt connector CN 15 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.

S1
OFF ON
Terminating resistance
V I Analog input A2 swich
: Factory settings
CN15 Analog output switch

Voltage output (Factory setting)

Current output

S1
O
F 1
F 2
CN15

Note: Refer to Table 2.13 for S1

functions

Fig 2.32
Shunt Connector CN15 and DIP Switch S1

The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.

Table 2.22 DIP Switch S1

Name Function Setting
RS-485 and RS-422A terminating resis- OFF: No terminating resistance
S1-1
tance ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω

OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)

S1-2 Input method for analog input A2
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)

2-43
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be selected between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24-V
common) as shown in Table 2.23. An external power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in sig-
nal input methods.

Table 2.23 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals

Internal Power Supply External Power Supply

S1 S1

S2 S2
Sink-
ing
Mode SN SN

SC External SC
+24V
SP IP24V (+24V) SP IP24V (+24V)

S1
S1

S2
S2
Sourc-
ing
Mode External SN
SN +24V
SC
SC
SP IP24V (+24V)
SP IP24V (+24V)

2-44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals for European Models

K Control Circuit Wiring Precautions

Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, and M2 (contact outputs) from wiring to
other control circuit terminals.
• If using an optional external power supply, it must be a UL-listed Class 2 power supply source.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process
cable ends as shown in Fig 2.33.
• Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
• Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.

Shield sheath Armor

Do not connect here.

Connect to shield sheath ter-
minal at Inverter (terminal E Insulate with tape
(G))

Fig 2.33 Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables

2-45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Check

K Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform
the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?

2-46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Installing and Wiring Option Cards

K Option Card Models and Specifications

Up to three Option Cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one Card into each of the three
places on the controller card (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.34.
Table 2.24 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.

Table 2.24 Option Card Specifications

Mounting
Card Model Specifications
Location
3G3FV-PPGA2 Serial open-collector/complimentary inputs A
3G3FV-PPGB2 Phase A/B complimentary inputs A
PG Speed Control Cards
3G3FV-PPGD2 Single line-driver inputs A
3G3FV-PPGX2 Phase A/B line-driver inputs A
DeviceNet Communications
3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN DeviceNet communications support C
Card
3G3FV-PA008 8-bit analog outputs, 2 channels D
Analog Monitor Card
3G3FV-PA012 12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels D
* An Option Card in Mounting Location D is supported by Asian Models only. Other models do not have the CN3 connector shown in Fig 2.34.

K Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front
cover and then mount the Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for actual mounting instructions for option slots A, C,
and D.

2-47
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Preventing C and D Option Card Connectors from Rising
After installing an Option Card into slot C or D, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector
from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and
pulling it out.

A Option Card mounting spacer hole

4CN
A Option Card connector
2CN
C Option Card connector

A Option Card mounting spacer

(Provided with A Option Card.)

C Option Card mounting spacer

C Option Card
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D Option Cards)
D Option Card
3CN
D Option Card connector* D Option Card mounting spacer

A Option Card
A Option Card mounting spacer

* An Option Card in Mounting Location D is supported by Asian Models only. Other models do not have the CN3 connector shown in Fig 2.34.

Fig 2.34 Mounting Option Cards

K PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications

The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Cards are given in the following tables.

n3G3FV-PPGA2
The terminal specifications for the 3G3FV-PPGA2 are given in the following table.

Table 2.25 3G3FV-PPGA2 Terminal Specifications

Terminal No. Contents Specifications
1 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
Power supply for pulse generator
2 0 VDC (GND for power supply)

3 Terminal for switching between12 V voltage input

+12 V/open collector switching ter-
and open collector input. For open collector input,
minal
4 short across 3 and 4.
TA1
H: +4 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum response fre-
5
Pulse input terminal quency: 30 kHz)
6 Pulse input common
7 12 VDC (±10%), 20 mA max.
Pulse motor output terminal
8 Pulse monitor output common
TA2 (E) Shield connection terminal -

2-48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Installing and Wiring Option Cards

n3G3FV-PPGB2
The terminal specifications for the 3G3FV-PPGB2 are given in the following table.

Table 2.26 3G3FV-PPGB2 Terminal Specifications

Terminal No. Contents Specifications
1 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
Power supply for pulse generator
2 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
H: +8 to 12 V
3 L: +1 V max.
A-phase pulse input terminal (Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
TA1
4 Pulse input common
H: +8 to 12 V
5 L: +1 V max.
B-phase pulse input terminal (Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
6 Pulse input common
1 Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
A-phase monitor output terminal
2 A-phase monitor output common
TA2
3 Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
B-phase monitor output terminal
4 B-phase monitor output common
TA3 (E) Shield connection terminal -

n3G3FV-PPGD2
The terminal specifications for the 3G3FV-PPGD2 are given in the following table.

Table 2.27 3G3FV-PPGD2 Terminal Specifications

Terminal No. Contents Specifications
1 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
2 Power supply for pulse generator 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
3 5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4 Pulse input + terminal Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
TA1
5 Pulse input - terminal Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz

6 Common terminal -
7 Pulse monitor output + terminal
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
8 Pulse monitor output - terminal
TA2 (E) Shield connection terminal -
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.

2-49
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n3G3FV-PPGX2
The terminal specifications for the 3G3FV-PPGX2 are given in the following table.

Table 2.28 3G3FV-PPGX2 Terminal Specifications

Terminal No. Contents Specifications
1 12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
2 Power supply for pulse generator 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
3 5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4 A-phase + input terminal
5 A-phase - input terminal
TA1
6 B-phase + input terminal Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
7 B-phase - input terminal Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz

8 Z-phase + input terminal

9 Z-phase - input terminal
10 Common terminal 0 VDC (GND for power supply)
1 A-phase + output terminal
2 A-phase - output terminal
3 B-phase + output terminal
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
TA2 4 B-phase - output terminal
5 Z-phase + output terminal
6 Z-phase - output terminal
7 Control circuit common Control circuit GND
TA3 (E) Shield connection terminal -
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.

K Wiring
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the Control Cards.

n Wiring the 3G3FV-PPGA2

Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the 3G3FV-PPGA2.

Three-phase, 200 Inverter

VAC (400 VAC) E6B2-CWZ3E
R/L1 U/T1
V/T2 V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
3G3FV-PPGA2
+12 V power supply
1
0 V power supply
4CN 4CN 2
3
4
TA1 12 V voltage input (A/B phase)
5 Pulse 0 V
6
E E
7
TA2 (E) Pulse monitor output
8

Fig 2.35 Wiring a 12-V Voltage Input

2-50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Installing and Wiring Option Cards

Three-phase,
200 VAC (400 VAC) Inverter
E6B2-CWZ6C
R/L1 U/T1
V/T2 V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
3G3FV-PPGA2
+12 V power supply
1
2 0 V power supply
4CN 4CN
3
4
TA1 Open collector output (A/B phase)
5
Pulse 0 V
6
E E
7
TA2 (E) Pulse monitor output
8

• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.

• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 30 meters.

Fig 2.36 Wiring an Open-collector Input

PG power
supply
+12 V
Pulse input

Short for
open-col-
lector
input

Pulse
monitor
output
Pulse
input

Fig 2.37 I/O Circuit Configuration of the 3G3FV-PPGA2

2-51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Wiring the 3G3FV-PPGB2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the 3G3FV-PPGB2.

Inverter
Three-phase 200 E6B2-CWZ6C
VAC (400 VAC)

3G3FV-PPGB2
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +12 V
A-phase pulse output (-)
Power supply +12 V
B-phase pulse output (-)

A-phase pulse monitor output

B-phase pulse monitor output

• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.

• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 30 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1-05. The factory preset if for forward rota-
tion, A-phase advancement.

Fig 2.38 3G3FV-PPGB2 Wiring

PG power
supply +12 V

A-phase pulse
monitor output
Division rate circuit

A-phase
A-phase pulse pulses
input

B-phase pulse
monitor output
B-phase
B-phase pulse pulses
input

• When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with
a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
• The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using parameter F1-06.

A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses

Fig 2.39 I/O Circuit Configuration of the 3G3FV-PPGB2

2-52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Installing and Wiring Option Cards

nWiring the 3G3FV-PPGD2

Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the 3G3FV-PPGD2.

Three-phase 200 Inverter

VAC (400 VAC) E6B2-CWZ1X

3G3FV-PPGD2

Power supply +12 V

Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
Pulse input + (A/B phase)
Pulse input - (A/B phase)

Pulse monitor output

• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.

• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 50 meters.

Fig 2.40 3G3FV-PPGD2 Wiring

nWiring the 3G3FV-PPGX2

Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the 3G3FV-PPGX2.

Three-phase Inverter
200 VAC (400 E6B2-CWZ1X
VAC) R/L1 U/T1

S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
3G3FV-PPGX2
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (-)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (-)

A-phase pulse monitor output

B-phase pulse monitor output

Z-phase pulse monitor output

• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.

• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 50 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if for
motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.

Fig 2.41 3G3FV-PPGX2 Wiring

2-53
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Wiring Terminal Blocks
Use no more than 30 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines for the 3G3FV-PPGA2/PPGB2 or 50
meters for the 3G3FV-PPGD2/PPGX2, and keep the wiring separate from power lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the
shield connection terminal.

nWire Sizes (Same for All Models)

Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.29.

Table 2.29 Wire Sizes

Terminal
Terminal
Screws Wire Thickness (mm2) Wire Type

Pulse generator power supply • Shielded, twisted-pair wire

Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Pulse input terminal - • Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Pulse monitor output terminal sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or
Shield connection terminal M3.5 0.5 to 2 equivalent)

nStraight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals

We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Refer to Table 2.15 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes for specifications.

nClosed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque

The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2.30.

Table 2.30 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques

Terminal
Wire Thickness [mm2] Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N • m)
Screws
0.5 1.25 - 3.5
0.75 1.25 - 3.5
M3.5 0.8
1.25 1.25 - 3.5
2 2 - 3.5

nWiring Method and Precautions

The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to page 2-30. Observe
the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main circuit lines and power lines.
• Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors
caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are longer than the recommended length. Refer to Fig 2.26
for details on connecting the shield.
• Connect the shield to the shield terminal (E).
• Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
• When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm.

2-54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Installing and Wiring Option Cards

K Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses

The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Card being used. Set the
correct number for your model.

n3G3FV-PPGA2/3G3FV-PPGB2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767 Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor.

Motor speed at maximum frequency output (r/min)

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × PG rating (p/rev) = 20,000 Hz
60

Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in
Table 2.31.

Table 2.31 PG Pulse Selection Examples

PG Rating PG Output Frequency for Maximum Fre-
Motor's Maximum Speed (r/min)
(p/rev) quency Output (Hz)
1800 600 18,000
1500 800 20,000
1200 1000 20,000
900 1200 18,000
Note 1. The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.
2. The PG power supply is 12 V.
3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a
backup capacitor or other method.)

PG power supply

Capacitor for momentary

power loss

Signals

Fig 2.42 3G3FV-PPGB2 Connection Example

2-55
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n3G3FV-PPGD2/3G3FV-PPGX2
There are 5 V and 12 V PG power supplies.
Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (fPG).

Motor speed at maximum frequency output (r/min)

f PG (Hz) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × PG rating (p/rev)
60

A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary
power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)

PG-X2
PG power
supply
TA1
AC
0V +12V
IP12 1
0V
IG 2
Capacitor for +12 V
IP5 3 momentary
power loss + +
A (+) 4
- PG
A (-) 5
+
B (+) 6
-
B (-) 7
Z (+) 8
Z (-) 9
IG 10

TA3

Fig 2.43 3G3FV-PPGD2 Connection Example (for 12-V PG power supply)

2-56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3
Chapter 3
Digital Operator and
Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.

Digital Operator............................................................3-2
Modes ..........................................................................3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.

K Digital Operator Display

The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.

Digital Operator with LED Display (3G3IV-PJVOP161)

Drive Mode Indicators

REMOTE FWD: Lit when there is a forward run command input.
FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM REV: Lit when there is a reverse run command input.
SEQ: Lit when the run command from the control circuit ter-
minal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit
terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when an error or alarm has occurred.

PRGM Data Display

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO Displays monitor data, parameter numbers, and
TUNING settings (in five digits).
DIGITAL OPERATOR PJVOP161
Mode Display
LOCAL DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
MENU ESC
REMOTE QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
JOG
A. TUNE:Lit in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
FWD
REV RESET Execute operations such as setting parameters,
monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.

RUN STOP

Digital Operator with LCD Display (3G3IV-PJVOP160)

REMOTE
FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM Drive Mode Indicators
FWD: Lit when there is a forward run command input.
REV: Lit when there is a reverse run command input.
SEQ: Lit when the run command from the control circuit ter-
minal is enabled.
REF: Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit
terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when an error or alarm has occurred.
Data Display
DIGITAL OPERATOR PJVOP160
Displays monitor data, parameter numbers, and
settings.
LOCAL
MENU ESC
REMOTE

JOG
Keys
FWD
REV RESET
Execute operations such as setting parameters,
monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.

RUN STOP

Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions

3-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Digital Operator

K Digital Operator Keys

The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Key Functions

Key Name Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
LOCAL
LOCAL/REMOTE Key control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
REMOTE
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter o2-01.

MENU MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).

ESC ESC Key Returns to the status before the ENTER Key was pressed.

Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
JOG JOG Key
Digital Operator.

FWD Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
FWD/REV Key
REV operated from the Digital Operator.

Sets the number of digits for parameter settings.

Digit Selection/RESET Key
RESET Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.

Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and increments set val-
Increment Key ues.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and decrements set val-
Decrement Key ues.
Used to move to the previous item or data.

Pressed to enter menu items, parameters, and set values.

ENTER Key
Also used to switch from one screen to another.

Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by

RUN RUN Key
the Digital Operator.

Stops Inverter operation.

STOP STOP Key This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting parameter o2-02.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.

3-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the
dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is
shown in the Fig 3.2.

FWD
REV RESET

RUN STOP

Inverter output frequency

RUN STOP
STOP
Frequency setting

RUN
STOP
Lit Blinking Not lit

Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators

3-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Modes

Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.

K Inverter Modes
The Inverter's parameters and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to
read and set parameters.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.2.

Table 3.2 Modes

Mode Primary function(s)
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Drive Mode Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output cur-
rent, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum parameters to operate the Inverter
Quick Programming Mode
(e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).
Advanced Programming Mode Use this mode to reference and set all parameters.
Use this mode to read/set parameters that have been changed from their factory-set
Verify Mode
values.
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants in the vector
Autotuning Mode* control mode. The motor constants are calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Autotuning Mode will not be displayed during operation or when an
error has occurred.

3-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to
access the setting display.

MENU Power ON

Drive Mode
(Operation possible)
ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYAUTO AUTO

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYTUNING
TUNING

Quick MENU
Programming Mode

ESC ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYAUTO DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING TUNING TUNING

Advanced MENU
Programming Mode

ESC ESC

AUTO AUTO AUTO

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY TUNING
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYTUNING
TUNING

MENU
Verify Mode When returning from a setting
display, the rightmost digit
of the monitor display will
ESC flash.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO AUTO
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYTUNING
TUNING

Autotuning If a user constant is changed

MENU the number will be dislayed.
Mode

ESC ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYAUTO DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING TUNING TUNING

Mode Selection Displays Monitor Displays Setting Displays

Lit Flashing Not lit

Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions (Example for the 3G3IV-PJVOP161)

When running the Inverter after using Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to enter the Drive Mode (DRIVE
indicator will flash) and then press the ENTER Key from the Drive Mode display to bring up the monitor dis-
play (DRIVE indicator will light). Run commands can't be received from any other display. (Monitor display in
IMPORTANT Drive Mode will appear when the power is turned ON.)

3-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Modes

K Drive Mode
Drive Mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in
Drive Mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault
information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display.
Use the Increment, Decrement, and Digit Selection/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The parameter will
be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the ENTER Key is pressed after changing the set-
ting.
nExample Operations
Key operations in Drive Mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Constant Display Detailed Monitor Constant Monitor Display
MENU Power ON
Display

Frequency reference setting/

Drive Mode Frequency reference display unit o1-03

ESC ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

Output frequency

ESC

Output current

ESC

Monitor setting for o1-01

ESC

Status Monitor Frequency reference

RESET

ESC
ESC

Fan operating time

ESC
ESC

Error Trace Current error

RESET

ESC ESC
ESC

Operating time at error

ESC
ESC

Fault History
1st previous error
RESET

ESC
ESC ESC

Operating time at 4th

previous error

ESC
ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING TUNING

Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode (Example for the 3G3IV-PJVOP161)

The display for the first monitor parameter (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON.
The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the Mode Selection Display.
IMPORTANT

3-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Quick Programming Mode
In Quick Programming Mode, the parameters required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Digit Selection/
RESET Keys to change the frequency. The parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned
to when the ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters for details on the parameters displayed in Quick Programming Mode.

nExample Operations
Key operations in Quick Programming Mode are shown in the following figure.

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

MENU

Quick Programming Mode Control method selection

ESC ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING
Reference selection

ESC ESC

Operation method selection

ESC ESC

Stopping method selection

ESC

C1-01: Acceleration time 1 d1-01: Frequency reference 1 E1-01: Input voltage setting
C1-02: Deceleration time 1 d1-02: Frequency reference 2 E1-03: V/f pattern selection
C6-01: CT/VT selection d1-03: Frequency reference 3 E1-04: Max. output frequency
C6-02: Carrier frequency d1-04: Frequency reference 4 E1-05: Max. voltage
selection d1-17: Jog frequency reference E1-06: Base frequency
E1-09: Min. output frequency
E1-13: Base voltage (VBASE)
E2-01: Motor rated current
AO CH1 output gain

ESC ESC

AO CH2 output gain

ESC ESC

Motor protection selection

ESC ESC

Deceleration stall selection

ESC ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode (Example for the 3G3IV-PJVOP161)

3-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Modes

K Advanced Programming Mode

In Advanced Programming Mode, all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set.
Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Digit Selection/
RESET Keys to change the frequency. The parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned
to when the ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters for details on the parameters.

nExample Operations
Key operations in Advanced Programming Mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU

RESET
Advanced Programming Mode Setup settings: A1-xx Language

ESC
ESC ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Access level

ESC
ESC

Control mode selection

ESC
ESC

RESET
PID control: b5-xx PID control mode selection

ESC
ESC ESC

Proportional gain

ESC
ESC
PID feedback command
loss detection time

ESC
ESC

RESET
Torque limits: L7-xx Forward torque limit

ESC
ESC ESC

Reverse torque limit

ESC
ESC

Reverse regenerative torque limit

ESC
ESC

RESET
Copy functions: o3-xx Copy function selection

ESC
ESC ESC

Read permitted selection

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO ESC

TUNING
ESC

AUTO
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY TUNING DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode (Example for the 3G3IV-PJVOP161)

3-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nSetting Parameters
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.

Table 3.3 Setting Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode

Step
Digital Operator Display Description
No.

1 Power supply turned ON.

2 MENU Key pressed to enter Drive Mode.

MENU Key pressed to enter Quick Program-

3 ming Mode.

MENU Key pressed to Enter Advanced Pro-

4
gramming Mode.

5 ENTER pressed to access monitor display.

Increment or Decrement Key pressed to dis-

6
play C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).

ENTER Key pressed to access setting display.

7
The setting of C1-01 (10.00) is displayed.

Digit Selection/RESET Key pressed to move

8
the flashing digit to the right.

Increment Key pressed to change set value to

9
20.00 s.

ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data.

10 “END” is displayed for 10 s and then the
entered value is displayed for 0.5 s.

11 The monitor display for C1-01 returns.

3-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Modes

K Verify Mode
Verify Mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a Pro-
gramming Mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Of the Environment Mode settings, only A1-02 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other Environment
Modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.
Even in Verify Mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as are used in the Programming
Modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Digit Selection/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The param-
eter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the ENTER Key is pressed after changing
the setting.

nExample Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their
default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).

Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display

MENU

Frequency reference Frequency reference

Verify Mode selection selection

ESC
ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Acceleration time 1 Acceleration time 1

ESC
ESC

Input voltage setting Input voltage setting

ESC
ESC

Motor rated current Motor rated current

ESC
ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode (Example for the 3G3IV-PJVOP161)

3-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Autotuning Mode

Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor constants when operating in the open-loop V/f,
V/f with PG, or open-loop vector control modes. Always perform autotuning before starting operation when
using open-loop vector control mode.
When V/f control has been selected, stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autotuning. Contact your dealer to
set motor constants by calculation.
The Inverter's autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants, while a servo system's auto-
tuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different.

nExample of Operation
Set the motor output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, and number of
poles specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN Key. The motor is automatically run
and the motor constants measured based on these settings and autotuning will be set.
Always set the above items. Autotuning cannot be started otherwise, e.g., it cannot be started from the motor
rated voltage display.
Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Digit Selection/
RESET Keys to change the frequency. The parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned
to when the ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
The following example shows autotuning for open-loop vector control while operating the motor without
switching to motor 2.

3-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Modes

MENU Autotuning Monitor Display Setting Display

Tuning mode:
Autotuning Tuning mode rotational tuning

ESC
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

Motor output power Motor output power

ESC

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

Motor rated voltage Motor rated voltage

ESC

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

Motor rated current Motor rated current

ESC

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

Motor base frequency Motor base frequency

ESC

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

No. of motor poles No. of motor poles

ESC

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

Motor base speed Motor base speed

ESC

ESC

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

Autotuning start* Autotuning Stop command input

ESC RUN

ESC
Autotuning completed
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO

TUNING

* TUn10 will be displayed during rotational autotuning and TUn11 will be displayed during stationary autotuning. The DRIVE indicator will light when
autotuning starts.

Fig 3.8 Operation in Autotuning Mode (Example for the 3G3IV-PJVOP161)

If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.

IMPORTANT

3-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 3-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4
Chapter 4
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example
of trial operation.

Cautions and Warnings................................................4-2

Trial Operation Procedures.......................................... 4-4
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................4-18

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cautions and Warnings

!WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Digital Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electri-
cal shock.

!WARNING Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Digital Operator, or
optional items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical
shock or damage to the product.

!WARNING Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in
electrical shock.

!WARNING Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the
machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.

!WARNING Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power inter-
ruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the pro-
cessing selection function after momentary power interruption is rest). Doing so may
result in injury.

!WARNING Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Digital
Operator is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result
in injury.

!WARNING Be sure to confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power
supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so while
the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.

!Caution Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation
because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so may
result in damage to the product.

!Caution Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.

!Caution Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.

!Caution Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the
product.

4-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedure

Trial Operation Procedure

Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart. When setting the basic parameters, always
set C6-01 (CT/VT Selection) according to the application.

START

Installation

Wiring

Set power supply voltage.

Turn ON power. *1

Confirm status.

Initialize
parameters

Basic settings
Select operating (Quick programming mode)
method.
NO
Open-loop vector control (A1-02 = 2)
V/f control?
YES
YES
A1-02 = 1
PG?
NO
Default: A1-02 = 0

Set E1-03 and E2-04. Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01. *2

V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz) V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
(-E) 200 V/50 Hz (400 V/50 Hz) (-E) 200 V/50 Hz (400 V/50 Hz)
Settings according
to control mode

Motor cable over

50 m or heavy load possibly YES OK to operate NO
*3
causing motor to stall or motor during autotuning?
overload?

YES
NO
Stationary autotuning for *4
Rotational autotuning Stationary autotuning
line-to-line resistance only

Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
*1 Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more.

No-load operation *2 If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set
the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced
programming mode.
Loaded operation
*3 Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy
whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
Optimum adjustments and
constant settings *4 If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual
installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line
resistance only on-site.
Check/record constants.

END

Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart

4-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedures
The procedure for trial operation is described in order in this section.

K Application Confirmation
First, confirm the application before using the Inverter.
• Fan, blower, pump
• Other equipment

For any Inverter application other than a fan, blower, or pump, set C6-01 (CT/VT Selection) to 0 (CT: low car-
rier, fixed torque). The default setting is 1 (VT: high carrier, variable torque).

K Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400-V Class Inverters of 75 kW

or Higher)
For 400-V class Inverters of 75 kW or higher, the power supply terminal for the external fan and internal con-
tact is separated from the main circuit.
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting). Insert the jumper into the
voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.

Power tab

200 V class power supply Jumper (factory-set position)

400V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator

Fig 4.2 Large-capacity Inverter Connections

4-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedures

K Power ON
Confirm all of the following items before turning ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200-V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
400-V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
• Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
• Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
• When using a PG Speed Control Card, make sure that it is wired correctly.
• Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status)

K Checking the Display Status

If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:

Display for normal operation The frequency reference monitor is dis-

played in the data display section.
AUTO
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYTUNING

When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.

The display will differ depending on the

Display for fault operation type of fault.
AUTO
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFYTUNING
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.

4-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Initializing Parameters
Initialize parameters by following the table below. Set A1-03 to 2220 when initializing a 2-wire sequence.
Table 4.1 Initializing Parameters
Step Key Operator Screen Displays Description

1 Turn ON the power.

Press to shift to Advanced Programming

2 MENU
Mode.

3 Press to show parameter reference screen.

4 Press to confirm A1.

RESET

5 Press three times to display A1-03 (initialize).



Press to show the set value for the initializing

6
method.

7 Use to change the set value to “2220.”

8 Press to execute the initialization.

When the initializing is completed, the “End”

9 indication appears, and the display returns to
the parameter reference screen.

4-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedures

K Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operation should be lit) and then
set the following parameters. Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating
procedures and to Chapter 5 Parameters and Chapter 6 Parameter Settings by Function for details on the
parameters.
Parameters that must be set are listed in Table 4.2 and those that are set according to the application are listed
in Table 4.3.
Table 4.2 Parameters that must be set
Parame-
Factory
ter Num- Name Description Setting Range Page
Setting
ber
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
Control method
A1-02 1: V/f control with PG 0 to 2 0 5-9
selection
(Pulse generator as encoder)
2: Open-loop vector control
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator 5-11
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input) 6-6
b1-01 Reference selection 0 to 4 1
2: RS-422A/485 communications 6-62
3: Option Card 6-76
4: Pulse train input
Set the run command input method.
5-12
0: Digital Operator
Operation method 6-12
b1-02 1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input) 0 to 3 1
selection 6-62
2: RS-422A/485 communications
6-76
3: Option Card
Set the acceleration time in seconds for the 5-19
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 0.0 to 6000.0 10.0 s
output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%. 6-19
Set the deceleration time in seconds for the 5-19
C1-02 Deceleration time 1 0.0 to 6000.0 10.0 s
output frequency to fall from 100% to 0%. 6-19
Set to CT (not low noise, maximum current
overload: 150%) or VT (low noise, maxi-
5-25
C6-01 CT/VT selection mum current overload:120%). 0 or 1 1
6-2
0: CT
1: VT
200 V
155 to 255 V (200 V
Input voltage set- Set the Inverter's nominal input voltage in (200 V class) class) 5-31
E1-01
ting volts. 310 to 510 V 400 V 6-129
(400 V class) (400 V
class)
Setting for
general-
10% to 200% of purpose 5-33
E2-01 Motor rated current Set the motor rated current. Inverter's rated motor of 6-47
current same 6-127
capacity as
Inverter

4-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 4.2 Parameters that must be set (Continued)
Parame-
Factory
ter Num- Name Description Setting Range Page
Setting
ber
Set to enable or disable the motor overload
protection function using the electronic ther-
mal relay.
Motor protection 5-56
L1-01 0: Disabled 0 to 3 1
selection 6-47
1: General motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection

When C6-01 is set to 0 (CT), not-low noise will apply and the Inverter overload withstand ratio will be
150% of the Inverter rating per minute. When C6-01 is set to 1 (VT), low noise will apply and the Inverter
overload withstand ratio will be 120% of the Inverter rating per minute. If C6-01 is set to 1 (VT) when
IMPORTANT overload withstand capability is required by the application, the life of the Inverter may be reduced.

Table 4.3 Parameters that are set as required

Parame-
Factory
ter Num- Name Description Setting Range Page
Setting
ber
The stopping method when the stop com-
mand is input.
Stopping method 0: Deceleration to stop 5-13
b1-03 0 to 3 0
selection 1: Coast to stop 6-14
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
The carrier frequency is set low if the motor
cable is 50 m or longer or to reduce radio Depends on
Carrier frequency
C6-02 noise or leakage current. The factory setting 0 to F setting of 5-25
selection
and setting range depends on the setting of C6-01.
C6-01.
d1-01 to
Frequency refer-
d1-01 to d1-04: 0.00
ences 1 to 4 and Set the required speed references for multi- 5-27
d1-04 and 0 to 400.00 Hz Hz
jog frequency ref- step speed operation or jogging. 6-6
d1-17 d1-17: 6.00
erence
Hz
H4-02:
H4-02 and FM and AM termi- Adjust when an instrument is connected to 1.00
0.00 to 2.50 5-52
H4-05 nal output gain the FM or AM terminal. H4-05:
0.50
If using the dynamic brake option (Braking
Stall prevention Resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Brak-
5-60
L3-04 selection during ing Units), be sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0 to 3 1
6-25
deceleration 0 (disabled) or 3 (enabled with Braking
Resistor).

4-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedures

K Settings for the Control Methods

Autotuning methods depend on the control method set for the Inverter. Make the settings required by the con-
trol method.

nOverview of Settings
Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autotuning mode according to the following flow-
chart.

START

NO
Open-loop vector control (A1-02 = 2)
V/f control?

YES A1-02 = 0 or 1)

Control mode selection

PG?
YES
A1-02 = 1

NO
(Default: A1-02 = 0)

Set E1-03 and E2-04. Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.

V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz) V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
(-E) 200 V/50 Hz (400 V/50 Hz) (-E) 200 V/50 Hz (400 V/50 Hz) *2

Motor cable over

50 m or heavy load possibly OK to operate NO
causing motor to stall motor during autotuning?*1
YES
or overload?

YES
NO

Stationary autotuning for

line-to-line resistance only
Rotational autotuning Stationary autotuning

END

Note If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only on-
site.
* 1. Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
* 2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13.

Fig 4.3 Settings According to the Control Method

4-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nSetting the Control Method
Any of the following three control methods can be set.
• V/f control without PG (normal speed control)
• V/f control with PG (simple speed feedback control)
• Open-loop vector control (high-performance control without PG)

V/f Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)

• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced program-
ming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz: E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 60 Hz: E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz (50 Hz for -E models)
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.

V/f Control with PG (A1-02=1)

• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced program-
ming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz: E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 60 Hz: E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz (50 Hz for -E models)
• Set the number of motor poles in E2-04 (Number of Motor Poles)
• Set the number of rotations per pulse in F1-01 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the
motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.

Open-loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2)

Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated without a load, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor
cannot be operated, perform stationary autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on
autotuning.

4-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedures

K Autotuning
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set motor constants when using the open-
loop vector control method, when the cable length is long, etc.

n Setting the Autotuning Mode

One of the following three autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotational autotuning
• Stationary autotuning
• Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only

=
Rotational Autotuning (T1-01 0)
Rotational autotuning is used only for open-vector control. Set T1-01 to 0, input the data from the nameplate,
and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will run the motor at zero speed for approx-
imately 1 minute, and run the motor for approximately 1 minute to set the required motor constants.

1. Always disconnect the motor from the machine and confirm that it is safe to operate the motor before
performing rotational autotuning.
2. If the motor cannot be operated by itself, perform stationary autotuning, but always use rotational
IMPORTANT autotuning whenever it is possible to operate the motor by itself to increase performance.

=
Stationary Autotuning (T1-01 1)
Stationary autotuning is used only for open-vector control. Set T1-01 to 1, input the data from the nameplate,
and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the stationary motor
for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor constants will be set automatically. The remaining motor
constants will be set automatically the first time operation is started in drive mode.

1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning is performed even though the motor
will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
IMPORTANT holding brake is not activated during autotuning.
3. Keep the motor load ratio to 50% or less the first time the system is operated in drive mode after per-
forming stationary autotuning.

Stationary Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance Only (T1-01 = 2)

Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only can be used in any control method. This is the only auto-
tuning possible for V/f control and V/f control with PG modes.
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long or the cable length has changed
or when the motor and Inverter have different capacities.
To perform autotuning in V/f control or V/f control with PG, set T1-01 to 2, and then press the RUN Key on
the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 20 seconds and
the Motor Line-to-Line Resistance (E2-05) and cable resistance will be automatically measured. This can be
performed for open-loop vector control.

1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance is performed
even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
IMPORTANT holding brake is not activated during autotuning.

4-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Precautions Before Using Autotuning
Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
• Autotuning the Inverter is fundamentally different from autotuning the servo system. Inverter autotuning
automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor constants, whereas servo system autotuning
adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the load.
• When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), use a motor with a
rated voltage that is 20 V less than the input power supply voltage of the Inverter for 200V-class Inverters
and 40 V less for 400V-class Inverters. If the rated voltage of the motor is the same as the input power sup-
ply voltage, the voltage output from the Inverter will be unstable at high speeds and sufficient performance
will not be possible.
• Use stationary autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a load.
• Use rotational autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that has fixed output characteristics
or for a motor that is not connected to a load.
• If rotational autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load, the motor constants will not be found
accurately and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autotuning for a motor
connected to a load.
• If the wiring between the Inverter and motor changes by 50 m or more between auto tuning and motor
installation, perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.
• If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
even when using V/f control.
• The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs will be as shown in the following table
during autotuning. When performing autotuning with the motor connected to a load, be sure that the hold-
ing brake is not applied during autotuning, especially for conveyor systems or similar equipment.

Tuning Mode Multi-function Inputs Multi-function Outputs

Same as during normal
Rotational autotuning Do not function.
operation

Maintain same status as

Stationary autotuning Do not function.
when autotuning is started.

Stationary autotuning for line- Maintain same status as

Do not function.
to-line resistance only when autotuning is started.

• To cancel autotuning, always use the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.

n Precautions for Rotational and Stationary Autotuning

Use the following procedure to perform autotuning when the rated voltage of the motor is higher than the volt-
age of the power supply to the Inverter.
1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).
2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):
(Base frequency from the motor’s nameplate × setting of T1-03)/(Rated voltage from motor’s nameplate)
3. Perform autotuning.
After completing autotuning, set E1-04 (Maximum output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s
nameplate.

1. When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor
rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage multipled by 0.9.
2. When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the output current will increase as
IMPORTANT the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.

4-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedures

n Parameter Settings for Autotuning

The following parameters must be set before autotuning.

Table 4.4 Parameter Settings before Autotuning

Data Displays during
Param-
Autotuning
eter Setting Factory
Name Display V/f Open
Num- Range Setting
V/f with Loop
ber
PG Vector
Set the location where the autotuned
Motor 1/2 motor constants are to be stored.
T1-00 1: E1 to E2 (motor 1) 1 or 2 1 Yes Yes Yes
selection
2: E3 to E4 (motor 2)*1
2 (V/f and
Set the autotuning mode. V/f with
Autotuning 0: Rotational autotuning PG) Yes Yes
T1-01 mode selec- 1: Stationary autotuning 0 to 2 0 (open- (only (only Yes
tion 2: Stationary autotuning for line-to- loop vec- for 2) for 2)
line resistance only
tor)*2
10% to 200%
Set the output power of the motor in Same as
Motor out- of Inverter
T1-02 Inverter Yes Yes Yes
put power kilowatts.*3 rated output
rated output
*5

200.0 V
0 to 255.0 V (200 V
Motor rated Set the rated voltage of the motor in (200 V class) class)
T1-03 - - Yes
voltage volts.*3 *4 0 to 510.0 V 400.0 V
(400 V class) (400 V
class)
Same as
10% to 200% general-
Set the rated current of the motor in of Inverter purpose
Motor rated
T1-04 motor with Yes Yes Yes
current amps.*3 rated cur-
same
rent*5 capacity as
Inverter

Motor base Set the base frequency of the motor 0 to 400.0 Hz

T1-05 60.0 Hz - - Yes
frequency in hertz.*3 *4 *6

Number of
T1-06 Set the number of motor poles. 2 to 48 poles 4 poles - - Yes
motor poles

Motor base Set the base speed of the motor in 0 to 24000 1750
T1-07 - - Yes
speed r/min.*3 *6 r/min

* 1.
Not normally displayed. Displayed only when a motor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H1-01 to H1-05 set to 16).
* 2.
Only a setting of 2 (stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only) is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
* 3.
For a constant-output motor, set the value at the base speed.
* 4.
For an inverter motor or vector motor, the voltage and frequency may be lower than for a general-purpose motor. Always confirm setting on the name-
plate or in test reports. Also, if you know the no-load values, set the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load frequency in T1-05 to obtain better accu-
racy.
* 5. Stable vector control will be possible when the setting is between 50% and 100%.
* 6. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity and the setting of C6-01 (CT/VT Selection).

4-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nDigital Operator Displays during Autotuning
The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.

Table 4.5 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning

Digital Operator Display Description
Autotuning mode selection: T1-01
Using the same procedures as for the programming
modes check and set the T1 parameters according to
information on the previous page.
Be sure that T1-01 (Autotuning Mode Selection) is set
correctly and check safety around the motor and
machine.

Motor base speed: T1-07

(For rotational autotuning)

The autotuning start display will appear when all set-

tings through T1-07 have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.

Autotuning started: TUn10

Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed

from the autotuning start display.
The digit second from the right in TUnoo is the
Motor 1/2 Selection (T1-00) and the right digit is the
Autotuning Mode Selection (T1-01).

Autotuning Stop command input

If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error

occurs during autotuning, and error message will be
display and autotuning will be stopped.
Refer to Errors during Autotuning on page 7-12.

Autotuning completed

END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 min-

utes, indicating that autotuning has been completed.

4-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedures

nPrecautions After Using Autotuning

When using a spindle motor, the maximum output speed is higher than the rated frequency (or Base Fre-
quency, FA (E1-06)). For the region greater than FA, defined as the constant output range, output torque is
reduced because the voltage does not increase for an increase in the frequency.
For application in the constant output range, the V/f characteristics must be reconfigured manually after auto-
tuning is performed. Set E1-03=F, and parameters E1-04 through E1-10 to the correct values. Do not change
E1-06 (Base Frequency) and E1-13 (Base Voltage) because they are auto-turned to the optimum values.

Increasing the Motor’s Rated Speed by 1 to 1.2 Times

To increase the motor’s rated speed by 1 to 1.2 times, use the following formula to change the setting of E1-04
(Maximum output voltage):
E1-04 = (Motor’s rated speed) × (No. of motor poles)/120 (Hz) × (1 to 1.2)
If the motor’s speed is increased beyond the rated speed, fixed output characteristics will be used at high
speeds and motor torque will be reduced.

Applications to Constant Output Motors Such as Motors for Machine Tools

Use the following formula to change the settings of E1-04 (Maximum output frequency) and E1-05 (Maxi-
mum voltage) when using a motor with a fixed output, e.g., a motor for a machine tool:
E1-04 = Frequency (Hz) at maximum speed under no-load conditions (load rate = 0)
E1-05 = Voltage (V) at maximum speed under no-load conditions (load rate = 0)
Do not change the E2 motor constants after performing autotuning.

n Precautions for Precision Settings

Settings for autotuning are different when performing autotuning using motor test reports or design data. Use
the following table as reference.

Operator Display Simple Setting Precision Setting

Voltage under no-load con-
T1-03 Motor rated voltage
ditions at motor rated speed

Frequency under no-load

T1-05 Motor base frequency
conditions at rated speed

4-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Application Settings
Parameters are set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e., with the ADV indicator lit on the Digital
Operator). All the parameters that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in
advanced programming mode.

nSetting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• When using an Inverter-mounted Braking Resistor (3G3IV-PEPFo), set L8-01 to 1 to enable Braking
Resistor overheating protection.
• To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
• To increase the speed of a 60 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 66.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 60 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 54 Hz (0%
to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of
the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.

K No-load Operation
To start no-load operation (without connecting the machine to the motor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator
should be OFF).
The motor and the machine must be checked for safety before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the
JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, con-
firm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in
REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be
taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.

Both a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed command) must
be provided to start Inverter operation.
Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE).
INFO

K Loaded Operation
Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the
Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).

nConnecting the Load

• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.

4-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trial Operation Procedures

nOperation Using the Digital Operator

• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• Make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible so that any unexpected movement
can be stopped.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.

n Checking Operating Status

• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnor-
mal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too
high.
• Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-18 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the
control system occur.

K Check and Recording Parameters

Use verify mode (i.e., when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator is lit) to check parameters that have
been changed for trial operation and record them in a parameter table.
Any parameters that have been change by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in parameters o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can
be used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed
settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system
recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage parameters.
• Recording parameters
• Setting access levels for parameters
• Setting a password

n Recording Parameters (o2-03)

If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of parameters will be saved in a separate mem-
ory area in the Inverter. Later, after Inverter settings have been changed, the parameters can be initialized to
the settings saved in the separate memory area when o2-03 was set to 1 by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.

nParameter Access Levels (A1-01)

A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent parameters from being changed. A1-01 can also be set to 1
(User-specified Parameters) and used along with A2 parameters to display only parameters required by the
machine or application in a programming mode.

nPassword (A1-04 and A1-05)

When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that parameters will be
displayed only when the correct password is input.

4-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation,
adjust the parameters listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the
most commonly used parameters.

Table 4.6 Adjusted Parameters

Recom-
Control Name (Parameter Factory
Performance mended Adjustment Method
Method Number) Setting
Setting
• Reduce the setting if
Controlling hunting torque is insufficient for
Hunting-prevention and vibration in mid- heavy loads.
1.00 0.50 to 2.00
gain (N1-02) dle-range speeds (10 to • Increase the setting if hunt-
40 Hz) ing or vibration occurs for
light loads.
• Increase the setting if
• Reducing motor motor magnetic noise is
Carrier frequency magnetic noise Depends high.
0 to
selection • Controlling hunting on capac- • Reduce the setting if hunt-
default
(C6-02) and vibration at low ity ing or vibration occurs at
speeds low to middle-range
speeds.
• Reduce the setting if
V/f control • Increasing torque
Torque compensation Depends torque or speed response is
(A1-02 = 0 and speed response 200 to 1000
primary delay time on capac- slow.
or 1) • Controlling hunting ms
constant (C4-02) ity • Increase the setting if hunt-
and vibration
ing or vibration occurs.
• Increase the setting if
• Improving torque at
torque is insufficient at
low speeds (10 Hz
Torque compensation low speeds.
or lower) 1.00 0.50 to 1.50
gain (C4-01) • Reduce the setting if hunt-
• Controlling hunting
ing or vibration occurs for
and vibration
light loads.
Middle output fre-
• Increase the setting if
quency voltage • Improving torque at Depends Default to torque is insufficient at
(E1-08) low speeds on capac- Default + 3 low speeds.
Minimum output fre- • Controlling shock at ity and
quency voltage startup voltage to 5 V* • Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
(E1-10)
• Increasing torque
• Reduce the setting if
Speed feedback detec- and speed response
torque or speed response is
tion control (AFR) • Controlling hunting
1.00 0.50 to 2.00 slow.
gain and vibration in mid-
• Increase the setting if hunt-
(N2-01) dle-range speeds (10
ing or vibration occurs.
to 40 Hz)
• Reduce the setting if
• Increasing torque
Torque compensation torque or speed response is
Open-loop and speed response 20 to
primary delay time 20 ms slow.
vector con- • Controlling hunting 100 ms
constant (C4-02) • Increase the setting if hunt-
trol (A1-02 and vibration
ing or vibration occurs.
= 2)
• Increasing speed • Reduce the setting if speed
Slip compensation pri-
response 100 to response is slow.
mary delay time (C3- 200 ms
• Improving speed sta- 500 ms • Increase the setting if the
02)
bility speed is not stable.
• Increase the setting if
Slip compensation • Improving speed speed response is slow.
1.0 0.5 to 1.5
gain (C3-01) accuracy • Reduce the setting if the
speed is too fast.

4-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Adjustment Suggestions

Table 4.6 Adjusted Parameters (Continued)

Recom-
Control Name (Parameter Factory
Performance mended Adjustment Method
Method Number) Setting
Setting
• Reducing motor • Increase the setting if
magnetic noise motor magnetic noise is
Depends
Carrier frequency • Controlling hunting 0 to high.
on capac-
selection (C6-02) and vibration at low default • Reduce the setting if hunt-
ity
Open-loop speeds (10 Hz or ing or vibration occurs at
vector con- less) low speeds.
trol (A1-02 Middle output fre-
= 2) • Increase the setting if
quency voltage • Improving torque at Depends Default to torque or speed response is
(E1-08) low speeds on capac- Default + 3 slow.
Minimum output fre- • Controlling shock at ity and
quency voltage startup voltage to 5 V* • Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
(E1-10)
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.

• Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01) from its default setting of 1.00 when using open-
loop vector control.
• If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector control, enable Slip Compensation During
Regeneration (C3-04 = 1).
• Use slip compensation to improve speed control during V/f control (A1-02 = 0).
Set the Motor Rated Current (E2-01), Motor Rated Slip (E2-02), and Motor No-load Current (E2-03), and
then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01) to between 0.5 and 1.5. The default setting for V/f control
is C3-01 = 0.0 (slip compensation disabled).
• To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (A1-02 = 1), set the ASR parameters
(C5-01 to C5-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default. (It is not normally necessary to adjust this set-
ting.) ASR for V/f control with a PG will only control the output frequency; a high gain, such as is possible
for open-loop vector control, cannot be set.

The following parameters will also indirectly affect the control system.

Table 4.7 Parameters Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications

Name (Parameter Number) Application
CT/VT selection (C6-01) Sets the maximum torque and overload capability to 120% or 150%.
DWELL function (b6-01 to b6-04) Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
Acceleration/deceleration times
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
(C1-01 to C1-11)
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04) Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04) Used to avoid resonance points during operation.
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12) Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Used to prevent 0 V (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy
loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06) default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using
a Braking Resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration
by setting L3-04 to 0.
Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased,
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04) use a motor with higher capacity than the Inverter. If a setting is reduced,
stalling can occur under heavy loads.

4-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 4-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5
Chapter 5
Parameters
This chapter describes all parameters that can be set in the Inverter.

Parameter Descriptions ...............................................5-2

Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels............5-3
Parameter Tables.........................................................5-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Parameter Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the parameter tables.

K Description of Parameter Tables

Parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an
example.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
Setting Factory during V/f Open
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Vec-
Display tion PG tor

Set the frequency reference

Reference input method.
selection 0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
b1-01 0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q 180H -
2: RS-422A/485 communi-
cations
Reference 3: Option Card
Source 4: Pulse train input

• Parameter Number: The number of the parameter.

• Name: The name of the parameter.
• LCD Display: The name of the parameter displayed on the LCD-type Digital Opera-
tor.
• Description: Details on the function or settings of the parameter.
• Setting Range: The setting range for the parameter.
• Factory Setting: The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is
changed.)
Refer to page 5-83 for factory settings by control method.
• Change during Operation: Indicates whether or not the parameter can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No: Changes not possible during operation.
• Control Methods: Indicates the control methods in which the parameter can be moni-
tored or set.
Q: Items which can be monitored and set in either quick program-
ming mode or advanced programming mode.
A: Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced pro-
gramming mode.
No: Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method.
• Register: The register number used for RS-422A/485 communications.
• Page: Reference page for more detailed information on the parameter.

5-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels

Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels

The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.

No. Function Display Page

MENU Drive Mode U1 Status Monitor Parameters Monitor 5-75

U2 Fault Trace Fault Trace 5-79
Inverter can be operated and
U3 Fault History Fault History 5-80
its status can be displayed.
A1 Initialize Mode Initialization 5-9
A2 User-set Parameters User Parameters 5-10
b1 Operation Mode Selections Sequence 5-11
b2 DC Injection Braking DC Braking 5-12
Quick Programming Mode b3 Speed Search Speed Search 5-13

Minimum parameters required b4 Timer Function Delay Timers 5-14

for operation can be monitored b5 PID Control PID Control 5-15
or set. b6 Dwell Functions Reference Hold 5-17
b8 Energy Saving Energy Saving 5-18
C1 Acceleration/Deceleration Accel/Decel 5-19
C2 S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration S-Curve Acc/Dcc 5-21
C3 Motor Slip Compensation Motor-Slip Comp 5-22

Advanced Programming Mode C4 Torque Compensation Torque Comp 5-23

C5 Speed Control (ASR) ASR Tuning 5-24
All parameters can be moni- C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq 5-25
tored or set.
d1 Preset Reference Preset Reference 5-27
d2 Reference Limits Reference Limits 5-29
d3 Jump Frequencies Jump Frequencies 5-29
d4 Reference Frequency Hold Sequence 5-30
d6 Field Weakening Field-weakening 5-31
E1 V/f Pattern V/f Pattern 5-31
Verify Mode E2 Motor Setup Motor Setup 5-33
Parameters changed from the E3 Motor 2 V/f Pattern V/f Pattern 2 5-35
default settings can be moni- E4 Motor 2 Setup Motor Setup 2 5-37
tored or set.
F1 PG Option Setup PG Option Setup 5-38
F4 Analog Monitor Cards A0-08, 12 Setup 5-41
F5 Not Used D0-02, 08 Setup 5-43
F6 Communications Option Card CP-916 Setup 5-44
H1 Multi-function Digital Inputs Digital Inputs 5-45
Autotuning Mode H2 Multi-function Digital Outputs Digital Outputs 5-47
H3 Analog Inputs Analog Inputs 5-49
Automatically sets motor con-
stants if autotuning data (from H4 Multi-function Analog Outputs Analog Outputs 5-52
motor nameplate) is input for H5 RS-422A/485 Communications Serial Com Setup 5-53
open-loop vector control or to H6 Pulse Train Pulse I/O Setup 5-54
measure the line-to-line resis-
tance for V/f control. L1 Motor Overload Motor Overload 5-56
L2 Power Loss Ridethrough PwrLoss Ridethru 5-57
L3 Stall Prevention Stall Prevention 5-59
L4 Reference Detection Ref Detection 5-61
L5 Fault Restart Fault Restart 5-62
L6 Torque Detection Torque Detection 5-63
L7 Torque Limits Torque Limit 5-65
L8 Hardware Protection Hdwe Protection 5-65
N1 Hunting Prevention Function Hunting Prev 5-67
N2 Speed Feedback Protection Control AFR 5-68
N3 High-slip Braking High Slip 5-69
o1 Monitor Select Monitor Select 5-69
o2 Multi-function Selections Key Selections 5-71
o3 Copy Function COPY Function 5-73

T Motor Autotuning Auto-Tuning 5-73

5-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Parameters Settable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming
mode. The parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all
other parameters, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-5 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f Open Regis-
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Vec-
ter
Display tion PG tor

Control Set the control method for the

method Inverter.
selection 0: V/f control
A1-02 0 to 2 0 No Q Q Q 102H
1: V/f control with PG
Control (Pulse generator as encoder)
Method 2: Open-loop vector control

Reference Set the frequency reference input

selection method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
b1-01 0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q 180H
input)
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Reference 3: Option Card
Source 4: Pulse train input

Operation
method Set the run command input method
selection 0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
b1-02 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 181H
input)
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Run Source 3: Option Card

Stopping Set the stopping method when a stop

method command is input.
selection 0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than
b1-03 0 to 3 0 No Q Q Q 182H
coast to stop, without regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
Stopping commands are disregarded during
Method deceleration time.)

5-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f Open Regis-
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Vec-
ter
Display tion PG tor

Accelera-
tion time 1 Set the acceleration time in seconds
C1-01 for the output frequency to climb from Yes Q Q Q 200H
Accel Time 0% to 100%.
1 0.0 to
6000.0 10.0 s
Decelera- *1
tion time 1 Set the deceleration time in seconds
C1-02 for the output frequency to fall from Yes Q Q Q 201H
Decel Time 100% to 0%.
1

CT/VT
selection 0: CT (low carrier, constant torque,
150% per minute)
C6-01 0 or 1 1 No Q Q Q 223H
1: VT (high carrier, variable torque,
Heavy/Nor- 120% per minute)
mal Duty

Carrier fre-
quency
selection Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
6
C6-02 Select F to enable detailed settings 0 to F No Q Q Q 224H
*2
CarrierFreq using parameters C6-03 to C6-07.
Sel

Frequency
Set the frequency reference in the unit
reference 1
specified in o1-03 (Frequency Units 0.00
d1-01 Yes Q Q Q 280H
for Reference Setting And Monitor, Hz
Reference 1 default: Hz)

Frequency
reference 2 Frequency reference when multi-step
0.00
d1-02 speed command 1 is ON for a multi- Yes Q Q Q 281H
Hz
function input (unit: Set in o1-03).
Reference 2

Frequency
reference 3 Frequency reference when multi-step 0 to
0.00
d1-03 speed command 2 is ON for a multi- 400.00 Yes Q Q Q 282H
Hz
function input (unit: Set in o1-03).
Reference 3

Frequency Frequency reference when multi-step

reference 4
speed command 1 and 2 are ON for a 0.00
d1-04 Yes Q Q Q 283H
multi-function input (unit: Set in o1- Hz
Reference 4 03).

Jog
frequency Frequency reference when Jog Fre-
reference quency Selection, FJOG command, or 6.00
d1-17 Yes Q Q Q 292H
RJOG command is ON for a multi- Hz
Jog function input (unit: Set in o1-03).
Reference

Input volt-
age setting Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt. 155 to
200 V
E1-01 This set value will be the basis for the 255 No Q Q Q 300H
*3
Input Volt- protection functions. *3
age

5-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f Open Regis-
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Vec-
ter
Display tion PG tor

V/f pattern
0 to E: Select from 15 preset patterns.
selection
F: Custom user-set patterns
E1-03 0 to F F No Q Q No 302H
(Applicable for setting E1-04
V/F Selec-
to E1-10).
tion

Max. output
frequency 40.0 to 60.0
E1-04 (FMAX) 400.0 Hz No Q Q Q 303H
Max *4 *5
Frequency
Max.
voltage
Output voltage (V) 0.0 to 200.0
(VMAX)
E1-05 VMAX
(E1-05) 255.0 V No Q Q Q 304H
Max VBASE *3 *3*5
(E1-13)
Voltage

Base fre- VMIN Frequency

(E1-10) (Hz)
quency (FA) FMIN FA FMAX 0.0 to 60.0
E1-06 (E1-09) (E1-06) (E1-04) No Q Q Q 305H
Base Fre- 400.0 Hz *5
quency
Min. output
frequency
0.0 to 1.5 Hz
E1-09 (FMIN) No Q Q Q 308H
400.0 *5
Min Fre-
quency
Base Change this setting only when making
voltage advanced adjustments for V/f in the 0.0 to
(VBASE) 0.0 V
E1-13 fixed outputs area. Normally, there is 255.0 No A A Q 30CH
*6
Base no need to make these settings. *3
Voltage

Motor rated
current Set the motor rated current in amps.
This set value becomes the base value 0.32 to
1.90 A
E2-01 for motor protection, torque limit, and 6.40 No Q Q Q 30EH
*7
torque control. It is set automatically *8
Motor when using autotuning.
Rated FLA

Number of
motor poles Set the number of motor poles. The
E2-04 value is set automatically during auto- 2 to 48 4 No No Q No 311H
Number of tuning.
Poles

PG constant Set the number of pulses per rotation

600
for the PG (pulse generator or 0 to (1024)
F1-01 No No Q No 380H
encoder) being used. (Do not set as a 60000 *9
PG Pulses/ multiple.)
Rev

5-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f Open Regis-
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Vec-
ter
Display tion PG tor

Set the voltage level gain for multi-

Gain (termi-
function analog output 1.
nal FM)
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
be output as the 100% output for the 0.00 to
H4-02 1.00 Yes Q Q Q 41EH
monitor items. Voltage output from 2.50
Terminal the terminals, however, is 10 V max.
FM Gain A meter calibration function is avail-
able.

Gain (termi- Set the voltage level gain for multi-

nal AM) function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
be output as the 100% output for the 0.00 to
H4-05 0.50 Yes Q Q Q 421H
monitor items. Voltage output from 2.50
the terminals, however, is 10 V max.
Terminal A meter calibration function is avail-
AM Gain able.

Set to enable or disable the motor

Motor pro-
overload protection function using the
tection
electronic thermal relay.
selection
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection

L1-01 In some applications when the 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 480H

Inverter power supply is turned off,
the thermal value is reset, so even if
this parameter is set to 1, protection
may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to
MOL Fault one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that
Select each motor is installed with a protec-
tion device.

5-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f Open Regis-
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Loop
Vec-
ter
Display tion PG tor

0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If

Stall pre- deceleration time is too short, a
vention main circuit overvoltage may
selection result.)
during 1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped
deceleration when the main circuit voltage
exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage
is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
L3-04 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 492H
(Deceleration rate is automatically
adjusted so that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest possible
time. Set deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor
StallP Decel
Unit)
Sel
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Brak-
ing Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.

* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to
0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. These are values for a 200-V class Inverter. Values for a 400-V class Inverter are double.
* 4. The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
* 5. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 6. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 7. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200-V class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 8. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200-V class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 9. The factory setting for (-E) models is 1024.

5-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Parameter Tables

K A: Setup Settings
The following settings are made with the environment parameters (A parameters): Language displayed on the
Digital Operator, access level, control method, initialization of parameters.

n Initialize Mode: A1
Parameters for the environment modes are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
Setting Factory during V/f
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Language Used to select the language
selection for displayed on the Digital
Digital Operator (LED).
Operator 0: English
display 1: Japanese
2: German
A1-00 3: French 0 to 6 1 Yes A A A 100H -
4: Italian
Select Lan- 5: Spanish
guage 6: Portuguese
This parameter is not initial-
ized by the initialize opera-
tion.
Used to set the parameter
Parameter access level (set/read.)
access level 0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode
and setting A1-01 and
A1-04.)
1: Used to select parameter
(Only parameters set in 6-141
A1-01 0 to 2 2 Yes A A A 101H
A2-01 to A2-32 can be 6-142
Access read and set.)
Level 2: Advanced
(Parameters can be read
and set in both quick
programming mode and
advanced programming
(A) mode.)
Control Used to select the control
method method for the Inverter
selection 0: V/f control
1: V/f with PG feedback
4-7
(Pulse generator as
A1-02 0 to 2 0 No Q Q Q 102H 4-9
encoder)
Control 4-18
2: Open loop vector
Method This parameter is not initial-
ized by the initialize opera-
tion.

5-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Used to initialize the param-
Initializeeters using the specified
method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
Parameters 0 to
A1-03 0 No A A A 103H -
2220: Initializes using a 3330
Init Parame-
two-wire sequence.
ters
(Initializes to the
factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a
three-wire sequence.
Password input when a pass-
Password word has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
some parameters of the ini-
tialize mode.
0 to
A1-04 If the password is changed, 0 No A A A 104H 6-141
9999
Enter Pass- A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01
word to A2-32 parameters can no
longer be changed. (Pro-
gramming mode parameters
can be changed.)
Password Used to set a four digit num-
setting ber as the password.
This parameter is not usually
displayed. When the Pass-
0 to
A1-05 word (A1-04) is displayed, 0 No A A A 105H 6-141
Select Pass- hold down the RESET Key 9999
word and press the Menu Key and
the password will be dis-
played.

nUser-set Parameters: A2
The parameters set by the user are listed in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- Regis-
Setting Factory during V/f
eter LCD Description Range Setting Open Page
Number Opera- V/f with Loop ter
Display tion PG

User setting Used to set the parameter

parameters numbers that can be set/read.
Maximum 32.
A2-01 Effective when the Parame- b1-01
106H to
to ter Access Level (A1-01) is to - No A A A 6-142
125H
A2-32 User Param set to User Program (1). o2-08
1 to 32 Parameters set in parameters
A2-01 to A2-32 can be set/
read in programming mode.

5-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

K Application Parameters: b
The following settings are made with the application parameters (B parameters): Operation method selection,
DC injection braking, speed searching, timer functions, dwell functions, and energy saving functions.

nOperation Mode Selections: b1

Parameters for operation mode selection are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Reference Sets the frequency reference
selection input method.
0: Digital Operator
4-7
1: Control circuit terminal
6-6
b1-01 (analog input) 0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q 180H
Reference 6-62
2: RS-422A/485 communi-
Source 6-76
cations
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
Operation Sets the run command input
method method.
selection 0: Digital Operator 4-7
1: Control circuit terminal 6-12
b1-02 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q7 181H
(sequence input) 6-62
Run Source 2: RS-422A/485 communi- 6-76
cations
3: Option Card
Sets the stopping method
Stopping
when a stop command is
method
input.
selection
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop
4-8
b1-03 (Stops faster than coast to 0 to 3 0 No Q Q Q 182H
6-14
stop, no regenerative
Stopping operation.)
Method 3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run commands are
disregarded during
deceleration.)
Prohibition
of reverse 0: Reverse enabled
0 or 1
1: Reverse disabled
b1-04 operation (0 to 0 No A A A 183H 6-51
2: Switch phase order
Reverse 2)*
(reverse enabled)*
Oper
Read Used to set the responsive-
sequence ness of the control inputs
input twice (forward/reverse and multi-
function inputs.)
0: Two scans every 2 ms
b1-06 0 or 1 1 No A A A 185H -
(Use for fast responses.)
Cntl Input 1: Two scans every 5 ms
Scans (Use for possible
malfunction due to
noise.)

5-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Operation Used to set the operation
selection mode by switching to the
after switch- Remote mode using the
ing to Local/Remote Key.
remote 0: Run signals that are input
mode during mode switching
b1-07 are disregarded. (Input 0 or 1 0 No A A A 186H -
Run signals after
switching the mode.)
LOC/REM 1: Run signals become
RUN Sel effective immediately
after switching to the
Remote mode.
Run com- Used to set an operation
mand selec- interlock in programming
tion in modes.
program- 0: Cannot operate.
b1-08 0 or 1 0 No A A A 187H -
ming modes 1: Can operate (Disabled
when Digital Operator is
RUN CMD set to select run command
at PRG (when b1-02 = 0)).
* Only for (-E) model with V/f. Disabled for V/f with PG.

nDC Injection Braking: b2

Parameters for injection braking are shown in the following table.

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Zero speed Used to set the frequency
level (DC which starts DC injection
injection braking in units of Hz when
braking deceleration to stop is
0.0 to
b2-01 starting fre- selected. 0.5 Hz No A A A 189H 6-14
10.0
quency) When b2-01 is less than E1-
09, E1-09 becomes the DC
DCInj Start injection braking starting
Freq frequency.
DC injec-
tion brak- Sets the DC injection brak-
0 to 6-14
b2-02 ing current ing current as a percentage 50% No A A A 18AH
100 6-17
DCInj Cur- of the Inverter rated current.
rent
Used to set the time to per-
DC injec-
form DC injection braking at
tion brak-
start in units of 1 second.
ing time at
0.00
start Used to stop coasting motor
b2-03 to 0.00 s No A A A 18BH 6-17
and restart it. When the set
10.00
DCInj value is 0, DC injection
Time@Start braking at start is not per-
formed.

5-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Sets the time in units of 1
DC Injec-
second to perform DC
tion brak-
injection braking at stop.
ing time at
0.00
stop Used to prevent coasting
b2-04 to 0.50 s No A A A 18CH 6-14
after the stop command is
10.00
DCInj input. When the set value is
Time@Stop 0.00, DC injection braking at
stop is not performed.

nSpeed Search: b3
Parameters for the speed search are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- Regis-
Setting Factory during V/f
eter LCD Description Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
ter
Display tion PG
Speed Enables/disables the speed
search search function for the run
selection command and sets the speed
(current search method.
detection 0:Disabled, speed calculation
or speed 1: Enabled, speed calculation
calcula- 2: Disabled, current detection
tion) 3: Enabled, current detection

Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
b3-01 acceleration/deceleration is 0 to 3 2* No A A A 191H 6-53
performed from the calculated
speed to the specified
frequency (motor direction is
SpdSrch at also searched).
Start
Current Detection:
The speed search is started
from the frequency when
power was momentarily lost
and the maximum frequency,
and the speed is detected at
the search current level.
Speed Sets the speed search operation
search current as a percentage, taking
operating the Inverter rated current as
current 100%. 0 to
b3-02 (current 120%* No A No A 192H 6-53
Not usually necessary to set. 200
detection) When restarting is not possible
SpdSrch with the factory settings,
Current reduce the value.

5-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f Regis-
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
ter
Display tion PG
Speed
search Sets the output frequency
decelera- deceleration time during speed
tion time search in 1-second units.
0.1 to
b3-03 (current Set the time for deceleration 2.0 s No A No A 193H 6-53
10.0
detection) from the maximum output fre-
quency to the minimum out-
SpdSrch put frequency.
Dec Time
Speed
search wait Sets the contactor operating
time (cur- delay time when there is a con-
rent detec- tactor on the output side of the
Inverter. When a speed search 0.0 to
b3-05 tion or 0.2 s No A A A 195H 6-53
speed cal- is performed after recovering 20.0
culation) from a momentary power loss,
the search operation is delayed
Search by the time set here.
Delay

* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)

nTimer Function: b4
Parameters for timer functions are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
Setting Factory during V/f
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Timer func- Sets the timer function out-
tion ON- put ON-delay time (dead 0.0 to
delay time band) for the timer function 300.0
b4-01 input, in 1-second units. (0.0 to 0.0 s No A A A 1A3H 6-116
Delay-ON Enabled when a timer func- 3000.0)
Timer tion is set in H1-oo or H2- *
oo.
Timer func- Sets the timer function out-
tion OFF- put OFF-delay time (dead 0.0 to
delay time band) for the timer function 300.0
b4-02 input, in 1-second units. (0.0 to 0.0 s No A A A 1A4H 6-116
Delay-OFF Enabled when a timer func- 3000.0)
Timer tion is set in H1-oo or H2- *
oo

* For (-E) models.

5-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nPID Control: b5
Parameters for PID control are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
PID control 0: Disabled
mode selec- 1: Enabled (Deviation is D-
tion controlled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value
is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled
b5-01 (frequency reference + 0 to 4 0 No A A A 1A5H 6-118
PID output, D control of
PID Mode deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
feedback value).
Propor- Sets P-control proportional
tional gain 0.00
gain as a percentage.
b5-02 (P) to 1.00 Yes A A A 1A6H 6-118
P-control is not performed
25.00
PID Gain when the setting is 0.00.

Integral (I) Sets I-control integral time

time in 1-second units. 0.0 to
b5-03 1.0 s Yes A A A 1A7H 6-118
I-control is not performed 360.0
PID I Time when the setting is 0.0.
Integral (I) Sets the I-control limit as a
0.0 to
b5-04 limit percentage of the maximum 100.0% Yes A A A 1A8H 6-118
100.0
PID I Limit output frequency.

Derivative
Sets D-control derivative
(D) timetime in 1-second units. 0.00 to
b5-05 0.00 s Yes A A A 1A9H 6-118
D-control is not performed 10.00
PID D Time when the setting is 0.00.

PID limit Sets the limit after PID-con-

0.0 to
b5-06 trol as a percentage of the 100.0% Yes A A A 1AAH 6-118
PID Limit 100.0
maximum output frequency.
PID offset Sets the offset after PID-con- -100.0
b5-07 adjustment trol as a percentage of the to 0.0% Yes A A A 1ABH 6-118
PID Offset maximum output frequency. +100.0

PID primary Sets the time constant for

delay time low pass filter for PID-con-
0.00 to
b5-08 constant trol outputs in 1-second 0.00 s Yes A A A 1ACH 6-118
10.00
PID Delay units.
Time Not usually necessary to set.

PID output Select forward/reverse for

characteris- PID output.
tics selec- 0: PID output is forward.
b5-09 tion 0 or 1 0 No A A A 1ADH 6-118
1: PID output is reverse
Output (highlights the output
Level Sel code)

5-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
PID output
gain 0.0 to
b5-10 Sets output gain. 1.0 No A A A 1AEH 6-118
25.0
Output Gain
PID reverse 0: 0 limit when PID output
output is negative.
selection 1: Reverses when PID
b5-11 0 or 1 0 No A A A 1AFH 6-118
output is negative.
Output Rev 0 limit when reverse prohibit
Sel is selected using b1-04.
Selection of 0: No detection of loss of
PID feed- PID feedback.
back com- 1: Detection of loss of PID
mand loss feedback.
detection Operation continues
during detection, with the
b5-12 malfunctioning contact 0 to 2 0 No A A A 1B0H 6-118
not operating.
Fb los Det 2: Detection of loss of PID
Sel feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault
contact operates.
PID feed-
back com-
mand loss Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level as a percent 0 to
b5-13 detection 0% No A A A 1B1H 6-118
level units, with the maximum 100
output frequency at 100%.
Fb los Det
Lvl
PID feed-
back com-
mand loss
Sets the PID feedback loss 0.0 to
b5-14 detection 1.0 s No A A A 1B2H 6-118
time detection level in seconds. 25.5

Fb los Det
Time
PID sleep Set the PID sleep function
function start level as a frequency.
operation
level Always enabled for (-E) 0.0 to
b5-15 0.0 Hz No A A A 1B3H 6-118
models. On other models, it 400.0
PID Sleep is disabled when the PID
Level control is not selected
(b5-01=0).
PID sleep
operation Set the delay time until the
0.0 to
b5-16 delay time PID sleep function starts in 0.0 s No A A A 1B4H 6-119
25.5
PID Sleep seconds.
Time

5-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Accel/decel
time for PID
Set the accel/decel time for 0.0 to
b5-17 reference 0.0 s No A A A 1B5H 6-118
PID reference in seconds. 25.5
PID Acc/
Dec Time
PID set
point selec-
0: PID set point disabled
b5-18 tion 0 or 1 0 No A* A* A* 1DCH 6-118
1: PID set point enabled
PID Set-
point Sel
PID set
point 0.0 to
b5-19 PID set point 0.0% No A* A* A* 1DDH 6-118
PID Set- 100.0
point
* The parameters b5-18 and b5-19 are enabled only with (-E) models.

nDwell Functions: b6
Parameters for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Name Control Methods
Param Change
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
ber Display tion
PG
Dwell
fre-
quency at
0.0 to
b6-01 start 0.0 Hz No A A A 1B6H 6-22
400.0
Dwell
Ref
@Start
Dwell
time at
start 0.0 to
ON
b6-02 Run command OFF 0.0 s No A A A 1B7H 6-22
Dwell 10.0
Output frequency
Time@
Start
b6-01 b6-03 Time
Dwell
fre- b6-02 b6-04

quency at The dwell function is used to output

0.0 to
b6-03 stop frequency temporarily when driving a 0.0 Hz No A A A 1B8H 6-22
motor with a heavy load. 400.0
Dwell
Ref
@Stop
Dwell
time at
stop 0.0 to
b6-04 0.0 s No A A A 1B9H 6-22
Dwell 10.0
Time
@Stop

5-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nEnergy Saving: b8
Parameters for energy-saving control functions are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Energy-sav- Select whether to enable or
ing mode disable energy-saving con-
b8-01 selection trol. 0 or 1 0 No A A A 1CCH 6-125
Energy 0: Disable
Save Sel 1: Enable

Energy-sav-
ing gain Set the energy-saving gain
0.0 to 0.7
b8-02 with the open loop vector Yes No No A 1CDH 6-125
Energy 10.0 *1
control method.
Save Gain
Energy-sav-
ing filter
time con- Set the energy-saving filter
0.00 to 0.50 s
b8-03 stant time constant with the open Yes No No A 1CEH 6-125
10.0 *2
loop vector control method.
Energy
Save F.T
Energy-sav- Set the maximum motor effi-
ing coeffi- ciency value.
cient Set the motor rated capacity 0.0 to
b8-04 in E2-11, and adjust the 655.00 *4 No A A No 1CFH 6-125
Energy value by 5% at a time until *3
Save COEF output power reaches a mini-
mum value.
Power
detection
filter time Set the time constant for out- 0 to
b8-05 constant 20 ms No A A No 1D0H 6-125
put power detection. 2000
kW Filter
Time
Search Set the limit value of the
operation voltage control range during
voltage lim- search operation.
iter Perform search operation to
optimize operations using 0 to
b8-06 0% No A A No 1D1H 6-125
minute variations in voltage 100
Search V using energy-saving control.
Limit Set to 0 to disable the search
operation. 100% is the motor
base voltage.
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW and over.
* 3. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the parameters.
* 4. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.

5-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

K Tuning Parameters: C
The following settings are made with the tuning parameters (C parameters): Acceleration/deceleration times,
s-curve characteristics, slip compensation, torque compensation, speed control, and carrier frequency func-
tions.

nAcceleration/Deceleration: C1
Parameters for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Accelera- Sets the acceleration time to
tion time 1 accelerate from 0 to the max- 4-7
C1-01 Yes Q Q Q 200H
Accel Time imum output frequency, in 1- 6-19
1 second units.

Decelera- Sets the deceleration time to

tion time 1 decelerate from the maxi- 4-7
C1-02 Yes Q Q Q 201H
Decel Time mum output frequency to 0, 6-19
1 in 1-second units.

Accelera- The acceleration time when

tion time 2 the multi-function input
C1-03 Yes A A A 202H 6-19
Accel Time “accel/decel time 1” is set to
2 ON.

Decelera- The deceleration time when

tion time 2 the multi-function input
C1-04 Yes A A A 203H 6-19
Decel Time “accel/decel time 1” is set to
2 ON.
0.0 to
Accelera- 6000.0 10.0 s
The acceleration time when *
tion time 3 the multi-function input
C1-05 No A A A 204H 6-19
Accel Time “accel/decel time 2” is set to
3 ON.

Decelera- The deceleration time when

tion time 3 the multi-function input
C1-06 No A A A 205H 6-19
Decel Time “accel/decel time 2” is set to
3 ON.

Accelera- The acceleration time when

tion time 4 the multi-function input
C1-07 “accel/decel time 1” and No A A A 206H 6-19
Accel Time “accel/decel time 2” are set
4 to ON.
Decelera- The deceleration time when
tion time 4 the multi-function input
C1-08 “accel/decel time 1” and No A A A 207H 6-19
Decel Time “accel/decel time 2” are set
4 to ON.

5-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Decelera- The deceleration time when
tion Stop the multi-function input
Time “Deceleration stop” is set to 0.0 to
C1-09 ON. 6000.0 10.0 s No A A A 208H 6-18
Fast Stop This function can be used a *
Time stopped method when a fault
has been detected.
Accel/decel
time setting
0: 0.01-second units
C1-10 unit 0 or 1 1 No A A A 209H 6-19
1: 0.1-second units
Acc/Dec
Units
Accel/decel Sets the frequency for auto-
time switch- matic acceleration/decelera-
ing fre- tion switching.
quency Below set frequency: Accel/
decel time 4
0.0 to
C1-11 Above set frequency: Accel/ 0.0 Hz No A A A 20AH 6-19
400.0
decel time 1
Acc/Dec The multi-function input
SW Freq “accel/decel time 1” or
“accel/decel time 2” take pri-
ority.
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/decel-
eration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.

5-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nS-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Parameters for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG
S-curve
character-
istic time
at acceler- 0.00
C2-01 ation start to 0.20 s No A A A 20BH 6-20
2.50
SCrv Acc
@ Start

S-curve
character-
istic time All sections of the S-curve charac-
at acceler- teristic time are set in seconds. 0.00
C2-02 ation end When the S-curve characteristic to 0.20 s No A A A 20CH 6-20
time is set, the accel/decel times will 2.50
SCrv Acc increase by only half of the S-curve
@ End characteristic times at start and end.

Run command OFF

S-curve
ON
character- Output frequency
C2-02 C2-03
istic time
at deceler- C2-01 C2-04 0.00
C2-03 ation start Time to 0.20 s No A A A 20DH 6-20
2.50
SCrv Dec
@ Start

S-curve
character-
istic time
at deceler- 0.00
C2-04 ation end to 0.00 s No A A A 20EH 6-20
2.50
SCrv Dec
@ End

5-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nMotor Slip Compensation: C3
Parameters for slip compensation are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Slip com- Used to improve speed accu-
pensation racy when operating with a
gain load.
Usually setting is not neces-
sary.
0.0 to 4-18
C3-01 Adjust this parameter at the 0.0* Yes A No A 20FH
2.5 6-34
Slip Comp following times.
Gain • When actual speed is low,
increase the set value.
• When actual speed is high,
decrease the set value.
Slip com- Slip compensation primary
pensation delay time is set in ms.
primary Usually setting is not neces-
delay time sary.
Adjust this parameter at the 2000
0 to 4-18
C3-02 following times. ms No A No A 210H
10000 6-34
• Reduce the setting when *
Slip Comp slip compensation respon-
Time sive is slow.
• When speed is not stabi-
lized, increase the setting.
Slip com-
pensation Sets the slip compensation
0 to
C3-03 limit limit as a percentage of 200% No A No A 211H 6-34
250
Slip Comp motor rated slip.
Limit
Slip com- 0: Disabled.
pensation 1: Enabled.
selection When the slip compensation
during during regeneration function
regeneration has been activated, as regen-
C3-04 eration capacity increases 0 or 1 0 No A No A 212H 6-34
momentarily, it may be nec-
Slip Comp essary to use a braking
Regen option (braking resistor,
Braking Resistor Unit or
Braking Unit.)
Output volt-
age limit 0: Disabled.
operation 1: Enabled. (The motor flux
will be lowered automati-
C3-05 selection 0 or 1 0 No No No A 213H 6-34
cally when the output
V/F Slip voltage become satu-
Cmp Sel rated.)

* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)

5-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nTorque Compensation: C4
Parameters for are torque compensation shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Sets torque compensation
Torque gain as a ratio.
compensa- Usually setting is not neces-
tion gain sary.
Adjust in the following cir-
cumstances:
• When the cable is long;
increase the set value.
• When the motor is smaller
than the Inverter capacity
(Max. applicable motor
capacity), increase the set
values. 0.00 to 4-18
C4-01 1.00 Yes A A A 215H
• When the motor is oscil- 2.50 6-37
lating, decrease the set
Torq Comp values.
Gain Adjust the output current
range at minimum speed
rotation so that it does not
exceed the Inverter rated
output current.
Do not alter the torque com-
pensation gain from its
default (1.00) when using
the open loop vector control
method.
Torque The torque compensation
compensa- delay time is set in ms.
tion pri- Usually setting is not neces-
mary delay sary.
time con- Adjust in the following cir-
stant cumstances: 0 to 200 ms 4-18
C4-02 No A A A 216H
• When the motor is oscil- 10000 *1 6-37
lating, increase the set val-
Torq Comp ues.
Time • When the responsiveness
of the motor is low,
decrease the set values.
Starting
torque value
(forward) Sets the value based on 0.0 to
C4-03
100% motor’s rated torque. 200.0
0.0% No No No A*2 217H 6-37
F
TorqCmp@
start
Starting
torque value
(reverse) Sets the value based on -200.0
C4-04
100% motor’s rated torque. to 0.0
0.0% No No No A*2 218H 6-37
R
TorqCmp@
start

5-23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Starting
Sets the rise time constant
torque time
(ms) for the starting torque
constant 0 to
C4-05 value.
200
10 ms No No No A*2 219H 6-37
TorqCmp The filter is disabled if set
Delay T between 0 and 4 ms.

* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 2. The starting torque value can be set only for (-E) models.

nSpeed Control (ASR): C5

Parameters for speed control are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG
ASR pro-
portional
Sets the proportional gain of the 0.00 to
C5-01 (P) gain 1 0.20 Yes No A No 21BH -
speed loop (ASR.) 300.00
ASR P
Gain 1
ASR
integral 0.000
Sets the integral time of the speed 0.200
C5-02 (I) time 1 to Yes No A No 21CH -
loop (ASR) in 1-second units. s
ASR I 10.000
Time 1

ASR pro-
portional
(P) gain 2
0.00 to
C5-03 0.02 Yes No A No 21DH -
300.00
Usually setting is not necessary.
ASR P Set to change the rotational speed
Gain 2 gain.
P I
P=C5-01
I=C5-02

ASR P=C5-03
I=C5-04
integral
(I) time 2 0 E1-04 Motor speed (Hz)
0.000
0.050
C5-04 to Yes No A No 21EH -
s
10.000
ASR I
Time 2

ASR Sets the upper limit for the com-

limit pensation frequency for the speed 0.0 to
C5-05 5.0% No No A No 21FH -
ASR control loop (ASR) to a percentage 20.0
Limit of the maximum output frequency.

5-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nCarrier Frequency: C6
Parameters for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG
CT/VT 0: CT (low carrier, constant
selection torque, 150% for 1 munite
max.) 4-7
C6-01 Heavy/ 0 or 1 1 No Q Q Q 223H
1: VT (high carrier, variable 6-2
Normal torque, 120% for 1 munite
Duty max.)
Carrier
frequency Select carrier wave fixed pattern. 4-8
6
C6-02 selection Select F to enable detailed settings 0 to F No Q Q Q 224H 4-18
*1
Carrier- using parameters C6-03 to C6-05. 6-2
Freq Sel

5-25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG

Carrier
frequency
upper
limit
2.0 to 15.0
C6-03 15.0 kHz No A A A 225H 6-2
*2 *3 *1

Carrier-
Freq Max
Set the carrier frequency upper
limit and lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as
follows:
Carrier With the vector control method, the
frequency upper limit of the carrier frequency
lower is fixed in C6-03.
limit

Carrier frequency 0.4 to 15.0

C6-04 15.0 kHz No A A No 226H 6-2
*2 *3 *1

Output frequency x (C6-05) x K

Carrier- Output
frequency
Freq Min
(Max. output frequency)

K is a coefficient that depends on the

setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
Carrier
frequency
propor-
tional gain
00 to
C6-05 99 00 No A A No 227H 6-2
*3

Carrier-
Freq Gain

* 1. The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.

* 2. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 3. This parameter can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.

5-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

K Reference Parameters: d
The following settings are made with the reference parameters (d parameters): Frequency references.

nPreset Reference: d1
Parameters for frequency references are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Frequency
reference 1
Sets the frequency reference 0.00 4-8
d1-01 Yes Q Q Q 280H
in the units used in o1-03. Hz 6-10
Reference 1

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 2
when multi-step speed com- 0.00 4-8
d1-02 Yes Q Q Q 281H
mand 1 is ON for a multi- Hz 6-10
Reference 2 function input.

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 3
when multi-step speed com- 0.00 4-8
d1-03 Yes Q Q Q 282H
mand 2 is ON for a multi- Hz 6-10
Reference 3 function input.

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 4
when multi-step speed com- 0.00 4-8
d1-04 Yes Q Q Q 283H
mands 1 and 2 are ON for Hz 6-10
Reference 4 multi-function inputs.
0 to
Frequency 400.00
reference 5 The frequency when multi-
0.00
d1-05 step speed command 3 is ON Yes A A A 284H 6-10
Hz
for a multi-function input.
Reference 5

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 6
when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-06 Yes A A A 285H 6-10
mands 1 and 3 are ON for Hz
Reference 6 multi-function inputs.

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 7
when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-07 Yes A A A 286H 6-10
mands 2 and 3 are ON for Hz
Reference 7 multi-function inputs.

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 8
when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-08 Yes A A A 287H 6-10
mands 1, 2, and 3 are ON for Hz
Reference 8 multi-function inputs.

5-27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 9
when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-09 Yes A A A 288H -
mand 4 is ON for a multi- Hz
Reference 9 function input.

Frequency The frequency reference

reference 10 when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-10 Yes A A A 28BH -
mands 1 and 4 are ON for Hz
Reference
multi-function inputs.
10

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 11
when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-11 Yes A A A 28CH -
mands 2 and 4 are ON for a Hz
Reference
multi-function inputs.
11

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 12
when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-12 Yes A A A 28DH -
mands 1, 2, and 4 are ON for Hz
Reference
12 multi-function inputs.

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 13 when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-13 0 to Yes A A A 28EH -
mands 3 and 4 are ON for 400.00 Hz
Reference
multi-function inputs.
13

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 14
when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-14 Yes A A A 28FH -
Reference mands 1, 3, and 4 are ON for Hz
multi-function inputs.
14

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 15
when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-15 Yes A A A 290H -
mands 2, 3, and 4 are ON for Hz
Reference
15 multi-function inputs.

Frequency
The frequency reference
reference 16 when multi-step speed com- 0.00
d1-16 Yes A A A 291H -
mands 1, 2, 3, and 4 are ON Hz
Reference
for multi-function inputs.
16

Jog
The frequency reference
frequency when the jog frequency ref- 4-8
6.00
d1-17 reference erence selection, FJOG com- Yes Q Q Q 292H 6-10
Hz
Jog mand, or RJOG command is 6-70
Reference ON.

Note The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz).

5-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nReference Limits: d2
Parameters for frequency reference limits are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Frequency
reference Set the output frequency
upper limit as a percent, tak- 0.0 to 6-32
d2-01 upper limit 100.0% No A A A 289H
ing the max. output fre- 110.0 6-65
Ref Upper quency to be 100%.
Limit
Frequency
reference Sets the output frequency
lower limit as a percentage 0.0 to 6-32
d2-02 lower limit 0.0% No A A A 28AH
of the maximum output fre- 110.0 6-65
Ref Lower quency.
Limit
Master
speed refer- Set the master speed refer-
ence lower ence lower limit as a percent, 0.0 to 6-32
d2-03 limit 0.0% No A A A 293H
taking the max. output fre- 110.0 6-65
Ref1 Lower quency to be 100%.
Limit

nJump Frequencies: d3
Parameters for jump frequencies are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG

Jump fre-
quency 1
d3-01 0.0 Hz No A A A 294H 6-29

Jump Freq 1 Set the center values of the

jump frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by
Jump fre- setting the jump frequency to
quency 2 0 Hz. Always ensure that the
following applies: 0.0 to
d3-02 0.0 Hz No A A A 295H 6-29
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 400.0
Jump Freq 2 Operation in the jump fre-
quency range is prohibited
but during acceleration and
deceleration, speed changes
Jump fre-
smoothly without jump.
quency 3
d3-03 0.0 Hz No A A A 296H 6-29

Jump Freq 3

Jump fre-
quency Sets the jump frequency
bandwidth in Hz. 0.0 to
d3-04 width 1.0 Hz No A A A 297H 6-29
The jump frequency will be 20.0
Jump Band- the jump frequency ± d3-04.
width

5-29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nReference Frequency Hold: d4
Parameters for the reference frequency hold function are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Sets whether or not frequen-
cies on hold will be
Frequency recorded.
reference 0: Disabled (when operation
hold func- is stopped or the power is
tion selec- turned on again starts at
tion 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation
d4-01 is stopped or the power is 0 or 1 0 No A A A 298H 6-64
turned on again starts at
the previous hold
frequency.)
MOP Ref This function is available
Memory when the multi-function
inputs “accel/decel Ramp
Hold” or “up/down” com-
mands are set.
Set the frequency to be add
to or subtracted from the
+ - Speed
analog frequency reference
limits
as a percent, taking the max-
imum output frequency to be
0 to
d4-02 100%. 10% No A A A 299H 6-68
100
Enabled when the increase
Trim Con- (+) speed command or
trol Lvl decrease (-) speed command
is set for a multi-function
input.

5-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nField Weakening: d6
Parameters for the field weakening command are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Set the Inverter output volt-
Field weak- age when the field weaken-
ening level ing command is input.
It is enabled when the field
0 to
d6-01 weakening command is set 80% No A A No 2A0H -
100
for a multi-function input.
Field-Weak
Set the level as a percentage
Lvl
taking the voltage set in the
V/f pattern as 100%.

Field Set the lower limit in hertz of

frequency the frequency range where
field control is valid.
The field weakening com-
0.0 to
d6-02 mand is valid only at fre- 0.0 Hz No A A No 2A1H -
Field-Weak 400.0
quencies above this setting
Freq and only when the speed is
in agreement with the cur-
rent speed reference.

K Motor Constant Parameters: E

The following settings are made with the motor constant parameters (E parameters): V/f characteristics and
motor constants.

nV/f Pattern: E1
Parameters for V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG
Input
voltage Set the Inverter input voltage in 1
155 to 200 V
volt. 4-7
E1-01 setting 255 *1 No Q Q Q 300H
This setting is used as a reference 6-129
Input *1
value in protection functions.
Voltage
V/f pat- 0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
tern selec- patterns.
E1-03 tion F: Custom user-set patterns 0 to F F No Q Q No 302H 6-129

V/F (Applicable for settings

Selection E1-04 to E1-10.)

5-31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG
Max. 60.0
output Hz
frequency 40.0 to *2
E1-04 400.0 (50.0 No Q Q Q 303H 6-129

Max *5 Hz)
*6
Frequency

Max. Output voltage (V)

voltage 0.0 to 200.0
E1-05 255.0 V No Q Q Q 304H 6-129
Max *1 *1*2
Voltage
Base 60.0
frequency Frequency (Hz) Hz
0.0 to *2
E1-06 No Q Q Q 305H 6-129
Base 400.0 (50.0
To set V/f characteristics in a
Frequency straight line, set the same values Hz)
*6
for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case,
Mid. the setting for E1-08 will be disre-
output garded.
frequency Always ensure that the four fre- 0.0 to 3.0 Hz
E1-07 quencies are set in the following No A A A 306H 6-129
Mid 400.0 *2
manner:
Frequency
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) >
A
E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Mid.
output
frequency 0.0 to 15.0 V 4-19
E1-08 voltage No A A A 307H
255 *1 *1 *2 6-129

Mid
Voltage A
Min.
output Output voltage (V)
0.0 to 1.5 Hz
E1-09 frequency No Q Q Q 308H 6-129
400.0 *2
Min
Frequency
Min.
output Frequency (Hz)

frequency
voltage To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values
for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, 0.0 to 4-18
9.0 V
E1-10 the setting for E1-08 will be disre- 255.0 *1 *2 No A A A 309H 4-19
garded. *1 6-129
Min Always ensure that the four fre-
Voltage quencies are set in the following
manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) >
E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

5-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Change Control Methods

Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG
Mid.
output
frequency
0.0 to 0.0 Hz
E1-11 2 No A A A 30AH 6-129
400.0 *3
Mid
Frequency
B
Mid. Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the
output output range. Normally, this setting
frequency is not required. 0.0 to
0.0 V
E1-12 voltage 2 255.0 No A A A 30BH 6-129
*3
*1
Mid
Voltage B
Base
voltage 0.0 to
0.0 V
E1-13 255.0 No A A Q 30CH 6-129
Base *4
*1
Voltage
* 1. These are values for a 200-V class Inverter. Values for a 400-V class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 3. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
* 5. When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
* 6. For (-E) models. Factory setting for base frequency is 50 Hz.

nMotor Setup: E2
Parameters for motor 1 are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Motor rated Sets the motor rated current
current in 1 A units.
These set values will become
0.32 to
the reference values for 1.90 A 6-47
E2-01 6.40 No Q Q Q 30EH
Motor motor protection and torque *1 6-127
*2
Rated FLA limits.
This parameter is automati-
cally set during autotuning.
Motor rated Sets the motor rated slip in
slip Hz units.
These set values will become 2.90
0.00 to
E2-02 the reference values for slip Hz No A A A 30FH 6-127
Motor 20.00
compensation. *1
Rated Slip This parameter is automati-
cally set during autotuning.
Motor no- Sets the motor no-load cur-
load current rent in 1 A units. 0.00 to
1.20 A
E2-03 1.89 No A A A 310H 6-127
No-Load This parameter is automati- *1
*3
Current cally set during autotuning.
Number of Sets the number of motor
motor poles poles.
E2-04 2 to 48 4 poles No No Q No 311H 6-127
Number of This parameter is automati-
Poles cally set during autotuning.

5-33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Motor line-
to-line resis- Sets the motor phase-to-
0.000 9.842
phase resistance in Ω units.
E2-05 tance to Ω No A A A 312H 6-127
This parameter is automati-
Term Resis- 65.000 *1
cally set during autotuning.
tance
Sets the voltage drop due to
Motor leak
motor leakage inductance as
inductance
a percentage of the motor 0.0 to 18.2%
E2-06 No No No A 313H 6-127
Leak Induc- rated voltage. 40.0 *1
tance This parameter is automati-
cally set during autotuning.
Motor iron Sets the motor iron satura-
saturation tion coefficient at 50% of
0.00 to
E2-07 coefficient 1 magnetic flux. 0.50 No No No A 314H 6-127
0.50
Saturation This parameter is automati-
Comp1 cally set during autotuning.
Motor iron Sets the motor iron satura-
saturation tion coefficient at 75% of
0.00 to
E2-08 coefficient 2 magnetic flux. 0.75 No No No A 315H 6-127
0.75
Saturation This parameter is automati-
Comp2 cally set during autotuning.
Motor iron
loss for
torque com- Sets motor iron loss in W 0 to 14 W
E2-10 No A A No 317H 6-127
pensation units. 65535 *1
Tcomp Iron
Loss
Motor rated Set the rated output of the
output motor in units of 0.01 kW. 0.00 to 0.40
E2-11 No Q Q Q 318H -
Mtr Rated This parameter is automati- 650.00 *1
Power cally set during autotuning.
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200-V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200-V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200-V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

5-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

n Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E3

Parameters for motor 2 V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG
Motor 2
control
method 0: V/f control
E3-01 selection 1: V/f control with PG 0 to 2 0 No A A A 319H -
2: Open-loop vector control
Control
Method
Motor 2
max. out- 60.0
put fre- 40.0 to Hz
E3-02 quency 400.0 (50.0 No A A A 31AH -
(FMAX) *3 Hz)
Max Fre- *4
quency
Motor 2
max. volt-
age 0.0 to 200.0
E3-03 (VMAX) 255.0 V No A A A 31BH -
*1 *2
Max Volt-
age
Output voltage (V)
Motor 2
max. volt- 60.0
age fre- Hz
0.0 to
E3-04 quency (50.0 No A A A 31CH -
(FA) 400.0
Hz)
Base Fre- *4
quency
Frequency (Hz)
Motor 2
mid. out-
put fre- To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values 0.0 to 3.0 Hz
E3-05 quency 1 No A A A 31DH -
(FB) for E3-05 and E3-07. 400.0 *2
In this case, the setting for E3-06
Mid Fre- will be disregarded.
quency Always ensure that the four fre-
Motor 2 quencies are set in the following
mid. out- manner:
put fre- E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) >
quency E3-05 (FB) > E3-07 (FMIN) 0.0 to 15.0 V
E3-06 voltage 1 255.0 *1 No A A A 31EH -
(VC) *1

Mid Volt-
age
Motor 2
min. out-
put fre-
0.0 to 1.5 Hz
E3-07 quency No A A A 31FH -
(FMIN) 400.0 *2

Min Fre-
quency

5-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG

Output voltage (V)

Motor 2
min. out-
put fre-
quency
voltage
(VMIN)

Frequency (Hz) 0.0 to 9.0 V

E3-08 255.0 *1 No A A A 320H -
*1
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values
for E3-05 and E3-07.
In this case, the setting for E3-06
Min Volt-
will be disregarded.
age
Always ensure that the four fre-
quencies are set in the following
manner:
E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) >
E3-05 (FB) > E3-07 (FMIN)
* 1. These are values for a 200-V class Inverter. Values for a 400-V class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 3. When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
* 4. For (-E) models. Factory setting for base frequency is 50 Hz.

5-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nMotor 2 Setup: E4
Parameters for motor 2 are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Motor 2 Sets the motor rated current
rated cur- in 1 A units.
rent These set values will become
0.32
the reference values for 1.90 A
E4-01 to 6.40 No A A A 321H 6-47
motor protection, torque lim- *1
Motor *2
its and torque control.
Rated FLA This parameter is automati-
cally set during autotuning.
Motor 2 Sets the motor rated slip in
rated slip Hz units.
These set values will become 2.90
0.00 to
E4-02 the reference values for slip Hz No A A A 322H -
Motor 20.00
compensation. *1
Rated Slip This parameter is automati-
cally set during autotuning.
Motor 2 no- Sets the motor no-load cur-
load current rent in 1 A units. 0.00 to
1.20 A
E4-03 1.89 No A A A 323H -
No-Load This parameter is automati- *1
*3
Current cally set during autotuning.

Motor 2
number of Sets the number of motor
poles (num- poles.
E4-04 ber of poles) 2 to 48 4 poles No No A No 324H -
This parameter is automati-
Number of cally set during autotuning.
Poles
Motor 2
line-to-line Sets the motor phase-to-
0.000 9.842
phase resistance in Ω units.
E4-05 resistance to Ω No A A A 325H -
This parameter is automati-
Term Resis- cally set during autotuning. 65.000 *1
tance
Motor 2Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as
leak induc-
tance a percentage of the motor 0.0 to 18.2%
E4-06 No No No A 326H -
rated voltage. 40.0 *1
Leak Induc- This parameter is automati-
tance cally set during autotuning.
Motor 2
rated capac- Set the rated output of the
motor in units of 0.01 kW. 0.40 to 0.40
E4-07 ity No A A A 327H -
This parameter is automati- 650.00 *1
Mtr Rated cally set during autotuning.
Power
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200-V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The values for a 200-V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. If a multi-function input is set for motor 2 (H1-@@ = 16), the factory setting will depend upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200-V class
Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.

5-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Option Parameters: F
The following settings are made with the option parameters (F parameters): Settings for Option Cards

nPG Option Setup: F1

Parameters for the PG Speed Control Card are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
PG constant Sets the number of PG (pulse
generator or encoder) pulses. 0 to 600
F1-01 No No Q No 380H 6-143
PG Pulses/ Sets the number of pulses 60000 (1024)*
Rev per motor revolution.
Operation Sets the PG disconnection
selection at stopping method.
PG open 0: Ramp to stop
circuit (Deceleration stop using
(PGO) Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency
F1-02 0 to 3 1 No No A No 381H 6-143
stop using the
deceleration time in C1-
PG Fdbk 09.)
Loss Sel 3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
Operation Sets the stopping method
selection at when an overspeed (OS)
overspeed fault occurs.
(OS) 0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
1: Coast to stop
F1-03 2: Fast stop (Emergency 0 to 3 1 No No A No 382H 6-143
stop using the
PG Over- deceleration time in C1-
speed Sel 09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
* Factory setting for (-E) models is 1024.

5-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Change Control Methods

Param-
Setting Factory during V/f
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Operation Sets the stopping method
selection at when a speed deviation
deviation (DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C1-
02.)
F1-04 1: Coast to stop 0 to 3 3 No No A No 383H 6-143
PG Devia- 2: Fast stop (Emergency
tion Sel stop using the
deceleration time in C1-
09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV
is displayed and
operation continued.)

PG rotation 0: Phase A leads with

forward run command.
(Phase B leads with
reverse run command.)
F1-05 PG Rota- 0 or 1 0 No No A No 384H 6-143
1: Phase B leads with
tion Sel forward run command.
(Phase A leads with
reverse run command.)
PG division Sets the division ratio for the
rate (PG PG Speed Control Card
pulse moni- pulse output.
tor) Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
F1-06 1 to
F1-06 1 No No A No 385H 6-144
n m 132
PG Output This parameter is only effec-
Ratio tive when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio
settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤
1.
Integral Sets integral control during
value during acceleration/deceleration to
accel/decel either enabled or disabled.
enable/dis- 0: Disabled (The integral
able function isn't used while
F1-07 accelerating or 0 or 1 0 No No A No 386H 6-144
decelerating; it is used at
PG Ramp constant speeds.)
PI/I Sel 1: Enabled (The integral
function is used at all
times.)

5-39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Overspeed
detection Sets the overspeed detection
0 to
F1-08 level method. 115% No No A No 387H 6-144
120
PG Over- Frequencies above that set
spd Level for F1-08 (set as a percent-
age of the maximum output
Overspeed frequency) that continue to
detection exceed this frequency for the
0.0 to
F1-09 delay time time set in F1-09 are 1.0 s No No A No 388H 6-144
2.0
PG Over- detected as overspeed faults.
spd Time

Excessive
speed devia-
tion detec-
tion level
Sets the speed deviation
F1-10 detection method. 0 to 50 10% No No A No 389H 6-144
Any speed deviation above
PG Deviate the F1-10 set level (set as a
Level percentage of the maximum
output frequency) that con-
tinues for the time set in F1-
Excessive
11 is detected as a speed
speed devia-
deviation.
tion detec-
Speed deviation is the differ-
tion delay
ence between actual motor
time
F1-11 speed and the reference com- 0.0 to 0.5 s No No A No 38AH 6-144
mand speed. 10.0

PG Deviate
Time

Number of
PG gear
teeth 1
F1-12 Sets the number of teeth on 0 No No A No 38BH 6-144
the gears if there are gears
PG# Gear between the PG and the
Teeth1 motor.
0 to
Input pulses from PG 60 F1-13
1000
Number of F1-01 F1-12
PG gear A gear ratio of 1 will be used
teeth 2 if either of these parameters
F1-13 is set to 0. 0 No No A No 38CH 6-144

PG# Gear
Teeth2

PG open-
circuit Used to set the PG discon-
detection nection detection time. PGO
0.0 to
F1-14 time will be detected if the detec- 2.0 s No No A No 38DH 6-144
10.0
tion time continues beyond
PGO Detect the set time.
Time

5-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nAnalog Monitor Cards: F4

Parameters for the Analog Monitor Card are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG

Channel 1
monitor
selection

F4-01 1 to 40 2 No A* A* A* 391H 6-73

AO Ch1
Select

Effective when the Analog

Monitor Card is used.
Channel 1
Monitor selection:
gain
Set the number of the moni-
tor item to be output. (U1- 0.00 to
F4-02 @@) 2.50
1.00 Yes A* A* A* 392H 6-73
Gain:
AO Ch1 Set the multiple of 10 V for
Gain outputting monitor items.
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40
cannot be set. 17, 23, 25, 29,
30, 31, 35 are not used.
Channel 2 When the AO-12 Analog
monitor Monitor Card is used, out-
selection puts of ± 10 V are possible.
To output ± 10 V, set F4-07
F4-03 or F4-08 to 1. When the AO- 1 to 40 3 No A* A* A* 393H 6-73
08 Analog Monitor Card is
used, only outputs of 0 to
AO Ch2
+10 V are possible.
Select
A meter calibration function
is available.

Channel 2
gain

0.00 to
F4-04
2.50
0.50 Yes A* A* A* 394H 6-73

AO Ch2
Gain

Channel 1
output mon- Sets the channel 1 item bias
-10.0 to
F4-05 itor bias to 100%/10 V when the Ana- 0.0 Yes A* A* A* 395H 6-73
10.0
AO Ch1 log Monitor Card is used.
Bias

5-41
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Channel 2
output mon- Sets the channel 2 item bias
-10.0 to
F4-06 itor bias to 100%/10 V when the Ana- 0.0 Yes A* A* A* 396H 6-73
10.0
AO Ch2 log Monitor Card is used.
Bias
Analog out-
put signal
level for 0: 0 to 10 V
F4-07 channel 1
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1 0 No A* A* A* 397H -

AO Opt
Level Ch1
Analog out-
put signal
level for 0: 0 to 10 V
F4-08 channel 2
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1 0 No A* A* A* 398H 6-73

AO Opt
Level Ch2
* Analog Monitor Cards are not available for (-E) models. Use the AM or FM terminal as a substitute.

5-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nNot Used: F5
Parameters for the Digital Output Card are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Not used
F5-01 DO Ch1 - 0 No A A A 399H -
Select
Not used
F5-02 DO Ch2 - 1 No A A A 39AH -
Select
Not used
F5-03 DO Ch3 - 2 No A A A 39BH -
Select
Not used
F5-04 DO Ch4 - 4 No A A A 39CH -
Select
Not used
F5-05 DO Ch5 Do not set. - 6 No A A A 39DH -
Select
Not used
F5-06 DO Ch6 - 37 No A A A 39EH -
Select
Not used
F5-07 DO Ch7 - 0F No A A A 39FH -
Select
Not used
F5-08 DO Ch8 - 0F No A A A 3A0H -
Select
Not used
F5-09 DO-08 - 0 No A A A 3A1H -
Selection

5-43
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nCommunications Option Cards: F6
Parameters for a Communications Option Card (DeviceNet) are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
DeviceNet 0: Decelerates to a stop
fault opera- using C1-02 deceleration
tion selec- time/fault detection
tion 1: Coast to a stop/fault
detection
F6-01 2: Decelerates to stop using 0 to 3 1 No A A A 3A2H -

Comm Bus C1-09 deceleration time/

Flt Sel fault detection
3: Continues operating/
alarm detection*1
Communi-
cations
external 0: Fault detection during
fault input power ON
F6-02 detection 1: Fault detected during 0 or 1 0 No A A A 3A3H -
method running only (when RUN
selection commands are input)
EF0 Detec-
tion
Communi- 0: Decelerates to a stop
cations using C1-02 deceleration
external time/fault detection
fault input 1: Coast to a stop/fault
operation detection
F6-03 selection 2: Decelerates to a stop 0 to 3 1 No A A A 3A4H -
using C1-09 deceleration
EF0 Fault time/fault detection
Action 3: Continues operating/
alarm detection*1
Not used
F6-04 Trace Sam- Do not set. - 0 No A A A 3A5H -
ple Tim
Display unit
selection for
current 0: Amperes
F6-05 monitor
1: 100%/8192
0 or 1 0 No A*2 A*2 A*2 3A6H -

Current
Unit Sel
Note For details on Communications Option Cards, refer to the manual for each Option Card (DeviceNet Communications Card/3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN (Cat.
No. I525-E1)).
* 1. If F6-01 or F6-03 is set to 3, the Inverter will continue operating. Be sure to install a limit switch or an emergency stop switch as a safety precaution.
* 2. For (-E) models.

5-44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

K Terminal Function Parameters: H

The following settings are made with the terminal function parameters (H parameters): Settings for external
terminal functions.

nMulti-function Digital Inputs: H1

Parameters for multi-function digital inputs are shown in the following tables.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Terminal S3
function
Multi-function contact input
H1-01 selection 0 to 68 24 No A A A 400H -
1
Terminal S3
Sel
Terminal S4
function
Multi-function contact input
H1-02 selection 0 to 68 14 No A A A 401H -
2
Terminal S4
Sel
Terminal S5
function
Multi-function contact input
H1-03 selection 0 to 68 3 (0)* No A A A 402H -
3
Terminal S5
Sel
Terminal S6
function
Multi-function contact input
H1-04 selection 0 to 68 4 (3)* No A A A 403H -
4
Terminal S6
Sel
Terminal S7
function
Multi-function contact input
H1-05 selection 0 to 68 6 (4)* No A A A 404H -
5
Terminal S7
Sel
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.

Multi-function Digital Input Functions

Control Methods
Set-
V/f Open
ting Function Page
V/f with Loop
Value Vec-
PG tor

0 3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Direction) Yes Yes Yes 6-13

1 Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Parameter setting) Yes Yes Yes 6-62
2 Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card) Yes Yes Yes 6-70
Multi-step speed reference 1
3 Yes Yes Yes 6-10
When H3-09 is set to 0, this function works as the master/auxiliary speed switch.
4 Multi-step speed reference 2 Yes Yes Yes 6-10

5-45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Control Methods
Set-
V/f Open
ting Function Page
V/f with Loop
Value Vec-
PG tor

5 Multi-step speed reference 3 Yes Yes Yes 6-10

6 Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference) Yes Yes Yes 6-10
7 Accel/decel time 1 Yes Yes Yes 6-20
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) Yes Yes Yes 6-63
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) Yes Yes Yes 6-63
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, fre-
A Yes Yes Yes 6-64
quency on hold)
B OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed) Yes Yes Yes -
C Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable) Yes Yes Yes -
No V/f control with PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f con-
D No Yes No -
trol)
E Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled) No Yes No -
F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used) - - - -
10 Up command (Always set with the down command) Yes Yes Yes 6-65
11 Down command (Always set with the up command) Yes Yes Yes 6-65
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes 6-70
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes 6-70
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON) Yes Yes Yes 7-2
Deceleration stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
15 Yes Yes Yes 6-18
time set in C1-09 when ON.)
16 Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection) Yes Yes Yes -
Deceleration stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
17 Yes Yes Yes 6-18
time set in C1-09 when OFF)
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function 6-
18 Yes Yes Yes
outputs are set in H1-oo and H2-oo.) 116
6-
19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) Yes Yes Yes
120
1A Accel/Decel time 2 Yes Yes Yes 6-20
Parameters write enable (ON: All parameters can be written-in. OFF: All parame-
1B Yes Yes Yes 6-141
ters other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency refer-
1C Yes Yes Yes 6-68
ence.)
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency
1D Yes Yes Yes 6-68
reference.)
1E Analog frequency reference sample/hold Yes Yes Yes 6-69
20 to External fault (Desired settings possible)
Yes Yes Yes 6-71
2F Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped dur- 6-
30 Yes Yes Yes
ing PID control) 120
6-
31 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold) Yes Yes Yes
120
32 Multi-step speed command 4 Yes Yes Yes -

5-46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Control Methods
Set-
V/f Open
ting Function Page
V/f with Loop
Value Vec-
PG tor

6-
34 PID soft starter Yes Yes Yes
120
6-
35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes
120
60 DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking) Yes Yes Yes 6-17
61 External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) Yes No Yes 6-54
62 External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency) Yes No Yes 6-54
63 Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-01 and d6-02) Yes Yes No -
64 External speed search command 3 Yes Yes Yes -
65 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NC contact) Yes Yes Yes -
66 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) Yes Yes Yes -
67 Communications test mode Yes Yes Yes 6-90
68 High-slip braking (HSB) Yes Yes No -

69* JOG 2 (for (-E) models) Yes Yes Yes -

6A * Drive Enable (for (-E) models) Yes Yes Yes -

* The setting values 69 and 6A can be set for (-E) models.

n Multi-function Digital Outputs: H2

Parameters for multi-function digital outputs are shown in the following tables.
Name Change Control Methods
Parameter Num- Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
ber Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Terminal
M1-M2
Select Multi-function
H2-01 0 to 37 0 No A A A 40BH -
output
Term M1-
M2 Sel
Terminal P1
function
3G3RV select (open
(Asia) collector)

Term P1 Sel
Terminal Multi-function
H2-02 0 to 37 1 No A A A 40CH -
M3-M4 output 1

3G3RV function
(-E) select (con-
(Europe) tact)

Term M3-
M4 Sel

5-47
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Parameter Num- Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
ber Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Terminal P2
function
3G3RV select (con-
(Asia) tact)

Term P2 Sel
Terminal Multi-function
H2-03 0 to 37 2 No A A A 40DH -
M5-M6 output 2

3G3RV function
(-E) select (con-
(Europe) tact)

Term M5-
M6 Sel

Multi-function Digital Output Functions

Control Methods
Set-
V/f Open
ting Function loop Page
V/f with Vec-
Value
PG tor

0 During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output) Yes Yes Yes -
1 Zero-speed Yes Yes Yes -
2 Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.) Yes Yes Yes -
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and dur-
3 Yes Yes Yes -
ing frequency agree)
Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, L4-02
4 Yes Yes Yes -
used)
Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output fre-
5 Yes Yes Yes -
quency ≤ -L4-01, L4-02 used)
Inverter operation ready
6 Yes Yes Yes -
READY: After initialization, no faults
7 During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection Yes Yes Yes -
8 During baseblock (ON: during baseblock) Yes Yes Yes -
9 Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator) Yes Yes Yes -
A Run command selection status (ON: Run command from Operator) Yes Yes Yes -
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque
B Yes Yes Yes 6-44
detection at ON)
C Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05) Yes Yes Yes 6-58
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault) Yes Yes Yes 6-60
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and
E Yes Yes Yes -
CPF01 has occurred.) (See Table 7.1 for faults.)
F Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.) - - - -
10 Alarm (ON: Alarm displayed) (See Table 7.2 for alarms.) Yes Yes Yes -
11 Fault reset command active Yes Yes Yes -
6-
12 Timer function output Yes Yes Yes
116
13 Frequency agree 2 (L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes -

5-48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Control Methods
Set-
V/f Open
ting Function loop Page
V/f with Vec-
Value
PG tor

Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and dur-
14 Yes Yes Yes -
ing frequency agree)
15 Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤L4-03, L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes -
16 Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥L4-03, L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes -
17 Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes 6-44
18 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON) Yes Yes Yes 6-44
19 Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes 6-44
1A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run) Yes Yes Yes -
1B During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock) Yes Yes Yes -
1C Motor selection (Motor 2 selected) Yes Yes Yes -
1D Not used (Set when the terminals are not used) Yes Yes Yes -
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) Yes Yes Yes 6-58
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detec-
1F Yes Yes Yes 6-47
tion level)
20 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting) Yes Yes Yes -
30 During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit) No No Yes -
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, ini-
37 Yes Yes Yes -
tial excitation, operation stop)

nAnalog Inputs: H3
Parameters for analog inputs are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Signal
select termi- 0: Voltage limit enabled
nal A1 (Below 0 V is 0 V)
H3-01 (voltage) 1: Voltage limit disabled 0 or 1 0 No A* A* A* 410H -
The setting value 1 can be
Term A1 set for (-E) models.
Lvl Sel
Gain (termi- Sets the frequency when 10
nal A1) V is input, as a percentage of 0.0 to
H3-02 100.0% Yes A A A 411H 6-27
Terminal the maximum output fre- 1000.0
A1 Gain quency.

Bias (termi-
nal A1) Sets the frequency when 0 V -100.0
H3-03 is input, as a percentage of to 0.0% Yes A A A 412H 6-27
Terminal the maximum frequency. +100.0
A1 Bias

5-49
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Multi-func- 0: Limit negative frequency
tion analog settings for gain and bias
input termi- settings to 0.
nal A2 sig- 1: Do not limit negative
nal level frequency settings for
selection gain and bias settings to 0
H3-08 0 to 2 2 No A A A 417H 6-27
(i.e., allow reverse
operation).
Term A2 2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Signal A switch for current or volt-
age input is located on the
terminal circuit board.
Multi-func-
tion analog
input termi-
nal A2 func- Select multi-function analog
H3-09 tion input function for terminal 0 to 1F 0 No A A A 418H 6-27
selection A2. Refer to the next table.

Terminal
A2 Sel

Gain (termi- Sets the input gain (level)

nal A2) when terminal 14 is 10 V (20
mA). 0.0 to
H3-10 100.0% Yes A A A 419H 6-27
Terminal Set according to the 100% 1000.0
A2 Gain value for the function set for
H3-09.

Bias (termi- Sets the input gain (level)

nal A2) when terminal 14 is 0 V (4
-100.0
mA).
H3-11 to 0.0% Yes A A A 41AH 6-27
Terminal Set according to the 100%
+100.0
A2 Bias value for the function set for
H3-09.
Analog Sets primary delay filter time
input filter constant in seconds for the
time con- two analog input terminal 0.00 to 0.00
H3-12 stant No A A A 41BH 6-27
(A1 and A2). 2.00 s
Filter Avg Effective for noise control
Time etc.

Terminal 0: Use terminal A1 analog

A1/A2 input as main speed
switching frequency reference.
1: Use terminal A2 analog
H3-13 0 or 1 0 No A A A 41CH -
input as main speed
TA1/A2 frequency reference.
Select Effective when H3-09 is set
to 2.
* For (-E) models.

5-50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

H3-09 Settings
Control Methods
Set-
V/f Open
ting Function Contents (100%) +1/
V/f with Loop
Value Vec-
PG tor

0 Add to terminal A1 Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes 6-28

Frequency reference (voltage) command
1 Frequency gain Yes Yes Yes 6-28
value
Auxiliary frequency reference (2nd
2 Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes 6-28
step analog)
4 Voltage bias Motor rated voltage (E1-05) Yes Yes No -
Accel/decel change (reduction Set acceleration and deceleration times (C1-
5 Yes Yes Yes 6-21
coefficient) 01 to C1-08)
6 DC injection braking current Inverter rated output current Yes Yes Yes 6-18
Overtorque/undertorque detection Motor rated torque for vector control
7 Yes Yes Yes 6-46
level Inverter rated output current for V/f control
8 Stall prevention level during run Inverter rated output current Yes Yes No 6-43
Frequency reference lower limit
9 Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes 6-33
level
A Jump frequency Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes 6-30
6-
B PID feedback Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes
120
6-
C PID target value Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes
120
E Motor temperature input 10 V = 100% Yes Yes Yes 6-51
10 Positive torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes 6-40
11 Negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes 6-40
12 Regenerative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes 6-40
15 Positive/negative torque limit Motor's rated torque No No Yes 6-40
1F Analog input not used. - Yes Yes Yes
13, 14,
Not used - - - - -
16 to 1F

5-51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nMulti-function Analog Outputs: H4
Parameters for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Monitor Sets the number of the moni-
selection tor item to be output (U1-
(terminal @@) from terminal FM.
H4-01 FM) 1 to 40 2 No A A A 41DH 6-72
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40
Terminal cannot be set. 17, 23, 25, 29,
FM Sel 30, 31, 35 are not used.

Gain (termi- Sets the multi-function ana-

nal FM) log output 1 voltage level 0.00 to
gain. 2.50 1.00
Sets whether the monitor (0.0 to (100.0%) 4-8
H4-02 Yes Q Q Q 41EH
Terminal item output will be output in 1000.0) * 6-72
FM Gain multiples of 10 V. *
The maximum output from
the terminal is 10 V.
Bias (termi- Sets the multi-function ana-
nal FM) log output 1 voltage level -10.0 to
bias. +10.0
Sets output characteristic up/ (-110.0
H4-03 to 0.0% Yes A A A 41FH 4-8
Terminal down parallel movement as a
FM Bias percentage of 10 V. +110.0)
The maximum output from *
the terminal is 10 V.
Monitor Sets the number of the moni-
selection tor item to be output (U1-
(terminal @@) from terminal AM. 4-8
H4-04 AM) 1 to 40 3 No A A A 420H
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 6-72
Terminal cannot be set. 17, 23, 25, 29,
AM Sel 30, 31, 35 are not used.

Gain (termi- Set the voltage level gain for

nal AM) multi-function analog out- 0.00 to
put 2. 2.50
Set the number of multiples (0.0 to 0.50 4-8
H4-05 * Yes Q Q Q 421H
Terminal of 10 V to be output as the 1000.0) (50.0%) 6-72
AM Gain 100% output for the monitor *
items. The maximum output
from the terminal is 10 V.
Bias (termi- Sets the multi-function ana-
nal AM) log output 2 voltage level -10.0 to
bias. +10.0
Sets output characteristic up/ (-110.0
H4-06 to 0.0% Yes A A A 422H 6-72
Terminal down parallel movement as a
AM Bias percentage of 10 V. +110.0)
The maximum output from *
the terminal is 10 V.
Analog out- Sets the signal output level
put 1 signal for multi-function output 1
level selec- (terminal FM) 0 or 1
H4-07 tion (0 to 2) 0 No A A A 423H 6-72
0: 0 to +10 V output *
AO Level 1: 0 to ±10 V output
Select1 (2: 4 to 20 mA)*

5-52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Analog out- Sets the signal output level
put 2 signal for multi-function output 2
level selec- (terminal AM) 0 or 1
H4-08 tion (0 to 2) 0 No A A A 424H 6-72
0: 0 to +10 V output *
AO Level 1: 0 to ±10 V output
Select2 (2: 4 to 20 mA)*

* For (-E) models. The shunt connector CN15 must be set. For details, refer to page 2-43.

nRS-422A/485 Communications: H5
Parameters for RS-422A/485 communications are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Slave
address Set the Inverter's slave 0 to 20
H5-01 1F No A A A 425H 6-76
Serial address. *
Comm Adr
Communi- Set the baud rate for 6CN
cation speed RS-422A/485 communica-
selection tions.
0: 1200 bps
H5-02 0 to 4 3 No A A A 426H 6-76
1: 2400 bps
Serial Baud 2: 4800 bps
Rate 3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Communi- Set the parity for 6CN RS-
cation parity 422A/485 communications.
H5-03 selection 0: No parity 0 to 2 0 No A A A 427H 6-76
Serial Com 1: Even parity
Sel 2: Odd parity

Stopping Set the stopping method for

method RS-422A/485 communica-
after com- tions error.
munication 0: Deceleration to stop
error using deceleration time in
H5-04 C1-02 0 to 3 3 No A A A 428H 6-76
1: Coast to stop
Serial Fault 2: Emergency stop using
Sel deceleration time in C1-
09
3: Continue operation
Communi- Set whether or not a commu-
cation error nications timeout is to be
detection detected as a communica-
H5-05 selection 0 or 1 1 No A A A 429H 6-76
tions error (CE).
Serial Flt 0: Do not detect.
Dtct 1: Detect

5-53
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Send wait Set the time from the
time Inverter receiving data to
H5-06 5 to 65 5 ms No A A A 42AH 6-76
Transmit when the Inverter starts to
WaitTIM send.

RTS con- Select to enable or disable

trol ON/ RTS control.
OFF 0: Disabled (RTS is always
H5-07 0 or 1 1 No A A A 42BH 6-76
ON)
RTS Con- 1: Enabled (RTS turns ON
trol Sel only when sending)
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS-422A/485 communications.

nPulse Train I/O: H6

Parameters for pulse I/O are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Pulse train
input func-
tion selec- 0: Frequency reference 6-6
H6-01 tion 1: PID feedback value 0 to 2 0 No A A A 42CH 6-30
2: PID target value 6-119
Pulse Input
Sel
Pulse train
input scal- Set the number of pulses in
1000 to 1440 6-6
H6-02 ing hertz, taking the reference to Yes A A A 42DH
32000 Hz 6-30
Pulse In be 100%.
Scaling
Pulse train
input gain Set the input gain level as a
0.0 to
H6-03 percent when the pulse train 100.0% Yes A A A 42EH 6-30
Pulse Input 1000.0
set in H6-02 is input.
Gain
Pulse train
input bias -100.0
Set the input bias when the
H6-04 to 0.0% Yes A A A 42FH 6-30
Pulse Input pulse train is 0.
100.0
Bias
Pulse train
input filter Set the pulse train input pri-
0.00 to 0.10
H6-05 time mary delay filter time con- Yes A A A 430H 6-30
2.00 s
Pulse In Fil- stant in seconds.
ter
Pulse train Select the pulse train moni-
monitor tor output items (value of the
1, 2, 5,
selection oo part of U1-oo).
H6-06 20, 24, 2 Yes A A A 431H 6-74
There are two types of moni-
Pulse Moni 36
tor items: Speed-related
Sel items and PID-related items.

5-54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Pulse train Set the number of pulses out-
monitor put when speed is 100% in
scaling hertz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0 to 1440
H6-07 Yes A A A 432H 6-74
0, to make the pulse train 32000 Hz
Pulse Moni monitor output synchro-
Scale nously to the output fre-
quency.

5-55
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Protection Function Parameters: L
The following settings are made with the protection function parameters (L parameters): Motor selection func-
tion, power loss ridethrough function, stall prevention function, frequency detection, torque limits, and hard-
ware protection.

nMotor Overload: L1
Parameters for motor overloads are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Sets whether the motor over-
Motor pro- load function is enabled or
tection disabled at electric thermal
selection overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection

In some applications when 4-8

L1-01 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 480H
the Inverter power supply is 6-47
turned off, the thermal value
MOL Fault is reset, so even if this
Select parameter is set to 1,
protection may not be
effective.
When several motors are
connected to one Inverter,
set to 0 and ensure that each
motor is installed with a pro-
tection device.
Motor pro- Sets the electric thermal
tection time detection time in seconds.
constant Usually setting is not neces-
sary. 0.1 to
The factory setting is 150% 1.0 min
5.0
L1-02 overload for one minute. (8.0 No A A A 481H 6-47
(0.1 to
MOL Time When the motor's overload 20.0)
min)
Const resistance is known, also set
the overload resistance pro-
tection time for when the
motor is hot started.

5-56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Alarm oper- Set H3-09 to E and select the
ation selec- operation when the input
tion during motor temperature (ther-
motor over- mistor) input exceeds the
heating alarm detection level
(1.17 V).
L1-03 0: Decelerate to stop 0 to 3 3 No A A A 482H 6-50
1: Coast to stop
Mtr OH 2: Emergency stop using the
Alarm Sel deceleration time in C1-
09.
3: Continue operation (H3
on the Operator flashes).
Motor over- Set H3-09 to E and select the
heating operation when the motor
operation temperature (thermistor)
selection input exceeds the operation
detection level (2.34 V).
L1-04 0 to 2 1 No A A A 483H 6-50
0: Decelerate to stop
Mtr OH 1: Coast to stop
Fault Sel 2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-
09.
Motor tem-
perature
input filter Set H3-09 to E and set the
primary delay time constant 0.00 to
L1-05 time con- 0.20 s No A A A 484H 6-50
stant for motor temperature (ther- 10.00
mistor) inputs in seconds.
Mtr Temp
Filter

nPower Loss Ridethrough: L2

Parameters for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Momentary 0: Disabled (main circuit
power loss undervoltage (UV)
detection detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when
the power returns within
the time for L2-02. When
L2-02 is exceeded, main
L2-01 circuit undervoltage 0 to 2 0 No A A A 485H 6-52
PwrL Selec- detection.)
tion 2: Enabled while CPU is
operating. (Restarts when
power returns during
control operations. Does
not detect main circuit
undervoltage.)

5-57
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Momentary
power loss Ridethrough time, when
ridethru Momentary Power Loss 0.1 s
L2-02 time 0 to 2.0 No A A A 486H 6-52
Selection (L2-01) is set to 1, *1
PwrL Ride- in units of seconds.
thru t
Sets the Inverter's minimum
Min. base-
baseblock time in units of
block time
one second, when the
Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approxi-
mately 0.7 times the motor 0.1 to 0.1 s 6-52
L2-03 No A A A 487H
secondary circuit time con- 5.0 *1 6-53
PwrL Base- stant.
block t When an overcurrent or
overvoltage occurs when
starting a speed search or DC
injection braking, increase
the set values.
Voltage Sets the time required to
recovery return the Inverter output
time voltage to normal voltage at
the completion of a speed
0.0 to 0.3 s 6-52
L2-04 search, in units of one sec- No A A A 488H
5.0 *1 6-53
PwrL V/F ond.
Ramp t Sets the time required to
recover from 0 V to the max-
imum voltage.
Undervolt- Sets the main circuit under-
age detec- voltage (UV) detection level
tion level (main circuit DC voltage) in
V units.
150 to
Usually setting is not neces- 190 V
L2-05 210 No A A A 489H 6-52
sary. *2
PUV Det *2
Insert an AC reactor in the
Level Inverter input side to lower
the main circuit undervolt-
age detection level.
KEB decel- Sets in seconds the time
eration time required to decelerate from
the speed where the deceler- 0.0 to
L2-06 0.0 s No A A A 48AH -
KEB Fre- ation at momentary power 200.0
quency loss command (KEB) is
input to zero speed.
Momentary
recovery Set in seconds the time to
time accelerate to the set speed 0.0 to 0s
L2-07 No A A A 48BH -
UV after recovery from a 25.5 *3
RETURN momentary power loss.
TIME

5-58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Frequency Sets as a percent the about to
reduction reduce the output frequency
gain at KEB at the beginning of decelera-
start tion at momentary power 0 to
L2-08 100 No A A A 48CH -
loss (KEB). 300
KEB Decel Reduction = slip frequency
Time before KEB operation × L2-
08 × 2
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200-V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200-V class Inverter. Value for a 400-V class Inverter is double.
* 3. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).

nStall Prevention: L3
Parameters for the stall prevention function are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Stall pre- 0: Disabled (Acceleration as
vention set. With a heavy load,
selection the motor may stall.)
during accel 1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level
is exceeded. Acceleration
starts again when the
L3-01 current is returned.) 0 to 2 1 No A A A 48FH 6-23
2: Intelligent acceleration
StallP Accel mode (Using the L3-02
Sel level as a basis,
acceleration is
automatically adjusted.
Set acceleration time is
disregarded.)
Effective when L3-01 is set
Stall pre-
vention to 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of
level during
accel Inverter rated current. 0 to 120%
L3-02 No A A A 490H 6-23
Usually setting is not neces- 200 *
StallP Accel sary. The factory setting
Lvl reduces the set values when
the motor stalls.
Stall pre- Sets the lower limit for stall
vention prevention during accelera-
limit during tion, as a percentage of the
accel Inverter rated current, when 0 to
L3-03 50% No A A A 491H 6-23
operation is in the frequency 100
StallP CHP range above E1-06.
Lvl Usually setting is not neces-
sary.

5-59
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
0: Disabled (Deceleration as
Stall pre-
vention set. If deceleration time is
selection too short, a main circuit
during decelovervoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main
circuit voltage exceeds
the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts
when voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration
mode (Deceleration rate 4-8
L3-04 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q 492H
is automatically adjusted 6-25
StallP Decel so that in Inverter can
Sel decelerate in the shortest
possible time. Set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option
(Braking Resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit, Braking Unit)
is used, always set to 0 or 3.
Stall pre- 0: Disabled (Runs as set.
vention With a heavy load, the
selection motor may stall.)
during run- 1: Deceleration time 1 (the
ning deceleration time for the
L3-05 stall prevention function 0 to 2 1 No A A No 493H 6-42
is C1-02.)
StallP Run 2: Deceleration time 2 (the
Sel deceleration time for the
stall prevention function
is C1-04.)
Stall pre- Effective when L3-05 is 1 or
vention 2.
level during Set as a percentage of the
running Inverter rated current.
30 to 120%
L3-06 Usually setting is not neces- No A A No 494H 6-42
200 *
sary.
StallP Run The factory setting reduces
Level the set values when the
motor stalls.
* The initial value when C6-01 is set to 1 is given. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value will be 150%.

5-60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nReference Detection: L4
Parameters for the reference detection function are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Speed Effective when “Desired fre-
agreement quency (ref/setting) agree
detection 1,” “Frequency detection 1,”
level or “Frequency detection 2” 0.0 to
L4-01 0.0 Hz No A A A 499H -
is set for a multi-function 400.0
Spd Agree output.
Level Frequencies to be detected
are set in Hz units.
Speed Effective when “Frequency
agreement (speed) agree 1,” “Desired
detection frequency (speed) agree 1,”
width or “Frequency (FOUT) 0.0 to
L4-02 2.0 Hz No A A A 49AH -
detection 1,” is set for a 20.0
Spd Agree multi-function output.
Width Sets the frequency detection
width in Hz units.
Speed Effective when “Desired fre-
agreement quency (speed) agree 2,”
detection “Desired frequency (speed)
level (+/-) agree 1” “Frequency
-400.0
(FOUT) detection 3,” or
L4-03 to 0.0 Hz No A A A 49BH -
“Frequency (FOUT) detec-
+400.0
Spd Agree tion 4” is set for a multi-
Lvl+- function output.
Frequency detection width is
set in Hz units.
Speed Effective when “Frequency
agreement (speed) agree 2,” “Desired
detection frequency (speed) agree 1,”
width (+/-) or “Frequency detection 4" 0.0 to
L4-04 2.0 Hz No A A A 49CH -
is set for a multi-function 20.0
Spd Agree output.
Width+- Frequency detection width is
set in Hz units.
Operation 0: Stop (Operation follows
when fre- the frequency reference.)
quency ref- 1: Continue speed opera-
erence is tion according to setting
lost of L4-06. (At 80% of
speed before the fre-
L4-05 0 or 1 0 No A A A 49DH 6-58
quency reference was
lost)
Ref Loss Frequency reference is lost:
Sel Frequency reference
dropped over 90% in 400
ms.
Frequency
reference Enables operation selection
for loss of when frequency reference is
0.0 to
L4-06 frequency lost and operation at the fol-
100.0%
80.0 No A* A* A* 4C2H -
reference lowing speed:
(Speed prior to loss) x L4-06
Fref at Floss
* For (-E) models only. Otherwise always 80.0%.

5-61
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nFault Restart: L5
Parameters for restarting faults are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Number of Sets the number of auto
auto restart restart attempts.
attempts Automatically restarts after a
L5-01 0 to 10 0 No A A A 49EH 6-59
fault and conducts a speed
Num of search from the run fre-
Restarts quency.
Auto restart Sets whether a fault contact
operation output is activated during
selection fault restart.
L5-02 0: Not output (Fault contact 0 or 1 0 No A A A 49FH 6-59
is not activated.)
Restart Sel 1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)

5-62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nTorque Detection: L6
Parameters for the torque detection function are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection
only with speed agree-
ment; operation continues
after overtorque
(warning).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during
Torque operation; operation
detection continues after
selection 1 overtorque (warning).
3: Overtorque detection
only with speed agree-
ment; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
4: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
L6-01 0 to 8 0 No A A A 4A1H 6-44
operation).
5: Undertorque detection
only with speed agree-
ment; operation continues
after overtorque
(warning).
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues after
Torq Det 1 overtorque (warning).
Sel 7: Undertorque detection
only with speed agree-
ment; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
8: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).

Torque Open loop vector control:

detection Motor rated torque is set as
0 to
L6-02 level 1 100%. 150% No A A A 4A2H 6-44
300
Torq Det 1 V/f control: Inverter rated
Lvl current is set as 100%.

Torque
detection Sets the overtorque/under-
0.0 to
L6-03 time 1 torque detection time in 1- 0.1 s No A A A 4A3H 6-44
10.0
Torq Det 1 second units.
Time

5-63
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Torque
detection
L6-04 selection 2 0 to 8 0 No A A A 4A4H 6-44
Torq Det 2
Sel
Torque Output of torque detection 1
detection is enabled by setting 17 for
0 to
L6-05 level 2 H2-oo and output of torque 150% No A A A 4A5H 6-44
300
Torq Det 2 detection 1 is enabled by set-
Lvl ting 18 or 18 for H2-oo.

Torque
detection
0.0 to
L6-06 time 2 0.1 s No A A A 4A6H 6-44
10.0
Torq Det 2
Time

5-64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nTorque Limits: L7
Parameters for torque limits are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
LCD Description Register Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
ber Display Loop
tion PG
Forward
drive
torque
0 to
L7-01 limit 200% No No No A 4A7H 6-40
300
Torq Limit
Fwd

Reverse
drive
torque Sets the torque limit value as a per-
0 to
L7-02 limit centage of the motor rated torque. 200% No No No A 4A8H 6-40
Four individual regions can be set. 300
Torq Limit
Rev Output torque
Positive torque

Forward No. of
Regenerative motor
regenera- Reverse state rotations
tive torque Regenerative Forward
state
0 to
L7-03 limit 200% No No No A 4A9H 6-40
Negative torque 300
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn

Reverse
regenera-
tive torque
0 to
L7-04 limit 200% No No No A 4AAH 6-40
300
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn

nHardware Protection: L8
Parameters for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
Setting Factory during V/f
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Protect
selection for 0: Disabled (no overheating
internal DB protection)
L8-01 resistor 0 or 1 0 No A A A 4ADH 6-60
1: Enabled (overheating
DB Resis- protection)
tor Prot
Overheat Sets the detection tempera-
pre-alarm ture for the Inverter overheat
level detection pre-alarm in °C. 50 to
L8-02 95 °C* No A A A 4AEH 6-61
The pre-alarm detects when 130
OH Pre- the cooling fin temperature
Alarm Lvl reaches the set value.

5-65
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Operation Sets the operation for when
selection the Inverter overheat pre-
after over- alarm goes ON.
heat pre- 0: Decelerate to stop in
alarm deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
L8-03 2: Fast stop in fast-stop time 0 to 3 3 No A A A 4AFH 6-61
C1-09.
OH Pre- 3: Continue operation
Alarm Sel (Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in set-
ting 0 to 2 and a minor fault
will be given in setting 3.
Input open- 0: Disabled
phase pro- 1: Enabled (Detects if input
tection current open-phase, 0
L8-05 selection power supply voltage 0 or 1 No A A A 4B1H -
imbalance or main circuit (1)*
Ph Loss In electrostatic capacitor
Sel deterioration occurs.)
Output 0: Disabled
open-phase1: Enabled (Output open-
protection phase detected at less
selection than 5% of Inverter rated
current.)
When applied motor capac- 0
L8-07 0 or 1 No A A A 4B3H -
ity is small for Inverter
Ph Loss Out capacity, output open-phase
Sel may be detected inadvert-
ently or open-phase may not
be detected. In this case, set
to 0.
Ground pro-
tection
0:Disabled
L8-09 selection 0 or 1 1 No A A A 4B5H -
1:Enabled
Ground
Fault Sel
Cooling fan Set the ON/OFF control for
control the cooling fan.
selection 0: ON only when Inverter is
L8-10 0 or 1 0 No A A A 4B6H -
ON
Fan On/Off 1: ON whenever power is
Sel ON
Cooling fan
control Set the time in seconds to
delay time delay turning OFF the cool- 0 to
L8-11 60 s No A A A 4B7H -
ing fan after the cooling fan 300
Fan Delay OFF command is received.
Time
Ambient
temperature Set the ambient temperature. 45 to
L8-12 No need to change the set- 45 °C No A A A 4B8H -
Ambient 60
tings for normal usage.
Temp

5-66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Change Control Methods

Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
OL2 charac-
teristics 0: OL2 characteristics at
selection at low speeds disabled.
L8-15 low speeds 0 or 1 1 No A A A 4BBH -
1: OL2 characteristics at
OL2 Sel @ low speeds enabled.
L-Spd
Soft CLA
selection 0: Disable (gain = 0)
L8-18 0 or 1 1 No A A A 4BFH -
Soft CLA 1: Enable
Sel
* For (-E) models.

K N: Special Adjustments
The following settings are made with the special adjustments parameters (N parameters): Hunting prevention
and speed feedback detection control.

nHunting Prevention Function: N1

Parameters for hunting prevention are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Hunting- 0: Hunting-prevention
prevention function disabled
function 1: Hunting-prevention
selection function enabled
The hunting-prevention
function suppresses hunt-
ing when the motor is
operating with a light
N1-01 0 or 1 1 No A A No 580H 6-38
load.
Hunt Prev This function is enabled
Select in V/f control method
only.
If high response is to be
given priority over vibration
suppression, disable the
hunting-prevention function.

5-67
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Set the hunting-prevention
Hunting-
gain multiplication factor.
prevention
Normally, there is no need to
gain
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as fol-
lows:
• If vibration occurs with
0.00 to 4-18
N1-02 light load, increase the set- 1.00 No A A No 581H
2.50 6-38
ting.
Hunt Prev • If the motor stalls, reduce
Gain the setting.
If the setting is too large, the
voltage will be too sup-
pressed and the motor may
stall.

nSpeed Feedback Protection Control Functions: N2

Parameters for speed feedback protection control functions are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param-
Setting Factory during V/f
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Speed feed- Set the internal speed feed-
back detec- back detection control gain
tion control using the multiplication
(AFR) gain function.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Adjust this parameter as fol-
0.00 to 4-18
N2-01 lows: 1.00 No No No A 584H
10.00 6-39
• If hunting occurs, increase
AFR Gain the set value.
• If response is low,
decrease the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at
a time, while checking the
response.
Speed feed-
back detec- Set the time constant to
tion control decide the rate of change in 0 to
N2-02 (AFR) time 50 ms No No No A 585H 6-39
the speed feedback detec- 2000
constant tion control.
AFR Time
Speed feed-
back detec-
tion control Set the time constant to 0 to
N2-03 (AFR) time decide the amount of change 750 ms No No No A 586H 6-39
2000
constant 2 in the speed.

AFR Time 2

5-68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nHigh-slip Braking: N3
Parameters for high-slip braking are shown in the following table.
Control
Name Change
Param- Methods
Setting Factory during
eter Description Range Setting V/f Register Page
Number LCD Opera-
tion V/f with
Display
PG
High-slip
braking
decelera- Sets the frequency width for
tion fre- deceleration during high-slip
N3-01 quency braking as a percent, taking the 1 to 20 5% No A A 588H -
width Maximum Frequency (E1-04) as
100%.
HSB Decel
Width
High-slip Sets the current limit for decelera-
braking cur- tion during high-slip braking as a
rent limit percent, taking the motor rated 100 to
N3-02 150% No A A 589H -
current as 100%. The resulting 200
HSB Cur- limit must be 150% of the Inverter
rent Ref rated current or less.
High-slip
braking stop Set in seconds the dwell time for
dwell time the output frequency for FMIN 0.1 to
N3-03 (1.5 Hz) during V/f control. 1.0 s No A A 58AH -
10.0
HSB Dwel- Effective only during deceleration
Tim@Stp for high-slip braking.

High-slip
braking OL Set the OL time when the output
time frequency does not change for 30 to
N3-04 40 s No A A 58BH -
some reason during deceleration 1200
HSB OL for high-slip braking.
Time

K Digital Operator Parameters: o

The following settings are made with the Digital Operator parameters (o parameters): Multi-function selec-
tions and the copy function.

nMonitor Select: o1
Parameters for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Monitor Set the number of monitor
selection item. (U1-oo)
It is displayed on the digital
o1-01 operator in 4th item in Drive 4 to 40 6 Yes A A A 500H -
User Moni- mode. The factory setting
tor Sel (Output voltage monitor) can
be changed.

5-69
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Monitor Sets the monitor item to be
selection displayed when the power is
after power turned on.
up 1: Frequency reference
o1-02 1 to 4 1 Yes A A A 501H 6-135
2: Output frequency
Power-On 3: Output current
Monitor 4: The monitor item set for
o1-01
Sets the units that will be set
Frequency and displayed for the fre-
units of ref- quency reference and fre-
erence set- quency monitor.
ting and 0: 0.01 Hz units
monitor 1: 0.01% units
(Maximum output
frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
r/min units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display 0 to
o1-03 0 No A A A 502H 6-135
Set the desired values for 39999
setting and display for the
Display max. output frequency.
Scaling

Set 4-digit number

excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max.
output frequency value is
200.0, set 12000
LCD bright- Lowering the brightness
ness adjustment value for the
LCD Operator lowers the
o1-05 0 to 5 3 Yes A* A* A* 504H -
LCD Con- LCD display contrast. Rais-
trast ing the value increases the
contrast.
* For (-E) models.

5-70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

nMulti-function Selections: o2
Parameters for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
LOCAL/ Sets the Digital Operator
REMOTE Local/Remote Key
key enable/ 0: Disabled
o2-01 disable 1: Enabled (Switches 0 or 1 1 No A A A 505H 6-135
between the Digital
Local/ Operator and the parame-
Remote Key ter settings.)
STOP key Sets the Stop Key in the run
during con- mode.
trol circuit 0: Disabled (When the run
terminal command is issued from
o2-02 0 or 1 1 No A A A 506H 6-135
operation and external terminal, the
Stop Key is disabled.)
Oper STOP 1: Enabled (Effective even
Key during run.)
Clears or stores user initial
Parameter values.
initial value 0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records
the set parameters as user
initial values.)
o2-03 2: All clear (Clears all 0 to 2 0 No A A A 507H 6-135
recorded user initial
User values)
Defaults When the set parameters are
recorded as user initial val-
ues, 1110 will be set in A1-
03.
kVA selec- Do not set unless using a
tion control board from an
o2-04
Inverter with a different
0 to FF 0*1 No A A A 508H -
Inverter
Model# capacity.

Frequency When the frequency refer-

reference ence is set on the Digital
setting Operator frequency refer-
method ence monitor, sets whether
selection the Enter Key is necessary.
o2-05 0: Enter Key needed 0 or 1 0 No A A A 509H 6-135
1: Enter Key not needed
Operator When set to 1, the Inverter
M.O.P. accepts the frequency refer-
ence without Enter Key
operation.

5-71
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Sets the operation when the
Operation
Digital Operator is discon-
selection
nected.
when digi-
0: Disabled (Operation
tal operator
is discon- continues even if the
nected Digital Operator is 0
o2-06 0 or 1 No A A A 50AH -
disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected
Oper Detec- at Digital Operator
tion disconnection. Inverter
output is cut off, and fault
contact is operated.)
Cumulative
operation Sets the cumulative opera-
tion time in hour units. 0 to
o2-07 time setting 0 hr No A A A 50BH 6-135
Operation time is calculated 65535
Elapsed from the set values.
Time Set
Cumulative 0: Cumulative time when
operation the Inverter power is on.
time selec- (All time while the
tion Inverter power is on is 0
o2-08 accumulated.) 0 or 1 (1)*2 No A A A 50CH -
1: Cumulative Inverter run
Elapsed time. (Only Inverter
Time Run output time is
accumulated.)
Factory use
o2-09 Init Mode Do not change. - - No A A A - -
Sel
Fan opera- Set the initial value of the
tion time fan operation time using
0 to
o2-10 setting time units. 0 hr No A A A 50EH 6-135
65535
Fan ON The operation time accumu-
Time Set lates from the set value.

Fault trace/
fault his- 0: Disable (U2, U3 are held)
tory initial- 1: Enable (U2, U3 are ini-
o2-12 ization tialized and o2-12 returns 0 or 1 0 No A*2 A*2 A*2 510H -
to 0.) For (-E) models
FLT Trace only.
Init
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200-V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. For (-E) models.

5-72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

n Copy Function: o3
Parameters for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Copy func- 0: Normal operation
tion selec- 1: READ (Inverter to
tion Operator)
o3-01 0 to 3 0 No A A A 515H 6-137
2: COPY (Operator to
Copy Func Inverter)
Select 3: Verify (compare)
Read per-
mitted
0: Read prohibited
o3-02 selection 0 or 1 0 No A A A 516H 6-137
1: Read permitted
Copy
Allowable

K T: Motor Autotuning
The following settings are made with the motor autotuning parameters (T parameters): Settings for autotuning.
Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG
Motor 1/2 Set the location where the
selection autotuned motor constants
T1-00 are to be stored. 1 or 2 1 No No No A 700H 4-13
Select 1: E1 to E2 (motor 1)
Motor 2: E3 to E4 (motor 2)
Autotuning Set the autotuning mode.
mode selec- 0: Rotational autotuning
tion 1: Stationary autotuning 0 to 2 4-11
T1-01 0 No A A A 701H
2: Stationary autotuning for *1 4-13
Tuning line-to-line resistance
Mode Sel only

Motor out-
put power
Set the output power of the 0.00 to 0.40
T1-02 No A A A 702H 4-13
motor in kilowatts. 650.00 kW
Mtr Rated
Power

Motor rated
voltage
Set the rated voltage of the 0 to 200.0 V
T1-03 No No No A 703H 4-13
motor in volts. 255.0*2 *2
Rated Volt-
age

5-73
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Change Control Methods
Param- during V/f
Setting Factory
eter LCD Description Register Page
Number
Range Setting Opera- V/f with Open
Loop
Display tion PG

Motor rated
current
Set the rated current of the 0.32 to 1.90 A
T1-04 No A A A 704H 4-13
motor in amps. 6.40 *4 *3
Rated Cur-
rent

Motor base
frequency
Set the base frequency of the 0 to 60.0
T1-05 No No No A 705H 4-13
motor in hertz. 400.0*5 Hz
Rated Fre-
quency

Number of
motor poles
Set the number of motor 2 to 48
T1-06 4 poles No No No A 706H 4-13
poles. poles
Number of
Poles

Motor base
speed
Set the base speed of the 0 to 1750
T1-07 No No No A 707H 4-13
motor in r/min. 24000 r/min
Rated Speed

* 1. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. Only set value 2 is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
* 2. These are values for a 200-V class Inverter. Values for a 400-V class Inverter are double.
* 3. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200-V class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 4. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200-V class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 5. The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.

5-74
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

K U: Monitor Parameters
The following settings are made with the monitor parameters (U parameters): Setting parameters for monitor-
ing in drive mode.

n Status Monitor Parameters: U1

The parameters used for monitoring status are listed in the following table.

Name Control Methods

Param- Output Signal Level Dur-
Min. V/f Open
eter LCD Description ing Multi-Function Analog Register
Number Unit V/f with Loop
Display Output Vec-
PG tor

Frequency
reference Monitors/sets the fre- 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-01 A A A 40H
Frequency quency reference value.* (0 to ± 10 V possible) Hz
Ref
Output fre-
quency Monitors the output fre- 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-02 A A A 41H
quency.* (0 to ± 10 V possible) Hz
Output Freq

Output cur-
rent 10 V: Inverter rated output
current 0.1
U1-03 Monitors the output current. A A A 42H
(0 to +10 V, absolute value A
Output Cur- output)
rent

Control
method
Checks the current control
U1-04 (Cannot be output.) - A A A 43H
method.
Control
Method

Motor speed 10 V: Max. frequency

Monitors the detected motor 0.01
U1-05 Motor (0 to ± 10 V possible) No A A 44H
speed.* Hz
Speed
Output volt-
age Monitors the output voltage
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC) 0.1
U1-06 reference value in the A A A 45H
Output Volt- Inverter. (0 to +10 V output) V
age
DC bus
voltage Monitors the main DC volt- 10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
U1-07 1V A A A 46H
DC Bus age in the Inverter. (0 to +10 V output)
Voltage
Output 10 V: Inverter capacity
power Monitors the output power (max. applicable motor 0.1
U1-08 A A A 47H
Output (internally detected value). capacity) kW
kWatts (0 to ± 10 V possible)

* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).

5-75
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Control Methods
Param- Output Signal Level Dur-
Min. V/f Open
eter LCD Description ing Multi-Function Analog Register
Number Unit V/f with Loop
Display Output Vec-
PG tor

Torque ref-
erence Monitor in internal torque
10 V: Motor rated torque
U1-09 reference value for vector 0.1% No No A 48H
Torque Ref- control. (0 to ± 10 V possible)
erence
Shows input ON/OFF status.
U1-10=
1: FWD command
Input termi- (S1) is ON.
nal status 1: REV command
(S2) is ON.
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON.
U1-10 1: Multi input 2 (Cannot be output.) - A A A 49H
(S4) is ON.
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON.
Input Term 1: Multi input 4
Sts (S6) is ON.
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON.

Shows output ON/OFF sta-

tus.
Output ter- U1-11=
1: Multi-function
minal status
contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
U1-11 contact output 2 (Cannot be output.) - A A A 4AH
(P1 or M3-M4) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 3
Output
(P2 or M5-M6) is ON.
Term Sts
Not used (always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/AB-MC) is ON.

Inverter operating status.

U1-12=
Operation 1: Run
status 1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
U1-12 input (Cannot be output.) - A A A 4BH
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter
ready
Int Ctl Sts 1 1: Minor fault

1: Major fault

Cumulative Monitors the total operating

operation time of the Inverter.
time The initial value and the 1
U1-13 (Cannot be output.) A A A 4CH
operating time/power ON hr
Elapsed time selection can be set in
Time o2-07 and o2-08.

5-76
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Control Methods

Param- Output Signal Level Dur-
Min. V/f Open
eter LCD Description ing Multi-Function Analog Register
Number Unit V/f with Loop
Display Output Vec-
PG tor

Software
No. (flash
U1-14 memory) (Manufacturer’s ID number) (Cannot be output.) - A A A 4DH

FLASH ID
Terminal
A1 input Monitors the input voltage of
the voltage frequency refer- 10 V: 100% (10 V)
U1-15 voltage 0.1% A A A 4EH
ence. An input of 10 V cor- (0 to ± 10 V possible)
Term A1 responds to 100%.
Level
Terminal Monitors the input voltage of
A2 input the multi-function analog
10 V: 100% (10 V)
U1-16 voltage input. 0.1% A A A 4FH
(0 to ±10 V possible)
Term A2 An input of 10 V corre-
Level sponds to 100%.

Motor sec- Monitors the calculated

ondary cur- value of the motor secondary
10 V:Motor rated
rent (Iq) current.
U1-18 secondary current) 0.1% A A A 51H
The motor rated secondary
Mot SEC (0 to ±10 V output)
current corresponds to
Current 100%.
Motor excit- Monitors the calculated
ing current value of the motor excitation
(Id) current. 10 V:Motor rated
U1-19 The motor rated secondary secondary current) 0.1% No No A 52H
Mot EXC current corresponds to (0 to ±10 V output)
Current 100%.

Output fre- Monitors the output fre-

quency after quency after a soft start.
soft-start The frequency given does 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-20 A A A 53H
not include compensations, (0 to ± 10 V possible) Hz
SFS Output such as slip compensation.
The unit is set in o1-03.
ASR input Monitors the input to the
speed control loop. 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-21 No A No 54H
ASR Input The maximum frequency (0 to ± 10 V possible) %
corresponds to 100%.
ASR output Monitors the output from the
10 V:Motor rated
speed control loop.
secondary current) 0.01
U1-22 The motor rated secondary No A No 55H
ASR Output current corresponds to (0 to ± 10 V possible) %
100%.
PID feed- Monitors the feedback value
back value when PID control is used.
10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-24 The input for the max. fre- A A A 57H
PID Feed- (0 to ± 10 V possible) %
quency corresponds to
back 100%.
Output volt-
age refer- Monitors the Inverter inter-
ence (Vq) nal voltage reference for 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC) 0.1
U1-26 No No A 59H
motor secondary current (0 to ± 10 V possible) V
Voltage Ref control.
(Vq)

5-77
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Control Methods
Param- Output Signal Level Dur-
Min. V/f Open
eter LCD Description ing Multi-Function Analog Register
Number Unit V/f with Loop
Display Output Vec-
PG tor

Output volt-
age refer- Monitors the Inverter inter-
nal voltage reference for 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC) 0.1
U1-27 ence (Vd) No No A 5AH
motor excitation current con- (0 to ± 10 V possible) V
Voltage Ref trol.
(Vd)
Software
(Manufacturer’s CPU soft-
U1-28 No. (CPU) (Cannot be output.) - A A A 5BH
ware No.)
CPU ID
ACR out-
put of q axis Monitors the current control 10 V: 100% 0.1
U1-32 output value for the motor No No A 5FH
ACR (q) (0 to ± 10 V possible) %
secondary current.
Output
ACR out-
put of d axis Monitors the current control 10 V: 100% 0.1
U1-33 output value for the motor No No A 60H
ACR (d) (0 to ± 10 V possible) %
excitation current.
Output
OPE fault
parameter Shows the first parameter
U1-34 number where an OPE fault (Cannot be output.) - A A A 61H
OPE was detected.
Detected
PID input PID feedback volume
10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-36 volume Given as maximum fre- A A A 63H
(0 to ± 10 V possible) %
PID Input quency/100%

PID output PID control output

10 V: Max. frequency 0.01
U1-37 volume Given as maximum fre- A A A 64H
(0 to ± 10 V possible) %
PID Output quency/100%

PID com- PID command + PID com-

mand mand bias 0.01
U1-38 10 V: Max. frequency A A A 65H
PID Set- Given as maximum fre- %
point quency/100%

RS-422A/ Shows RS-422A/485 com-

485 Com- munications errors.
munica- U1-40=
1: CRC error
tions Error 1: Data length error
Not used (always 0).
U1-39 1: Parity (Cannot be output.) - A A A 66H
error
1: Overrun
Transmit error
Err 1: Framing
error
1: Timeout
Not used (always 0).

Cooling fan
operating
time Monitors the total operating
1
U1-40 time of the cooling fan. The (Cannot be output.) A A A 68H
FAN hr
time can be set in 02-10.
Elapsed
Time

5-78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

n Fault Trace: U2
Parameters for error tracing are shown in the following table.
Name Control Methods
Param- Output Signal Level
Min. V/f Open
eter LCD Description During Multi-Function Register
Number Unit V/f with Loop
Display Analog Output Vec-
PG tor

Current
fault The contents of the current
U2-01 - A A A 80H
Current fault.
Fault

Previous
fault The contents of the error that
U2-02 occurred just prior to the cur- - A A A 81H
Last Fault rent fault.

Reference
frequency at
The reference frequency when 0.01
U2-03 fault A A A 82H
the previous fault occurred. Hz
Frequency
Ref

Output fre-
quency at
The output frequency when the 0.01
U2-04 fault A A A 83H
previous fault occurred. Hz
Output Freq

Output cur-
rent at fault
The output current when the 0.1
U2-05 (Cannot be output.) A A A 84H
Output Cur- previous fault occurred. A
rent

Motor speed
at fault The motor speed when the pre- 0.01
U2-06 No A A 85H
Motor vious fault occurred. Hz
Speed

Output volt-
age refer- The output reference voltage
0.1
U2-07 ence at fault when the previous fault A A A 86H
V
Output Volt- occurred.
age

DC bus
voltage at The main current DC voltage
U2-08 fault when the previous fault 1V A A A 87H
DC Bus occurred.
Voltage

Output
power at
The output power when the pre- 0.1
U2-09 fault A A A 88H
vious fault occurred. kW
Output
kWatts

5-79
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Control Methods
Param- Output Signal Level
Min. V/f Open
eter LCD Description During Multi-Function Register
Number Unit V/f with Loop
Display Analog Output Vec-
PG tor

Torque ref-
erence at The reference torque when the
previous fault occurred. The
U2-10 fault 0.1% No No A 89H
motor rated torque corresponds
Torque Ref- to 100%.
erence

Input termi-
nal status at The input terminal status when
the previous fault occurred.
U2-11 fault - A A A 8AH
The format is the same as for
Input Term U1-10.
Sts

Output ter-
minal status The output terminal status when
U2-12 at fault the previous fault occurred. The (Cannot be output.) - A A A 8BH
Output format is the same as for U1-11.
Term Sts

Operation
status at The operating status when the
U2-13 fault previous fault occurred. The - A A A 8CH
Inverter Sta- format is the same as for U1-12.
tus

Cumulative
operation
The operating time when the 1
U2-14 time at fault A A A 8DH
previous fault occurred. hr
Elapsed
time
Note The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.

nFault History: U3
Parameters for the error log are shown in the following table.
Name Control Methods
Param- Output Signal Level Dur-
Min. V/f Open
eter LCD Description ing Multi-Function Analog Register
Number Unit V/f with Loop
Display Output Vec-
PG tor

Most recent
fault The error contents of 1st 90H
U3-01 - A A A
previous fault. (800H)
Last Fault

Second
most recent
The error contents of 2nd 91H
U3-02 fault (Cannot be output.) - A A A
previous fault. (801H)
Fault Mes-
sage 2
Third most
recent fault The error contents of 3rd 92H
U3-03 - A A A
Fault Mes- previous fault. (802H)
sage 3

5-80
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Name Control Methods

Param- Output Signal Level Dur-
Min. V/f Open
eter LCD Description ing Multi-Function Analog Register
Number Unit V/f with Loop
Display Output Vec-
PG tor

Fourth/old-
est fault The error contents of 4th 93H
U3-04 - A A A
Fault Mes- previous fault. (803H)
sage 4
Cumulative
operation The total operating time
1 94H
U3-05 time at fault when the 1st previous fault A A A
hr (80AH)
Elapsed occurred.
Time 1
Accumu-
lated time of The total operating time
1 95H
U3-06 second fault when the 2nd previous fault A A A
hr (80BH)
Elapsed occurred.
Time 2
Accumu-
lated time of The total operating time
1 96H
U3-07 third fault when the 3rd previous fault A A A
hr (80CH)
Elapsed occurred.
Time 3
Accumu-
lated time of
fourth/old- The total operating time 1 97H
U3-08 est fault when the 4th previous fault A A A
hr (80DH)
occurred. (Cannot be output.)
Elapsed
Time 4
5th previ-
ous fault
U3-09 5th previous fault - A* A* A* 804H
Fault Mes-
sage 5
6th previ-
ous fault
U3-10 6th previous fault - A* A* A* 805H
Fault Mes-
sage 6
7th previ-
ous fault
U3-11 7th previous fault - A* A* A* 806H
Fault Mes-
sage 7
8th previ-
ous fault
U3-12 8th previous fault - A* A* A* 807H
Fault Mes-
sage 8
9th previ-
ous fault
U3-13 9th previous fault - A* A* A* 808H
Fault Mes-
sage 9

5-81
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Control Methods
Param- Output Signal Level Dur-
Min. V/f Open
eter LCD Description ing Multi-Function Analog Register
Number Unit V/f with Loop
Display Output Vec-
PG tor

10th previ-
ous fault
U3-14 10th previous fault - A* A* A* 809H
Fault Mes-
sage 10
Accumula-
tive operat-
ing time at
Accumulative operating
U3-15 5th previ- 1H A* A* A* 80EH
ous fault time at 5th previous fault

Elapsed
Time 5
Accumula-
tive operat-
ing time at
Accumulative operating
U3-16 6th previ- 1H A* A* A* 80FH
ous fault time at 6th previous fault

Elapsed
Time 6
Accumula-
tive operat-
ing time at
Accumulative operating
U3-17 7th previ- 1H A* A* A* 810H
ous fault time at 7th previous fault
(Cannot be output.)
Elapsed
Time 7
Accumula-
tive operat-
ing time at
Accumulative operating
U3-18 8th previ- 1H A* A* A* 811H
ous fault time at 8th previous fault

Elapsed
Time 8
Accumula-
tive operat-
ing time at
Accumulative operating
U3-19 9th previ- 1H A* A* A* 812H
ous fault time at 9th previous fault

Elapsed
Time 9
Accumula-
tive operat-
ing time at
Accumulative operating
U3-20 10th previ- 1H A* A* A* 813H
ous fault time at 10th previous fault

Elapsed
Time 10

Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
* U3-09 to U3-20 are not supported for Asian models. Addresses 800H to 813H are not supported for Asian models.

5-82
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

K Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)

The factory settings of the following parameters will change if the control method (A1-02) is changed.
Factory Setting
Param- Open
V/f Con- V/F with
eter Name Setting Range Unit Loop
Number trol PG
Vector
A1-02=0 A1-02=1
A1-02=2
b3-01 Speed search selection 0 to 3 1 2 3 2
b3-02 Speed search operating current 0 to 200 1% 120 - 100
C3-01 Slip compensation gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0 - 1.0
Slip compensation primary delay time
C3-02 0 to 10000 1 ms 2000 - 200
constant
Torque compensation primary delay time
C4-02 0 to 10000 1 ms 200 200 20
constant
E1-04 60.0 60.0
Max. output frequency (FMAX) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0
E3-02 *2 *2

E1-05 200.0 200.0

Max. voltage (VMAX) 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V 200.0
E3-03 *2 *2

E1-06 60.0 60.0

Base frequency (FA) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0
E3-04 *2 *2

E1-07 3.0 3.0

Mid. output frequency (FB) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 3.0
E3-05 *2 *2

E1-08 *1 0.0 to 255.0 15.0 15.0

0.1 V 11.0
E3-06 Mid. output frequency voltage (VC) (0.0 to 510.0) *2 *2

E1-09 1.5 1.5

Min. output frequency (FMIN) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.5
E3-07 *2 *2

E1-10 *1 0.0 to 255.0 9.0 9.0

0.1 V 2.0
E3-08 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN) (0.0 to 510.0) *2 *2

* 1. The settings shown are for 200-V class Inverters. The values will double for 400-V class Inverters.
* 2. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.

5-83
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n200-V and 400-V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW

Para
meter Open
Num-
Unit Factory Setting Loop
Vector
ber Control
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07
Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
*
E1-08
V 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 19.0 24.0 19.0 24.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 11.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5
E1-10
V 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 11.0 13.0 11.0 15.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 2.0
*

* The settings shown are for 200-V class Inverters. The values will double for 400-V class Inverters.

n200-V and 400-V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW

Para
meter Open
Num-
Unit Factory Setting Loop
Vector
ber Control
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07
Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
*
E1-08
V 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 18.0 23.0 18.0 23.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 11.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5
E1-10
V 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 9.0 13.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 2.0
*

* The settings shown are for 200-V class Inverters. The values will double for 400-V class Inverters.

n200-V class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400-V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW

Para
meter Open
Num-
Unit Factory Setting Loop
Vector
ber Control
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 60.0 60.0
E1-05
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
*
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0
E1-07
Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
*
E1-08
V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 15.0 20.0 15.0 20.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 11.0
*
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5
E1-10
V 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 7.0 11.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 2.0
*

* The settings shown are for 200-V class Inverters. The values will double for 400-V class Inverters.

5-84
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

K Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)

The factory settings of the following parameters will change if the Inverter capacity (o2-04) is changed.

n200-V Class Inverters

Parame-
ter Num- Name Unit Factory Setting
ber
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Energy-saving filter time
b8-03 s 0.50 (Open loop vector control)
constant
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 288.20 223.70 169.40 156.80 122.90 94.75 72.69 70.44 63.13
cient
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
tion*
Carrier frequency selec-
- - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
tion upper limit
E2-01
Motor rated current A 1.90 3.30 6.20 8.50 14.00 19.60 26.60 39.7 53.0
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 2.90 2.50 2.60 2.90 2.73 1.50 1.30 1.70 1.60
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 1.20 1.80 2.80 3.00 4.50 5.10 8.00 11.2 15.2
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis-
Ω 9.842 5.156 1.997 1.601 0.771 0.399 0.288 0.230 0.138
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 18.2 13.8 18.5 18.4 19.6 18.2 15.5 19.5 17.2
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 14 26 53 77 112 172 262 245 272
torque compensation
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 100 95 95 95 95 90

5-85
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parame-
ter Num- Name Unit Factory Setting
ber
- Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
o2-04 kVA selection - 9 A B C D E F 10 11
Energy-saving filter time
b8-03 s 0.50 (Open loop vector control) 2.00 (Open loop vector control)
constant
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 57.87 51.79 46.27 38.16 35.78 31.35 23.10 23.10 23.10
cient
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 6 6 4 3 3 3 3 3 1
tion*
Carrier frequency selec-
- - 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 1
tion upper limit
E2-01
Motor rated current A 65.8 77.2 105.0 131.0 160.0 190.0 260.0 260.0 260.0
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 1.67 1.70 1.80 1.33 1.60 1.43 1.39 1.39 1.39
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 15.7 18.5 21.9 38.2 44.0 45.6 72.0 72.0 72.0
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis-
Ω 0.101 0.079 0.064 0.039 0.030 0.022 0.023 0.023 0.023
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 20.1 19.5 20.8 18.8 20.2 20.5 20.0 20.0 20.0
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 505 538 699 823 852 960 1200 1200 1200
torque compensation
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 100 90 90 95 100 105 95 100 95
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200-V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10
kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7.5 kW or more, the Inverter
rated current will need to be reduced.

5-86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

n400-V Class Inverters

Parame-
ter Num- Name Unit Factory Setting
ber
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection - 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
Energy-saving filter time
b8-03 s 0.50 (Open loop vector control)
constant
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 576.40 447.40 338.80 313.60 245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26
cient
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
tion *
Carrier frequency selec-
- - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
tion upper limit
E2-01
Motor rated current A 1.00 1.60 3.10 4.20 7.00 7.00 9.80 13.30 19.9 26.5
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 2.90 2.60 2.50 3.00 2.70 2.70 1.50 1.30 1.70 1.60
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 0.60 0.80 1.40 1.50 2.30 2.30 2.60 4.00 5.6 7.6
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis-
W 38.198 22.459 10.100 6.495 3.333 3.333 1.595 1.152 0.922 0.550
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 18.2 14.3 18.3 18.7 19.3 19.3 18.2 15.5 19.6 17.2
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 14 26 53 77 130 130 193 263 385 440
torque compensation
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 90 95 95 95 90 95 95

5-87
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parame-
ter Num- Name Unit Factory Setting
ber
- Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132
o2-04 kVA selection - 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33
Energy-saving filter time
b8-03 s 0.50 (Open loop vector control) 2.00 (Open loop vector control)
constant
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 115.74 103.58 92.54 76.32 71.56 67.20 46.20 41.22 36.23 33.18
cient
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 6 6 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3
tion *
Carrier frequency selec-
- - 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 4
tion upper limit
E2-01
Motor rated current A 32.9 38.6 52.3 65.6 79.7 95.0 130.0 156.0 190.0 223.0
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 1.67 1.70 1.80 1.33 1.60 1.46 1.39 1.40 1.40 1.38
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 7.8 9.2 10.9 19.1 22.0 24.0 36.0 40.0 49.0 58.0
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis-
Ω 0.403 0.316 0.269 0.155 0.122 0.088 0.092 0.056 0.046 0.035
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 20.1 23.5 20.7 18.8 19.9 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 508 586 750 925 1125 1260 1600 1760 2150 2350
torque compensation
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.7
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 98 78 85 85 90 90 98 108 100 95

5-88
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameter Tables

Parame-
ter Num- Name Unit Factory Setting
ber
- Inverter Capacity kW 160 185 220 300
o2-04 kVA selection - 34 35 36 37
Energy-saving filter time 2.00 (Open loop vector con-
b8-03 s
constant trol)
Energy-saving coeffi-
b8-04 - 30.13 30.57 27.13 21.76
cient
Carrier frequency selec-
C6-02 - 3 3 1 1
tion *
Carrier frequency selec-
- - 4 4 1 1
tion upper limit
E2-01
Motor rated current A 270.0 310.0 370.0 500.0
(E4-01)
E2-02
Motor rated slip Hz 1.35 1.30 1.30 1.25
(E4-02)
E2-03
Motor no-load current A 70.0 81.0 96.0 130.0
(E4-03)
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resis-
Ω 0.029 0.025 0.020 0.014
(E4-05) tance
E2-06
Motor leak inductance % 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
(E4-06)
Motor iron loss for
E2-10 W 2850 3200 3700 4700
torque compensation
Momentary power loss
L2-02 s 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
L2-03 s 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1
time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time s 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200-V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4:
10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7.5 kW or more, the Inverter
rated current will need to be reduced.

5-89
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 5-90
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 6
Chapter 6
Parameter Settings by
Function
Application and Overload Selections ........................... 6-2
Frequency Reference ..................................................6-6
Run Command........................................................... 6-12
Stopping Methods ......................................................6-14
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-19
Adjusting Frequency References............................... 6-27
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ..6-32
Improved Operating Efficiency...................................6-34
Machine Protection .................................................... 6-40
Continuing Operation................................................. 6-52
Inverter Protection ..................................................... 6-60
Input Terminal Functions............................................6-62
Monitor Parameters ................................................... 6-72
Communications Functions .......................................6-76
Individual Functions ................................................. 6-116
Digital Operator Functions ....................................... 6-135
Options .................................................................... 6-143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Application and Overload Selections

K Select the Overload to Suit the Application

Set C6-01 (CT: Low carrier constant torque, VT: High carrier variable torque) depending on the application
for which the Inverter is used. The setting ranges for the Inverter carrier frequency, overload tolerance, and
maximum output frequency depend on the setting in C6-01. If using the Inverter with C6-01 set to the factory
setting (1: VT), use a load application in which load torque reduces with the speed, e.g., fans and pumps.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory s during
Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion vec-
PG
tor

CT/VT selection 0: CT (low carrier, constant torque, 150% per

minute)
C6-01 0 or 1 1 No Q Q Q
1: VT (high carrier, variable torque, 120% per
Heavy/Normal Duty minute)

Carrier frequency selection Select carrier wave fixed pattern.

C6-02 Select F to enable detailed settings using parame- 0 to F 6*1 No Q Q Q
CarrierFreq Sel ters C6-03 to C6-05.

Carrier frequency upper

limit

2.0 to 15.0 kHz

C6-03 15.0 No A A A
*1
*2 *3

CarrierFreq Max

Set upper and lower carrier frequency limits in

kHz.
Set the carrier wave gain as shown below.
In vector control method, the carrier frequency is
fixed according to C6-03 (Carrier Frequency
Carrier frequency lower Upper Limit).
limit Carrier frequency

Output frequency x 0.4 to

C6-04 (C6-05) x K 15.0 kHz No A A No
15.0 *1
*2 *3
Output frequency

(Maximum output frequency)

CarrierFreq Min
K is the coefficient determined by the set value in
C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz
:K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 2
Carrier frequency
proportional gain

C6-05 00 to 99 00 No A A No
*3

CarrierFreq Gain

* 1. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.

* 2. The setting ranges depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. Can be set and referenced only when C6-01 is set to 1, and C6-02 is set to F.

6-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Application and Overload Selections

nDifference between CT and VT

The characteristics of CT (low carrier, constant torque) and VT (high carrier, variable torque) are shown
below.
CT: Low Carrier, Constant Torque VT: High Carrier, Variable Torque

Constant Torque Variable Torque

Torque Torque

0 Motor speed Motor speed

Constant torque means a fixed load torque for all motor Variable torque means that the load torque will decrease
speed, and it requires overload resistance capability. as the speed decreases. Normally, overload resistance
Applications include pushers, conveyors, cranes, and capability is not required. Applications include fans and
other friction or heavy loads. pumps.
Low carrier: Acoustic noise is present. High carrier: Acoustic noise is not present.

nSetting Precautions

C6-01 (CT/VT Selection)

When setting C6-01, observe the following precautions.
• Depending on the set value in C6-01, the setting range of the related parameters is limited as follows:
C6-01 Set Value 0 (Low Carrier, Constant Torque) 1 (High Carrier, Variable Torque)

150% Inverter rated current/1 120% Inverter rated current/1

Inverter Overload Protection Level
min. min.
0: Low carrier low noise
1: Carrier 2 kHz
2: Carrier 5 kHz
0: Low carrier, low noise 3: Carrier 8.0 kHz
C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection)
1: Carrier 2 kHz 4: Carrier 10.0 kHz
5: Carrier 12.5 kHz
6: Carrier 15 kHz
F: User-set*
E1-04 and E3-02 (Max. Output Fre-
150 Hz 400 Hz
quency)
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level During
150% 120%
Acceleration)
L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level During
150% 120%
Operation)
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters for 0.4 to 22 kW: 6 (15 kHz)
200 V Class Inverters for 30 to 90 kW, or 400 V Class Inverters for 30 to 185 kW: 4 (10 kHz)
200 V Class Inverter for 110 kW, or 400 V Class Inverters for 220 to 300 kW: 1 (2 kHz)
• When the setting in E1-04 or E3-02 is greater than 150 Hz, if C6-01 is set to 0, an OPE02 (Parameter set-
ting range error) will occur.

6-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Carrier Frequency
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions items.
• When using a device with C6-01 set to 1 (VT), adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown
below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following
values as guidelines.
Wiring Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Over 100 m

C6-02 (carrier frequency)

0 to 6 (15 kHz) 0 to 4 (10 kHz) 0 to 2 (5 kHz)
setting

If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
Carrier frequency upper limit depends on the Inverter capacity. Refer to Factory Settings that Change with the
Inverter Capacity (o2-04) on page 5-85.

• When using V/f control or V/f control with PG, you can vary the carrier frequency to match the output fre-
quency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04
(Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).

Carrier Frequency

C6-03

Output frequency × C6-05

C6-04
× K*

Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
* K is the coefficient determined by
the set value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz < C6-03: K=1

Fig 6.1

• With vector control, the carrier frequency is fixed by the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6-03 if user-
set, or by the carrier frequency set in C6-02.
• To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
• If the settings are as shown below, OPE11 (Data setting error) will occur.
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04.
If C6-01 = 0 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 2 to E.
If C6-01 = 1 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 7 to E.

6-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Application and Overload Selections

nCarrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Current Level

When C6-01 is set to 1, the Inverter overload level will be reduced. Even when the overload current falls to
below 120%, OL2 (Inverter overload) will be detected. The Inverter overload current reduction level is shown
below.

verload current reduction level 200 V class 22 kW or less

400 V class 22 kW or less
100%

80%
200 V class 
37 to 90 kW 200 V class 
400 V class 30 kW
75 to 185 kW 400 V class 
50% 30 to 55 kW

Carrier frequency
0 5kHz 8kHz 10kHz 15kHz

Fig 6.2 Overload Current Reduction Level

6-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.

K Selecting the Frequency Reference Source

Set parameter b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Reference selection Set the frequency reference source
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
b1-01 0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Reference Source
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input

Pulse train
0: Frequency reference
H6-01 input function selection 1: PID feedback value 0 to 2 0 No A A A
2: PID target value
Pulse Input Sel

Pulse train
input scaling Set the number of pulses taking the reference to be 1000 to
H6-02 1440 Hz Yes A A A
100%, in Hz. 32000
Pulse Input Gain

nInput the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator

When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator.
Input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator's reference frequency setting display.
For details on setting the reference frequency, refer to Chapter 3.

Fig 6.3 Frequency Setting Display

6-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Frequency Reference

nInputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)

When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input),
or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).

Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only (Asian Model)

If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal
A1.

Inverter
2 kΩ (2 W)

+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Master speed frequency
reference)
A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency
(2 W) reference)
AC (Analog common)

Fig 6.4 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input

2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary (Asian Model)

If performing 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies, input the master speed fre-
quency reference to control circuit terminal A1, and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.
When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 (master speed frequency reference) will
be the Inverter frequency reference, and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 (auxiliary speed frequency ref-
erence) will be the Inverter frequency reference.

Inverter
S3 Multi-step speed
Master/ command 1
Auxiliary
SC Sequence common

+V (Power supply: 15 V,
0 to 10 V input 20 mA)
A1 (Master speed frequency
0 to 10 V reference)
input
A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)

DIP switch S1

Fig 6.5 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input

Setting Precautions
When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, observe the following precautions.
• Turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 for switching between voltage and current (factory setting is ON).

6-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only (European Model)
If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal
A1. The voltage range canbe selected by setting H3-01.

When H3-01 = 0 When H3-01 = 1

Inverter Inverter
2 kΩ (2 W) 2 kΩ (2 W)
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA) +V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Master speed frequency
reference) A1 (Master speed frequency
reference)
2 kΩ A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency
(2 W) reference) reference)
(2 W)
AC (Analog common) AC (Analog common)

−V (Power supply: −15 V,

20 mA)
2 kΩ (2 W)

Fig 6.6 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input

2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary (European Model)

If performing 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies, input the master speed fre-
quency reference to control circuit terminal A1, and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.
When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 (master speed frequency reference) will
be the Inverter frequency reference, and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 (auxiliary speed frequency ref-
erence) will be the Inverter frequency reference. The voltage range can be selected by setting H3-01.

When H3-01 = 0 When H3-01 = 1

Inverter Inverter
S3 Multi-step speed
S3 Multi-step speed command 1
command 1 Master/
Master/ Auxiliary
Auxiliary
SC Sequence common
SC Sequence common

2k
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
+V (Power supply: 15 V, 2W 20 mA)
0 to 10 V input 20 mA)
2k A1 (Master speed fre-
A1 (Master speed frequency 2W 0 to -10 V
quency reference)
0 to 10 V 0 to +10 V
reference) Input 0 to 10 V input
input 2k A2 (Auxiliary speed fre-
A2 (Auxiliary speed frequency 2W quency reference)
reference) AC (Analog common)
AC (Analog common) 2k
2W
−V (Power supply: −15 V, 20 mA)
OFF ON
DIP switch S1 1
2 DIP switch S1

Fig 6.7 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input

Setting Precautions
When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, observe the following precautions.
• Turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 for switching between voltage and current (factory setting is ON).

6-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Frequency Reference

nInputting Frequency Reference Using Current

When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A2. Input the cur-
rent (4 to 20 mA) in control circuit terminal A2.
When H3-09 (Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection) is set to 0 (factory setting)
the input on A2 is added to A1.

Inverter

+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)

A1 (Auxiliary speed frequency

reference)
1 to 20 mA input A2 (Master speed frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)

DIP switch S1

Fig 6.8 Frequency Reference Using Current

Setting Precautions
• When inputting a current signal to terminal A2, turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 (factory setting: ON).
• If using terminal A2 to input the master speed reference and terminal A1 to input the auxiliary frequency
reference, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 Switching) to 1.

nSetting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals

When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP is used as the frequency reference.
Set H6-01 (PulseTrain Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and then set the 100% reference
pulse frequency to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).

Pulse Input Specifications Inverter

Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V

High level voltage 3.5 to 13.2 V

32 kHz max.
Heavy duty 30 to 70%
3.5 to 13.2 V
RP(Pulse train input termi-
Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz nal)
Pulse input
AC (Analog common)

Fig 6.9 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input

6-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With SYSDRIVE RV series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps, using 16 fre-
quency references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step
references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.

nRelated Parameters
To switch frequency references, set multi-step references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the multi-
function contact inputs.

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Parameter
Terminal Set Value Details
Number
Multi-step speed reference 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when
S4 H1-02 3
multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)

S5 H1-03 4 Multi-step speed reference 2

S6 H1-04 5 Multi-step speed reference 3

S7 H1-05 6 Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed reference)

Multi-step Speed by Combining Multi-Function Digital Inputs

The speed can be changed by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S7 (multi-function digital input termi-
nals) to set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection. The following table shows the
possible combinations.
TerminalS4 TerminalS5 TerminalS6 TerminalS7
Speed Multi-step Multi-step Multi-step Jog Fre- Selected Frequency
Speed Refer- Speed Refer- Speed Refer- quency
ence 1 ence 2 ence 3 Selection
1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency

2 ON OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency

3 OFF ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 3 d1-03

4 ON ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 4 d1-04

5 OFF OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 5 d1-05

6 ON OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 6 d1-06

7 OFF ON ON OFF Frequency reference 7 d1-07

8 ON ON ON OFF Frequency reference 8 d1-08

9 - - - * Jog frequency d1-17

ON

* Terminal S7's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed references.

6-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Frequency Reference

Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to speed 1 and speed 2, observe the following precautions.
• When setting terminal A1's analog input to speed 1, set b1-01 to 1, and when setting d1-01 (Frequency
Reference 1) to speed 1, set b1-01 to 0.
• When setting terminal A2's analog input to speed 2, set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When
setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to speed 2, set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).

nConnection Example and Time Chart

The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step
operation.

Inverter

S1 Forward/stop

S2 Reverse/stop

S3 Error reset
S4 Multi-step reference 1

S5 Multi-step reference 2

S6 Multi-step reference 3
S7 Jog frequency
SC Sequence common

Fig 6.10 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation

Frequency
reference 8
Frequency
reference 7
Frequency
reference 6
Frequency
reference 5
Frequency
reference 4
Frequency
Frequency reference 3
reference Frequency refer-
ence 2: Auxiliary
speed frequency
Frequency ref-
erence 1: Mas- Jog frequency
ter speed
frequency

Forward/stop

Multi-step speed
reference 1

Multi-step speed
reference 2
Multi-step speed
reference 3
Jog frequency
selection

Fig 6.11 Multi-step Speed Reference/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart

6-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.

K Selecting the Run Command Source

Set parameter b1-02 to select the source for the run command.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Operation method selec- Set the run command source.
tion 0: Digital operator
b1-02 1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input) 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Run Source
3: Option Card

nPerforming Operations Using a Digital Operator

When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,
JOG, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3.

nPerforming Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals

When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.

Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence

The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward opera-
tion will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control cir-
cuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter
will stop.

Inverter
Forward/stop

Reverse/stop

Sequence common

Fig 6.12 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example

6-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Run Command

Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence

By selecting 0 for any parameter from H1-01 to H1-05 (related to terminals S3 to S7), the selected terminal
functions as a forward/reverse run command, and terminals S1 and S3 change functions to 3-wire sequence
commands.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire sequence control (A1-03=3330), multi-function input 3 (terminal
S5) will be the forward/reverse direction.

Stop switch Operation switch

(NC contact) (NO contact)
Run command
(operates when ON)
Stop command
(stopped when OFF)
Forward/reverse direction
(multi-function input)
Sequence input common

Fig 6.13 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example

50 ms min.

Run command Can be either ON or OFF

OFF
Stop command (stopped)

Forward/reverse OFF (forward) ON (reverse)

direction

Motor speed

Stop Forward Reverse Stop Forward

Fig 6.14 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart

Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run
command self-holding in the Inverter.

INFO

6-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.

K Selecting the Stopping Method

There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is set:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer

Set parameter b1-03 to select the stopping method.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Sets the stopping method when a stop command is

Stopping method selection input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
b1-03 0 to 3 0 No Q Q Q
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than coast to
stop, without regenerative operation.)
Stopping Method 3: Coast to stop with timer (Run commands are
ignored during deceleration time.)

Zero speed level (DC

injection braking starting Sets the frequency to start the DC injection brak-
frequency) ing in units of Hz when deceleration to stop is
0.0 to
b2-01 selected. 0.5 Hz No A A A
10.0
DC injection braking starts from E1-09 when b2-
DCInj Start Freq 01 < E1-09.

DC injection braking cur-

rent Sets the DC injection braking current as a percent, 0 to
b2-02 50% No A A A
with the Inverter rated current as 100%. 100
DCInj Current

DC injection braking time

Sets the DC injection braking time in seconds.
at stop The motor coasts to a stop after the deceleration 0.00
b2-04 time due to inertia. DC injection breaking stops to 0.50 s No A A A
coasting. 10.00
DCInj Time@Stop The value 0.00 disables DC injection.

6-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Stopping Methods

nDeceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor deceler-
ates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time
1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied
using the DC current set in b2-02 only for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-20 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.

Run command
ON OFF

Output frequency
Decelerates to stop at
deceleration time
DC injection brake

DC injection brake time

when stopping (b2-04)

Fig 6.15 Deceleration to Stop

nCoast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output
voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage to the
machine and inertia including the load.

Run command
ON OFF

Output frequency

Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted.

Fig 6.16 Coast to Stop

After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has
elapsed.

INFO

6-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nDC Braking Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 2, a wait is made for
the time set in L2-03 (Minimum Baseblock (BB) Time) and then the DC injection brake current set in b2-02 is
sent to the motor to apply a DC injection brake to stop the motor. The DC injection brake time is determined
by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency when the stop command is input.

DC injection brake time

Run command
ON OFF
b2-04 10
Output frequency

Inverter output voltage interrupted

DC injection brake

b2-04
Minimum baseblock DC injection brake time
time (L2-03) Output frequency at
stop command input
10 100% (maximum output frequency)

Fig 6.17 DC Injection Braking (DB) Stop

Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.

INFO

nCoast to Stop with Timer

If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output
is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until
the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the stop command is input and
the deceleration time.

Run command Operation wait time T

ON OFF ON OFF ON

Output Deceleration time

frequency (e.g., C1-02)

Inverter output voltage interrupted

Operation wait time T Minimum baseblock

time (L2-03)
Output frequency at
stop command input
Minimum output frequency 100% (Maximum output frequency)

Fig 6.18 Coast to Stop with Timer

6-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Stopping Methods

K Using the DC Injection Brake

Set parameter b2-03 to apply the DC injection brake voltage to the motor while it is coasting to a stop, to stop
the motor and then restart it.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

DC injection braking cur-

rent
Set the DC Injection Braking Current as a percent- 0 to
b2-02 50% No A A A
age of the Inverter rated current. 100
DCInj Current

DC injection braking time Used to set the time to perform DC injection brak-
at start
ing at start in units of 1 second. 0.00
b2-03 Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When to 0.00 s No A A A
the set value is 0, DC injection braking at start is 10.00
DCInj Time@Start not performed.

nInputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals

If a multi-function input terminal (H1-oo) is set to 60 (DC injection brake command), the DC injection
brake is applied to the motor by turning ON the terminal (the DC injection brake command) when the Inverter
is being stopped.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.

DC injection brake command

FRUN

Output frequency

DC injection brake E1-09 b2-01 DC injection brake

If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, or if the run command
and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will
resume.

Fig 6.19 DC Injection Brake Time Chart

6-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nChanging the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) is set to 6 (DC injection brake
current), the DC injection brake current level is specified by the analog input.
At 10 V input (voltage) or 20 mA input (current), 100% of the Inverter rated current will be applied.

DC injection brake voltage level

Inverter rated current

If you set this parameter to 7 and use overtorque detection

in the multi-function output, you can apply the brake only
when overtorque detection 1 turns ON.

Fig 6.20 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input

K Using a Deceleration Stop from an External Input

Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-oo) to 15 or 17 (deceleration stop) to decelerate to a stop at the
deceleration time set in C1-09. If the deceleration stop uses normally open logic, set the multi-function input
terminal (H1-oo) to 15, and if it uses normally closed logic, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-oo)
to 17.
After deceleration stop command has been given from an external input, operation cannot be restarted until the
Inverter has stopped. To cancel the deceleration stop, turn OFF the run command and deceleration stop com-
mand.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Deceleration stop time The deceleration time when the multi-function

input “Deceleration stop” is ON. 0.0 to
C1-09 10.0 s No A A A
This function can be used a stopped method when 6000.0*
Fast Stop Time a fault has been detected.

* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings
range is 0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).

6-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.

K Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times

Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%. Deceleration
time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to reduce to 0%. The factory setting of the acceleration
time is C1-01, and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1-02.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Acceleration time 1
Set the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to
C1-01 Yes Q Q Q
the maximum output frequency, in 1-second units.
Accel Time 1

Deceleration time 1
Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output
C1-02 Yes Q Q Q
frequency to fall from 100% to 0%.
Decel Time 1

Acceleration time 2 Acceleration time when multi-function input

C1-03 "Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" is Yes A A A
Accel Time 2 ON.

Deceleration time 2 Deceleration time when multi-function input

C1-04 "Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" is Yes A A A
Decel Time 2 ON.
0.0 to
Acceleration time 3 Acceleration time when multi-function input 10.0 s
6000.0*
C1-05 "Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2" is No A A A
Accel Time 3 ON.

Deceleration time 3 Deceleration time when multi-function input

C1-06 "Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2" is No A A A
Decel Time 3 ON.

Acceleration time 4 Acceleration time when multi-function input

"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" and
C1-07 No A A A
Accel Time 4 "Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2" are
ON.

Deceleration time 4 Deceleration time when multi-function input

C1-08 "Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" and No A A A
Decel Time 4 "Acceleration/deceleration time 2" are ON.

Acceleration/deceleration
time setting unit 0: 0.01 s
C1-10 0 or 1 1 No A A A
1: 0.1 s
Acc/Dec Units

Set the frequency at which acceleration/decelera-

Acceleration/deceleration tion time switches automatically.
time switching frequency Less than set frequency: Acceleration/deceleration
time 4
0.0 to
C1-11 Set frequency or above: Acceleration/deceleration 0.0 Hz No A A A
400.0
time 1
Multi-function inputs "Acceleration/deceleration
Acc/Dec SW Freq
time selection 1" and "Acceleration/deceleration
time selection 2" are given priority.

6-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
S-curve characteristic time
at acceleration start 0.00 to
C2-01 0.20 s No A A A
2.50
SCrv Acc@ Start Set the S-curve characteristic time for each part in
seconds.
When you set the S-curve characteristic time, the
S-curve characteristic time start time and end time S-curve characteristic
at acceleration end time's acceleration/deceleration time is lengthened 0.00 to
C2-02 0.20 s No A A A
by 1/2 only. 2.50
SCrv ACC@ End
Run
command OFF
S-curve characteristic time ON
at deceleration start Output frequency
C2-02 C2-03 0.00 to
C2-03 0.20 s No A A A
2.50
SCrv Dec@ Start
C2-01 C2-04

S-curve characteristic time Time

at deceleration end 0.00 to
C2-04 0.00 s No A A A
2.50
SCrv Dec@ End

* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings
range is 0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).

nSetting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units

Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. Parameter C1-10 is set to 1 at the factory.
Set value Details

0 The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.

1 The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.1 s.

nSwitching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal

Commands
Using the Inverter, you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times. When the multi-function
input terminals (H1-oo) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/decel-
eration time selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combin-
ing the ON/OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
Selection 1 Terminal Selection 2 Terminal

OFF OFF C1-01 C1-02

ON OFF C1-03 C1-04
OFF ON C1-05 C1-06
ON ON C1-07 C1-08

nSwitching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically

Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the set frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration
time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.

6-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

Output frequency

Acceleration/
deceleration time
switching frequency
(C1-11)

C1-07 rate C1-01 rate C1-02 rate C1-08 rate

When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).

Fig 6.21 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency

nAdjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input

If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/decelera-
tion time gain), you can adjust the acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's input voltage.
The Inverter's acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C1-01 is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain

Acceleration/deceleration time gain (set value: 5)

(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to

10 V) = 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)

Fig 6.22 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input

6-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nEntering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and
stopping the machine.
Using the Inverter, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: Acceleration start
time, deceleration start time, acceleration end time, and deceleration end time.

Set the S-curve characteristic time to lengthen acceleration/deceleration time as follows:

Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (Deceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
INFO
Deceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2

Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.

Forward

Reverse

C2-02 C2-03 C2-04

Output frequency
C2-01
C2-04
C2-01

C2-02 C2-03

Fig 6.23 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching

K Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)

The dwell function stores the output frequency when starting or stopping heavy loads. By temporarily storing
the output frequency, the motor can be prevented from stalling.
The deceleration stop must be selected when using the dwell function. Set b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection)
to 0.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Dwell frequency at start 0.0 to
b6-01 ON
0.0 Hz No A A A
Dwell Ref@Start Run OFF 400.0
command
Dwell time at start Output
b6-02 frequency 0.0 to 0.0 s No A A A
Dwell Time@Start 10.0

Dwell frequency at stop b6-01 b6-03 0.0 to

b6-03 0.0 Hz No A A A
Dwell Ref@Stop Time 400.0
b6-02 b6-04
Dwell time at stop The dwell function is used to output a frequency
b6-04 temporarily when driving a motor with a heavy 0.0 to 0.0 s No A A A
Dwell Time@Stop load. 10.0

6-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

K Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention

During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is placed
on the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current exceeds the -15% level of the set value in L3-
02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor current accelerates to the value set in L3-02. With this
setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

0: Disabled (Accelerates according to the setting.

Stall prevention selection Motor may stall if the load is too great.)
during acceleration 1: Enabled (Acceleration stops when the level set
in L3-02 is exceeded. Acceleration restarts
L3-01 0 to 2 1 No A A A
using current value recovery.)
2: Optimum adjustment (Adjusts acceleration
StallP Accel Sel using the level set in L3-02 as the standard.
The acceleration time setting is ignored.)

Stall prevention level dur- Set as a percent taking the Inverter rated voltage to
ing acceleration be 100%.
L3-02 Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting. 0 to 200 120%* No A A A
Lower the set value if the motor stalls using the
StallP Accel Lvl
factory setting.

Stall prevention limit dur- If using the motor at a frequency higher than the
ing acceleration setting in E1-06, set the lower limit of the stall pre-
L3-03 vention level during acceleration as a percent, tak- 0 to 100 50% No A A A
ing the Inverter rated current to be 100%.
StallP CHP Lvl
Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting.

* Shows the initial value when C6-01 is set to 1. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value is 150%.

6-23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nTime Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.

Output current

Stall level during

acceleration

Time
Output frequency

Output frequency is controlled

to prevent the motor stalling.

Time

Fig 6.24 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration

nSetting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, or if the motor is operated using the fac-
tory settings, resulting in the motor stalling, lower the set value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
L3-03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being
reduced more than necessary.
• Set the parameters as a percent taking the inverter rated voltage to be 100%.

Stall prevention level during

acceleration

L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Accelera-

tion)

L3-02 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during Ac-

celeration)

Output frequency
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)

Fig 6.25 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration

6-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics

K Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During

Deceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Deceleration function makes the rate of deceleration more gentle to suppress
increases in DC bus voltage when the DC bus voltage exceeds the set value during motor deceleration.
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the bus voltage, even if the decel-
eration time has been set to a considerably small value.
If L3-04 is set to 1 or 2, when the main circuit DC voltage approaches the stall prevention level during decel-
eration, deceleration stops, and when deceleration falls below the level, is restarted. Using this operation,
deceleration time is automatically lengthened. If L3-04 is set to 1, deceleration time returns to the set value,
and if L3-04 is set to 2, deceleration is automatically adjusted to a faster deceleration time within the range of
the stall prevention level during deceleration.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
0: Disabled (Motor decelerates according to
setting. When the deceleration time is short,
Stall prevention selection there is a risk of main circuit overvoltage (0V)
during deceleration func- occurring.)
tion selection 1: Enabled (Prevents deceleration when main
circuit voltage reaches the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts after voltage has been
restored.)
L3-04 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q
2: Intelligent deceleration mode (Minimizes
deceleration judging from main circuit
voltage. The deceleration time setting is
ignored.)
StallP Decel Sel 3: Enabled (with dynamic braking)
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resis-
tor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be
sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0 or 3.

6-25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nSetting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 as shown below.

Output frequency Deceleration time controlled to

prevent overvoltage

Time

Deceleration time
(set value)

Fig 6.26 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation

nSetting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the Inverter capacity. Refer to the fol-
lowing table for details.
Inverter Capacity Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)

200 V class 380

E1-01 ≥ 400 V 760
400 V class
E1-01 < 400 V 660
• When using the braking option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be sure to set
parameter L3-04 to 0 or 3.
• To decelerate at a shorter time than the deceleration time set when L3-04 is set to 0 with the braking option
enabled, set L3-04 to 3.

6-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Adjusting Frequency References

Adjusting Frequency References

This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references.

K Adjusting Analog Frequency References

Gain and bias are among the parameters used to adjust analog inputs.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Signal select terminal A1
0: Voltage limit enabled (Below 0 V is 0 V)
(voltage)
H3-01 1: Voltage limit disabled 0 or 1 0 No A* A* A*
Set value 1 can be set for (-E) models.
Term A1 Lvl Sel

Gain (terminal A1)

Set the frequency during 10 V input as a percent, 0.0 to
H3-02 100.0% Yes A A A
taking max. output frequency to be 100%. 1000.0
Terminal A1 Gain

Bias (terminal A1) -100.0

Set the frequency during 0 V input as a percent,
H3-03 to 0.0% Yes A A A
taking max. output frequency to be 100%.
Terminal A1 Bias +100.0

Multi-function analog 0: Limit negative frequency settings for gain and

input terminal A2 signal bias settings to 0.
level selection 1: Do not limit negative frequency settings for
gain and bias settings to 0 (i.e., allow reverse
H3-08 0 to 2 2 No A A A
operation).
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Term A2 Signal
Switch current and voltage input using the switch
on the control panel.

Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 function Select multi-function analog input function for ter-
H3-09 selection 0 to 1F 0 No A A A
minal A2.
Terminal A2 Sel

Gain (terminal A2) Set the reference capacity for each function during
10 V (20 mA) input as a percent. 0.0 to
H3-10 100.0% Yes A A A
Set the 100% content function selected using H3- 1000.0
Terminal A2 Gain 09 to 100%.

Bias (terminal A2) Set the reference capacity for each function during
-100.0
0 V (4 mA) input as a percent.
H3-11 to 0.0% Yes A A A
Set the 100% content function selected using H3-
+100.0
Terminal A2 Bias 09 to 100%.

* For (-E) models.

nAdjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Parameters

The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using parameters H3-02
and H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal, perform
adjustments using H3-10 and H3-11.

6-27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Frequency reference Frequency reference

Terminal A1 Terminal A2 input

input voltage voltage (current)

Terminal A1 input Terminal A2 input

Fig 6.27 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs

nAdjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input

When H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using an analog input.

Frequency gain

Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 input level

Fig 6.28 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)

The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the sum of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02 is set
to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.

Frequency reference

100% H3-02

50% H3-02 0.5

Terminal A1 input voltage

0 10 V

nAdjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input

When parameter H3-09 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input volt-
age is added to A1 as a bias.

6-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Adjusting Frequency References

Frequency bias

Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 input level

Fig 6.29 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)

For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from
terminal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.

Frequency reference
H3-02

10%
Bias
Terminal A1 input voltage
0V 10 V

K Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)

The jump frequency function operates the motor while avoiding resonance caused by characteristic frequen-
cies in the machinery.
This function is effective in creating a frequency reference dead band.
During constant-speed operation, operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Smooth operation
still used during acceleration and deceleration, i.e., jumps are not performed.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Jump frequency 1
d3-01 Set the frequency center value at which to prohibit 0.0 Hz No A A A
Jump Freq 1 settings, in hertz.
Set to 0.0 to disable the jump frequency.
Jump frequency 2 Make sure the settings are as follows: d3-01 ≥ d3-
0.0 to
d3-02 02 ≥ d3-03. 0.0 Hz No A A A
400.0
Jump Freq 2 Operation within the jump frequency range is pro-
hibited. Changes during acceleration and decelera-
Jump frequency 3 tion are made gradually without performing
d3-03 jumps. 0.0 Hz No A A A
Jump Freq 3

Jump frequency width Set the jump frequency width in hertz.

0.0 to
d3-04 The jump frequency range is as follows: (Jump 1.0 Hz No A A A
20.0
Jump Bandwidth frequency ±d3-04).

6-29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:

Output frequency

Frequency reference descending

Jump frequency width d3-04

Frequency
reference
ascending
Jump
frequency
Jump width d3-04
frequency
width d3-04

Jump frequency reference

Jump Jump Jump
frequency frequency frequency
3 (d3-03) 2 (d3-02) 1 (d3-01)

Fig 6.30 Jump Frequency

nSetting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input

When parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) is set to A (jump fre-
quency), you can change the jump frequency using the terminal A2 input level.

Jump frequency

Max. output frequency

E1-04

Multi-function analog input

0V 10 V terminal A2 input level
(4 mA) (20 mA)

Fig 6.31 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input

nSetting Precautions
• Set the jump frequency according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 > Analog input.
• When parameters d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.

K Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs

The frequency reference can be adjusted when b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set
the pulse frequency in parameter H6-02 to 100% reference, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly
using H6-03 and H6-04.

6-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Adjusting Frequency References

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Pulse train input function 0: Frequency reference
H6-01 selection 1: PID feedback value 0 to 2 0 No A A A
Pulse Input Sel 2: PID target value

Pulse train input scaling

Set the number of pulses in Hz, taking the refer- 1000 to
H6-02 1440 Hz Yes A A A
Pulse In Scaling ence to be 100%. 32000

Pulse train input gain

Set the input gain level as a percent when the pulse 0.0 to
H6-03 100.0% Yes A A A
Pulse Input Gain train set in H6-02 is input. 1000.0

Pulse train input bias

-100.0 to
H6-04 Set the input bias when the pulse train is 0. 0.0% Yes A A A
Pulse Input Bias 100.0

Pulse train input filter time

Set the pulse train input primary delay filter time 0.00 to 0.10
H6-05 Yes A A A
Pulse In Filter constant in seconds. 2.00 s

The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the frequency reference using pulse inputs.

Gain and bias

Filter =0 Master speed
H6-03
RP frequency
Cycle 1 =1
PID feedback
measurement 1+sT H6-04
Pulse 0 100 PID target value
H6-05 =2
H6-01

Scaling using H6-02

Fig 6.32 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs

nSetting example
This example results in an output frequency of 30 Hz when a 2-kHz pulse is input (maximum frequency: 60
Hz).
2000 Hz: 30 Hz = Set value: 60 Hz
Set value = 2000 x 60/30 = 4000 Hz (4 kHz)

nSetting precautions
The pulse train inputs of the Inverter do not control positioning as they do for servomotors and stepper motors.
Speed control is thus absolutely necessary. Make adjustments with the following procedure.
1. First, adjust the pulse train input bias setting.
Adjust the output with respect to the pulse input near the minimum output frequency.
2. Next, adjust the pulse train input gain setting.
Adjust the output with respect to the pulse input near the maximum output frequency.

6-31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Func-
tion)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.

K Limiting Maximum Output Frequency

If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use parameter d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percent, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Fre-
quency) to be 100%.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Frequency reference upper
limit Set the output frequency upper limit as a percent, 0.0 to
d2-01 100.0% No A A A
taking the max. output frequency to be 100%. 110.0
Ref Upper Limit

K Limiting Minimum Frequency

If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use parameters d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multi-
step speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Frequency reference lower
limit Set the output frequency lower limit as a percent, 0.0 to
d2-02 0.0% No A A A
taking the base reference to be 100%. 110.0
Ref Lower Limit

Master speed reference

Set the master speed reference lower limit as a
lower limit 0.0 to
d2-03 percent, taking the max. output frequency to be 0.0% No A A A
110.0
100%.
Ref1 Lower Limit

6-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)

nAdjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input

If you set parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 9 (output fre-
quency lower level), you can adjust the frequency lower level using the terminal A2 input level.

Output frequency lower level

Max. output frequency

E1-04

Multi-function analog input

0V 10 V terminal A2 input level
(4 mA) (20 mA)

Fig 6.33 Analog Output Characteristics of Output Frequency Lower Level

If parameter d2-02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower level have been set at the same time, the larger
set value will become the frequency lower limit.

INFO

6-33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Improved Operating Efficiency
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.

K Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)

When the load is large, the amount of motor slip also grows large and the motor speed decreases. The slip
compensation function controls the motor at a constant speed, regardless of changes in load. When the motor
is operating at the rated load, parameter E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) × the frequency in parameter C3-01 is
added to the output frequency.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Use this parameter to improve speed accuracy
Slip compensation gain when operating under a load. Normally, there is no
need to make this setting.
Adjust parameter C3-01 under the following con-
C3-01 ditions: 0.0 to 2.5 0.0* Yes A No A
• Increase the set value when the speed falls to
Slip Comp Gain below the target value.
• Decrease the set value when the speed rises to
above the target value.

Set the primary delay time constant for the slip

Slip compensation pri- compensation function in seconds.
mary delay time Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Adjust parameter C3-02 under the following con-
0 to 2000 ms
C3-02 ditions: No A No A
10000 *
• When the slip compensation response is low,
lower the set value.
Slip Comp Time • When the speed is unstable, increase the set
value.

Slip compensation limit Set the upper limit of the compensation amount
0 to
C3-03 for the slip compensation function as a percent, 200% No A No A
250
Slip Comp Limit taking the motor rated slip amount to be 100%.

0: Slip compensation is disabled during

Slip compensation during regeneration.
regeneration 1: Slip compensation is enabled during
regeneration.
C3-04 If the slip compensation function operates during 0 or 1 0 No A No A
regeneration, you might have to use the braking
Slip Comp Regan option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, or
Braking Unit) to momentarily increase the regen-
erative amount.

Output voltage limit opera-

tion selection 0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux will be lowered auto-
C3-05 0 or 1 0 No No No A
matically when the output voltage become sat-
urated.)
V/F Slip Cmp Sel

* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)

6-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Improved Operating Efficiency

nAdjusting Slip Compensation Gain

The C3-01 parameter is initialized as shown below for the control method.
• V/f control without PG: 0.0
• Open loop vector control: 1.0

Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the rated slip set using the rated torque output status.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. Set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current) correctly.
The motor rated slip is calculated from the values on the motor nameplate using the following formula.
Amount of motor rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (r/min.) × No. of
motor poles / 120
Set the values for rated voltage, rated frequency, and no-load current in the motor unladen current. The
motor rated slip is set automatically in the vector control using autotuning.
2. In V/f control, set C3-01 to 1.0. Setting this parameter to 0.0 disables slip compensation.
3. Apply a load, and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation
gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if
the speed is greater than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.

nAdjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant

Set the slip compensation primary delay time constant in ms.
The factory setting is related to the control method as follows:
• V/f control without PG: 2000 ms
• Open loop vector control: 200 ms

Normally, there is no need to make these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set
value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.

nAdjusting Slip Compensation Limit

Set the upper limit for the slip compensation amount as a percent, taking the motor rated slip amount as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even when you adjust the slip compensation
gain, the motor may have reached the slip compensation limit. Increase the limit, and check the speed again.
Make the settings, however, to make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency
does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.

Slip compensation limit

Output frequency

E1-06: Base frequency

E1-04: Maximum output frequency

Fig 6.34 Slip Compensation Limit

6-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nSelecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration
Set whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration.
For the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, the braking option (braking resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit, and Braking Unit) may be useful to momentarily increase the regenerative amount.

nSelecting Output Voltage Limit Operation

If output voltage saturation occurs while the output voltage limit operation is disabled, the output current will
not change, but torque control accuracy will be lost. If torque control accuracy is required, change the settings
to enable the output voltage limit operation.
If the output voltage limit operation is enabled, motor magnetic flux current is controlled automatically, and
torque control accuracy is maintained to limit the output voltage references. Consequently, the output current
will increase by approximately 10% maximum (with rated load) compared with when the output voltage limit
operation is disabled, so check the Inverter current margin.

Setting Precautions
• If using the device at medium to low speed only, if the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than
the motor rated voltage, or if the torque control accuracy at high speeds is insufficient, it is not necessary to
change the output voltage limit operation.
• If the power supply voltage is too low compared with the motor rated voltage, torque control accuracy may
be lost even if the output voltage limit operation is enabled.

K Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Opera-

tion (Torque Compensation)
The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased, and increases the output torque.
V/f control calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the output voltage (V), and
compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate the compensation
voltage as follows: Motor primary voltage loss × parameter C4-01.
Vector control separates the motor excitation current and the torque current by calculating the motor primary
current, and controlling each of the two separately.
Calculate the torque current as follows: Calculated torque reference × C4-01

6-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Improved Operating Efficiency

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Set the torque compensation gain using the multi-

Torque compensation gain plication factor. Normally, there is no need to
change this parameter. Adjust the torque compen-
sation gain in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the motor is smaller than the maximum 0.00 to
C4-01 1.00 Yes A A A
applicable motor of the Inverter, increase the 2.50
set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this parameter so that the output current
Torq Comp Gain during low-speed rotation does not exceed the
Inverter rated output current range.

Set the primary delay for the torque compensation

Torque compensation pri- function in ms.
mary delay time constant
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Adjust this parameter in the following circum- 0 to 200 ms
C4-02 No A A A
stances. 10000 *1
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
Torq Comp Time
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set
value.

Starting torque value (for-

ward)
Sets the value based on 100% motor’s rated 0.0 to
C4-03
torque. 200.0
0.0% No No No A*2

F TorqCmp@start

Starting torque value

(reverse)
Sets the value based on 100% motor’s rated -200.0 to
C4-04
torque. 0.0
0.0% No No No A*2

R TorqCmp@start

Starting torque time con-

stant
Sets the rise time constant (ms) for the starting
C4-05 torque value. 0 to 200 10 ms No No No A*2
The filter is disabled if set between 0 and 4 ms.
TorqCmp Delay T

* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 2. The starting torque value can be set only for (-E) models.

nAdjusting Torque Compensation Gain

Normally, there is no need to make this adjustment. Do not adjust the torque compensation gain when using
open loop vector control.
For V/f control, adjust the torque compensation gain in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.

Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current range.

6-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nAdjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
The factory setting is related to the control method as follows:
• V/f control without PG: 200 ms
• V/f control with PG: 200 ms
• open loop vector control: 20 ms

Normally, there is no need to change the set value. The parameter can be adjusted as follows:
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.

K Hunting-prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This func-
tion can be used in V/f without PG and V/f with PG.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

0: Hunting-prevention function disabled

Hunting-prevention func- 1: Hunting-prevention function enabled
tion selection The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunt-
ing when the motor is operating with a light load.
N1-01 This function is enabled in V/f control method 0 or 1 1 No A A No
only.
If high response is to be given priority over vibra-
Hunt Prev Select tion suppression, disable the hunting-prevention
function.

Set the hunting-prevention gain multiplication fac-

Hunting-prevention gain tor.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
0.00 to
N1-02 • If vibration occurs with light load, increase the 1.00 No A A No
2.50
setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce the setting.
Hunt Prev Gain If the setting is too large, the voltage will be too
suppressed and the motor may stall.

6-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Improved Operating Efficiency

K Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function)

The speed feedback detection control (AFR) stabilizes the speed when a load changes swiftly.
The speed is compensated by the amount of fluctuation from the current feedback torque.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Speed feedback detection Set the internal speed feedback detection control
control (AFR) gain gain using the multiplication function.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
Adjust this parameter as follows: 0.00 to
N2-01 1.00 No No No A
• If hunting occurs, increase the set value. 10.00
• If response is low, decrease the set value.
AFR Gain Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time, while check-
ing the response.

Speed feedback detection

control (AFR) time con-
Set the time constant to decide the rate of change
N2-02 stant 0 to 2000 50 ms No No No A
in the speed feedback detection control.
AFR Time

Speed feedback detection

control (AFR) time con- Set the time constant to decide the amount of
N2-03 stant 2 0 to 2000 750 ms No No No A
change in the speed.
AFR Time 2

6-39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Machine Protection
This section explains functions for protecting the machine.

K Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)

The motor torque limit function is enabled only in open-loop vector control. The output torque to the motor is
calculated internally in open loop vector control. The Torque Limit Function limits this internal torque value
to output within a user set value.
This function is used when a load can handle only limited torque, or when limiting the regeneration amount.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Forward drive torque limit
L7-01 Set the torque limit value as a percent of the motor 0 to 300 200% No No No A
Torq Limit Fwd rated torque.
You can set up to four separate limits.
Reverse drive torque limit
L7-02 Output torque
0 to 300 200% No No No A
Torq Limit Rev Positive torque

Forward regenerative
torque limit Regenera- No. of motor
L7-03 Reverse tive status rotations 0 to 300 200% No No No A
Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn Regenera- Forward
tive status
Reverse regenerative
Negative torque
torque limit
L7-04 0 to 300 200% No No No A
Torq Lmt Rev Rgn

Multi-function Analog Input (H3-09)

Control Methods
Set Open
Function 100% of Contents V/f
Value Loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
10 Positive torque limit Motor rated torque No No Yes

11 Negative torque limit Motor rated torque No No Yes

12 Regenerative torque limit Motor rated torque No No Yes

15 Positive/negative torque limit Motor rated torque No No Yes

Note The forward torque limit is the limit value when the analog input signal generates forward torque. This torque limit setting is enabled even when the
analog input signal generates forward torque while the motor is operating (regeneration).

nSetting the Torque Limit in Parameters

Using L7-01 to L7-04, you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions: Forward drive,
reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration.

nSet the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input

You can change the analog input level torque limit value by setting the torque limit in multi-function analog
input terminal A2.
The analog input terminal signal level is factory-set as follows:
Multi-function analog input terminal A2: 4 to 20 mA (20 mA at input, torque limited to 100% motor rated
torque). The following diagram shows the relationship between the torque limits.

6-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Machine Protection

Output torque

Positive
Positive/negative torque limits
Forward torque limit

Regenerative torque limit

No. of motor rotations
Reverse operation Forward operation

Regenerative torque limit

Negative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Negative

Fig 6.35 Torque Limit by Analog Input

nSetting Torque Limits Using Parameters and an Analog Input

The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using parameters and torque limit
using an analog input.
The lowest torque limit set from among the following is enabled: Torque limit using parameters, torque limit
using an analog input, 150% of Inverter rating (when set to CT), or 120% of Inverter rating (when set to VT)
set in C6-01.

Multi-function analog input Positive forward drive

Reverse positive regenerative torque
torque
Forward torque limit
Terminal (set value = 10)
A2 Forward negative regenerative torque
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11) Min: Minimum value priority circuit
Regenerative torque limit
(set value = 12) Reverse
Positive/negative torque limit drive
(set value = 15) reverse
torque
Forward torque limit
Forward torque limit
(L7-01)
Reverse torque limit Reverse torque limit
(L7-02)
Parame- Forward regenerative torque Forward regenerative
limit (L7-03) torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque Reverse regenerative
limit (L7-04) torque limit
175% of Inverter rated current

Fig 6.36 Torque Limit Using Parameters and an Analog Input

6-41
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nSetting Precautions
• When the torque limit function is operating, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled
because torque control is given priority.
• When using the torque limit to raise and lower loads, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this
may result in the motor falling or slipping.
• Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value (during 10 V or 20 mA input) of 100% of the
motor rated torque. To make the torque limit value during 10 V or 20 mA input 150% of the rated torque,
set the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using
H3-10.
• The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at the output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is less
than 10 Hz, accuracy is lowered.

K Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation

Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's
output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation is enabled only during V/f control. If the Inverter output current continues to
exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable
or disable deceleration time using parameter L3-05. Set the deceleration time using C1-02 (Acceleration time
1) or C1-04 (Acceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 - 2% (Inverter Rated Output Current), the motor
will accelerate again at the frequency set or the acceleration time set.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Stall prevention selection 0: Disabled (Operates according to the setting.
during running function Motor may stall when the load is large.)
selection 1: Enabled--Deceleration time 1 (Stall prevention
function during operation deceleration time is
L3-05 0 to 2 1 No A A No
set in C1-02.)
2: Enabled--Deceleration time 2 (Stall prevention
StallP Run Sel
function during operation deceleration time is
set in C1-04.)

Stall prevention level dur- Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. Set as a per-
ing running cent, taking Inverter rated current to be 100%.
L3-06 Normally, there is no need to make this setting. 30 to 200 120% No A A No
*
Lower the set value if the motor stalls at the fac-
StallP Run Level tory setting.

* The initial value when C6-01 is set to 1 is given. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value will be 150%.

6-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Machine Protection

K Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input

If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 8 (stall prevention during
operation level), you can change the stall level during operation by setting H3-10 (Gain (Terminal A2)) and
H3-11 (Bias (Terminal A2)).
The stall prevention level during operation enabled is the multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
or the set value in parameter L3-06, whichever is the smaller.

Stall prevention level during operation

Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 input level

(4 mA) (8.8 mA) (20 mA)

Fig 6.37 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input

If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory set-
tings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.

INFO

K Detecting Motor Torque

If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overtorque) or the load is suddenly lightened (undertorque),
an alarm signal can be set to multi-function output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4/P1-PC, or M5-M6/P2-PC.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/
NC) in one of the following parameters: H2-01 to H2-03 (selects functions for multi-function output terminals
M1-M2, M3-M4/P1-PC, or M5-M6/P2-PC).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level (Inverter rated output current 100%) in V/f
control, and the motor torque (motor rated torque 100%) in vector control.

6-43
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.

1: Overtorque detection only with speed agree-
ment; operation continues after overtorque
(warning).
2: Overtorque detected continuously during oper-
Torque detection selection ation; operation continues after overtorque
1 (warning).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed agree-
ment; output stopped upon detection (pro-
tected operation).
4: Overtorque detected continuously during oper-
ation; output stopped upon detection (pro-
L6-01 tected operation). 0 to 8 0 No A A A
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agree-
ment; operation continues after overtorque
(warning).
6: Undertorque detected continuously during
operation; operation continues after over-
torque (warning).
Torq Det 1 Sel
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agree-
ment; output stopped upon detection (pro-
tected operation).
8: Undertorque detected continuously during
operation; output stopped upon detection (pro-
tected operation).

Torque detection level 1 Open-loop vector control: Motor rated torque is

L6-02 set as 100%. 0 to 300 150% No A A A
Torq Det 1 Lvl V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.

Torque detection time 1

Set the overtorque/undertorque detection time in 0.0 to
L6-03 0.1 s No A A A
1-second units. 10.0
Torq Det 1 Time

Torque detection selection

2
L6-04 0 to 8 0 No A A A
Torq Det 2 Sel

Output of torque detection 1 is enabled by setting

Torque detection level 2 17 for H2-oo and output of torque detection 1 is 0 to
L6-05 enabled by setting 18 or 18 for H2-oo. 150% No A A A
300
Torq Det 2 Lvl

Torque detection time 2 0.0 to

L6-06 0.1 s No A A A
Torq Det 2 Time 10.0

Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
Set Open
Function V/f
Value Loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO
B Yes Yes Yes
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)

Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC
17 Yes Yes Yes
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)

Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO
18 Yes Yes Yes
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)

Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC
19 Yes Yes Yes
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)

6-44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Machine Protection

nL6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and LED Indicators

The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is
detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
LED Indicator
Set Overtorque/ Overtorque/
Function
Value Undertorque Undertorque
Detection 1 Detection 2

0 Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled. - -

Overtorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
1 OL3 flashes OL4 flashes
overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
2 OL3 flashes OL4 flashes
after overtorque (warning).
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detec-
3 OL3 lit OL4 lit
tion (protected operation).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
4 OL3 lit OL4 lit
detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
5 UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
6 UL3 flashes UL4 flashes
after overtorque (warning).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon
7 UL3 lit UL4 lit
detection (protected operation).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
8 UL3 lit UL4 lit
detection (protected operation).

nSetting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection

Motor current (output torque)

* *
L6-02 or L6-05

Overtorque detection 1 NO L6-03 or L6-03 or

or overtorque detection 2 NO L6-06 L6-06
ON ON

* Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque).

6-45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • Undertorque Detection

Motor current (output torque)

*
L6-02 or L6-05

L6-03 L6-03
Undertorque detection 1 NO
or or
or Undertorque detection 2 NO
L6-06 ON L6-06 ON

The undertorque detection disabled margin is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque)

K Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Ana-

log Input
If you set parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 7 (overtorque/
undertorque detection level), you can change the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
If you change the overtorque/undertorque detection level using the multi-function analog input, only over-
torque/undertorque detection level 1 will be enabled.
The following diagram shows the overtorque/undertorque detection level using an analog input.

Detection level

Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 input level
(4 mA) (20 mA)

Fig 6.38 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input

Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)

Control Methods
Set Open
Function Content at 100% V/f
Value loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
Motor rated torque (vector control), Inverter rated current (V/f con-
7 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Yes Yes Yes
trol)

6-46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Machine Protection

K Motor Overload Protection

You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Motor rated current Set the motor rated current in amps.
0.32 to
This set value becomes the base value for motor 1.90 A
E2-01 6.40 No Q Q Q
protection and torque limit. It is set automatically *1
Motor Rated FLA *2
when using autotuning.

Motor 2 rated current Set the motor rated current in Amps.

0.32
This set value becomes the base value for motor 1.90 A
E4-01 to 6.40 No A A A
Motor Rated FLA protection and torque limit. It is set automatically *1
*2
when using autotuning.

Set to enable or disable the motor overload protec-

tion function using the electronic thermal relay.
Motor protection selection 0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
2: Inverter special motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
L1-01 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q
With applications where the power supply is often
turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit
cannot be protected even if this parameter has
MOL Fault Select been set to 1, as the thermal value will be reset. If
multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set
this parameter to 0, and install a thermal relay in

Motor protection time con- Set the electronic thermal detection time in min-
stant utes.
0.1 to
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
5.0 1.0 min
L1-02 The factory setting is resistance at 150% for 1 min. No A A A
(0.1 to (8.0 min)
If the motor overload resistance is clear, set the
20.0)
overload resistance protection time during hot
MOL Time Const
start to suit the motor.

* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. The settings range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)

Multi-Function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
Set Open
Function V/f
Value Loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
1F Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level) Yes Yes Yes

6-47
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nSetting Motor Rated Current
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2-01 (for motor 1) and E4-01 (for motor 2).
This set value is the electronic thermal base current.

nSetting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics

Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities differ according to the speed control range. Consequently, you must
select the electronic thermal protection characteristics to match the applicable motor's tolerance load charac-
teristics.
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.
L1-01
Electronic Thermal Opera-
Set Motor Type Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability
tion (at 100% Motor Load)
Value

Short time 60 Rated rotation

speed = 100%

3.7 kW max.
5.5 to 15 kW Use this motor for
18.5 kW When operating continu-
operations using a
ously at 50/60 Hz or less,
Torque (%)

80% ED or Frame number

Max. 30 min. speed of 200 LJ commercial power
General-purpose 50% ED or 30 motor overload detection
supply. This motor
1 motor (standard (OL1) is detected. The
Frame construction yields
motor) Continuous number Inverter outputs the error
Max. best cooling effect
speed of Frame number Max.
contact, and the motor
200 LJ
min.
speed of 160 MJ to 160 when operating at 50/
Frame number coasts to a stop.
Max. speed of 132 60 Hz.

Rotation speed

Rated rotation
Short time 60 speed = 100%
Torque (%)

This motor yields a

Inverter motor cooling effect even
Operates continuously at 6
2 (constant torque) when operating at
Continuou to 50/60 Hz.
(1:10) Frame number
low speeds (approx.
Max. speed of 200
Frame number Max.
6 Hz).
speed of 160 MJ to 180
Frame number
Max. speed of 132

Rotation speed

Rated rotation
Short time 60 s. speed = 100%
Torque (%)

This motor yields a

cooling effect even
Vector motor Operates continuously at
3 Continuou when operating at
(1:100) Frame number 0.6 to 60 Hz.
Max. speed of
200 LJ min.
extremely low speeds
Frame number Max.
(approx. 0.6 Hz).
speed of 160 MJ to 180
Frame number
Max. speed of 132

Rotation speed (%)

6-48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Machine Protection

nSetting Motor Protection Operation Time

Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 150% overload is experienced, set the (hot
start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 150% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation
time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 60 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)

Operating time (min.)

Cold start

Hot start

Motor current (%)

E2-01 is set to 100%

Fig 6.39 Motor Protection Operation Time

nSetting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set parameter L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect the motor,
install a thermal relay in the motor power cable, and perform overload protection on each motor.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit can-
not be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset.
• To detect overloads in good time, set the set value in parameter L1-02 to a low setting.

• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f1/4 (fre-
quency). Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below
the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor.

nSetting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm

If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to other than 0) and you set H2-01 to
H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, M3-M4, M5-M6, and P2-PC function selection) to 1F
(motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value
reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.

6-49
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC
(Positive Temperature Coefficient) built into the windings of each motor phase.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Set H3-09 to E, and select the operation when the
Alarm operation selection input motor temperature (thermistor) input
during motor overheating exceeds the alarm detection level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
L1-03 1: Coast to stop 0 to 3 3 No A A A
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.
Mtr OH Alarm Sel
3: Continue operation (H3 on the Digital Opera-
tor flashes).

Set H3-09 to E, and select the operation when the

Motor overheating opera-
tion selection motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the
operation detection level (2.34 V).
L1-04 0: Decelerate to stop 0 to 2 1 No A A A
1: Coast to stop
Mtr OH Fault Sel 2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in
C1-09.

Motor temperature input

filter time constant Set H3-09 to E, and set the primary delay time
0.00 to
L1-05 constant for motor temperature (thermistor) inputs 0.20 s No A A A
10.00
in seconds.
Mtr Temp Filter

nPTC Thermistor Characteristics

The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.

Class F Class H
Resistance (ohms) 180
150

1330

Tr: Temperature threshold value

550

Temperature
Tr

Tr 5 Tr Tr+5

Fig 6.40 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics

6-50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Machine Protection

nOperation during Motor Overheating

Set the operation if the motor overheats in parameters L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter
time parameter in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digi-
tal Operator.

Error Codes If the Motor Overheats

Error Code Details

OH3 Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.

OH4 Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04.
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature
input), you can detect alarm OH3 or OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics, and protect the
motor. The terminal connections are shown in the following diagram.

Inverter
Multi-function Multi-function
contact input contact output

Fault contact Note:The portion in dotted lines

output can also be as follows:

Branch resistance
18 kΩ
M3 Multi-
M4 function
contact
M5
Multi-function outputs
PTC thermistor M6
PHC output

Fig 6.41 Mutual Connections During Motor Overheating Protection

K Limiting Motor Rotation Direction

If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted even if it is input.
Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Prohibition of reverse
0: Reverse enabled
operation 0 or 1
b1-04 1: Reverse disabled 0 No A A A
(0 to 2)*
Reverse Oper 2: Switch phase order (reverse enabled)*

* Can be set only for (-E)) model. Disabled for V/f with PG.

6-51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Continuing Operation
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation even if an
error occurs.

K Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored

Even if a temporary power loss occurs, you can restart the Inverter automatically after power is restored to
continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after power is restored, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, when power is restored within the time set in L2-02, the Inverter will restart. If the time set
in L2-02 is exceeded, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, when the main power supply is restored while the control power supply (i.e., power supply
to the control panel) is backed up, the Inverter will restart. Consequently, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervolt-
age) will not be detected.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
0: Disabled (main circuit undervoltage (UV)
Momentary power loss detection)
detection 1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns
within the time for L2-02. When L2-02 is
L2-01 exceeded, main circuit undervoltage detec- 0 to 2 0 No A A A
tion.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts
PwrL Selection
when power returns during control operations.
Does not detect main circuit undervoltage.)

Momentary power loss

ridethru time Ridethrough time, when momentary power loss 0.1 s
L2-02 0 to 2.0 No A A A
selection (L2-01) is set to 1, in units of seconds. *1
PwrL Ridethru t

Set the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time in

Min. baseblock (BB) time units of one second, when the Inverter is restarted
after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor 0.1 s
L2-03 0.1 to 5.0 *1 No A A A
secondary circuit time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when
PwrL Baseblock t starting a speed search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.

Set the time required to return the Inverter output

Voltage recovery time
voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a
0.0 to
L2-04 speed search, in units of one second.
5.0 0.3 s*1 No A A A
Set the time required to recover from 0 V to the
PwrL V/F Ramp t
maximum voltage.

Undervoltage (UV) detec- Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection
tion level level (main circuit DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary. 150 to
L2-05 190 V No A A A
Insert an AC reactor in the Inverter input side to 210 *2
*2
lower the main circuit undervoltage detection
PUV Det Level
level.

* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.

nSetting Precautions
• Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that run commands from the
control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.

6-52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Continuing Operation

• If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss
exceeds 15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.

K Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of the motor that is rotating using inertia, and then starts
smoothly from that speed. When restoring power after a temporary power loss, the speed search function
switches connection from the commercial power supply, and then restarts, for example, a fan that is rotating
due to the mechanical inertia.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- LCD Dis- Range Setting Opera- Loop
V/f with
ber play tion Vec-
PG
tor

Enables/disables the speed search function for the run com-

Speed search mand and sets the speed search method.
selection (cur- 0: Disabled, speed calculation
rent detection 1: Enabled, speed calculation
or speed cal- 2: Disabled, current detection
culation) 3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation
b3-01 When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated and 0 to 3 2*1 No A A A
acceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated
speed to the specified frequency (motor direction is also
searched).
Slip Comp Current Detection
Gain The speed search is started from the frequency when power
was momentarily lost and the maximum frequency, and the
speed is detected at the search current level.

Speed search
operating cur- Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking
rent (current
the Inverter rated current as 100%. 0 to
b3-02 detection) 120% No A No A
Not usually necessary to set. When restarting is not possible 200
with the factory settings, reduce the value.
Spd Srch Cur-
rent

Speed search
deceleration
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed
time (current search in 1-second units. 0.1 to
b3-03 detection) 2.0 s No A No A
Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output fre- 10.0
SpdSrch Dec quency to the minimum output frequency.
time

Speed search
wait time
(current Sets the contactor operating delay time when there is a contac-
detection or tor on the output side of the Inverter. When a speed search is 0.0 to
b3-05 0.2 s No A A A
speed calcula- performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the 20.0
tion) search operation is delayed by the time set here.

Search Delay

Min. base- Sets the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time in units of one sec-
block time ond, when the inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor secondary
L2-03
circuit time constant.
0.1 to 5.0 0.1 s *2 No A A A
PwrL Base-
If an overcurrent or undercurrent occurs when starting a speed
block t
search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.

Voltage Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage to
recovery time normal voltage at the completion of a speed search, in units of
0.0 to
L2-04 one second.
5.0 0.3 s*2 No A A A
PwrL V/F Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum
Ramp t voltage.

* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 2. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)

6-53
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Control Methods
Set Open
Function V/f
Value Loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
External search command 1
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
61 Yes No Yes
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed, and start search from estimated speed)
Current detection (Start speed search from maximum output frequency)

External search command 2

OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed estimation (Estimate the motor speed, and start search from estimated speed) (Same operation as exter-
62 Yes No Yes
nal search command 1)
Current detection: Start speed search from set frequency (reference frequency when search command was
input).

nSetting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error may occur. Set either external search command 1 or
external search command 2.
• If speed search during startup is selected when using V/f control with PG, the Unit will start from the fre-
quency detected by PG.
• If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the period
when the run command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum Base-
block Time (L2-03).
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search
Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time
by making the setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed
search.
• Parameter b3-02 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When
the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed, and the motor acceler-
ates or decelerates to the set frequency. If the motor cannot restart, lower the set value.
• If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss, lengthen
the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).

nApplication Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed

• When using V/f control with or without a PG, always perform stationary autotuning for only line-to-line
resistance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
• When using open loop vector control, always perform rotational autotuning before using speed searches
based on estimated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, per-
form stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance again.

The motor will not operate when stationary autotuning or stationary autotuning only for line-to-line
resistance is performed.
IMPORTANT

6-54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Continuing Operation

nSpeed Search Selection

Set whether to enable or disable speed search at startup, and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or
current detection) using setting b3-01. To perform speed search when inputting the run command, set b3-01 to
1 or 3.

Table 6.1 Search Methods

Search Name Estimated Speed Current Detection

Estimates the motor speed when the search

Starts speed search from the frequency when
starts, and accelerates and decelerates from the
the temporary power loss was detected, or from
Search Method estimated speed to the set frequency. You can
the highest frequency, and performs speed
also search including direction of motor rota-
detection at the current level during the search.
tion.
External speed search command 1:
External search command 1 and external Starts speed search from the maximum output
External Speed Search search command 2 become the same operation, frequency.
Command estimating the motor speed and starting the External speed search command 2:
search from the estimated speed. Starts speed search from the frequency refer-
ence set before the search command.
Cannot be used multi-motor drives, motors two
Application Precau- In control method without PG, the motor may
or more frames smaller than the Inverter capac-
tions accelerate suddenly with light loads.
ity, and high-speed motors (130 Hz min.)

nEstimated Speed Search

The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below.

Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals us shown
below.

OFF ON Set frequency

Run command reference
Start using
speed detected
Output frequency
b3-02

Output current
1.0 s
Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).

Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.7

Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a short time,
the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.

Fig 6.42 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed)

6-55
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)

AC power supply ON OFF Set frequency

Start using
reference
speed detected

Output frequency

Output current
10 ms

*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency

*2 immediately before the baseblock.
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1 *2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).

Fig 6.43 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)

• Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)

AC power supply ON OFF Start using speed detected

Set frequency
reference
Output frequency

Output current
10 ms

Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time

(L2-03) (b3-05)

Fig 6.44 Speed Search After Baseblock (Estimated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)

nCurrent Detection Speed Search

The time charts for current detection speed search is shown below.

Speed Search at Startup

The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.

6-56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Continuing Operation

OFF ON Deceleration time set in b3-03

Run command
Maximum output Set frequency
frequency or reference
set frequency
Output frequency
b3-02

Output current
* * Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)

Fig 6.45 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection)

Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time

AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss

Set frequency
Deceleration reference
time set in b3-03
Output frequency
b3-02
speed search operating current

Output current
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before baseblock.
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) *1 *2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum
Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
*2

Fig 6.46 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)

• Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time

AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss

Set frequency
Deceleration speed set in b3-03 reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Speed search operating time

Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)

Minimum baseblock time

(L2-03)

Fig 6.47 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)

6-57
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is
Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation using 80% speed of the frequency refer-
ence before loss when the frequency reference using an analog input is reduced 90% or more in 400 ms.
When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function
contact output terminal M1-M2, P1-PC/M3-M4, and P2-PC/M5-M6 function selection) to C (frequency refer-
ence lost).

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Operation when frequency 0: Stopped (Operation follows frequency refer-

reference is missing ence.)
1: Operation at 80% speed continues (At 80% of
L4-05 speed before the frequency reference was 0 or 1 0 No A A A
lost.)
Ref Loss Sel Frequency reference is lost: Frequency reference
dropped over 90% in 400 ms.

Frequency reference for

Enables operation selection when frequency ref-
loss of frequency reference
erence is lost and operation at the following 0.0 to
L4-06
speed: 100.0%
80.0 No A* A* A*
Fref at Floss (Speed prior to loss) x L4-06

* For (-E) models only. Otherwise always 80.0%.

K Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function)

If an Inverter error occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in parameter L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following faults. If an fault not listed below occurs, the protec-
tion function will operate and the auto restart function will not.
• OC (Overcurrent) • RH (Braking resistor overheated)
• GF (Ground fault) • RR (Braking transistor fault)
• PUF (Fuse blown) • OL1 (Motor overload)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage) • OL2 (Inverter overload)

• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)* • OH1 (Motor overheat)

• PF (Main circuit voltage fault) • OL3 (Overtorque)

• LF (Output phase failure) • OL4 (Overtorque)

* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)

6-58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Continuing Operation

nAuto Restart External Outputs

To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-
M4, M5-M6, P1-PC, and P2-PC function selection) to 1E (auto restart).

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Number of auto restart Set the number of auto restarts attempts.
attempts
L5-01 Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a 0 to 10 0 No A A A
Num of Restarts speed search from the run frequency.

Auto restart operation Sets whether a fault contact output is activated

selection during fault restart.
L5-02 0 or 1 0 No A A A
0: Not output (Fault contact is not activated.)
Restart Sel 1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)

n Application Precautions
• The number of auto restarts count is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
After the protection operation has been performed, and the error has been verified, and an error reset
has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
• Do not use the auto restart function with variable loads.

6-59
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Inverter Protection
This section explains the functions for protecting the Inverter and the braking resistor.

K Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors

Perform overheating protection on Inverter-mounted braking resistors (3G3IV-PERFo).
When overheating in a mounted braking resistor is detected, an alarm RH (Mounted braking resistor overheat-
ing) is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to a stop.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Protect selection for inter-
nal DB resistor 0: Disabled (no overheating protection)
L8-01 0 or 1 0 No A A A
1: Enabled (overheating protection)
DB Resistor Prot

Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)

Control Methods
Open
Set Value Details V/f
Loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
D Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheats or brake transistor fault) Yes Yes Yes

The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) being detected are that the deceleration
time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration
time or replace the Braking Resistor Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity.
INFO

6-60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Inverter Protection

K Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels

The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermistor, and protects the Inverter from
overheating. You can receive Inverter overheating pre-alarms in units of 10°C.
The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Stopping the Inverter as error protection, and
continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fins overheating) on the Digital Operator flashing.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Overheat pre-alarm level Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter
overheat detection pre-alarm in °C.
L8-02 50 to 130 95°C No A A A
The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin tem-
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl perature reaches the set value.

Operation selection after Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat
overheat pre-alarm pre-alarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
L8-03 0 to 3 3 No A A A
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C1-09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.)
OH Pre-Alarm Sel A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor
fault will be given in setting 3.

6-61
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Input Terminal Functions
This section explains input terminal functions, which set operating methods by switching functions for the
multi-function contact input terminals (S3 to S7).

K Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control

Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an output from H1-01 to
H1-05 (multi-function input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote selection).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Set the frequency reference input method.

Reference selection 0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
b1-01 0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Reference Source 3: Option Card
4: Pulse input

Operation method selec- Set the run command input method

tion 0: Digital Operator
b1-02 1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input) 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Run Source 3: Option Card

You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When
the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
INFO

6-62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Input Terminal Functions

K Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)

Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function input ter-
minal S3 to S7 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation,
and prohibit Inverter voltage output using the baseblock commands.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from frequency references from the
previous baseblock command input.

Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Control Methods
Set Open
Function V/f
Value Loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
8 External baseblock NO (Normally Open contact: Baseblock when ON) Yes Yes Yes

9 External baseblock NC (Normally Closed contact: Baseblock when OFF) Yes Yes Yes

nTime Chart
The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below.

Forward operation/Stop
Input Cleared
Baseblock command

Frequency reference

Search from stored frequency reference

Output frequency

Coast to a stop

Fig 6.48 Baseblock Commands

If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during oper-
ation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in the motor falling or slipping.

IMPORTANT

6-63
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold)
The acceleration/deceleration ramp hold function stops acceleration and deceleration, stores the output fre-
quency at that point in time, and then continues operation.
Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to A
(acceleration/deceleration ramp hold) to stop acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned ON
and to store the output frequency at that point in time. Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the ter-
minal is turned OFF.
If d4-01 is set to 1 and the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input, the output frequency is
still stored even after the power supply is turned OFF.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Set whether or not frequencies on hold will be

Frequency reference hold recorded.
function selection 0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the
power is turned ON again starts at 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the
d4-01 0 or 1 0 No A A A
power is turned ON again starts at the previ-
ous hold frequency.)
MOP Ref Memory This function is available when the multi-function
inputs “Accel/Decel Ramp Hold” or “up/down”
commands are set.

nTime Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.

Power supply

Forward/Stop

Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold

Frequency reference

Output frequency

Hold Hold

Fig 6.49 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold

6-64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Input Terminal Functions

nApplication Precautions
• When d4-01 is set to 1, the output frequency on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. If
performing operations using this frequency after the Inverter has also been turned OFF, input the run com-
mand with the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON.
• When d4-01 is set to 0 and a run command is input while the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold is
turned ON, the output frequency will be set to zero.
• If you input an Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during posi-
tioning, deceleration may be canceled.

K Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/

DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S7.
To use this function, set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function input terminal S3 to S7 func-
tion selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the
UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair.
The output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration time. Be sure to set b1-02 (Run command
selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Frequency reference upper
limit Set the output frequency upper limit as a percent, 0.0 to
d2-01 100.0% No A A A
taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%. 110.0
Ref Upper Limit

Frequency reference lower

limit Set the output frequency lower limit as a percent- 0.0 to
d2-02 0.0% No A A A
age of the maximum output frequency. 110.0
Ref Lower Limit

Master speed reference

Set the master speed frequency reference lower
lower limit 0.0 to
d2-03 limit as a percent, taking the maximum output fre- 0.0% No A A A
110.0
quency to be 100%.
Ref1 Lower Limit

nPrecautions
When setting and using UP and DOWN commands, observe the following precautions.

Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S7 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function
input selection) will occur:
• Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
• UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.

6-65
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Application Precautions
• Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower
limits set in parameters d2-01 to d2-03. Here, frequency references from analog frequency reference termi-
nal A1 becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference
from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either parameter d2-02 or d2-03, the larger
lower limit will become the frequency reference lower limit.
• If inputting the run command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates to the
frequency reference lower limit.
• When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
• When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference held using
the UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is
turned ON and the run command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been
stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while
the run command is ON.

nConnection Example and Time Chart

The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input
terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Parameter Name Set Value

H1-01 Multi-function input (terminal S3) 10

H1-02 Multi-function input (terminal S4) 11

Inverter

Forward
operation/Stop

Reverse
operation/Stop
Up command

Down command
Sequence
0 to 10 V analog common
signal Frequency
reference lower limit

Fig 6.50 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated

6-66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Input Terminal Functions

Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit Same
frequency

Lower limit

Forward operation/stop

UP command
Reference
frequency reset
DOWN command

Frequency
matching signal*

Power supply

* The frequency matching signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/
decelerating while the run command is ON.

Fig 6.51 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart

6-67
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog Refer-
ences (+/- Speed)
The +/- speed function increments or decrements the frequency set in analog frequency reference d4-02 (+/-
Speed Limit) using two contact signal inputs.
To use this function, set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function terminal inputs S3 to S7 func-
tion selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command). Be sure to
allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command can
be used as a pair.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
Open Parame-
eter Setting Factory during V/f
Description Loop ter Num-
Num- LCD Display Range Setting Opera- V/f with
Vec- ber
ber tion PG
tor
Set the frequency to be add to or subtracted
+/- speed limits from the analog frequency reference as a per-
cent, taking the maximum output frequency to
d4-02 be 100%. 0 to 100 10% No A A A 299H
Enabled when the increase (+) speed command
Trim Control
or decrease (-) speed command is set for a
Lvl
multi-function input.

nTrim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference

The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown
below.
Set Frequency Refer- Set Frequency Refer-
Frequency Reference
Frequency Reference ence ence
(d4-02 not added or subtracted)
+ d4-02 - d4-02

Trim Control Increase

ON OFF ON OFF
Command Terminal
Trim Control Decrease
OFF ON ON OFF
Command Terminal

nApplication Precautions
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference is
from an analog input.
• When the master speed frequency reference value from the analog input - d4-02 < 0, the frequency refer-
ence is set to 0.
• The auxiliary frequency reference is added after calculating the master speed frequency reference ±d4-02.
• If only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S7, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected)
will occur.

6-68
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Input Terminal Functions

K Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing

When one of H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) is set to 1E (sample/
hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the terminal
is turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency.

The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.

Sample/hold
command

Analog input

Frequency reference

Fig 6.52 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency

nPrecautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precau-
tions.

Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same
time. If these commands are used at the same time, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selec-
tion) will occur.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
• UP/DOWN command
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command

Application Precautions
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency references, be sure to store references of 100 ms mini-
mum. If the reference time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.

6-69
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Con-
trol Circuit Terminals
You can switch reference input between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals.
Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 2
(Option/Inverter selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when the
Inverter is stopped.

nSetting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals, set the
following parameters.
• Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal [analog input])
• Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 (Control circuit terminal (sequence inputs])
• Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selec-
tion) to 2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Terminal Status Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection

Inverter
OFF (Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input termi-
nal.)
Communications Option Card
ON
(Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.)

K Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands

(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/
OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the run command.
To use this function, set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7
function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Jog frequency reference

The frequency reference when the jog frequency
0 to
d1-17 reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG 6.00 Hz Yes Q Q Q
400.00
command is ON.
Jog Reference

Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Control Methods
Set Open
Function V/f
Value Loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes

13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17) Yes Yes Yes

6-70
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Input Terminal Functions

nApplication Precautions
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).

K Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the

Inverter (External Error Function)
The external error function performs the error contact output, and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter
peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External error [input
terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external error signal. For
example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05
(multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External error detection method
• Operation during external error detection

The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-
oo.
Input Level Error Detection Method (See
Operation During Error Detection
(See Note 1.) Note 2.)
Set
Value Detection Continue
Constant Decelerate to Coast to Emergency
NO Contact NC Contact During Oper- Operation
Detection Stop (Error) Stop (Error) Stop (Error)
ation (Warning)

20 Yes Yes Yes

21 Yes Yes Yes
22 Yes Yes Yes
23 Yes Yes Yes
24 Yes Yes Yes
25 Yes Yes Yes
26 Yes Yes Yes
27 Yes Yes Yes
28 Yes Yes Yes
29 Yes Yes Yes
2A Yes Yes Yes
2B Yes Yes Yes
2C Yes Yes Yes
2D Yes Yes Yes
2E Yes Yes Yes
2F Yes Yes Yes
Note1.Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.

6-71
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Monitor Parameters
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor parameters.

K Using the Analog Monitor Parameters

This section explains the analog monitor parameters.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Monitor selection (termi-

nal FM) Sets the number of the monitor item to be output
(U1-oo) from terminal FM.
H4-01 1 to 40 2 No A A A
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set. 17, 23, 25,
Terminal FM Sel 29, 30, 31, 35 are not used.

Gain (terminal FM) Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage 0.00 to
level gain. 2.50 1.00
H4-02 Sets whether the monitor item output will be out- (0.0 to (100.0%) Yes Q Q Q
put in multiples of 10 V. *1
Terminal FM Gain The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. 1000.0)*1

Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage -10.0 to

Bias (terminal FM)
level bias. +10.0
H4-03 Sets output characteristic up/down parallel move- (-100.0 to 0.0% Yes A A A
ment as a percentage of 10 V.
Terminal FM Bias
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. +110.0)*1

Monitor selection (termi-

nal AM) Sets the number of the monitor item to be output
(U1-oo) from terminal AM.
H4-04 1 to 40 3 No A A A
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set. 17, 23, 25,
Terminal AM Sel 29, 30, 31, 35 are not used.

Gain (terminal AM) Set the voltage level gain for multi-function ana- 0.00 to
log output 2. 2.50 0.50
H4-05 Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output (0.0 to (50.0%) Yes Q Q Q
as the 100% output for the monitor items. The *1
Terminal AM Gain maimum output from the terminal is 10 V. 1000.0)*1

Bias (terminal AM) Set the multi-function analog output 2 voltage -10.0 to
level bias. +10.0
H4-06 Sets output characteristic up/down parallel move- (-100.0 to 0.0% Yes A A A
ment as a percentage of 10 V.
Terminal AM Bias The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. +110.0)*1

Analog output 1 signal Sets the signal output level for multi-function
level selection output 1 (terminal FM) 0 or 1
H4-07 0: 0 to 10 V output 0 No A A A
1: 0 to ±10 V output (0 to 2)*1
AO Level Select1 (2: 4 to 20 mA)*

Analog output 2 signal Sets the signal output level for multi-function out-
level selection put 2 (terminal AM) 0 or 1
H4-08 0: 0 to +10 V output 0 No A A A
1: 0 to ±10 V output (0 to 2)*1
AO Level Select2 (2: 4 to 20 mA)*1

6-72
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Monitor Parameters

Name Control Methods

Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Channel 1 monitor selec-
tion
F4-01 1 to 40 2 No A*2 A*2 A*2
Effective when the Analog Monitor Card is used.
AO Ch1 Select Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor item to be output.
Channel 1 gain (U1-oo)
Gain: 0.00 to
F4-02
Set the multiple of 10 V for outputting monitor 2.50
1.00 Yes A*2 A*2 A*2
AO Ch1 Gain items.
4, 10 to 14, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set. 17, 23, 25,
Channel 2 monitor selec- 29, 30, 31, 35 are not used.
tion When the AO-12 Analog Monitor Card is used,
F4-03 outputs of ±10 V are possible. To output ±10 V, set 1 to 40 3 No A*2 A*2 A*2
AO Ch2 Select F4-07 or F4-08 to 1. When the AO-08 Analog
Monior Card is used, only outputs of 0 to +10 V
are possible.
Channel 2 gain A meter calibration function is available. 0.00 to
F4-04
2.50
0.50 Yes A*2 A*2 A*2
AO Ch2 Gain

Channel 1 output monitor

bias Set the channel 1 item bias to 100%/10 V when -10.0 to
F4-05
the analog monitor card is used. 10.0
0.0 Yes A*2 A*2 A*2
AO Ch1 Bias

Channel 2 output monitor

bias Set the channel 2 item bias to 100%/10 V when -10.0 to
F4-06
the analog monitor card is used. 10.0
0.0 Yes A*2 A*2 A*2
AO Ch2 Bias

Analog output signal level

for channel 2 0: 0 to 10 V
F4-08
1: -10 to 10 V
0 or 1 0 No A*2 A*2 A*2
AO Opt Level Ch1

* 1. For (-E) models. The shunt connector CN15 must be set. For details, refer to page 2-43.
* 2. Analog Monitor Cards are not available for (-E) models. Use the AM or FM terminal as a substitute.

nSelecting Analog Monitor Items

The digital operator monitor items (U1-oo [status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output
terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters, and set the values for the oo part of U1- oo
(status monitor).
Alternatively, you can output monitor items (U1-oo [status monitor]) from analog output option terminal
channels 1 and 2 on analog monitor cards AO-08 and AO-12. Refer to the table of parameters, and set the val-
ues.

nAdjusting the Analog Monitor Items

Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and
bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06. Also, adjust the output voltage for output channels 1 and 2 of Ana-
log Output Option Cards AO-08 and AO-12 using the gain and bias in F4-02, F4-04, and F4-06.

Adjusting the Meter

Display the data setting display for the gain and bias constants corresponding to the output channel of the
Inverter Unit and the AO Option Card while the Inverter is stopped to output the following voltages to the ana-
log monitor terminal, to enable meter adjusting while the Inverter is stopped.

6-73
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 10 V/100% monitor output × output gain + output bias

Output voltage

Gain x 10 V

Bias x 10/100 V

Monitor item

Fig 6.53 Monitor Output Adjustment

nSwitching Analog Monitor Signal Levels

Monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10 V output 0 to 10 V signals when the monitor value is positive (+),
and 0 to -10 V signals when the monitor value is negative (-). For monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10 V,
refer to Chapter 5 Parameters.

You can select the signal levels separately for multi-function analog output terminals and analog output option
terminals.

INFO

K Using Pulse Train Monitor Parameters

This section explains pulse monitor parameters.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Pulse train monitor selec- Select the pulse train monitor output items (value
tion of the oo part of U1-oo). 1, 2, 5,
H6-06 2 Yes A A A
There are two types of monitor items: Speed- 20, 24, 36
Pulse Moni Sel related items and PID-related items.

Pulse train monitor scaling Set the number of pulses output when speed is
100% in hertz.
0 to
H6-07 Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to make the pulse 1440 Hz Yes A A A
Pulse Moni Scale 32000
train monitor output synchronously to the output
frequency.

nSelecting Pulse Monitor Items

Output digital operator monitor items (U1-oo [status monitor]) from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Refer to
Chapter 5 Parameters, and set the oo part of U1-oo (Status monitor). The possible monitor selections are
limited as follows: U1-01, 02, 05, 20, 24, 36.

6-74
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Monitor Parameters

nAdjusting the Pulse Monitor Items

Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Set the pulse frequency output when
100% frequency is output to H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter's U-phase output.

nApplication Precautions
When using a pulse monitor parameter, connect a peripheral device according to the following load condi-
tions. If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to other
devices.

Using a Sourcing Output

Output Voltage (Iso-
lated) Load Impedance (kΩ) Load impedance
VRL (V) MP
+5 V min. 1.5 kΩ min.
VRL
+8 V min. 3.5 kΩ min.
AC
+10 V min. 10 kΩ min.

External power supply

Using a Sinking Input
External Power Supply 12 VDC±10%, Load impedance
(V) 15 VDC±10%
MP
Sink Current (mA) 16 mA Max Sinking current

AC

6-75
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions
This section explains the individual communications functions.

K Using RS-422A/485 Communications

You can perform serial communications with SYSMAC CS-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or simi-
lar devices using the RS-422A/485 protocol.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Set the frequency reference input method

Reference selection 0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
b1-01 0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Reference Source 3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input

Operation method selec- Set the run command input method

tion 0: Digital Operator
b1-02 1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input) 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q
2: RS-422A/485 communications
Run Source
3: Option Card

Slave address
H5-01 Set the Inverter slave address. 0 to 20 1F No A A A
*
Serial Comm Adr

Set the baud rate for 6CN RS-422A/485 commu-

Communication speed
nications.
selection
0: 1200 bps
H5-02 1: 2400 bps 0 to 4 3 No A A A
2: 4800 bps
Serial Baud Rate 3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps

Communications parity Set the parity for 6CN RS-422A/485 communica-

selection tions.
H5-03 0: No parity 0 to 2 0 No A A A
1: Even parity
Serial Com Sel
2: Odd parity

Set the stopping method for communications

Stopping method after errors.
communication error 0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in
C1-02
H5-04 0 to 3 3 No A A A
1: Coast to a stop
2: Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1-
Serial Fault Sel 02
3: Continue operation

Communications error Set whether or not a communications timeout is to

detection selection be detected as a communications error.
H5-05 0 or 1 1 No A A A
0: Do not detect
Serial Flt Dtct 1: Detect

Send wait time Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to
H5-06 5 to 65 5 ms No A A A
when the Inverter starts to send.
Transmit Wait TIM

RTS control ON/OFF Select to enable or disable RTS control.

H5-07 0: Disabled (RTS is always ON) 0 or 1 1 No A A A
RTS Control Sel 1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)

Frequency units of refer- 0: 0.01 Hz units

ence setting and monitor 1: 0.01% units 0 to
o1-03 0 No A A A
2 to 39: r/min units 39999
Display Scaling 40 to 39999: User desired display

6-76
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Name Control Methods

Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Bit 0: CRC error
RS-422A/485 communica- Bit 1: Data length error
tions error Bit 2: Not used.
Bit 3: Parity error
U1-39 Bit 4: Overrun error 0 to FF - - A A A
Bit 5: Framing error
Bit 6: Timeout
Transmit Err Bit 7: Not used.
Refer to the parameter tables for Digital Operator
displays.
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS-422A/485 communications.

RS-422A/485 communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and
b1-02.
• Monitoring operation status from the PLC
• Setting and reading parameters
• Resetting errors
• Inputting multi-function commands

An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands
input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7.

nRS-422A/485 Communications Configuration

RS-422A/485 communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 32 slaves. Serial com-
munications between master and slave are normally started by the master, and the slave responds.
The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address
of each slave beforehand, so the master can perform signal communications using that address. Slaves receiv-
ing commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response to the master.

SYSMAC-series PLC

Inverter Inverter Inverter

RS-485 connections
example

Fig 6.54 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter

6-77
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nCommunications Specifications
The RS-422A/485 communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Specifications

Interface RS-422, RS-485

Communications Cycle Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate: Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 19,200 bps.
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Communications Parameters
Parity: Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits: 1 bit fixed
Communications Protocol MODBUS
Number of Connectable Units 32 units max. (when using RS-485)

nCommunications Connection Terminal

RS-422A/485 communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance
by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only, as seen from the PLC.

S+ +
-
S- S1 Terminating
O OFF ON resistance
RS-422A 1
or RS-485 R+ F
F 2
Switch
R- 1

Terminating resistance (1/2 W, 110 Ohms)

Fig 6.55 Communications Connection Terminal

1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, connect the shield cover to the Inverter earth terminal,
and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected to prevent operating errors due to noise.
IMPORTANT 3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior.

R+ R S+ S

6-78
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

nConnection Example to a PLC

This section provides a connector pin arrangements and standard wiring diagram for the Serial Communica-
tions Boards/Units.

Connector Pin Arrangement for Serial Communications Board/Unit

The connector pin arrangement for the CS1W-SCB41, CS1W-SCU41, and C200HW-COM06-V1 Serial Com-
munications Boards/Units is shown below.

Pin No. Code Signal name I/O Pin No. Code Signal name I/O

1 SDA Send data (-) Output 6 RDA Receive data (-) Input
2 SDB Send data (+) Output 7 NC - -
3 NC - - 8 RBD Receive data (+) Input
4 NC - - 9 NC - -
5 NC - - Frame FG FG -

Standard Wiring Diagrams

Wiring diagrams are provided below for RS-485 and RS-422A.
• RS-485 (2-wire)

Communications Board SYSDRIVE RV

Code Pin No. Shielded cable Code

Control cir-
SDA 1 S cuit terminal
SDB 2 S block (com-
RS-422A/485 munictions
interface RDA 6 R terminals)
RDB 8 R
FG Frame

9-pin D-sub connector SYSDRIVE RV

(Connector on cable: Male) Code
Control cir-
S cuit terminal
block (com-
S munictions
R terminals)

R
Note Turn ON the terminating resistance switches at the end Inverters. Turn OFF the terminating resistance switches at all other Inverters.

Fig 6.56 RS-485 Wiring

6-79
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 • RS-422A (4-wire)

Communications Board SYSDRIVE RV

B500-AL001 Link Adapter

Code Pin No. Shielded cable Pin No. Code Code Pin No. Shielded cable Code
Control cir-
SDA 1 9 SDA SDA 9 S cuit terminal
SDB 2 5 SDB RS-422A SDB 5 S block (com-
RS-422A/485 munictions
interface RDA 6 6 RDA interface RDA 6 R terminals)
RDB 8 1 RDB RDB 1 R
FG Hood RS-422A 3 SG SG 3 RS-422A
9-pin D-sub connector 7 FG FG 7
(Connector on cable: Male) Code SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG
Pin No. 9 5 6 1 3 7
SYSDRIVE RV
Shielded cable
Code
Control cir-
S cuit terminal
S block (com-
munictions
R terminals)
R
RS-422A
Note Turn ON the terminating resistance switch at all Inverters.

Fig 6.57 RS-422A Wiring

nMessage Format
In RS-422A/485 communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The mes-
sage format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is
changed by the command (function) contents.

Message data Function code Communications Error check

Slave address
(Request message or response (1 byte) data (2 bytes)
(1 byte)

The space between messages must support the following.

PLC to Inverter Inverter to PLC PLC to Inverter

Command message Response message Command message

Time (Seconds)

24 bits long H5-06 24 bits long 5 ms min.

setting

Fig 6.58 Message Spacing

6-80
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the
Inverter will not return responses).

Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Command Message Response Message
Function Code
Function
(Hexadecimal) Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes) Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes)

03H Read storage register contents 8 8 7 37

08H Loopback test 8 8 8 8
10H Write multiple storage registers 11 41 8 8

Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and
the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.

Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. The CRC-16 data is the remainder of dividing all
of the message data blocks as a continuous string of data by a specific binary number (1 1000 0000 0000
0101), as shown in the following diagram.

8 bits
When calculating the CRC-16 data, the LSB of the slave ad-
dress is treated as the MSB.

Slave address

Note 1. Although normally the initial value for the CRC-16 calculation is 0, “-1”
Function code (all 16 bits set to 1) is used here instead.
2. The CRC-16 data is calculated using the LSB of the slave address as
Start of communications
the MSB and the last MSB of the communications data as the LSB.
data 3. Calculate the CRC-16 data for the response message from the slave
and verify that it is the same as the one in the response message.

End of communications
data

Fig 6.59

6-81
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nDSR Message
An example of command/response messages is given below.

Reading Storage Register Contents (Function Code: 03 Hex)

Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive, starting
from a specified address. The contents of the storage register are separated into higher place 8 bits and lower
place 8 bits, and comprise the data within response messages in address order.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and
frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.

Response Message Response Message

Command Message
(Normal Meesage) (Error Message)
Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H

Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H

Start Higher Number of attached data

00H 08H Error code 03H
Address place bytes
(register Lower Higher Higher
number) 20H 00H F1H
place Lead stor- place place
CRC-16
Higher age register Lower Lower
00H 65H 31H
Quantity place place place
(10H max.) Lower Higher Note The MSB of the function code will be
04H 00H set to 1 when an error occurs.
place Next stor- place

Higher age register Lower

45H 00H
place place
CRC-16
Lower Higher
F0H 00H
place Next stor- place
age register Lower
00H
place
Higher
01H
Next stor- place
age register Lower
F4H
place

Higher
AFH
place
CRC-16
Lower
82H
place

6-82
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Loopback Test (Function Code: 08 Hex)

The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter.
Response Message Response Message
Command Message
(Normal Message) (Error Message)
Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H
Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 88H
Higher Higher
00H 00H Error Code 01H
place place
Test Code Test Code
Lower Lower Higher
00H 00H 86H
place place place
CRC-16
Higher Higher Lower
A5H A5H 50H
place place place
Data Data
Lower Lower Note The MSB of the function code will be
37H 37H set to 1 when an error occurs.
place place
Higher Higher
DAH DAH
place place
CRC-16 CRC-16
Lower Lower
8DH 8DH
place place

Writing to Multiple Storage Registers (Function Code: 10 Hex)

Write the specified data to each specified storage register from the specified addresses. The written data must
be in the following order in the command message: Higher place 8 bits, then lower place 8 bits, in storage reg-
ister address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency refer-
ence of 60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC.
Response Message Response Message
Command Message
(Normal Message) (Error Message)
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H
Start Higher Higher
00H 00H Error code 02H
Address place Start place
(register Lower Address Lower Higher
01H 01H CDH
number) place place place
CRC-16
Higher Higher Lower
00H 00H C1H
Quantity place place place
Quantity
(10H max.) Lower Lower Note The MSB of the function code will be
02H 02H set to 1 when an error occurs.
place place
Number of attached Higher
04H 10H
data bytes place
CRC-16
Higher Lower
00H 08H
place place
Lead data
Lower
01H
place
Higher
02H
place
Next data
Lower
58H
place
Higher
63H
place
CRC-16
Lower
39H
place

6-83
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle
response messages in the same way.

INFO

nData Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast
data.

Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
Register No. Contents

0000H Reserved
Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command 1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1 Forward/reverse operation 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bit 2 External error 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3 Error reset 1: Reset command
Bit 4 ComNet
0001H Bit 5 ComCtrl
Bit 6 Multi-function input command 3
Bit 7 Multi-function input command 4
Bit 8 Multi-function input command 5
Bit 9 Multi-function input command 6
Bit A Multi-function input command 7
Bits B to F Not used
0002H Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03)
0003H to 0005H Not used
0006H PID target value
0007H Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726)
0008H Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726)
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Contact output (Terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 PHC1(Contact P1-PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 PHC2(Contact P2-PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
0009H
Bits 3 to 5 Not used
Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used

6-84
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Register No. Contents

Reference selection settings

Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 PID target value (register 0006H) 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 3 to B Not used
000FH
C Broadcast data S5 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D Broadcast data S6 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E Broadcast data S7 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F Not used
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.

Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No. Contents

Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3 Error 1: Error
0020H
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function contact output (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function output 1 (terminal P1 - PC) (M3-M4)1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Multi-function output 2 (terminal P2 - PC) (M5-M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
Error details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4 Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External error (EF, EFO)
0021H
Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit A PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Bit B Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush preven-
Bit C
tion circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D Missing output phase (LF)
Bit E RS-422A/485 communications error (CE)
Bit F Operator disconnected (OPR)

6-85
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Register No. Contents

Data link status

Bit 0 Writing data
Bit 1 Not used
0022H Bit 2 Not used
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F Not used
Frequency ref-
0023H Monitors U1-01
erence
Output fre-
0024H Monitors U1-02
quency
0025H Output voltage reference (U1-06)
0026H Output current U1-03
0027H Output power U1-08
Torque refer-
0028H U1-09
ence
0029H Not used
002AH Not used
Sequence input status
Bit 0 Multi-function input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Multi-function input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
002BH Bit 3 Multi-function input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4 Multi-function input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5 Multi-function input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 7 to F Not used

6-86
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Register No. Contents

Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Frequency matching 1: Matched
Bit 3 User-defined speed matching 1: Matched
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01

Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency ≥ L4-01

Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
002CH Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit A Run command mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications

Bit B Overtorque detection 1: Detected

Bit C Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit D Retrying error 1: Retrying
Bit E Error (including RS-422A/485 communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F Communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function output status
Bit 0 Multi-function output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
002DH Bit 1 Multi-function output 1 (terminal P1-PC, M3-M4): 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function output 2 (terminal P1-PC, M5-M6): 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 3 to F Not used
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
0032H - 0037H Not used
0038H PID feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H PID input quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003AH PID output quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003BH CPU software number
003CH Flash software number
Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used
003DH Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
Bits 7 to F Not used

6-87
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Register No. Contents

003EH kVA setting

003FH Control method
Note Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating). Communications error details can
also be read by using the register numbers given in the Register column in the U: Monitor parameter table.

Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. This is write data only.
Register Address Contents

Operation signal
Bit 0 Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3 Not used
Bit 4 External error 1: Error (set using H1-01)
0001H Bit 5 Error reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Bits 6 to B Not used
Bit C Multi-function input S5
Bit D Multi-function input S6
Bit E Multi-function input S7
Bit F Not used.
Frequency ref-
0002H 30000/100%
erence
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.

nENTER Command
When writing parameters to the Inverter from the PLC using RS-422A/485 communications, the parameters
are temporarily stored in the parameter data area in the Inverter. To enable these parameters in the parameter
data area, use the ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as
enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H.
Register No. Contents

0900H Write parameter data to EEPROM

0910H Parameter data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.

The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100,000. Do not frequently
execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address
will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
INFO

6-88
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

nError Codes
The following table shows RS-422A/485 communications error codes.
Error Code Contents

Function code error

01H
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
Invalid register number error
02H • The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
Invalid quantity error
03H • The Quantity (number of data item) in the command message must be in range between 1 to 16.
• In the write command message, the Numbers of attached data bytes must be twice of the Quantity.
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parame-
21H
ters.
• When writing parameters, the parameter setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write parameters during operation.
• Attempting to write an ENTER command during operation.
22H
• Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error
23H • Writing parameters from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing ENTER commands from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during parameters processing
24H
Attempting to write parameters from the PLC while processing parameters in the Inverter.

nSlave Not Responding

In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function. If the slave address specified in the command
message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
• When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.

Application Precautions
Set a timer in the master to monitor response time from the slaves. Make the setting so that if no response is
sent to the master from the slave within the set time, the same command message is sent again from the mas-
ter.

6-89
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nSelf-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface cir-
cuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communica-
tions parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Inverter, and checks if
communications are being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter, and set 67 (communications test mode) in parameter H1-05
(Terminal S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again.

Fig 6.60 Details of Communications Terminals

Pass will be displayed on the Digital Operator if the diagnosis have finished correctly.
If an error occurs, a CE (RS-422A/485 communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator,
the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.

6-90
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

nConverting Register Data

Register data (such as monitor values or parameter set value data) is placed in the communications data block
of the message data (i.e., request message or response data). The data in each register is sent as 2-byte data. It
is processed under the following rules and sent in hexadecimal.

The data is converted to a hexadecimal value using a minimum setting unit for each register of
1
For example, if the frequency reference is 60 Hz and the minimum unit of setting is 0.01 Hz, the data will be
converted as follows:


60 Hz/0.01 (Hz) = 6000 = 1770 Hex
The minimum unit of setting of each parameter is given in the description of the parameter and in the parame-
ter tables in Chapter 5 Parameters.
The minimum unit of setting of frequency reference data or frequency monitor data is determined by o1-03
(register 502 Hex: frequency reference/monitor unit selection). The unit of setting of each of the three registers
below is determined by the set value in o1-03. The set value in o1-03 has nothing to do with frequency data
items set as parameters (e.g., frequency references 1 through 16, inching frequency reference, maximum fre-
quency, minimum output frequency, jump frequency). For these items, the unit of setting is as shown in Chap-
ter 5 Parameters.
• Monitor Items
Register 0023H: Frequency reference monitor
Register 0024H: Output frequency monitor
• Communications Register
Register 0002H: Frequency reference
In spite of the set value in o1-03, however, set the maximum frequency to 30000 when the frequency refer-
ence is executed with a broadcast message. In this case, the Inverter rounds off any value less than 0.01 Hz.
If the jump frequency is 100.0 Hz and the minimum unit of setting is 0.01 Hz, the data will be converted as
follows:


100.0 (Hz)/0.01 (Hz) = 10000 = 2710 Hex

Negative values are expressed in 2’s complements

If the frequency bias in H3-03 is -100%, the minimum unit of setting will be 1% and the data will be converted
as follows:


100 (%)/1 (%) = 100 = 0064 Hex

2’s complement: FF9C Hex
0064 Hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

Bit reversed.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 FF9B Hex

1 is added.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 FF9C Hex

Fig 6.61

Whether the data is positive or negative is determined by the parameter set value.
The MSB of negative-value data is always set to 1. Data with its MSB set to 1 is not, however, always nega-
tive-value data.
For example, the setting range of parameter d3-01 (register 294 Hex: jump frequency 1) is within a range from
0.00 to 400.0 Hz. If the jump frequency is 400.0 Hz, the data is obtained from the following formula and its

6-91
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MSB will be 1.
400.0 (Hz)/0.01 (Hz) = 40000 = 9C40 Hex

Set All Unused Bits to 0

Bits 11 through 15 of the RUN command (register 0001H) are not used. When writing the data, be sure to set
all of these bits to 0. These bits when read are set to 0.

No Data Settings in Unused Registers

Registers described “not used” may be used for internal processing. Do not write any data to such registers.

Communications with a Programmable Controller

The RS-422A/485 communications of the 3G3RV Inverter conform to the MODBUS Communications Proto-
col. This protocol cannot share the same line with any other communications protocol.
To control the 3G3RV through RS-422A/485 communications with the Programmable Controller, mount a
Serial Communications Board or Unit to the Programmable Controller and use the protocol macro function.
The following settings and operations are necessary for serial communications using the protocol macro func-
tion.
• Configure system settings for the Serial Communications Board or Unit
• Create Send & Recv procedures conforming to the MODBUS Communications Protocol by means of pro-
tocol macro tools (CX-Protocol or Protocol Support Tool), and transfer them to the Serial Communications
Board.
• Execute the PMCR instruction on the CPU Unit of the Programmable Controller.

n Applicable Programmable Controllers and Peripheral Devices

A Serial Communications Board or Unit can be mounted to the following SYSMAC CPU Units.

Table 6.2 Applicable Programmable Controllers

Series CPU Unit models
High-speed models: CS1H-CPU67-E/66-E/65-E/64-E/63-E
SYSMAC CS
Low-speed models: CS1G-CPU45-E/44-E/43-E/42-E
SYSMAC CJ CJ1G-CPU44/45
C200HX-CPU34-E/44-E/54-E/64-E/34-ZE/44-ZE/54-ZE/64-ZE/65-ZE/85-ZE
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE C200HG-CPU33-E/43-E/53-E/63-E/33-ZE/43-ZE/53-ZE/63-ZE
C200HE-CPU32-E/42-E/32-ZE/42-ZE
SYSMAC CQM1H CQM1H-CPU61/51

6-92
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

n Applicable Serial Communications Boards and Unit

The following Serial Communications Boards and Unit can be used with the RS-422A/485 port.
The RS-232C port can be used if an RS-422/485 Conversion Adapter is installed. For ease of wiring, however,
it is recommended that the RS-422/485 port be used. The following information is for the RS-422/485 port.

Table 6.3 Applicable Serial Communications Boards

Series Serial Communications Board/Unit Mounting method Specifications
• One RS-232C port
As an Inner Board of
SYSMAC CS CS1W-SCB41 • One RS-422A/485 port
the CPU Unit
• Protocol macro function
• One RS-232C port
SYSMAC CJ CJ1W-SCU41 CPU Bus Unit • One RS-422A/485 port
• Protocol macro function
C200HW-COM06-EV1 • One RS-232C port
Mounted to an
SYSMAC Make sure that the model number has the suffix • One RS-422A/485 port
optional slot of the
C200HX/HG/HE “EV1,” otherwise the CRC-16 check code can- • Protocol macro function
CPU Unit
not be used.
• One RS-232C port
SYSMAC As an Inner Board of
CQM1H-CPU61/51-E • One RS-422A/485 port
CQM1H the CPU Unit
• Protocol macro function

nPeripheral Devices
The following peripheral devices are required to use the protocol macro function.

Table 6.4 Peripheral Devices

Name Model Specification
The following peripheral devices support the protocol macro function of the
entire SYSMAC series.
Personal computer environment
Personal com-
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer
puter
Minimum requirement: Pentium 90 MHz
CPU
Recommended: Pentium 166 MHz or faster
CX-Protocol WS02-PSTC1-E OS Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98
Minimum: 16 MB
Memory
Recommended: 24 MB min.
Minimum: Available space of 24 MB
Hard disk
Recommended: Available space of 50 MB
Monitor SVGA or better
FDD: 1 or more
Drive
CD-ROM drive: 1 or more

6-93
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 6.4 Peripheral Devices
Name Model Specification
The following peripheral devices support the protocol macro function of the
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE series.
Personal computer environment
Personal com-
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer
puter
Minimum requirement: Pentium 90 MHz
CPU
Recommended: Pentium 166 MHz or faster
Protocol Sup-
WS01-PSTF1-E OS Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98
port Tool
Minimum: 16 MB
Memory
Recommended: 24 MB min.
Minimum: Available space of 24 MB
Hard disk
Recommended: Available space of 50 MB
Monitor SVGA or better
FDD: 1 or more
Drive
CD-ROM drive: 1 or more

nManuals for Related Equipment and the Support Tool

The following manuals provide details on equipment and the Protocol Support Tool.

Table 6.5 List of manuals

Name, series, model Cat. No.
W339 Users Manual
SYSMAC CS series, CPU Unit W340 Instruction Reference Manual
W394 Programming Manual
W393 Operation Manual
SYSMAC CJ series, CPU Unit W340 Instruction Reference Manual
W394 Programming Manual
W302 Installation Guide
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE , CPU Unit
W303 Operation Manual
W363 Operation Manual
SYSMAC CQM1H CPU Unit
W364 Programming Manual
Serial Communications Board, CS1W-SCB21/41
Serial Communications Unit, CS1W-SCU21 W336 Users Manual
Serial Communications Unit, CS1W-SCU41
Serial Communications Board, C200HW-COM06-V1 W304 Operation Manual
Serial Communications Board, CQM1H-SCB41 W365 Operation Manual
CX-Protocol, WS02-PSTC1-E W344 Operation Manual
Protocol Support Tool WS01-PSTF1-E W319 Operation Manual

nSerial Communications Board/Unit SystemSettings

The system settings for the Serial Communications Board and Unit are given below.

For the CS/CJ series:

Use the following ports for the CS/CJ series.
• CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board: Port 2
• CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit: Port 2

6-94
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

m = D30000 + 100 x Unit No. (Wd)

DM Area
Board Unit Bit Setting Value
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
15 Port setting -- 0: Default, 1*: Desired setting
14 to 12 Reserved
Serial communications mode
11 to 08
(6 Hex*: Protocol macro)
07 to 05 Reserved
D32000 D32010 m m+10
04
Start bit -- 0*: 1 bit, 1: 1 bit (fixed at 1 bit regardless of 
the setting)
03 Data length -- 0: 7 bits, 1*: 8 bits
02 Stop bit -- 0: 2 bits, 1*: 1 bit
01 Parity -- 0: With, 1*: Without
00 Parity -- 0*: Even, 1: Odd
15 to 04 Reserved
Transmission rate (unit: bps)
D32001 D32011 m+1 m+11 
03 to 00 0: Default (9,600), 3: 1,200, 4: 2,400, 5: 4,800,
6*: 9,600, 7: 19,200, 8: 38,400
- - - - 
Transmission method -- 0: Half-duplex, 1*: Full-
15
D32008 D32018 m+8 m+18 duplex 
14 to 00 Reserved
Max. number of bytes in send/receive data -- 00C8* to
D32009 D32019 m+9 m+19 15 to 00
03E8 Hex  

* Set to this value.

For the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H Series:

Use the following ports for the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE and CQM1H series.
• C200HW-COM06-V1 Communications Board: Port A
• CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board: Port 2
Communications
Board
Bit Setting Value
Port 1 Port 2
Port A Port B
Standard format setting
00 to 03 0 Hex: Standard setting (default)
1 Hex*: Settings in bits 00 to 15 of DM6656 and DM 6551 are used.
04 to 11 00: Default
Serial Communications Board
DM6555 DM6550 0 Hex: Host link (default) 6001
1 Hex: Not protocol
2 Hex: 1:1 Link slave
12 to 15 3 Hex: 1:1 Link master
4 Hex: NT link (1:1 mode)
5 Hex: Hex: NT link (1:N mode)
6 Hex*: Protocol macro

6-95
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications
Board
Bit Setting Value
Port 1 Port 2
Port A Port B
Communications speed
00 Hex: 1,200 bps (default)
01 Hex: 2,400 bps
00 to 07
02 Hex: 4,800 bps
03 Hex*: 9,600 bps
04 Hex: 19,200 bps
Frame format

Start Stop
Data Parity
bits bits
00 Hex: 1 7 1 Even (default)
DM6556 DM6551 0803
01 Hex: 1 7 1 Odd
02 Hex: 1 7 1 None
03 Hex: 1 7 2 Even
08 to 15 04 Hex: 1 7 2 Odd
05 Hex: 1 7 2 None
06 Hex: 1 8 1 Even
07 Hex: 1 8 1 Odd
08 Hex*: 1 8 1 None
09 Hex: 1 8 2 Even
10 Hex: 1 8 2 Odd
11 Hex: 1 8 2 None
* Set to this value.

6-96
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

nProtocol Macro Function

The protocol macro function makes it possible to customize a communications protocol in order to create a
macro according to the specifications of the serial communications port of a general-purpose peripheral
device.
The protocol macro function is mainly used for the following jobs.
• Creation of the message communications frame
• Creation of Send & Recv procedures for the message communications frame

This manual uses the terms “message, DSR message, and response” to express the communications data
exchanged.
Message: A DSR message or response.
TERMS DSR message: A message sent by the Master for instructions to the Inverter.
Response: A message that the Inverter returns in compliance with a DSR message from the Master.

Creating a Message
The message can be created according to the communications specifications of the general-purpose peripheral
device (Inverter) as a counterpart.
A DSR message can include variables to set data in the I/O memory (such as data memory) of the CPU Unit or
write response data to the I/O memory.
Each component of a message is in the memory of the Communications Board. Therefore, the CPU Unit can
just execute the PMCR instruction to send or receive the data, with no need to write ladder programs for the
communications protocol.
CPU Unit Serial Communications Board SYSDRIVE 3G3RV

DSR message
PMCR Instruction Send

Reception
Response

Fig 6.62 Creating a Message

Step to Send and Receive Messages

Sending and receiving messages as a single step includes step-type commands, such as Send, Recv, Send &
Recv, and Wait commands.
The step can be finished or switched to another step according to the result of the step.
CPU Unit Serial Communications Board SYSDRIVE 3G3RV

Step 0
PMCR Instruction

Next process
according to To step n according
the result. to the result

Fig 6.63 Sending and Receiving Messages

6-97
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nConfiguration of the Protocol Macro Function
The protocol consists of one or more sequences. A sequence is an independent set of actions to perform
together with a general-purpose peripheral device, such as an Inverter. For example, the RUN command and
the frequency reference are given to the Inverter and the status of the Inverter is read in a single sequence.
A sequence consists of one or more steps. A step consists of a Send & Recv command + a Send & Recv mes-
sage + a step branch in accordance with the processing result + Completion.

Sequence
When repeating actions to give the RUN command and frequency reference to the Inverter and read the status
of the Inverter, for example, the actions can be registered as one sequence, or more than one if necessary. On
page 101 under Creating a Project File, an example is shown with all actions registered as a single sequence.
A sequence may include the following parameters.
Parameter Description

Set the method of control, such as flow control.

Transmission control
Select only modem control for communications with the 3G3RV.
Set the area for sharing the data between the Programmable Controller and Communications
Link word Board.
On page 101 under Creating a Project File, an example is shown without such an area set.
Set the periods to monitor the transmission and reception steps with timers Tr, Tfr, and Tfs.
Monitor time
Set a period of approximately 0.5 s each for communictions with the 3G3RV.
A method to write reception data to the I/O memory of the Programmable Controller.
Response notify method
Select “notify by scan” for communictions with the 3G3RV.

CPU Unit Serial Communications Board SYSDRIVE 3G3RV

Step 00
DSR message
(Write the RUN command
PMCR instruction
and frequency response.)

Response

Step 01
Sequence 000
DSR message
(Read the inverter status)

Response
(Inverter status)

Fig 6.64

6-98
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Step
In a single step, a DSR message is sent and a response for the DSR message is received. A step may not
include a response if it is a broadcast message.
In the case of repetitive actions to issue the RUN command and frequency reference to the Inverter and read
the status of the Inverter, for example, the actions to give the RUN command and frequency reference consti-
tute one step. The reason is that these register numbers are consecutive and can be sent with a single DSR
message. The action to read the status of the Inverter is another step.
A step includes a command and a maximum of two messages. The above example uses the Send & Recv com-
mand. The DSR message and response are both messages.
A step may include the following parameters.
Parameter Description
The Send, Recv, Send & Recv, Wait, Flush, Open (ER-ON) or Close (ER-OFF) is set.
Command Under Creating a Project File, an example is shown with the Send & Recv command
used. The Send command is used for a broadcast message.
Send message A DSR message is set for the Send command used.
Recv message A response is set for the Recv command.

Message Send & Recv mes-

A DSR message and response are set for the Send & Recv command.
sage
If there are two or more responses for the Send or Send & Recv command, the next
Recv matrix
process is selected per response.
The number (N) of times to repeat the step is set within a range from 0 to 255.
It is possible to change messages by making use of the number (N).
Repeat counter
Under Creating a Project File, an example is shown with this function used for
enabling three Slaves to repeat the same process.
The number of times to retry the command can be set within a range from 0 to 9 only
Number of retries when the Send & Recv command is used.
It is recommended that the number be set to 3 or larger.
Send Wait Time The waiting time until data is sent with the Send or Send & Recv command executed.
Determines whether or not to write the reception data in the response.
Response Write (with operand
Under Creating a Project File, an example is shown with this function used for writ-
specified)
ing the Inverter status to the memory.
Determines which step is to be processed next, or finishes the opertion after the step is
Next process
finished normally.
Determines which step is to be processed next, or finishes the operation, if the the step
Error processing
has an error.

6-99
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nData Created by Protocol Support Tool and CX-Protocol
                 
          

Single project file Protocol list Protocol name

Protocol name A maximum of 20 protocols
(A maximum of 1,000 sequences per project)
Protocol name
Trace list
PC

Protocol name Sequence 000/Sequence name

(Single protocol) Sequence 001/Sequence name A maximum of 60 sequences/protocol
The first sequence number and last sequence number
Sequence 999/Sequence name are specified by each protocol.

Send message list Message name

Message name
A maximum of 300 messages
Recv message list Message name

Message name

Recv matrix Matrix name

A maximum of 100 matrixes
Matrix name

Sequence Step 00
Step 01
A maximum of 16 steps

Step 15

Fig 6.65 Project File Configuration

The standard system protocol incorporated by the Communications Board cannot be edited or transferred. To make use of
the standard system protocol, copy it to the project file and edit it.
Under Creating a Project File, an example to create a new project file is shown without making use of the standard system
protocol.

6-100
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

nCreating a Project File

The following descripton provides information about how to create a project file to send the RUN command
and frequency references to three Inverters and read the Inverter status. (“PST” indicates the WS01-PSTF1-J
Protocol Support Tool.)
First, select from I/O items, monitor items, and parameters the data to be exchanged according to the applica-
tion. Then consider what sequence is required by using the protocol macro function.
Example: Writes control input items (such as the RUN command and multi-function input) of the Inverter and
frequency reference, monitors the control output (such as error output and RUN output) of the Inverter, and
monitors the Inverter status.
Three Inverters with Slave addresses from 01 to 03 are installed for communications.

Checking the Register Numbers

In the above example, the following three registers are required.
Control Input: Register 0001 Hex for RUN command
Frequency Reference: Register 0002 Hex
Control Output: Register 002C Hex for Inverter status

Memory Allocations
The PMCR instruction sends each Slave the data in consecutive words specified by the operand and beginning
with the first word (S), and writes in the memory area beginning with the first word (D) the data received.
The following memory allocations are made in the above example.

Control data
Communications SYSDRIVE
C1 Board/Unit 3G3RV
Communica- Serial port Communications Board/Unit
tions port number designation
PMCR 0 to 7 Hex Port 1: 1 Hex
Inner Board: E1 Hex
Port 2: 2 Hex
CPU Bus Unit: Unit No. 10 Hex
C1
C2
C2
Sequence No.
0000 to 03E7 Hex 000 999
S
Word Data
D
Number of data items sent in accordance with
S PMCR instruction 000B
S 1 No. of Slaves 0003
Protocol macro function

S 2 First Slave address 0001

S 3 RUN command to Slave 1
S 4 Frequency reference to Slave 1
S 5 Second Slave address 0002
RS-422A
S 6 RUN command to Slave 2
/485
S 7 Frequency reference to Slave 2
S 8 Third Slave address 0003
S 9 RUN command to Slave 3
S 10 Frequency reference to Slave 3

Number of data items received in accordance with

D PMCR instruction 0003
D 1 Slave 1 Inverter status
D 2 Slave 2 Inverter status
D 3 Slave 3 Inverter status

SYSMAC CS or CJ-series Programmable Controllers

6-101
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications SYSDRIVE
Board 3G3RV
C: Control data (See note.)
15 12 11 0

Communications Sequence No.

PMCR port 000 to 999 BCD
1: Port A
C 2: Port B
Word Data
S
No. of data items sent in accordance with
D S PMCR instruction 000B
S 1 No. of Slaves 0003

Protocol macro function

S 2 First Slave address 0001
S 3 RUN command to Slave 1
S 4 Frequency reference to Slave 1
S 5 Second Slave address 0002
RS-422A
S 6 RUN command to Slave 2
/485
S 7 Frequency reference to Slave 2
S 8 Third Slave address 0003
S 9 RUN command to Slave 3
S 10 Frequency reference to Slave 3

No. of data items received in accordance with

D PMCR instruction 0003
Note Control data for the SYSMAC D 1 Slave 1 Inverter status
C200HX/HG/HE is indicated. The SYSMAC D 2 Slave 2 Inverter status
CS1 Series uses different control data.
D 3 Slave 3 Inverter status

SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE or CQM1H Programmable Controllers

Fig 6.66 Memory Allocations

nCreating a New Project and Protocol

Use the following procedure to create a new project and protocol.
1. Select New from File in the Menu Bar or click on the New icon with the left button of the mouse to create
a new project.
2. If CX-Protocol is used, set the PC name, PC model, and network type according to the actual conditions.
The network type refers to the type of the network conected to the Support Software and it does not refer to
the communications configuration between the Programmable Controller and the SYSDRIVE RV.
The above settings will not be displayed if the PST is used.
3. Double-click on New Project with the left button of the mouse to display Protocol List.
4. Click on Protocol List with the left button of the mouse and click on a blank space with the right button of
the mouse.
5. Select Create Protocol.

nCreating a Sequence
Use the following procedure to create a new sequence.
1. Click on New Protocol with the left button of the mouse. Then click on a blank space with the right button
of the mouse.
2. Select Create Communication Sequence.
The following table will appear. Set the parameters related to the sequence in the table.

6-102
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Communication Timer Timer Timer

 sequence
Link word Control Response
Tr Tfr Tfs
Inverter I/O Send &
 Recv  Set (Setting required) Scan 0.5 0.5 0.5


Sequence number. The sequence number is automatically set.

Communication Sequence
The label (name) of the sequence. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.

Link Word
Set the area for sharing the data between the Programmable Controller and Communications Board.
In this example, the link word is specified by the operand of the PMCR instruction. Therefore no link word is
set here.

Control
Set the control method, such as flow control.
Select only “modem control” for communications with the 3G3RV.

Response
A method to write reception data to the I/O memory of the Programmable Controller.
Select “notify by scan” for communications with the 3G3RV.

Timer Tr, Timer Tfr, and Timer Tfs

Set the periods to monitor the transmission and reception steps with timers Tr, Tfr, and Tfs. The following tim-
ing chart shows the meaning of each monitor.
Be sure to set the periods according to the application.
The step will be retried if the step is not completed within the monitor periods. An error will occur if the step
is not completed within the monitor time again.
Set a period of approximately 0.5 s each for communications with the 3G3RV.

Ts
Send & Recv Send
Monitored for
Monitored for
Tfs period Tr period
Recv
Monitored for
Tfr period
Ts: Send wait time set per step. Nothing is sent during this period.
Tfs: Monitors the completion of the data sent. If the data transmission is not finished within this period,
the data will be re-transmitted.
Tr: Monitors the response to be received. If the response is not returned within this period, the response will
be re-transmitted.
Tfr: Monitors the reception completion of the response. If the response transmission is not finished within this
period, the response will be re-transmitted.

Note If the Tr period is too long, the time to detect a communications error will be longer, during which the Inverter
cannot be controlled. Therefore, be sure to set an appropriate period.

Fig 6.67

6-103
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nCreating a Step
1. Double-click on New Protocol with the left button of the mouse.
2. Click on New Sequence with the left button of the mouse and click on a blank space with the right button
of the mouse.
3. Select Create Step.
The following table will appear. Set the parameters related to the step in the table.
Send mes- Recv mes-
* Step Repeat Command Retry Send wait Response Next Error
sage sage
Send & Input

00 Reset/R (1) 3 0.02 Input send Yes Next Abort
Recv response
Send & Read

01 Reset/R (1) 3 0.02 Status Yes End Abort
Recv response

Step
Step number. The step number is automatically set.

Repeat
The number (N) of times to repeat the step is set within a range from 0 to 255. It is possible to change mes-
sages by making use of the number (N).
In this example, the same message is sent to three Slaves with addresses different to each other. Therefore, the
number is set to 3 in word S + 1. The number of Slaves is specified by the operand. Therefore, select Channel,
use the Edit command to set Data Address to Operand, and set 0N + 1 in order to select word S + 1. In the
above table, “Reset” means that the repeat counter must be reset first in the step.

Command
Set the commands, such as Send, Recv, and Send & Recv.
Only the Send & Recv command is used for communications with the 3G3RV except for broadcasting mes-
sages, in which case the Send command is used.

Retry
Set the number of times to retry the command within a range from 0 to 9.
It is recommended that the number be set to 3 or larger. If a transmission error occurs due to noise, the trans-
mission of the command will be retried. If the number is set to 3, an error will be detected if the transmission
fails three times.

Send Wait
The waiting time until the data is sent.
For communications with the 3G3RV, if data is repeatedly transmitted to the same Slave, set the waiting time
to 20 ms or more.

Send Message and Recv Message

Set the labels of the DSR message and response to be used.
Make these settings after deciding the labels in Send Message Detail Settings and Recv Message Detail Set-
tings.

6-104
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Response
Determine whether or not to write the reception data in the response.
Always set this parameter to Yes for communications with the 3G3RV.

Next
Determine which step is to be processed next or finish the operation after the step finishes normally.
In this example, step 00 is set to Next and step 01 is set to END because the sequence completes be executing
steps 00 and 01.

Error
If the step has an error, determine which step is to be processed next or finish the operation.
In this example, the parameter will be set to Abort to interrupt the sequence if an error occurs.

nSend Message Detail Settings

1. Click on Send Message List with the left button of the mouse, and then click on a blank space with the
right button of the mouse.
2. Select Create Send Message. The following table will appear. Set the send message in the table.

Message name Header <h> Terminator <t> Check code <c> Length <l> Address <a>
Input send CRC-16 65535 2Byte BIN 0 1Byte BIN R 3N 2 1
Status CRC-16 65535 2Byte BIN R 3N 2 1

Data
a 10 00 01 00 02 l R 3N 3 4 c
a 03 00 2C 00 01 c

Message name
The label (name) of the sequence. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.
Set the label in the send message box in the table shown under Creating a Step.

Header <h> and Terminator <t>

Set the header and terminator.
No header or terminator is used for communications with the 3G3RV. Therefore, set both to None.

Check code <c>

Set the check code.
The CRC-16 check code is used for communications with the 3G3RV. Select the CRC-16 check code and set
the default value to 65535.
Select Reverse for the conversion method. Then select BIN for data type.

6-105
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Length <l>
Set the length of the data.
All communications with the 3G3RV are performed in byte units. Select 1 Byte and BIN. Select No for read-
ing data because there is no data to be read.

Address <a>
Set the addresses of the Slaves.
In this example, the Slave addresses are set in S + 2, S + 5, and S + 8. Therefore, retrieve the data from those
locations.
The address is set in the LSB of each word. To read the byte, select Variable Reverse, otherwise the data is
read from the MSB. Then click on Edit Variable with the left button of the mouse. Select Read R () and set
Data/Address to the operand (3N + 2) using the number (N) of times to repeat the step.
Set Edit Length to 1 byte as a default. If the default value has been changed, set it to 0N + 1.

Data
Set the DSR message in detail.
• DSR Message Requesting that the RUN Command and Frequency Reference Be Written
The DSR message to write data to two registers from register 0001 Hex (the RUN command) consists of
the following items.
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Next register data
Set with variables
Start register data
Number of bytes of attached data (Set with <l>)
Number of write data registers: 2
Write start register number (RUN command: 0001)
Function code (Write 10)
Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data a 10 00 01 00 02 l R 3N 3 4 c
a
The Slave address is set in the address box. Insert the address with the Insert icon.
10 00 01 00 02
Set the constants contained in the DSR message.
Use Set Constant and set the constants in Hex.
l
The length is set in the length box. Insert the length by using the Insert icon. The length is the number of bytes of the
succeeding data (R(3N +3), 4). The length is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.
(R(3N +3), 4)
The Inverter’s actual data to be sent. This example selects Variable and Read R() and sets the operand. Set Data to
3N + 3 because the RUN command data uses four bytes each from S + 3, S +6, and S + 9.
Set Edit Length to 0N + 4 so that it will be set to four bytes.
c
The check code is set in the check code box. Insert the check code by using the Insert icon. All the data including the
address data before the check code is operated. Mark all the items if the PST is used. The check code is automatically
set by the CX-Protocol.

Fig 6.68 DSR Message to Write Data

6-106
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

• DSR Message to Read the Inverter Status

The DSR message to read the Inverter status from register 002C Hex consists of the following items.

0 3 0 0 2 C 0 0 0 1

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Number of read data registers: 1
Read start register number (Inverter status: 002C)
Function code (Read 03)
Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data a 03 00 2C 00 01 c

Set the address data, constant data, and check code data.

Fig 6.69 DSR Message to Read

nRecv Message Detail Settings

1. With the left button of the mouse, click on Receive Message List. Then click on a blank space with the
right button of the mouse.
2. Select Create Receive Message.
The following table will appear. Set the Receive message in the table.

Message Header <h> Terminator <t> Check code <c> Length <l> Address <a>
Input response CRC-16 65535 2Byte BIN R 3N 2 1
Read response CRC-16 65535 2Byte BIN 0 1Byte BIN R 3N 2 1

Data
a 10 00 01 00 02 c
a 03 l W 1N 1 2 c

Message
The label (name) of the response. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.
Set the label in the Recv message box in the table shown under Creating a Step.

Header <h> and Terminator <t>

Set the header and terminator.
No header or terminator is used for communications with the 3G3RV. Therefore, set both to None.

Check Code <c>

Set the check code.
The CRC-16 check code is used for communications with the 3G3RV. Select the CRC-16 check code and set
the initial value to 65535.
Select Reverse for the conversion method. Then select BIN as the data type.

6-107
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Length <l>
Set the length of the data.
All communications with the 3G3RV are performed in byte units. Select 1 Byte and BIN. Select No for read-
ing data because there is no data to be read.

Address <a>
Set the addresses of the Slaves.
In this example, the Slave addresses are set in S + 2, S + 5, and S + 8. Therefore, retrieve the data from those
locations.
The address is set in the LSB of each word. To read the byte, select Variable Reverse, otherwise the data will
be read from the MSB. Then click on Edit Variable with the left button of the mouse. Select Read R () and
set Data/Address to the operand (3N + 2) using the number (N) of times to repeat the step.
Set Edit length to 1 byte as a default. If the default value has been changed, set it to 0N + 1.

Data
Set the expected response in detail.
• Response to the RUN Command and Frequency Reference
The response to the DSR message written consists of the following items.

1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Number of write data registers: 2
Write start register number (RUN command: 0001)
Function code (Write 10)
Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data a 10 00 01 00 02 c
a
The Slave address is set in the address box. Insert the address with the Insert icon.
10 00 01 00 02
Set the constants contained in the response.
Use Set Constant and set the constants in Hex.
c
The check code is set in the check code box. Insert the check code by using the Insert icon. All the data including the
address data before the check code is used. Mark all the items if the PST is used. The check code is automatically set
by the CX-Protocol.

Fig 6.70 Response to DSR Message Written

6-108
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

• Response to the Inverter Status Read

The response to the DSR message to request the Inverter status in register 002C Hex consists of the fol-
lowing items.

0 3

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Inverter status data (Set with variable)
Number of bytes of attached data (Set with <l>)
Function code (Write 10)
Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data a 03 l W 1N 1 2 c
a 03 c
The address data, constant data, and check code data are the same as the above.
l
The length is set in the length box. Insert the length by using the Insert icon. The length is the number of bytes of the
succeeding data (W(1N + 1), 2). The length is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.
W 1N 1 2
The Inverter’s actual data is to be sent. This example selects Variable and Write W () (ntlp: English reference
mistakenly(?) says Read R () here) and sets the operand. Set the data to 1N + 1 because the RUN command data
uses two bytes each from D + 1, D + 2, and D + 3. (ntlp: English reference mistakenly(?) says the RUN command data
uses four bytes each from D + 3, D + 6, and D + 9. here)
Set Edit Length to 0N + 2 so that it will be set to two bytes.

Fig 6.71 Response to DSR Message Read

nLadder Program
Connect the PST and the Communications Board, and read the Communications Board system settings from
the PST. Set the start/stop bits both to 1 bit, and data length to 8 bits.
Transfer the created protocol to the Communications Board. The following example describes how to control
the Inverter with this protocol.

Before using this program in your system, be sure to check the word and data memory allocations and
change them if necessary so that there will be no word or data memory duplication.
This program will stop all communications if a communications error or fault occurs. Be sure to set H5-05 for
IMPORTANT communications error detection selection to 1 (effective) and H5-04 for communications error detection
operation selection to 0 through 2 so that the system will stop with time-over detection.

nMemory Allocations

Starting Communications and Status Signals

Word Functions common to all Slaves
 Inverter control communications (continued when set to ON)
Communications error output (on hold when a communications error
 or fault occurs
 Communications fault reset

6-109
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Inverter Control Inputs (Register 0001 RUN Command)
The Inverter control inputs for the register 0001 RUN command are listed in the following table.
Word Slave 1 function Word Slave 2 function Word Slave 3 function
00100 RUN command 00200 RUN command 00300 RUN command
00101 Forward/Reverse 00201 Forward/Reverse 00301 Forward/Reverse
00102 External fault 00202 External fault 00302 External fault
00103 Fault reset 00203 Fault reset 00303 Fault reset
00104 Multi-function input 1 00204 Multi-function input 1 00304 Multi-function input 1
00105 Multi-function input 00205 Multi-function input 00305 Multi-function input
00106 Multi-function input  00206 Multi-function input  00306 Multi-function input 
00107 Multi-function input 00207 Multi-function input 00307 Multi-function input
00108 Multi-function input 00208 Multi-function input 00308 Multi-function input
00109 Multi-function input  00209 Multi-function input  00309 Multi-function input 
00110 Multi-function input  00210 Multi-function input  00310 Multi-function input 
00111

Always set to 0. 00211

Always set to 0. 00311

Always set to 0.
00112

Always set to 0. 00212

Always set to 0. 00312

Always set to 0.
00113

Always set to 0. 00213

Always set to 0. 00313

Always set to 0.
00114

Always set to 0. 00214

Always set to 0. 00314

Always set to 0.
00115

Always set to 0. 00215

Always set to 0. 00315

Always set to 0.

Frequency References of Inverter (Register 0002 Frequency Reference)

The frequency references of the Inverter for register 0002 frequency references are listed in the following
table.
DM Function
D0001 Slave 1 frequency reference
D0002 Slave 2 frequency reference
D0003 Slave 3 frequency reference

6-110
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Inverter Control Outputs (Register 002C Inverter Status)

The Inverter control outputs for register 002C Inverter status are listed in the following table.
Word Slave 1 function Word Slave 2 function Word Slave 3 function
01100 During RUN 01200 During RUN 01300 During RUN
01101 Zero speed 01201 Zero speed 01301 Zero speed
01102 Frequency agree 01202 Frequency agree 01302 Frequency agree
01103 Custom speed agree 01203 Custom speed agree 01303 Custom speed agree
01104 Frequency detection 1 01204 Frequency detection 01304 Frequency detection
01105 Frequency detection 01205 Frequency detection 01305 Frequency detection
01106 Inverter ready 01206 Inverter ready 01306 Inverter ready
01107 UV 01207 UV 01307 UV
01108 Base block 01208 Base block 01308 Base block
01109 Frequency reference mode 01209 Frequency reference mode 01309 Frequency reference mode
01110 RUN command mode 01210 RUN command mode 01310 RUN command mode
01111 Overtorque detection 01211 Overtorque detection 01311 Overtorque detection
01112 Frequency reference loss 01212 Frequency reference loss 01312 Frequency reference loss
01113 Fault retry 01213 Fault retry 01313 Fault retry
01114 Fault 01214 Fault 01314 Fault
01115 Communications time-over 01215 Communications time-over 01315 Communications time-over

Area Used by Operand of PMCR Instruction

The area used by the operand of the PMCR instruction in the CS-series is shown here.
Control Data: C1 Control Data: C2
DM Word DM Word
D0100 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 D0101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Communications Serial port 2 Communications Sequence 000 set

port 7 port E1

Send Data: S Recv Data: D

DM Area DM Area
D1000 000B (Number of Send data items: D2000 0003(Number of Recv data items: 3)
11) See note 1.) See note 2.)

D1001 0003 (Number of Slaves) D2001 Slave 1 Inverter status

D1002 0001 (Slave 1 address) D2002 Slave 2 Inverter status
D1003 RUN command to Slave 1 D2003 Slave 3 Inverter status
D1004 Frequency reference to Slave 1
D1005 0002 (Slave 2 address)
D1006 RUN command to Slave 2
D1007 Frequency reference to Slave 2
D1008 0003 (Slave 3 address)
D1009 RUN command to Slave 3
D1010 Frequency reference to Slave 3

Note 1. Set the number of Send data items in Hex to the number of words of D1000 through D1010 (11).
Note 2. The number of words of D2001 through D2003 is written in Hex for the number of Recv data
items.

6-111
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Status flags
• Communications Port Enabled Flag
Flag bit for communications port 7: A20207
• Protocol Macro Execution Flag
The Protocol Macro Execution Flag is described below.

Unit/Board Port 1 Port 2

CS1 Board CIO 190915 CIO 191915

Bit 15 of CIO n +
CS1 Unit Bit 15 of CIO n + 9
19
n = CIO 1500 + (25 x number of units)
• Communications Port Abort Flag
The Communications Port Abort Flag is described below.

Unit/Board Port 1 Port 2

CS1 Board CIO 190913 CIO 191913

Bit 13 of CIO
CS1 Unit Bit 13 of CIO N + 9
n+19

n = CIO 1500 + (25 x number of units)

6-112
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

Ladder Program

Protocol Communications
Macro Execution Port Enabled
Flag Flag*

Communications
Port Abort Flag

Fig 6.72 Ladder Program

6-113
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nCommunications Response Time
The communications response times for communications with an Inverter via the RS-422/485 port of an
Omron-made Communications Board are detailed below. Use this information as a reference when deciding
the number of Slaves to be connected to one network, and when considering the timing of input and output
signals.

Communications Time for One Message

A wide variety of programs for RS-422/485 communications can be created using the protocol macro func-
tion. The communications times will vary according to the contents of the program.
In general, the communications time for one message can be calculated using the following formula.

Communications time = [Number of bytes in DSR message x 10 (See note 1.) x (1/baud rate) x 1,000 (ms)]
+ [Number of bytes in response x 10 x (1/baud rate) x 1,000 (ms)] + [24 x (1/baud rate) x 1,000 (ms)] + send
wait time setting (ms) + protocol macro waiting time (See note 2.) (ms)
The reason that the number of bytes in the DSR message and response is multiplied by 10 is because both the
start bit and the stop bit require one bit each.
(1 byte = 8 bits) + (start bit: 1 bit) + (stop bit: 1 bit) = 10 bits
With RS-422A/485 communications, set at least 20 ms as the protocol macro waiting time.

Calculation Example
The communications time required for one Slave in the protocol macro created under Creating a Project File, can
be calculated according to the following formula. (Baud rate = 19,200 bps.)

Communications time = [DSR message to write data (13 bytes) + DSR message to read (8 bytes)) x 10 x (1/
19,200) x 1,000 (ms)] + [write response (8 bytes) + read response (7 bytes)) x 10 x (1/19,200) x 1,000 (ms)]
+ [24 x (1/19,200) x 1,000 (ms) x 2] + [10 (ms) x 2] + [20 (ms) x 2] = 81.2 (ms)

If there are N Slaves, the total communications time will be N x 81.2 ms. Consequently, the more Slaves that
are used, the longer the communications time will be. If the number of Slaves is too high, it is possible that the
detection time of 2 s for communications time-over will be exceeded. In this case, either disable the time-over
detection function and use a different sequence to detect communications errors, or increase the number of
Masters thereby decreasing the number of Slaves per Master.

6-114
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Communications Functions

I/O Response Time

The communications processing times for the Inverter are as follows.
• Inverter communications input scan: 8 ms
• Inverter communications output scan: 8 ms
• Internal processing time for the Inverter: Approx. 20 ms

The I/O response times for the Inverter are illustrated in the following diagram.

Ladder program cycle time

Communications time x 2

Inverter I/O scan

Internal processing for

the Inverter
Max. input Max. output

Fig 6.73 I/O Response Time

6-115
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Individual Functions
This section explains the individual functions used in special applications.

K Using the Timer Function

Multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7 can be designated as timer function input terminals, and multi-
function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P1-PC, and P2-PC can be designated as timer function
output terminals. By setting the delay time, you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches.
• Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7) to 18 (timer
function input).
• Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P1-PC, and P2-PC func-
tion selection) to 12 (timer function output).

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Timer function ON-delay Set the timer function output ON delay time (dead 0.0 to
time band) for the timer function input in 1-second 300.0
b4-01 (0.0 to 0.0 s No A A A
units. Enabled when a timer function is set in H1-
Delay-ON Timer oo and H2-oo. 3000.0)*

Timer function OFF-delay Set the timer function output OFF delay time 0.0 to
time (dead band) for the timer function input in 1-sec- 300.0
b4-02 (0.0 to 0.0 s No A A A
ond units. Enabled when the timer function is set
Delay-OFF Timer in H1-oo and H2-oo. 3000.0)*

* For (-E) models.

nSetting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is
turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output
function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.

Timer function input

Timer function output

Fig 6.74 Timer Function Operation Example

6-116
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Individual Functions

K Using PID Control

PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combin-
ing proportional control (P), integral control (I), and derivative control (D), you can even control targets
(machinery) with play time.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.

P control Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the
deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback
value to the target value. I control is not suited, however, to rapid variations.
D control Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation. Can respond promptly to rapid
variations.

nPID Control Operation

To understand the differences between each PID control operation (P, I, and D, the variation in the amount of
operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference
between the target value and feedback value) is fixed.

Deviation
Time

PID control
Amount of operation I control
D control

P control
Time

Fig 6.75 PID Control Operation

nPID Control Applications

The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
Example of Sensor
Application Control Details
Used

• Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed to the target value.
Speed Con- Tachometer genera-
• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs
trol tor
synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Pressure
Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control. Pressure sensor
Control
Flow Rate
Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately. Flow rate sensor
Control
Tempera-
Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control • Thermocouple
ture Con-
by rotating the fan. • Thermistor
trol

6-117
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
0: Disabled
PID control mode selection 1: Enabled (Deviation is D-controlled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is D-controlled.)
b5-01 3: PID control enabled (frequency reference + 0 to 4 0 No A A A
PID output, D control of deviation)
PID Mode 4: PID control enabled (frequency reference +
PID output, D control of feedback value).

Proportional gain (P) Sets P-control proportional gain as a percentage. 0.00

b5-02 P-control is not performed when the setting is to 1.00 Yes A A A
PID Gain 0.00. 25.00

Integral (I) time

Sets I-control integral time in 1-second units. 0.0 to
b5-03 1.0 s Yes A A A
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0. 360.0
PID I Time

Integral (I) limit

Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the 0.0 to
b5-04 100.0% Yes A A A
maximum output frequenc. 100.0
PID I Limit

Derivative (D) time Sets D-control derivative time in 1-second units.

0.00 to
b5-05 D-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00 s Yes A A A
10.00
PID D Time 0.00.

PID limit
Sets the limit after PID-control as a percentage of 0.0 to
b5-06 100.0% Yes A A A
the maximum output frequency. 100.0
PID Limit

PID offset adjustment -100.0

Sets the offset after PID-control as a percentage
b5-07 to 0.0% Yes A A A
of the maximum outut frequency.
PID Offset +100.0

PID primary delay time

Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PID-
constant 0.00 to
b5-08 control outputs in 1-second units. 0.00 s Yes A A A
10.00
PID Delay Time Not usually necessary to set.

PID output characteristics Select forward/reverse for PID output.

selection 0: PID output is forward.
b5-09 0 or 1 0 No A A A
1: PID output is reverse (highlights the output
Output Level Sel code)

PID output gain

0.0 to
b5-10 Sets output gain. 1.0 No A A A
25.0
Output Gain

PID reverse output selection 0: 0 limit when PID output is negative.

1: Reverse when PID output is negative.
b5-11 0 or 1 0 No A A A
0 limit when reverse prohibit is selected using b1-
Output Rev Sel 04.

Selection of PID feedback 0: No detection of loss of PID feedback

command loss detection 1: Detection of loss of PID feedback. Operation
continues during detection, with the malfunc-
b5-12 tioning contact not operating. 0 to 2 0 No A A A

Fb los Det Sel 2: Detection of loss of PID feedback. Coasts to

stop during detection, and fault contact

PID feedback command

Set the PID feedback loss detection level as a per-
loss detection level
b5-13 cent, with the maximum output frequency at 0 to 100 0% No A A A
Fb los Det Lvl 100%.

PID feedback command

loss detection time Sets the PID feedback loss detection level in s 0.0 to
b5-14 1.0 s No A A A
units. 25.5
Fb los Det Time

PID sleep function opera-

tion level Set the PID sleep function start level as a fre- 0.0 to
b5-15 0.0 Hz No A A A
quency. 400.0
PID Sleep Level

6-118
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Individual Functions

Name Control Methods

Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
PID sleep operation delay
time Set the delay time until the PID sleep function 0.0 to
b5-16 0.0 s No A A A
starts in seconds. 25.5
PID Sleep Time

Accel/decel time for PID

reference Set the accel/decel time for PID reference in sec- 0.0 to
b5-17 0.0 s No A A A
onds. 25.5
PID Acc/Dec Time

PID set point selection

0: PID set point disabled
b5-18
1: PID set point enabled
0 or 1 0 No A* A* A*
PID Setpoint Sel

PID set point

0.0 to
b5-19 PID set point
100.0
0.0% No A* A* A*
PID Setpoint

Pulse train input function

0: Frequency reference
selection
H6-01 1: PID feedback value 0 to 2 0 No A A A
Pulse Input Sel 2: PID target value

* The parameters b5-18 and b5-19 are enabled only with (-E) models.

Name Control Methods

Param-
eter Output Signal Level During Min. Open
Description V/f
Num- Multi-Function Analog Output Unit Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber Vec-
PG
tor

PID feedback value Monitors the feedback value when

PID control is used. 10 V: Max. frequency (0 to ± 10 V
U1-24 0.01% A A A
The input for the max. frequency cor- possible)
PID Feedback responds to 100%.

PID input volume

PID feedback volume 10 V: Max. frequency (0 to ± 10 V
U1-36 0.01% A A A
PID Input Given as maximum frequency/100% possible)

PID output volume

PID control output 10 V: Max. frequency (0 to ± 10 V
U1-37 0.01% A A A
PID Output Given as maximum frequency/100% possible)

PID command
PID command + PID command bias
U1-38 10 V: Max. frequency 0.01% A A A
PID Setpoint Given as maximum frequency/100%

Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Control Methods
Set Open
Function V/f
Value loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
19 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) Yes Yes Yes

30 PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control) Yes Yes Yes

31 PID control integral hold (ON: Integral hold) Yes Yes Yes

34 PID soft starter Yes Yes Yes

35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes

Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)

Control Methods
Set Open
Function V/f
Value loop
V/f with
Vec-
PG
tor
B PID feedback Max. output frequency Yes Yes Yes

C PID target value Max. output frequency Yes Yes Yes

6-119
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nPID Control Methods
There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting parameter b5-01.
Set Value Control Method

PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID
1
target value and feedback value.
2 PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
3
difference between PID target value and feedback value.
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
4
PID feedback value.

nPID Input Methods

Enable PID control using parameter b5-01, and set the PID target value and PID feedback value.

PID Target Value Input Methods

Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target
value as shown in the following table.

PID Target Input Method Setting Conditions

Multi-Function Analog Ter- Set H3-09 to C (PID target value). Also, be sure to set H6-01 (pulse train input function
minal A2 Input selection) to 1 (PID feedback value).
Set RS-422A/485 bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PID target value
RS-422A/485 register 0006H
from communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PID target value.
Pulse train input Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).

PID Feedback Input Methods

Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods.

Input Method Setting Conditions

Multi-function analog input Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Pulse train input Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).

Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.
INFO

nPID Adjustment Methods

Use the following procedure to adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response wave-
form.
1. Set b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) to 1, 2, 3 or 4 (PID control enabled).
2. Increase b5-02 (Proportional Gain (P)) to within a range that does not vibrate.
3. Reduce b5-03 (Integral (I) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
4. Increase b5-05 (Derivative (D) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.

6-120
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Individual Functions

nPID Fine Adjustment Methods

This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control constants.

Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce derivative time (D), and increase integral time (I).

Response Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition

To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen derivative time
(D).

Response
Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration

If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, the integral operation is too strong.
Lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.

Response Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

6-121
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short, and the cycle is almost identical to the derivative time (D)
set value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the derivative time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the derivative time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the propor-
tional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.

Response Before adjustment

After adjustment

Time

nSetting Precautions
• In PID control, the b5-04 parameter is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding
a specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, Inverter response is delayed, and the machine may be
damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.
• The b5-06 parameter is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from
exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
• The b5-07 parameter is used to adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum
output frequency to be 100%.
• Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this parameter to prevent
machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this
case, set the constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to
reduce Inverter responsiveness.
• Using b5-09, you can invert the PID output polarity. Consequently, if you increase the PID target value,
you can apply this parameter to applications to lower the Inverter output frequency.
• Using b5-10, you can apply gain to the PID control output. Enable this parameter to adjust the amount of
compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation.
• When the PID control output is negative, the output direction can be reversed by the parameter b5-11.
However, PID control output is limited to 0 when b1-04 (Prohibition of reverse operation) is set to 1
(enabled).
• With the Inverter, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in parameter b5-17, you can
increase or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/
deceleration function (C1 parameters) used normally, however, is allocated after PID control, so depending
on the settings, resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens,
reduce C1 parameters until hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using
b5-17. Also, you can disable the set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using
multi-function input set value 34 (PID soft starter).

6-122
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Option Card
Frequency reference
using multi-step command
Serial Com Enable/disable reverse operation
Frequency reference when PI output is negative
(U1-01) Upper limit
Terminal A1
Output frequency
nPID Control Block

D1-01 Lower limit 0

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PID SFS Cancel Multi-function input PID control cancel
signal is ON. PID is OFF under the Uppwer limit
D1-02 following conditions:
b5-01 = 0
During JDG command input
Lower limit
D1-16

Pulse input terminal RP

PID output monitor
(U1-37)
RS-422A/485 communications PID command (U1-38)
register 06 H PID target value
Set PID target value in
multi-function analog input
Terminal 16 or 14 PID
target value
Set bit 1 of
register 0FH to 1
Frequency reference

Fig 6.76 PID Control Block

terminal A2 PID feedback
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter.

Pulse input terminal RP PID input volume PID output

(U1-36) gain (b5-10)

Store integral using Integral rset using

multi-function inputs multi-function inputs
Proportional Integral
time limit b5-04 PID primary delay
gain (P) Integral (I) time time constant
b5-02

Select multi-function inputs

PID input characteristics
PID limit
b5-06 PID offset
adjustment (b5-07)
Select PID output
characteristics selection
Derivative (b5-09)
time
Individual Functions

6-123
 nPID Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. If PID feedback is lost,
the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and
continues for the time set in b5-14, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digi-
tal Operator and Inverter operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital
Operator, the error contact will operate, and Inverter operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.

PID feedback value

Loss detection
level
b5-13)

Time
No FbL
detection
FbL detection
Loss detection time Loss detection time
b5-14) b5-14)

Fig 6.77 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart

nPID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID sleep function delay time continues while the PID
control target value is at an insufficient level to operate the PID sleep function. When the PID sleep delay time
continues and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level, Inverter operation
will automatically resume.
When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function,
select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.

PID target value

Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation Sleep operation
delay time delay time
b5-16 b5-16
Internal run command
Operation Stopped
Run command has been input
External run command
Operation status output
Operating

Fig 6.78 PID Sleep Time Chart

6-124
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Individual Functions

K Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. Energy-saving control can be per-
formed using both V/f control and open loop vector control. The parameters to be adjusted are different for
each. In V/f control, adjust b8-04 to b8-06, and in open loop vector, adjust b8-02 and b8-03.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during
Open
Details V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Energy-saving Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving con-
mode selection
trol.
b8-01 0 or 1 0 No A A A
0: Disable
Energy Save
1: Enable
Sel

Energy-saving
gain Set the energy-saving gain with the open loop vector 0.0 to 0.7
b8-02 Yes No No A
Energy Save control method. 10.0 *1
Gain

Energy-saving
filter time con-
stant Set the energy-saving filter time constant with the open 0.00 to 0.50 s
b8-03 Yes No No A
loop vector control method. 10.0 *2
Energy Save
F.T

Energy-saving
Set the maximum motor efficiency value.
coefficient 0.0 to
Set the motor rated capacity in E2-11, and adjust the
b8-04 *4 No A A No
Energy Save
value by 5% at a time until output power reaches a mini- 655.00 *3
COEF mum value.

Power detec-
tion filter time
b8-05 constant Set the time constant for output power detection. 0 to 2000 20 ms No A A No

kW Filter Time

Search opera- Set the limit value of the voltage control range during
tion voltage search operation.
limiter Perform search operation to optimize operations using
b8-06 0 to 100 0% No A A No
minute variations in voltage using energy-saving con-
Search V Limit trol. Set to 0 to disable the search operation. 100% is the
motor base voltage.

Motor rated slip

Sets the motor rated slip in hertz. These set values will
0.00 to 2.90 Hz
E2-02 become the reference values for slip compensation. This No A A A
20.00 *5
Motor Rated parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Slip

Motor rated
output
Set the rated output of the motor in units of 0.01 kW. 0.00 to 0.40
E2-11 No Q Q Q
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning. 650.00 *5
Mtr Rated
Power

* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s for an Inverter capacity of 55 kW and over.
* 3. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the parameters.
* 4. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 5. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for 200-V class, 0.4 kW Inverters.)

6-125
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nAdjusting Energy-saving Control
The method of adjustment during energy-saving control operations differs depending on the control method.
Refer to the following when making adjustments.

V/f Control
In V/f control method, the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage
reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter. If the motor
capacity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Out-
put). Also, adjust the output voltage in steps of 5 until it reaches minimum. The larger the energy-saving
coefficient, the greater the output voltage.
• To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time parameter b8-05. If
b8-05 is set too small, however, motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Conse-
quently, control motor efficiency online to optimize efficiency by causing minute variations in voltage
using the search operation. Parameter b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that
control the voltage using the search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/200 V, and
for 400 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation.

Open loop vector control

In open loop vector control, control the slip frequency so that motor efficiency is maximized.
• Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, calculate the optimum slip for motor
efficiency for each frequency. In vector control, be sure to perform autotuning, and set the motor rated slip.
• If the motor performs hunting when using energy-saving control in vector control, reduce the set value in
b8-02 (Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03 (Energy-saving Filter Time Constant).

6-126
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Individual Functions

K Setting Motor Constant Parameters

In vector control method, the motor constant parameter are set automatically using autotuning. If autotuning
does not complete normally, set them manually.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Motor rated current Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units.

These set values will become the reference values 0.32 to
1.90 A
E2-01 for motor protection and torque limits. 6.40 No Q Q Q
*1
This parameter is automatically set during auto- *2
Motor Rated FLA tuning.

Sets the motor rated slip in Hz units.

Motor rated slip
These set values will become the reference values
0.00 to 2.90 Hz
E2-02 for slip compensation. No A A A
20.00 *1
This parameter is automatically set during auto-
Motor Rated Slip
tuning.

Motor no-load current Sets the motor no-load current in 1 A units. 0.00 to
1.20 A
E2-03 This parameter is automatically set during auto- 1.89 No A A A
*1
No-Load Current tuning. *3

Number of motor poles Sets the number of motor poles.

E2-04 This parameter is automatically set during auto- 2 to 48 4 poles No No Q No
Number of Poles tuning.

Motor line-to-line resis- Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance in Ω

0.000
tance units. 9.842 Ω
E2-05 to No A A A
This parameter is automatically set during auto- *1
65.000
Term Resistance tuning.

Motor leak inductance Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage induc-
tance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage. 0.0 to
E2-06 18.2% No No No A
This parameter is automatically set during auto- 40.0
Leak Inductance tuning.

Motor iron saturation coef- Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50%
ficient 1 of magnetic flux. 0.00 to
E2-07 0.50 No No No A
This parameter is automatically set during auto- 0.50
Saturation Comp1 tuning.

Motor iron saturation coef- Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75%
ficient 2 of magnetic flux. 0.00 to
E2-08 0.75 No No No A
This parameter is automatically set during auto- 0.75
Saturation Comp2 tuning.

Motor iron loss for torque

compensation 0 to 14 W
E2-10 Sets motor iron loss in W units. No A A No
65535 *1
Tcomp Iron Loss

Note All factory-set parameters are for a standard 4-pole motor.

* 1. The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 3. The setting range depends on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).

6-127
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nManual Motor Constant Parameter Setting Methods
The motor constant parameters settings methods are given below. Make (enter) settings referring to the motor
test report.

Motor Rated Current Setting

Set E2-01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate.

Motor Rated Slip Setting

Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Amount of motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (r/min) x No. of motor poles/
120.

Motor No-Load Current Setting

Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current using the rated voltage and rated frequency. The motor no-load current
is not normally written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.

Number of Motor Poles Setting

E2-04 is displayed only when V/f control method with PG is selected. Set the number of motor poles (number
of poles) as written on the motor nameplate.

Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting

E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot per-
form tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from
the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting
accordingly.
• E-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test repor]t × 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)

Motor Leak Inductance Setting

Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leak inductance in E2-06 using the percentage over the motor
rated voltage. Make this setting when the high-speed motor inductance is small. If the inductance is not writ-
ten on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.

Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings

E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically using autotuning.

Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting

E2-10 is displayed only when in V/f control method. To increase the torque compensation accuracy when in
V/f control method, set the motor iron loss in Watts.

6-128
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Individual Functions

K Setting the V/f Pattern

In V/f control method, you can set the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern as the need arises.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Input voltage setting Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt. This setting 155 to
200 V
E1-01 is used as a reference value in protection func- 255 No Q Q Q
*1
Input Voltage tions. *1

V/f pattern selection 0 to E: Select from the 15 preset V/f patterns.

E1-03 F: Custom user-set patterns (Application for 0 to F F No Q Q No
V/F Selection settings E1-04 to E1-10.)

Max. output frequency

(FMAX) 60.0 Hz
40.0 to
E1-04 (50.00 No Q Q Q
400.0 *5
Max Frequency Hz)*6

Max. voltage (VMAX) 0.0 to 200.0 V

E1-05 255.0 *1 No Q Q Q
Max Voltage Output voltage (V) *1 *2

Base frequency (FA) 60.0 Hz

0.0 to
E1-06 (50.00 No Q Q Q
400.0
Base Frequency Hz)*6

Mid. output frequency

0.0 to 3.0 Hz
E1-07 No A A A
400.0 *2
Mid Frequency A

Mid. output frequency Frequency (Hz)

voltage 15.0 V
0.0 to
E1-08 To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the *1 No A A A
255.0
Mid Voltage A same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the *2
setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in
Min. output frequency the following manner:
(FMIN) E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) 0.0 to 1.5 Hz
E1-09 No Q Q Q
>E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN) 400.0 *2
Min Frequency

Min. output frequency

voltage 0.0 to 9.0 V
E1-10 255.0 *1 No A A A
Min Voltage *1 *2

Mid. output frequency 2

0.0 to 0.0 Hz
E1-11 No A A A
400.0 *3
Mid Frequency B

Mid. output frequency

voltage 2 Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range. 0.0 to
0.0 V
E1-12 Normally, this setting is not required. 255.0 No A A A
*3
Mid Voltage B *1

Base voltage 0.0 to

0.0 V
E1-13 255.0 No A A Q
*4
Base Voltage *1

* 1. These are values for a 200-V Class Inverter. Values for a 400-V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 3. The contents of parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
* 5. When C6-01 is set to 0, the upper limit of the setting range is 150.0 Hz.
* 6. For (-E) models. Factory setting for base frequency is 50 Hz.

6-129
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nSetting Inverter Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 to match the power supply voltage. This set value will be the
standard value for the protection function and similar functions.

nSetting V/f Pattern

Set the V/f pattern in E1-03. There are two methods of setting the V/f pattern: Select one of the 15 pattern
types (set value: 0 to E) that have been set beforehand, or set a user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F. The contents of E1-03 when factory-set to F are the same as when E1-03 is
set to 1.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
Characteristic Application Set Value Specifications

0 50 Hz specifications

This pattern is used in general applications. 1 (F) 60 Hz specifications

Constant Torque Used when the load torque is fixed, regard- 60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
Characteristic less of rotation speed, for linear transport 2
50 Hz
systems.
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
3
60 Hz
4 50 Hz specifications,× 3 decrement

Variable torque
This pattern is used for loads with torque 5 50 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
proportional to two or three times the rota-
characteristic 6 60 Hz specifications, × 3 decrement
tion speed, such as fans and pumps.
7 60 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
Select the high startup torque V/f pattern 50 Hz specifications, medium startup
8
only in the following cases. torque
• The wiring distance between Inverter and
High Startup motor is large (approx. 150 m min.) 9 50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
Torque (See • A large torque is required at startup (ele-
vator loads, etc.) 60 Hz specifications, medium startup
Note)* • An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter A
torque
input or output.
• You are operating a motor that is less B 60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
than optimum.
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
C
60 Hz
Fixed Output This pattern is used for frequencies of 60 120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
D
Operation Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied. 60 Hz
180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
E
60 Hz
* The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.

When you select these patterns, the values of parameters E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are
three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern

The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.

6-130
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Individual Functions

0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern

The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

(Initial value of set value F)

• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz

• High startup torque (Set value 8: to b)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz

• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz

6-131
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

(Initial value of set value F)

• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz

• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz

• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz

6-132
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Individual Functions

55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern

The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz

(Initial value of set value F)

• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz

• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz

• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz

6-133
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set parameters E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to
anything other than F, you can only refer to parameters E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set
E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.

Output voltage (V)

E1-05
(VMAX)

E1-13
(V Base)

E1-08
(VC)

E1-10
(VMIN)

Frequency (Hz)
E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-04
(FMIN) (FB) (FA) (FMAX)

Fig 6.79 User-Set V/f Pattern

nSetting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points.
• When changing control method, parameters E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that
control method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)

6-134
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Digital Operator Functions

Digital Operator Functions

This section explains the Digital Operator functions.

K Setting Digital Operator Functions

You can set Digital Operator-related parameters such as selecting the Digital Operator display, multi-function
selections, and copy functions.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Monitor selection after Set the monitor item to be displayed when the
power up power supply is turned ON.
1: Frequency reference
o1-02 1 to 4 1 Yes A A A
2: Output frequency
Power-On Monitor 3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01

Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the
frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% (Maximum output fre-
quency is 100%)
Frequency units of refer-
2 to 39: r/min units (Sets the motor poles)
ence setting and monitor
40 to 39999: User desired display
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
0 to
o1-03 0 No A A A
39999
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.

Display Scaling Set the number of digits

below the decimal point
to display.

Example: When the max. output frequency value

is 200.0, set 12000.

LOCAL/REMOTE key Set the run method selection key (LOCAL/

enable/disable REMOTE Key) function.
o2-01 0: Disabled 0 or 1 1 No A A A
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital Opera-
Local/Remote Key tor and the parameter settings.)

STOP Key during control Set the STOP Key in the run mode.
circuit terminal operation 0: Disabled (When the run command is issued
o2-02 from an external terminal, the Stop Key is dis- 0 or 1 1 No A A A
Oper STOP Key abled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)

Parameter initial value When the frequency reference is set on the Digital
Operator frequency reference monitor, sets
whether the Enter key is necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
o2-03 1: Enter Key not needed 0 to 2 0 No A A A
2: All clear (clears all recorded user initial val-
ues)
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency
User Defaults reference without Enter Key operation.

6-135
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Frequency reference set-

ting method selection Sets the operation when the Digital Operator is
disconnected.
0: Enter key needed
o2-05 0 or 1 0 No A A A
1: Enter key not needed
Inverter output is cut off, and fault contact is
Operator M.O.P. operated.)

Cumulative operation time

setting Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units. 0 to
o2-07 0 No A A A
Operation time is calculated from the set values. 65535
Elapsed Time Set

Fan operation time setting Set the initial value of the fan operation time using
time units. 0 to
o2-10 0 No A A A
Fan ON Time Set The operation time accumulates from the set 65535
value.

* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)

nChanging Frequency Reference and Display Units

Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using parameter o1-03. You can change the
units for the following parameters using o1-03.
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)

nSwitching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON

Using parameter o1-02, select the monitor item (U1-oo [status monitor]) to be displayed on the Digital
Operator when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1-oo in Chap-
ter 5 Parameters.

Setting Precautions
If selecting monitor parameters other than U1-01 (Frequency Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency), and U1-
03 (Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01, and then set o1-02 to 4.

nDisabling the STOP Key

If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2, or 3, the stop command from the STOP Key on the Digital
Operator is an emergency stop command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency stop commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.

nDisabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key

Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. You cannot switch Inverter ref-
erence inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operator, b1-01 (Reference Selection), or b1-02
(Operation Method Selection).

6-136
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Digital Operator Functions

nInitializing Changed Parameter Values

You can save to the Inverter parameter set values that you have changed as parameter initial values. Change
the set values from the Inverter factory settings, and then set o2-03 to 1.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the Inverter parameters using the user-set initial values in memory.
To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.

nSetting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key
Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you
can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter
Key.
For example, enter the Run command using a 0 Hz reference, and then continuously press the UP Key to
increment the frequency reference by 0.01 Hz only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.01 Hz every 80 ms for 3 s
thereafter. Press and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s
after that. The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys
are released.

nClearing Cumulative Operation Time

Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in parameter o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(Inverter Operating Time).

nClearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time

Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in parameter o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling
Fan Operating Time).

K Copying Parameters
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile
memory).
• Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter parameters (VERIFY)

nRelated Parameters

Name Control Methods

Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Copy function selection 0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
o3-01 0 to 3 0 No A A A
Copy Func Select 2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)

Read permitted selection 0: Read prohibited

o3-02 0 or 1 0 No A A A
Copy Allowable 1: Read permitted

6-137
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nStoring Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method. Set o3-02
(Read permitted selection) to 1 (read permitted).

Table 6.6 READ Function Procedure

Step
Digital Operator Display Explanation
No.

Press the Menu Key, and select advanced pro-

1
gramming mode.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Press the ENTER Key, and select the parame-

2
ters monitor display.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using

3
the Increment Key and Decrement Key.
AUTO
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY TUNING

Press the ENTER Key, and select the parame-

4
ters setting display.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Change the set value to 1 using the Increment

5
Key.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Set the changed data using the ENTER Key.

6
The READ function will start.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

If the READ function ends normally, End is

displayed on the Digital Operator. Parameter
7
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the
display returns to o3-01.

An error may occur while saving to memory. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning

You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.

Read data length mismatch or read data error.

Tried to write parameters to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write opera-
tion.

Select READ Permitted

Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you
set o3-01 to 1, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the write
operation will be stopped.

6-138
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Digital Operator Functions

nWriting Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, make the settings using the follow-
ing method.

Table 6.7 COPY Function Procedure

Step
Digital Operator Display Explanation
No.

Press the MENU Key, and select advanced pro-

1
gramming mode.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Press the ENTER Key, and select the parame-

2
ters monitor display.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using

3
the Increment Key and Decrement Key.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Press the ENTER Key, and select the parame-

4
ters setting display.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Change the set value to 2 using the Increment

5
Key.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Set the changed data using the ENTER Key.

6
The COPY function will start.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

If the COPY function ends normally, End is dis-

played on the Digital Operator. Parameter o3-
7
01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the dis-
play returns to o3-01.

During the copy operation, errors may occur. If an error is displayed, set the parameters again. Error displays
and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Func-
tion.)
Error Display Meaning

Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.

Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital
Operator are different.
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter control method stored
in the Digital Operator are different.
Comparison between the parameter written to the Inverter and the parameter in the Digital Operator
shows they are different.
After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the Inverter parameter area and the
sum value of the Digital Operator parameter area shows they are different.

6-139
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nComparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values, make the settings using the follow-
ing method.

Table 6.8 VERIFY Function Procedure

Step
Digital Operator Display Explanation
No.

Press the MENU Key. and select advanced pro-

1
gramming mode.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Press the ENTER Key, and select the parame-

2
ters monitor display.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using

3
the Increment Key and Decrement Key.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Press the ENTER Key, and select the function

4
setting display.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Change the set value to 3 using the Increment

5
Key.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

Set the changed data using the ENTER Key.

6
The VERIFY function will start.
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING

If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is

displayed on the Digital Operator. Parameter
7
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the
display returns to o3-01.

An error may occur during the comparison. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display Meaning

Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).

nApplication Precautions
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type • Inverter capacity and voltage
• Software number • Control method

6-140
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Digital Operator Functions

K Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator

If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 parameter groups, and refer to drive mode, using
the Digital Operator.
If you set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function
selection) to 1B (write parameters permitted), you can write parameters from the digital operator when the ter-
minal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing parameters other than the frequency ref-
erence is prohibited. You can, however, reference parameters.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Used to set the parameter access level (set/read.)

0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and
Parameter access level setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select parameter
(Only parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 can
A1-01 0 to 2 2 Yes A A A
be read and set.)
2: ADVANCED
Access Level (Parameters can be read and set in both quick
programming mode and advanced program-
ming (A) mode.)

K Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot refer to or
change the settings of parameters A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all parameters except A1-00 by using the password function in
combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Used to set the parameter access level (set/read.)

0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and
Parameter access level setting A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select parameter
(Only parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 can
A1-01 0 to 2 2 Yes A A A
be read and set.)
2: ADVANCED
Access Level (Parameters can be read and set in both quick
programming mode and advanced program-
ming (A) mode.)

Password input when a password has been set in

Password A1-05.
This function write-protects some parameters of
the initialize mode. 0 to
A1-04 0 No A A A
If the password is changed, A1-01 to A1-03 and 9999
A2-01 to A2-32 parameters can no longer be
Enter Password changed. (Programming mode parameters can be
changed.)

6-141
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

Used to set a four digit number as the password.

Password setting
This parameter is not usually displayed. When the
0 to
A1-05 password (A1-04) is displayed, hold down the 0 No A A A
9999
RESET Key and press the Menu Key and the pass-
Select Password
word will be displayed.

nSetting Precautions
Parameter A1-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A1-05, hold down the RESET
Key and press the MENU Key while A1-04 is displayed.

K Displaying User-set Parameters Only

You can set and refer to parameters necessary to the Inverter only, using the A2 parameters (user-set parame-
ters) and A1-01 (Parameters Access Level).
Set the number of the parameter to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. You
can set and refer to parameters set in A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 only, using advanced programming
mode.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

User setting parameters Used to set the parameter numbers that can be set/
A2-01 read. Maximum 32. b1-01
to Effective when the access level (A1-01) is set to to - No A A A
A2-32 User Program (1). Parameters set in A2-01 to A2- o2-08
User Param 1 to 32 32 can be set/read in programming mode.

6-142
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options

Options
This section explains the Inverter option functions.

K Performing Speed Control with PG

This section explains functions with V/f control with PG.

nRelated Parameters
Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor

PG constant Set the number of PG (pulse generator or encoder)

0 to 600
F1-01 pulses. Sets the number of pulses per motor revo- No No Q No
60000 (1024)*
PG Pulsed/Rev lution.

Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.

Operation selection at PG 0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration stop using the
open circuit (PGO) deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
F1-02 0 to 3 1 No No A No
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the decelera-
tion time in C1-09.)
PG Fdbk Loss Sel 3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or
machinery, do not make this setting.)

Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS)

Operation selection at fault occurs.
overspeed (OS) 0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration stop using the
deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
F1-03 1: Coast to stop 0 to 3 1 No No A No
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the decelera-
PG Overspeed Sel tion time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or
machinery, do not make this setting.)

Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation

Operation selection at (DEV) fault occurs.
deviation (DEV) 0: Decelerate to stop (Deceleration stop using the
deceleration time 1, C1-02.)
F1-04 1: Coast to stop 0 to 3 3 No No A No
2: Emergency stop (Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.)
PG Deviation Sel 3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and
operation continued.)

PG rotation 0: Phase A leads with forward run command.

(Phase B leads with reverse run command.)
F1-05 0 or 1 0 No No A No
1: Phase B leads with forward run command.
PG Rotation Sel (Phase A leads with reverse run command.)

Sets the division ratio for the PG speed control

card pulse output.
PG division rate (PG pulse Division ratio = (1 + n)/m
monitor) (n = 0 or 1, m = 1 to 32)
F1-06
F1-06 n m 1 to 132 1 No No A No

This parameter is effective only when a PG-B2 is

PG Output Ratio used.
The possible division ratio settings are 1/32 ≤ F1-
06 ≤ 1

Integral value during accel/ Sets integral control during acceleration/decelera-

decel enable/disable tion to either enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral function isn't used
F1-07 while accelerating or decelerating; it is used at 0 or 1 0 No No A No
PG Ramp PI/I Sel constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral function is used at all
times.)

6-143
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Name Control Methods
Param- Change
eter Setting Factory during Open
Description V/f
Num- Range Setting Opera- Loop
LCD Display V/f with
ber tion Vec-
PG
tor
Overspeed (OS) detection
level
F1-08 0 to 120 115% No No A No
Sets the overspeed detection method.
PG Overspd Level Frequencies above that set for F1-08 (set as a per-
centage of the maximum output frequency) that
Overspeed detection delay continue to exceed this frequency for the time set
time (OS) in F1-09 are detected as overspeed faults.
F1-09 0.0 to 2.0 1.0 s No No A No
PG Overspd Time

Excessive speed deviation

F1-10 (DEV) detection level Sets the speed deviation detection method. 0 to 50 10% No No A No
Any speed deviation above the F1-10 set level
PG Deviate Level
(set as a percentage of the maximum output fre-
quency) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is
Excessive speed deviation
detected as a speed deviation.
detection delay time
Speed deviation is the difference between actual 0.0 to
F1-11 (DEV) 0.5 s No No A No
motor speed and the reference command speed. 10.0
PG Deviate Time

Number of PG gear teeth 1

Sets the number of teeth on the gears if there are
F1-12 gears between the PG and the motor. 0 No No A No
PG# Gear Teeth1
Input pulses input from PG 60 F1-13
0 to 1000
F1-01 F1-12
Number of PG gear teeth 2
F1-13 A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these 0 No No A No
parameters is set to 0.
PG# Gear Teeth2

PG open-circuit detection
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time.
time 0.0 to
F1-14 PGO will be detected if the detection time contin- 2.0 s No No A No
10.0
ues beyond the set time.
PGO Detect Time

* The factory setting for (-E) models is 1024.

nUsing PG Speed Control Card

There are four types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in V/f control with PG.
• 3G3FV-PPGA2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with open collector or complimentary outputs.
• 3G3FV-PPGB2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.
• 3G3FV-PPGD2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
• 3G3FV-PPGX2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers.

For the connection diagram, refer to page 2-50.

nSetting Number of PG Pulses

Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses/rotation. Set the number of A-phase or B-
phase pulses per 1 motor rotation in F1-01.

nMatching PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction

Parameter F1-05 matches the PG rotation direction and the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating
forwards, set whether it is A-phase driven or B-phase driven. Make this setting when using 3G3FV-PPGB2 or
3G3FV-PPGX2.

6-144
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options

Inverter
Motor PG (encoder)
Forward
command

Pulse output
A-phase driven when set value = 0 B-phase driven when set value = 1

A-phase A-phase
B-phase B-phase

Example: Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa motor (PG used: E6B2-CWZ6C)

Motor output axis rotates

counter-clockwise during In-
Forward verter forward command.
command Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase

The standard PG has A-phase driven (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.

Generally, PG is A-phase driven when rotation is clockwise (CW) see from the input axis. Also, motor rota-
tion is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the output side when forward commands are output. Conse-
quently, when motor rotation is forward, PG is normally A-phase driven when a load is applied, and B-phase
driven when a load is not applied.

nSetting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor

Set the number of PG gear teeth in F1-12 and F1-13. If there are gears between the motor and PG, you can
operate the motor by setting the number of gear teeth.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the number of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated
using the following formula.
No. of motor rotations (r/min.) = No. of input pulses from PC × 60 / F1-01 × F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on load
side) / F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)

nMatching Motor Speed During Acceleration and Deceleration to Frequency Reference

You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration.
To match the motor speed as closely as possible to the frequency reference even during acceleration and decel-
eration, set F1-07 to 1.

If F1-01 is set to 1, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and decelera-
tion. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F1-01 to 0.

IMPORTANT

6-145
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 nSetting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio
This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card 3G3FV-PPGB2. Set the dividing ratio for the
PG pulse monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the lower place 2
digits. The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 =



n m

The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are monitor outputs.

nDetecting PG Open Circuit

Set F1-09 (PG0 detection time) to detect PG cable disconnection and select the stopping method when PG
cable disconnection is detected.
PG disconnection is detected when the speed feedback from the PG is 0 for the time set in F1-14 whenever the
frequency reference is 1% or more of the maximum speed. PG0 is not detected during DC braking.

nDetecting Motor Overspeed

An error is detected when the motor speed exceeds the limit. An overspeed (OS) is detected when a PG Input
frequency that exceeds the set value in F1-08 continues for longer than the time set in F1-09. After detecting
an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.

nDetecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference

An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the designated speed and the actual
motor speed) is too great. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the
speed reference and actual workpiece speed are within the setting of L4-02, if a speed deviation great than the
set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.

6-146
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasures for the Inverter, and motor prob-
lems and countermeasures.

Protective and Diagnostic Functions ........................... 7-2

Troubleshooting .........................................................7-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection,
alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.

K Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing
the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping
method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the error reset signal.
• Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.

Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing

Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
• A short-circuit or ground fault
occurred at the Inverter output. (A
short or ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insu-
Overcurrent lation, or a damaged cable.)
The Inverter output current exceeded • The load is too large or the accelera- Reset the fault after correcting its
Over the overcurrent detection level. (200% tion/deceleration time is too short. cause.
Current of rated current) • A special-purpose motor or motor
with a capacity too large for the
Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic switch was switched at
the Inverter output.

Ground Fault
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter
The ground fault current at the
output. (A ground fault can be caused Reset the fault after correcting its
Ground Inverter output exceeded approxi-
by motor burn damage, worn insula- cause.
Fault mately 50% of the Inverter rated out-
tion, or a damaged cable.)
put current.

The output transistor has failed

because of a short-circuit or ground
fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit
Fuse Blown between the following terminals. A Replace the Inverter after correct-
DC BUS The fuse in the main circuit is blown. ing the cause.
Fuse Open short-circuit will damage the output
transistor:
B1 ( 3)
 U, V, W

 U, V, W

Main Circuit Overvoltage The deceleration time is too short and Increase the deceleration time or
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the regenerative energy from the connect a braking resistor (or
the overvoltage detection level. motor is too large. Braking Resistor Unit).
DC Bus
Overvolt 200 V class: Approx. 410 V Decrease the voltage so it's within
400 V class: Approx. 820 V The power supply voltage is too high.
specifications.

7-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)

Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below
• An open-phase occurred with the
the Undervoltage Detection Level
input power supply.
(L2-05).
• A momentary power loss occurred.
200 V class: Approx. 190 V
• The wiring terminals for the input
400 V class: Approx. 380 V Reset the fault after correcting its
DC Bus power supply are loose.
Main Circuit MC Operation Failure cause.
Undervolt • The voltage fluctuations in the input
The MC stopped responding during
power supply are too large.
Inverter operation.
• A fault occurred in the surge pre-
Applicable Inverter Capacities
vention circuit.
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW

• Try turning the power supply

Control Power Fault
off and on.
CTL PS The control power supply voltage -
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
Undervolt dropped.
continues to occur.

Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault

Overheating occurred in the inrush
resistor.
• Try turning the power supply
The MC did not respond for 10 s even • The MC in the main circuit failed.
MC off and on.
though the MC ON signal has been • The MC excitation coil is burned
Answer- • Replace the Inverter if the fault
output. out.
back continues to occur.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW

• An open-phase occurred in the input

power supply.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault • A momentary power loss occurred.
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates • The wiring terminals for the input
Reset the fault after correcting its
Input Pha unusually (not when regenerating). power supply are loose.
cause.
Loss This fault is detected when L8-05 is • The voltage fluctuations in the input
set to “Enabled.” power supply are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases
is bad.

• There is a broken wire in the output

cable.
Output Open-phase Reset the fault after correcting its
• There is a broken wire in the motor
An open-phase occurred at the cause.
winding.
Output Pha Inverter output. • The output terminals are loose.
Loss This fault is detected when L8-07 is
set to “Enabled.” The motor being used has a capacity
Check the motor and Inverter
less than 5% of the Inverter's maxi-
capacity.
mum motor capacity.

Cooling Fin Overheating The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.
The temperature of the Inverter's cool-
ing fins exceeded the setting in L8-02 There is a heat source nearby. Remove the heat source.
or 105°C.
Heatsnk
OH: The temperature exceeded the
Overtmp
setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can
( ) be changed by L8-03.).
Heatsink The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped. Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
OH1: The temperature exceeded
MAX our sales representative.)
100°C (Stopping method: Coast to
Temp
stop).

Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.

7-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceler-
Motor Overheating Alarm ation, and cycle times.
The Inverter will stop or will continue
Motor The motor has overheated.
to operate according to the setting of Check the V/f characteristics.
Overheat 1 L1-03.
Check the motor temperature
input on terminals A1 and A2.

Check the size of the load and the

length of the acceleration, deceler-
Motor Overheating Fault ation, and cycle times.
Motor The Inverter will stop according to the The motor has overheated.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Overheat 2 setting of L1-04.
Check the motor temperature
input on terminals A1 and A2.

Installed Braking Resistor Over- • Reduce the load, increase the

heating The deceleration time is too short and deceleration time, or reduce the
DynBrk The braking resistor is overheated and the regenerative energy from the motor speed.
Resistor the protection function has operated if motor is too large. • Change to a Braking Resistor
it has been enabled in L8-01. Unit.

• Try turning the power supply

Internal Braking Transistor Fault
off and on.
DynBrk The braking transistor is not operating -
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
Transistr properly.
continues to occur.

The load is too heavy. The accelera- Check the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time, and cycle length of the acceleration, deceler-
Motor Overload time are too short. ation, and cycle times.
The motor overload protection func-
Motor The V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal Check the V/f characteristics.
Overloaded electronic thermal value. high or too low.

The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is Check the Motor Rated Current
incorrect. (E2-01).

The load is too heavy. The accelera- Check the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time and cycle length of the acceleration, deceler-
Inverter Overload time are too short. ation, and cycle times.
The Inverter overload protection func-
Inv Over- The V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal Check the V/f characteristics.
loaded high or too low.
electronic thermal value.
Replace the Inverter with one that
The Inverter capacity is too low.
has a larger capacity.

• Make sure that the settings in

Overtorque Detected 1 L6-02 and L6-03 are appropri-
Over- There has been a current greater than ate.
-
torque the setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system
Det 1 setting in L6-03. and correct the cause of the
overtorque.

• Make sure that the current set-

Overtorque Detected 2 ting in L6-05 and time setting in
Over- There has been a current greater than L6-06 are appropriate.
-
torque the setting in L6-05 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system
Det 2 setting in L6-06. and correct the cause of the
overtorque.

7-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)

Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
• Make sure the load is an inertial
High-slip Braking OL load.
The inertia returned to the load is too
The output frequency did not change • Set the system so that the decel-
HSB-OL large.
for longer than the time set in N3-04. eration time that does not pro-
duce 0 V is 120 s or less.

• Make sure that the settings in

Undertorque Detected 1 L6-02 and L6-03 are appropri-
There has been a current less than the ate.
Undertorq setting in L6-02 for longer than the -
• Check the mechanical system
Det 1 setting in L6-03. and correct the cause of the
overtorque.

• Make sure that the current set-

Undertorque Detected 2 ting in L6-05 and time setting in
There has been a current less than the L6-06 are appropriate.
Undertorq setting in L6-05 for longer than the -
• Check the mechanical system
Det 2 setting in L6-06. and correct the cause of the
overtorque.

Overshooting/Undershooting are
Adjust the gain again.
occurring.
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the Check the reference circuit and
Overspeed setting in F1-08 for longer than the The reference speed is too high.
reference gain.
Det setting in F1-09.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't Check the settings in F1-08 and
appropriate. F1-09.

Fix the broken/disconnected wir-

There is a break in the PG wiring.
ing.
PG Disconnection Detected
PG pulses were input when the The PG is wired incorrectly. Fix the wiring.
PG Open Inverter was outputting a frequency Power isn't being supplied to the PG. Supply power to the PG properly.
(soft start output ≥ E1-09).
Check for open circuit when using
-
brake (motor).

The load is too heavy. Reduce the load.

The acceleration time and deceleration Lengthen the acceleration time

time are too short. and deceleration time.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater The load is locked. Check the mechanical system.
Speed than the setting in F1-10 for longer
Deviation than the setting in F1-11. The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't Check the settings in F1-10 and
appropriate. F1-11.

Check for open circuit when using

-
brake (motor).

Control Fault
The torque limit was reached continu-
Out of ously for 3 seconds or longer during a - Check the motor constants.
Control deceleration stop during open-loop
vector control.

PID Feedback Reference Lost

A PID feedback reference loss was
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feed-
Feedback back input was less than b5-13 (PID - -
Loss feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).

7-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions

Check the Communications

External fault input from Communi-
Opt Exter- cations Option Card - Option Card and communications
nal Flt signals.

Ext Fault External fault (Input terminal 3)

S3

Ext Fault External fault (Input terminal 4)

S4
• Reset external fault inputs to the
An “external fault” was input from a
multi-function inputs.
Ext Fault External fault (Input terminal 5) multi-function input terminal (S3 to
• Remove the cause of the exter-
S5 S7).
nal fault.

Ext Fault External fault (Input terminal 6)

S6

Ext Fault External fault (Input terminal 7)

S7

Digital Operator Connection Fault

The connection to the Digital Operator
Check the connection to the Digi-
Oper Dis- was broken during operation for a -
tal Operator.
connect RUN command from the Digital
Operator.

RS-422A/485 Communications
Check the communications
Error
devices and communications sig-
Memobus A normal reception was not possible -
nals.
Com Err for 2 s or longer after control data was
received once.

Option Communications Error

Check the communications
A communications error was detected
devices and communications sig-
Option during a run command or while setting -
nals.
Com Err a frequency reference from a Commu-
nications Option Card.

Digital Operator Communications The Digital Operator's connector isn't Disconnect the Digital Operator
Error 1 connected properly. and then connect it again.
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5 The Inverter's control circuits are
seconds after the power was turned Replace the Inverter.
faulty.
on.
CPF
Try turning the power supply off
-
CPU External RAM Fault and on again.

The control circuits were destroyed. Replace the Inverter.

Digital Operator Communications The Digital Operator isn't connected Disconnect the Digital Operator
Error 2 properly. and then connect it again.
After communications were estab-
CPF01 lished, there was a communications The Inverter's control circuits are
error with the Digital Operator for Replace the Inverter.
faulty.
more than 2 seconds.

7-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)

Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Try turning the power supply off
-
and on again.
BB Circuit Baseblock circuit error
Err The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
EEPROM error and on again.
EEROM
Error The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
CPU internal A/D converter error and on again.
Internal
A/D Err The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
CPU internal A/D converter error and on again.
External
A/D Err The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

The Option Card is not connected Turn off the power and insert the
properly. Card again.
Option Option Card connection error
error Replace the Option Card or the
The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.
Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
ASIC internal RAM fault and on again.
RAM-Err
The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
Watchdog timer fault and on again.
WAT-Err
The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

Try turning the power supply off

-
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault and on again.
CPU-Err
The control circuit is damaged. Replace the Inverter.

ASIC version fault The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter.
ASIC-Err

The Option Card is not connected Turn off the power and insert the
Communications Option Card A/D properly. Card again.
Option converter error
A/D error The Option Card's A/D converter is Replace the Communications
faulty. Option Card.

Communications Option Card self

Option diagnostic error
CPU down

Communications Option Card

Option model code error Communications Option Card fault. Replace the Option Card.
Type Err

Option Communications Option Card

DPRAM DPRAM error
Err

7-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function and do not operate the fault contact output. The
system will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm is output from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-
03).
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.

Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing

Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions

Check the sequence of the forward and

Forward/Reverse Run Commands
(blink- reverse run commands.
Input Together
ing) Since the rotational direction is
Both the forward and reverse run com- -
External unknown, the motor will be deceler-
mands have been ON for more than
Fault ated to a stop when this minor fault
0.5 s.
occurs.

Main Circuit Undervoltage

The following conditions occurred
when there was no Run signal.
(blink- • The main circuit DC voltage was
ing) below the Undervoltage Detection See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3 See corrective actions for UV1, UV2,
DC Bus Level Setting (L2-05). faults in the previous table. and UV3 faults in the previous table.
Under- • The surge current limiting contactor
volt opened.
• The control power supply voltage
when below the CUV level.

Main Circuit Overvoltage

(blink- The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
Decrease the voltage so it's within
ing) the overvoltage detection level. The power supply voltage is too high.
specifications.
DC Bus 200 V class: Approx. 400 V
Overvolt 400 V class: Approx. 800 V

The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.

(blink- Cooling Fin Overheating There is a heat source nearby. Remove the heat source
ing) The temperature of the Inverter's cool-
Heatsnk ing fins exceeded the setting in L8-02.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your
Over- The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
dealer.)
temp

Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm

(blink- An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter over-
Clear the multi-function input termi-
ing) heating alarm signal) was input from a -
nal's overheating alarm input.
Over multi-function input terminal (S3 to
Heat 2 S7).

Check the size of the load and the

length of the acceleration, decelera-
(blink- Motor overheating tion, and cycle times.
ing) E was set for H3-09 and the motor
The motor has overheated.
Motor temperature thermistor input exceeded Check the V/f characteristics.
Over- the alarm detection level.
Check the motor temperature input on
heat 1
terminals A1 and A2.

7-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)

Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions

(blink- Overtorque 1 • Make sure that the settings in L6-02

ing) There has been a current greater than and L6-03 are appropriate.
-
Over- the setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system and
torque setting in L6-03. correct the cause of the overtorque.
Det 1

• Make sure that the current setting in

(blink- Overtorque 2
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
ing) There has been a current greater than
- appropriate.
Over- the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
• Check the mechanical system and
torque setting in L6-06.
correct the cause of the overtorque.
Det 2

(blink- Undertorque 1 • Make sure that the settings in L6-02

ing) There has been a current less than the and L6-03 are appropriate.
-
Under- setting in L6-02 for longer than the • Check the mechanical system and
torq Det setting in L6-03. correct the cause of the overtorque.
1

• Make sure that the current setting in

(blink- Undertorque 2
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
ing) There has been a current less than the
- appropriate.
Under- setting in L6-05 for longer than the
• Check the mechanical system and
torq Det setting in L6-06.
correct the cause of the overtorque.
2

Overshooting/undershooting are
Adjust the gain again.
occurring.
(blink- Overspeed
ing) The speed has been greater than the Check the reference circuit and refer-
The reference speed is too high.
Over- setting in F1-08 for longer than the ence gain.
speed setting in F1-09.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't
Det Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-09.
appropriate.

There is a break in the PG wiring. Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.

The PG is disconnected
(blink- The Inverter is outputting a frequency, The PG is wired incorrectly. Fix the wiring.
ing) but PG pulses aren't being input.
PG Open Power isn't being supplied to the PG. Supply power to the PG properly.

The load is too large. Reduce the load.

Excessive Speed Deviation The acceleration time and decelera- Lengthen the acceleration time and
(blink-
The speed deviation has been greater tion time are too short. deceleration time.
ing)
Speed than the setting in F1-10 for longer The load is locked. Check the mechanical system.
Devia- than the setting in F1-11.
tion The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-11.
appropriate.

External error detected for Com-

munications Card other than SI-K2
Opt Continuing operation was specified - Remove the cause of the external fault.
External for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external
Flt fault was input from the Option Card.

7-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions

(blink-
ing) External fault (Input terminal S3)
Ext Fault
S3

(blink-
ing) External fault (Input terminal S4)
Ext Fault
S4

• Reset external fault inputs to the

(blink- An external fault was input from a
multi-function inputs.
ing) External fault (Input terminal S5) multi-function input terminal (S3 to
• Remove the cause of the external
Ext Fault S7).
fault.
S5

(blink-
ing) External fault (Input terminal S6)
Ext Fault
S6

(blink-
ing) External fault (Input terminal S7)
Ext Fault
S7

PID Feedback Reference Lost

A PID feedback reference loss was
(blink- detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feed-
ing) back input was less than b5-13 (PID - -
Feed- feedback loss detection level) for
back longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
Loss feedback loss detection time).

RS-422A/485 Communications
(blink- Error
ing) Check the communications devices
Normal reception was not possible for -
Memo- and signals.
2 s or longer after received control
bus Com data.
Err

Option Card Communications

Error
(blink- A communications error occurred in a Check the communications devices
ing) -
mode where the run command or a and signals.
Option frequency reference is set from an
Com Err Communications Option Card.

Communications on Standby
(blink- Control data was not normally Check the communications devices
-
ing) and signals.
received when power was turned ON.
ComCall

7-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

K Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two parameter settings. It
won't be possible to start the Inverter until the parameters have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault
contact outputs will not operate either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the
errors.

Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings

Display Meaning Incorrect settings

Incorrect Inverter
kVA Selec- The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your dealer.)
capacity setting
tion

Parameter setting range

The parameter setting is outside of the valid setting range.
Limit error

One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-
06) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• An up or down command was selected independently. (They must be used
together.)
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were
selected at the same time.
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set fre-
quency) were selected at the same time.
Multi-function input
• External Baseblock NO (8) and External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the
Terminal selection error
same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while PID Control Mode
Selection (b5-01) was enabled.
• The Multi-function Analog Input Terminal (A2) Function Selection (H3-09) was
set to a value other than 1F and the Terminal 13/14 Switch (1F) was selected, but
the Terminal A1/A2 Switching (H3-13) was set to use the main speed frequency
for A2 (H3-13 = 1).
• Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time.
• The emergency stop command NO and NC have been set at the same time.

Option Card selection The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
Sequence error 3, but an Option Card isn't connected (C option).
Select

Control method selec- V/f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1-02 to 1, but a PG Speed
PG Opt tion error Control Card isn't connected.
Missing

The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID func-
tion selection.
Multi-function analog • H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
Analog input selection error • H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2
Selection b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (pulse input) and H6-01 (Pulse Train Input
Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).

Parameter selection A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Ex.: A
error function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V/f control.

The following settings have been made at the same time.

PID control selection • b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
error • b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.

7-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings (Continued)
Display Meaning Incorrect settings

Parameters E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
V/f Ptrn V/f data setting error • E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Setting • E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > E3-05 (FB) ≥ E3-07 (FMIN)

One of the following parameter setting errors exists.

• C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Gain) > 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04)
> the Carrier Frequency Gain(C6-05)
CarrFrq/On- Parameter setting error • Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 05.
Delay • C6-01 is 0 and C6-02 is 2 to E.
• C6-01 is 1 and C6-02 is 7 to E.

A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.

EEPROM EEPROM write error • Try turning the power supply off and on again.
R/W Err • Try setting the parameters again.

K Errors During Autotuning

The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor
will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and
alarm output will not function.

Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning

Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
There is an error in the data input for
autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship
• Check the input data.
between the motor output and the motor
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and
rated current.
Motor data error motor.
Data Invalid The is an error between the no-load cur-
• Check the motor rated current and no-
rent setting and the input motor rated
load current.
current (when autotuning for only line-
to-line resistance is performed for vector
control).

A minor fault occurred during autotun-

Alarm
Minor Fault ing (xxx). • Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel • Check the load.
STOP key input
STOP Key autotuning.

Line-to-line resis-
tance error • Check the input data.
Resistance
• Check motor wiring.
Autotuning was not completed in the
• If the motor is connected to the
specified time.
No-load current error machine, disconnect it.
No-load current The results of autotuning has exceeded
• If the setting of T1-03 is higher than
the setting range for a parameter.
the Inverter input power supply volt-
Rated slip error age for Er-08, change the input data.
Rated Slip

• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).

Acceleration error • Increase L7-01 and L7-02 (Reverse
The motor did not accelerate in the spec-
(detected only for Torque Limits) if they are low.
Accelerate ified time.
rotational autotuning) • If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.

7-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning (Continued)

Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
• If the motor is connected to the
Motor speed error machine, disconnect it.
The torque reference was too high
(detected only for • Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
(100%) during acceleration (for open
rotational autotuning) • Check the input data (particularly the
loop vector control only).
Motor Speed number of PG pulses and the number
of motor poles).

The current flow exceeded the motor

rated current.
Check the current detection circuit,
Current detection
The detected current sign was the oppo- motor wiring, current detector, and
error
I-det Circuit site of what it should be. installation methods.

There is a phase fault for U, V, or W.

Leakage inductance Autotuning was not completed in the

Check motor wiring.
error specified time.
Leak Inductance

The torque reference exceeded 100%

V/f settings exces- • Check and correct the settings.
and the no-load torque exceeded 70%
sive* • Disconnect the load from the motor.
V/f Over Setting during autotuning.

Autotuning for the motor core saturation

Motor core satura- value could not be completed in the
• Check the input data.
tion error (detected specified time.
• Check motor wiring.
only for rotational The results of autotuning has exceeded
• If the motor is connected to the
Saturation autotuning) the setting range for a parameter so a
machine, disconnect it.
temporary setting was made for the
motor core saturation coefficient.

Rated current setting Check the input data (particularly the

The rated current is set high. motor output current and motor rated
alarm* current).
Rated FLA Alm

* Displayed after autotuning has been completed.

K Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function

The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following
table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an
error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-01 will be displayed. The error contact output
and alarm output will not function.

7-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function
Func-
Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
tion

o3-01 was set to 1 to write a parameter

Digital Operator Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing
when the Digital Operator was write-
READ write-protected parameters with the Digital Operator.
protected (o3-02 = 0).
IMPOSSIBLE

The read data length does not agree.

Repeat the read.
Read Illegal read data Check the Digital Operator cable.
READ DATA
The write data is incorrect. Replace the Digital Operator.
ERROR

A low Inverter voltage has been

An attempted write of a parameter to detected.
Illegal write status
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed. Repeat the read.
DATA ERROR
Replace the Digital Operator.

The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same
ID not matched
number is different. product code and software number.
ID UNMATCH

The capacity of the Inverter being

Inverter capacity Use the copy function for the same
copied and the capacity in the Digital
INV. KVA matched Inverter capacity.
Operator are different.
UNMATCH

The control method of the Inverter

Control method Use the copy function for the same
being copied and the control method
Copy CONTROL matched control method.
in the Digital Operator are different.
UNMATCH

The parameter written to the Inverter

was compared with the parameter in
Verify error Retry the copy.
the Digital Operator and they were
COPY ERROR
different.

The checksum in the Inverter parame-

ter area was compared with the check-
Checksum error Retry the copy.
SUM CHECK sum in the Digital Operator parameter
ERROR area and they were different.

7-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as
expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the
appropriate measures.

If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.

K If Parameters Cannot Be Set

Use the following information if an Inverter parameter cannot be set.

nThe display does not change when the and Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.

The Inverter is operating (drive mode).

There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the set-
tings.

Parameter write enable is turned OFF.

This occurs when “parameter write enable” (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-05). If the parameter write enable input is OFF, the parameters cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set
the parameters.

Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)

If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the parameters for
the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset Key and the
Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password in
parameter A1-04.)

nOPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.

The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.

nCPF00 or CPF01 is displayed./Nothing appears on Digital Operator display.

This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.

7-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.

nThe motor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.

If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to make
the DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. The DRIVE indicator
will light when drive mode is entered.
IMPORTANT

The operation method setting is wrong.

If parameter b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not oper-
ate when the Run Key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key to switch to Digital Operator oper-
ation or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).

The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.

INFO

The frequency reference is too low.

If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.

There is a multi-function analog input setting error.

If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the
frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.

nThe motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.

The Inverter is not in drive mode.

If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU Key make
the DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the ENTER Key. The DRIVE indicator will
light when drive mode is entered.

7-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting

The operation method selection is wrong.

If parameter b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an
external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE Key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* again to return to the original setting.

The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.

INFO

The wiring to the Inverter control circuit terminal is faulty.

If the input wiring to the control circuit terminal is faulty, the Inverter input signal cannot be confirmed. Use
the Digital Operator to check U1-10 (input terminal status).
The sequence input method can be switched between an NPN (factory setting) and PNP input. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 Wiring.

A 3-wire sequence is in effect.

The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2-
wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable
for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-05, terminals S3 to
S7) to a value other than 0.

The frequency reference is too low.

If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.

There is a multi-function analog input setting error.

If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 and H3-09 are set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is
input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are
correct.

nThe motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.

The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost func-
tion, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.

nThe motor only rotates in one direction.

“Reverse run prohibited” is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run pro-
hibited), the Inverter will not receive reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set
b1-04 to 0.

7-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U),
T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a for-
ward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer
and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W.

K If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration Is Slow

Use the following information if the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.

nThe torque limit has been reached.

When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit.
This can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the
value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-09 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to be sure
that the analog input value is suitable.

nThe stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.

If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

nThe stall prevention level during running is too low.

If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed will drop before out-
putting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

nV/f control limit

The output torque at low frequencies is smaller with V/f control than it is for vector control. Consider whether
it is possible to change to vector control (A1-02 = 2).

nAutotuning has not been performed for vector control

Vector control will not be perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control (0 or 1).

K If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference

Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference.

7-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting

nThe analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The frequency reference bias set in parameter H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that
the set value is suitable.

nA signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal A1.

When 1F (frequency reference) is set for parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Func-
tion Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency
reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.

K If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision

If speed control accuracy is low for the slip compensation function, the slip compensation limit has been
reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensa-
tion limit set in parameter C3-03. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

K If There Is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-

loop Vector Control Mode
The motor's rated voltage is high.
The Inverter's maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC is input,
then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a result of vector control, the output voltage refer-
ence value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Use
a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor for use with vector control), or change to flux vector
control.

K If Motor Deceleration Is Slow

Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.

nThe deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.

The following causes are possible.

“Stall prevention during deceleration enabled” is set.

When braking resistor is connected, set parameter L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0
(disabled) or 3 (with braking resistor). When this parameter is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking
resistor does not fully function.

The deceleration time setting is too long.

Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).

Motor torque is insufficient.

If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider
increasing the motor capacity.

7-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit.
This can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is
suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input terminal A2 Function H3-09 (set value: 10 to
12 or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.

nIf the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake Is Applied

The following causes are possible.

There is a fault in the sequence.

The sequence is incorrect. The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration
is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output ter-
minals (M1 and Mw) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0
to 5.0 Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz). Change the
setting to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run
signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.

DC braking is insufficient.
If the DC braking power is insufficient, increase the b2-02 setting (DC injection braking current).

The wrong brake is being used.

Use the main brake rather than the holding brake.

K If the Motor Overheats

Take the following steps if the motor overheats.

nThe load is too big.

If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated
torque, the motor will overheat. Some motor ratings are given for short period performance and are not contin-
uous ratings. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/decelera-
tion time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.

nThe ambient temperature is too high.

The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn
out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating
temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating
temperature range.

nThe withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.

When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and
the motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage

7-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting

(i.e., 1,200 V for 400 V class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that
is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 400 V class Inverter, use a special
motor for Inverters.

nAutotuning has not been performed for vector control

Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning, or set the motor
constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/f control (0
or 1).

K If There Is Noise When the Inverter Is Started or From an AM Radio

If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to
some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input area.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply output area.
• Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
• Ground the Inverter and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.

7-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter Is Run
The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the
ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a
high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of
0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Invert-
ers). It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the
carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.

K If There Is Mechanical Oscillation

Use the following information when there is mechanical oscillation.

nThe machinery is making unusual sounds.

The following causes are possible.

There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the
carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may
indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with parameters
C6-02 to C6-05.

There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output fre-
quency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3-01 to d3-04 or install
rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.

nThe motor vibrates strongly and won't operate normally.

This may be caused by open phases in the motor output. Failure in one or two of the phases in a three-phase
motor output will cause extremely strong vibration and prevent the motor from operating. Check for a faulty
motor power line or disconnection. The same condition will also occur if the Inverter's output transistor is
open and damaged. Check the balance of the Inverter output voltage.

nOscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting parameters C4-
02 (torque compensation time constant), C2-01 (S-curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start), and C3-02
(Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time
setting.
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the control method selection (A1-
02) to V/f control (0 or 1).

7-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting

nOscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting parameters C4-
02 (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant), N1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain), and C3-02 (Slip
Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.

nOscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f w/PG control.

The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (parameter N1-01) to 0
(disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again.

nOscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.

If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I,
and D parameters. (Refer to page 6-120.)

nPID control diverges.

The following causes are possible.

Feedback is not being input.

If no feedback is being input and the detection value is zero, PID control will fail to function and the output
will diverge. This will cause the motor speed to increase to the maximum frequency. Check for a break in the
feedback signal or for an incorrect setting of either H3-09 (multi-function analog input terminal A2 function
selection) = B or H6-01 (pulse train input function selection) = 1. Also check to make sure that the PID-related
parameters are correct.

The target values and detection values do not agree.

PID control brings the difference (error) between the target value and detection value to zero. Because of this,
it is necessary to unify the input levels for the target value and detection value. Set the gain so that the level of
detection coincides.
Example: H3-10/H3-11 (gain (terminal A2)/bias (terminal A2)) or H6-03/H6-04 (pulse train input gain/pulse
train input bias)

The Inverter output frequency and detection value relationship is reversed.

If the Inverter is set so that the detection value decreases when the output frequency increases, the PID control
will diverge. Correct this by switching the forward/reverse status of b5-09 (PID output characteristics selec-
tion). For example, if 0 is being used, change it to 1.

nAutotuning has not been performed with vector control.

Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control.

K If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output Is Stopped

If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the
motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been

7-23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking
as follows:
• Increase the parameter b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the parameter b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.

K If 0 V Is Detected When the Fan Is Started, or the Fan Stalls

Generation of 0 V (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started. The DC
injection braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the
parameter b2-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting.

K If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference

Use the following information if the output frequency does not rise to the frequency reference.

nThe frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.

When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency
range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (parameters d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width
(parameter d3-04) settings are suitable.

nThe frequency reference upper limit has been reached.

The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) × Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the parameter E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.

K Oscillation occurs when using energy-saving control

The energy-saving control setting may be incorrect. If oscillation occurs during energy-saving operation, mea-
sure the oscillation frequency. If the oscillation cycle matches b8-05 (power detection filter time constant), the
search operation will be adversely affected. Set b8-06 (search operation voltage limiter) to 0 to disable search
operation, or increase the power detection filter time constant.

K An EF (Forward/Reverse Run Commands Input Together) was detected

and the Inverter will not operate, or the motor operates for only an instant
when the control equipment power supply is turned OFF.
When the EF is detected and the Inverter will not operate, use one of the following measures.

nIncorrect Sequence
If the EF is detected when the forward reference and reverse reference are input simultaneously for 0.5 second
or more, revise the sequence.

7-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Troubleshooting

nIncorrect operation due to sneak current.

The Inverter input can become indefinitely ON due to an unwanted current path in the control section output.
If, in the wiring diagram shown below, the output power supply for the control section is lower than 24 VDC
or the power supply is OFF, current will flow as shown by the arrows and the Inverter input will operate. If
this occurs, insert a diode at section A in the diagram.

Section A
Control device (Output Unit) Inverter (control input)

24 V

S1 7

SC

GND

7-25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 7-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 8
Chapter 8
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter

Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance and Inspection

K Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation.
• The ambient temperature should not be too high.
• The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
• The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.

K Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LED indicators on the front
cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the inspec-
tion. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric
shock.

Fig 8.1 Periodic Inspections

Item Inspection Corrective Procedure
External terminals, Are all screws and bolts tight? Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
mounting bolts, connec-
tors, etc. Are connectors tight? Reconnect the loose connectors.

Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty? dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm 2).
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
PCBs
the PCBs? (4 to 6 kg•cm 2).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or
Cooling fan has the total operating time exceeded Replace the cooling fan.
20,000 hours?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
Power elements dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
the elements?
(4 to 6 kg•cm 2).
Are there any irregularities, such as dis-
Smoothing capacitor Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
coloration or odor?

K Periodic Maintenance of Parts

The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use
of the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage condi-
tions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform
period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.

8-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Inspection

Periodic inspection standards vary depending on the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.

Fig 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines

Part Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method
Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new part.
Replace with new part. (Determine need by
Smoothing capacitor 5 years
inspection.)
Breaker relays - Determine need by inspection.
Fuses 10 years Replace with new part.
Replace with new board. (Determine need by
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs 5 years
inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30°C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day

8-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Cooling Fan Replacement Outline

n200-V and 400-V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.

Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and then pull the fan out in
the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.

Air flow direction

2
1
Fan cover

Fig 8.3 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)

Mounting the Cooling Fan

1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above
faces into the Inverter.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter.

8-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maintenance and Inspection

n200-V and 400-V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More

A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.

Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the con-
troller.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the
back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.

Mounting the Cooling Fan

After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow faces the top of the Inverter.

Air flow direction

Controller bracket Fan cover

Controller Connector

Gate driver

Fig 8.4 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)

8-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
The control circuit terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.

Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal
card.

IMPORTANT

nRemoving the Control Circuit Terminal Card

1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the card.

nMounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card

Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on
the card.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Inverter operation.

Removing and Mounting the

Control Circuit Terminal Card

FE NC

Fig 8.5 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card

8-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 9
Chapter 9
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.

Standard Inverter Specifications .................................. 9-2

Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ....... 9-5
Options and Peripheral Devices .................................. 9-6

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.

K Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.

n200-V Class Inverters

Table 9.1 Specifications for 200-V Class Inverters

Model
A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 A2185 B2220 B2300 B2370 B2450 B2550 B2750 B2900 B211K
3G3RV-
Max. applicable motor
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
output (kW)
Rated output
1.2 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.7 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 44 55 69 82 110 130 160
capacity (kVA)
Rated output
3.2 4.1 7 9.6 15 23 31 45 58 71 85 115 145 180 215 283 346 415
Output current (A)
specifi- Max. output
cations voltage (V) 3-phase, 200 to 240 VAC (Depends on input voltage.)
VT:
Max. output CT (low carrier, fixed torque applications): 150 Hz
400
frequency (Hz) VT (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz
Hz
Rated voltage
3-phase, 200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
(V)
3-phase, 200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Cooling Fan: 200 to 220 VAC at 50 Hz,
Rated fre-
200 to 230 VAC at 60 Hz
quency (Hz)
Power
Allowable volt-
supply -15% to +10%
age fluctuation
specifi-
Allowable fre-
cations
quency fluctua- ±5%
tion
Power supply
1.5 1.9 3.2 4.5 7.0 9.3 14 20 26 33 36 46 62 76 91 122 147 176
capacity (kVA)
Power consumption (W) 59 69 100 129 186 248 332 544 612 712 860 1217 1416 1771 2206 997 3434 3975
Approx. weight (kg) 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 7.0 11 11 21 24 57 63 86 87 108 150
Measures for power sup-
Optional DC reactor Built-in DC reactor
ply harmonics
Enclose, wall-mounting (NEMA1: Equivalent to IP20) or Mounted in a
Protective structure Mounted in a panel (equivalent to IP00)
panel (equivalent to IP00)*
Note The specifications for the 3G3RV-A2220 to 3G3RV-A2750 for Europe are the same as those for the 3G3RV-B2220 to 3G3RV-B2750.
* For applications of a NEMA1 mounting, remove the top and bottom covers and treat as IP00.

9-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Standard Inverter Specifications

n400-V Class Inverters

Table 9.2 Specifications for 400-V Class Inverters

Model
A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 A4040 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 A4185
3G3RV-
Max. applicable motor output (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
Rated output capacity
1.4 1.6 2.8 4 5.8 6.6 9.5 13 18 24 30
(kVA)
Output specifi- Rated output current (A) 1.8 2.1 3.7 5.3 7.6 8.7 12.5 17 24 31 39
cations Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase, 380 to 480 VAC (Depends on input voltage.)
CT (low carrier, fixed torque applications): 150 Hz
Max. output frequency (Hz)
VT (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz
Rated voltage (V)
3-phase, 380 to 480 VAC 50/60 Hz
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctua-
-15% to +10%
Power supply tion
specifications Allowable frequency fluctu-
±5%
ation
Power supply capacity
1.7 1.9 3.3 4.9 6.9 7.9 12 15 22 28 36
(kVA)
Power consumption (W) 53 58 84 115 148 148 209 307 410 498 634
Approx. weight (kg) 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 10 10
Measures for power supply harmonics Optional DC reactor
Protective structure Enclose, wall-mounting (NEMA1: Equivalent to IP20) or Mounted in a panel (equivalent to IP00)*

Model
B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B4900 B411K B413K B416K
3G3RV-
Max. applicable motor output (kW) 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160
Rated output capacity
34 46 57 69 85 110 140 160 200 230
(kVA)
Output specifi- Rated output current (A) 45 60 75 91 112 150 180 216 260 304
cations Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase, 380 to 480 VAC (Depends on input voltage.)
Max. output frequency CT (low carrier, fixed torque applications): 150 Hz
(Hz) VT (high carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz
Rated voltage (V)
3-phase, 380 to 480 VAC 50/60 Hz
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctua-
-15% to +10%
Power supply tion
specifications Allowable frequency fluc-
±5%
tuation
Power supply capacity
38 52 63 76 91 125 151 181 217 254
(kVA)
Power consumption (W) 725 995 1144 1316 1698 1974 2285 2950 3390 3938
Approx. weight (kg) 21 21 36 36 36 88 89 102 120 160
Measures for power supply harmonics Built-in DC reactor Built-in DC reactor
Mounted in a panel (equivalent to
Protective structure
IP00) Mounted in a panel (equivalent to IP00)*

* For applications of a NEMA1 mounting, remove the top and bottom covers and treat as IP00.

9-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.

Table 9.3 Common Specifications

Model Number
Specification
o
3G3RV-o
Sine wave PWM
Control method
Open loop vector control, V/f control, V/f with PG control (switched by parameter setting)
Speed control range 1:100 (Open loop vector control)
Speed control accuracy ±0.2% (25°C ± 10°C) (Open loop vector control)
Speed control response 5 Hz (Open loop vector control)
CT selected (low carrier, fixed torque applications): 150% /0.5 Hz
Torque characteristics
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120%/0.5 Hz (Open loop vector control)
Torque limits Can be set using parameter settings for open loop vector control only.
Frequency control range 0.01 to 150 Hz (CT selected.), 0.01 to 400 Hz (VT selected.)
Frequency accuracy (tem- Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to +40°C)
Control characteristics

perature characteristics) Analog references: ±0.1% (25°C ±10°C)

Frequency setting resolu- Digital references: 0.01 Hz
tion Analog references: 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (10 bit with no sign)
Output frequency resolu-
0.001 Hz
tion
Overload capacity and CT selected: 150% of rated output current per minute*1
maximum current *2 VT selected: 120% of rated output current per minute
Frequency setting signal Voltage input of 0 to ±10 or 0 to 10 (20 kΩ) VDC or current input of 4 to 20 mA
Acceleration/Decelera-
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
tion time
Braking torque Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, torque limits, 16-speed control (maximum), accelera-
tion/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire sequence, autotuning (rotational or stationary), dwell
Main control functions functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for
frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving
control, RS-485/422A communications (Conforms to MODBUS,19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, and function copying.
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
protection
CT selected (low carrier, fixed torque applications): 150% of rated output current per minute (except for 110 kW Inverters)
Overload protection
VT selected (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current per minute
Protective functions

200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.

Overvoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
Undervoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss Stops for 15 ms or more.
ridethru By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor.
Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits. (Overcurrent level)
Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
Application site Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Ambient operating tem- -10°C to 40°C (Closed wall-mounted type)
perature 10°C to 45°C (Open chassis type)
Ambient operating humid-
95% max. (with no condensation)
ity
Environment

Storage temperature - 20°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)

Altitude 1000 m max.
Insulation resistance 5 MW max. (Do not perform insulation resistance with withstand voltage tests.)
Vibration 10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 max, oscillation vibration of 20 Hz

Protective structure Enclose, wall-mounting (NEMA1: Equivalent to IP20) or Mounted in a panel (equivalent to IP00)
Mounted in a panel (equivalent to IP00)

Note Rotational autotuning is required to obtain the specifications labeled as open loop vector control.
* 1. Not including the 200 V Class Inverter for 110 kW and the 400 V Class Inverters for 220 and 300 kW.
* 2. Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected.

9-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices

Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices

The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter. Select them according to the
application.

Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices

Purpose Name Model (Code) Description

MCCB or Ground Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to pro-
Example: Mitsubishi Power supply
Protect Inverter wiring tect Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable
Fault Interrupter* Electric’s NV Series
for high frequencies.
Prevents burning when Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out
Magnetic Contac- Example: Fuji Electric’s
a Braking Resistor is when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the MCCB or
tor SC Series
used. coil. ground fault
interrupter
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control
Contains switching
Surge Absorber DCR2-o relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors
surge
and relays near the Inverter.
Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective Magnetic
Isolates I/O signals Isolator DGPo contactor
against inductive noise.
Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All AC Reactor to
Improve the input Inverters of 22 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors. improve power
DC Reactor 3G3HV-PUZDABo factor
power factor of the These are optional for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Install
AC Reactor 3G3IV-PUZBABo
Inverter DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power
supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power
3G3IV-PFNo supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter
Reduce the affects of Input Noise Filter
3G3EV-PLNFo into the power supply line. Connect as close to the
radio and control device Inverter as possible. Braking
noise Resistor
Output Noise Fil- Reduces noise generated by the Inverter. Connect as close
3G3IV-PLFo
ter to the Inverter as possible. Input-line
noise filter
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
Braking Resistor 3G3IV-PERF150WJo01
reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED).
Enable stopping the Braking Resistor Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
3G3IV-PLKEBo
machine in a set time Unit reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
DC
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the decelera- Reactor
Braking Unit 3G3IV-PCDBRoB
tion time of the motor.
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF opera- Inverter
Analog Operator
tion control to be performed by analog references from a
(small plastic 3G3IV-PJVOP95o Analog
remote location (50 m max.). Operator
Operator)
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF opera-
Analog Operator
Operates the Inverter tion control to be performed by analog references from a
(Standard steel- 3G3IV-PJVOP96o Ground
externally remote location (50 m max.).
plate Operator)
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
1 m cable: (3G3IV- Output-line
Digital Operator PCN126) Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely. noise filter
Connection Cable 3 m cable: (3G3IV- Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
PCN326)
Provides Inverter Momentary Power Handles momentary power losses for the control power
momentary power loss Loss Recovery 3G3IV-PCNo26 supply for models 2.2 kW or less (maintains power for
recovery time Unit 2 s).
Set/monitor frequen-
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for Motor
cies and voltages exter- Scaling Meter K3TJ-V11o
use with a PWM Inverter.
nally.
Ground
* Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent
operating errors. The interrupter must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example:NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)

9-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices
There are several types of options and peripheral devices for Inverters: Separately installed options, spe-
cial options, Option Cards, and recommended separately installed options. The specifications of these
options are provided in this sections.

Separately Installed Options Special Options

BRAKING UNIT

WARNING

Remove this cover, and

set the connectors
May cause injury or electric before turning the
shock. power on.
Please follow the instructions in (See instructions.)
the manual before installation or
operation.
Disconnect all power before opening
Lights
front cover of unit. Wait 3 minutes when
until DC Bus capacitors discharge. braking
Use proper grounding techniques.

K3TJ-V11@
Scaling Meter 3G3IV-PCDBR@ B 3G3IV-PLKEB@ 3G3IV-PERF150WJ@ 01
Braking Unit Braking Resistor Unit Braking Resistor
REMOTE REMOTE
FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM

PRGM
DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY AUTO
TUNING
DIGITAL OPERATOR PJVOP161 DIGITAL OPERATOR PJVOP160

LOCAL LOCAL
MENU ESC MENU ESC
REMOTE REMOTE

JOG JOG

FWD FWD
REV RESET REV RESET

RUN STOP RUN STOP

3G3IV-PJVOP96@ 3G3IV-PJVOP95@ 3G3HV-PUZDAB@ 3G3FV-PCN@ 25 Digital Operator

Analog Operator Analog Operator DC Reactor Digital Operator 3G3IV-PJVOP161 (LED)
(standard, steel panels) (small, plastic) Connection Cable 3G3IV-PJVOP160 (LCD)

Recommended Separately Installed

Options

Recommended Separately Installed

Options
3G3EV-PLNFD@
Simple Input Noise
Filter

3G3IV-PUZBAB@
AC Reactor
E
L1 L2
+
L3
SL11

EN133200
LINE

3G3IV-PLF@
MADE
IN SWITZERLAND
FN 258L-
100 - 35
480VAC
100A@50 / 50 - 60Hz
ßC
/ - 25ß
+ 85ßC

Output Noise Filter

LOAD
L1Õ 9713

L2Õ
L3Õ
E

3G3IV-PFN @
Input Noise Filter

3-phase inductive
motor

Power supply
3-phase, 200 VAC (200-V Class)
3-phase, 400 VAC (400-V Class)

Option Cards
JP3
T1

C3
U6

JP1
C33

++ C1
U10

U9
U7

R
R5
R1

C21
R2

R11
R3
R36
R35

C26
R6
U8 R70
U10

R113

R28
C28

R120 R8
11
R11
R110
R107

U1
+
TR2

Y1 R55

R75
C2

R52 R114
R54
U11 C17
TR1

PE C24
R7 R14
+ R57
R56

R6
R21 R40
R5
2
+ R78 R39 D6
C22 R25 C5
C39

R15 R20
C16 R15 R30 C35
U14 R15
R131
U12
R99
R95

U15
C11
R105
R10
R10

R94
R102 R97
C12 C13 C20
JP5
JP6 R96
R95

RT4
U13

U17
CODE
No. SI-N
7360
C10
0-C0
210

3G3IV-PA008 3G3IV-PA012 3G3FV-PPGA2 3G3FV-PPGB2 3G3FV-PPGD2 3G3FV-PPGX2 3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN

Analog Monitor Card Analog Monitor Card PG Speed Control PG Speed Control PG Speed Control PG Speed Control DeviceNet Commu-
Card Card Card Card nications Card

Fig. 3.1 Options and Peripheral Devices

9-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Table 9.1 Options and Peripheral Devices

Type Name Model number Application
Replacement fan for Inverters equipped with a cooling fan.
Special Mounted
Fan Unit 3G3IV-PFAN@ Replace the Cooling Fan when the fan replacement time has come or a cooling fan fault
Options
(FAN) alarm has been displayed.
Connects to a multi-function analog output from the Inverter.
Scaling Meter K3TJ-V11@
Used to display rotational speeds of motors, line speeds, etc., in physical units.
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by
Analog Operator (stan-
Separately 3G3IV-PJVOP96@ analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
dard with steel panels)
Installed Options Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by
Analog Operator (small,
3G3IV-PJVOP95@ analog references from a remote location (50 m max.).
plastic)
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor.
Braking Unit 3G3IV-PCDBR@ B Not required with Inverters of 7.5 kW or less for 200-V class Inverters or for Inverters of
15 kW or less for 400-V class Inverters.
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use
Braking Resistor Unit 3G3IV-PLKEB@
rate: 10% ED).
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use
rate: 3% ED).
Braking Resistor 3G3IV-PERF150WJ@01
Not required with Inverters of 3.7 kW or less for 200-V class Inverters or for Inverters of
2.2 kW or less for 400-V class Inverters.
Special Options
Used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter and to improve the input power fac-
DC Reactor 3G3HV-PUZDAB@
tor of the Inverter. All Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors.
Digital Operator with
3G3IV-PJVOP160 Displays messages on an LCD.
LCD Display
Digital Operator with
3G3IV-PJVOP161 Display messages on an LED display. Standard in Asia and Europe.
LED Display
Digital Operator Connec- 3G3IV-PCN126 (1 m) Extension cable to use a 3G3RV-series Digital Operator remotely.
tion Cable 3G3IV-PCN326 (3 m) Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
The resolution of the analog output from the Inverter is 11 bits. Use this Card if there are
3G3IV-PAO08
not enough analog outputs.
Analog Monitor Cards*2 The output resolution of the 3G3IV-PAO08 is (0 to 10 V output for frequency meters or
3G3IV-PAO12 output current meters) and the output resolution of the 3G3IV-PAO12 is 1/2048 (0 to
10 V for control applications).
Phase-A (single-phase) pulse input and open collector output for V/f control with a PG.
3G3FV-PPGA2
Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz, with pulse monitor output.
Option Cards Phase-A/B pulse inputs and open collector output for flux vector control.
3G3FV-PPGB2
Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz, with pulse monitor output.
PG Speed Control Cards
Phase-A (single-phase) pulse input and line driver output (RS-422) for V/f control with a PG.
3G3FV-PPGD2
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz, with pulse monitor output.
Phase-A/B/Z pulse inputs and line driver output (RS-422) for flux vector control.
3G3FV-PPGX2
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz, with pulse monitor output
DeviceNet Communica- Used for DeviceNet communications with a Programmable Controller or other
3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN
tions Card DeviceNet master device.
Used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter or when the power supply capacity
AC Reactor (Yaskawa) 3G3IV-PUZBAB@
is greatly larger than the Inverter’s capacity. Also used to increase the power factor.
Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise
Simple Input Noise Filter
3G3EV-PLNFD@ flowing from the inverter into the power supply line. Connected to the power supply
(Yaskawa)
input side.
Recommended
Separately Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise
Input Noise Filter
Installed 3G3IV-PFN@ flowing from the inverter into the power supply line.Connected to the power supply
(Schaffner)
input side.
Options*1
Input Noise Filter
(Schaffner) for EMC 3G3RV-PFSo Required for the 3GRV Inverter to meet the EMC Directive.
Directive
Output Noise Filter Controls noise generated by the Inverter so it does not enter the power supply. Con-
3G3IV-PLF@
(Tokin) nected to the motor output side.

* 1. Recommended Options can be ordered from OMRON using the above model numbers.
* 2. Not applicable to (-E) models.

9-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Special Mounted Options
The special mounted options are described in this section.

n Fan Unit
Replacement fan for Inverters equipped with a cooling fan.
Replace the Cooling Fan when the fan replacement time has come or a cooling fan fault (FAN) alarm has been
displayed.

Models and Application

The standard models of Fan Units are listed in the following table.

Inverter Replacement Cooling Fan

Max. Applicable
Voltage
Motor Capacity Model No. Model No. Qty Used
Class
(kW)
0.4 3G3RV-A2004
0.75 3G3RV-A2007
No Fan -
1.5 3G3RV-A2015
2.2 3G3RV-A2022
3.7 3G3RV-A2037
1
5.5 3G3RV-A2055
3G3IV-PFAN001041
7.5 3G3RV-A2075
2
11 3G3RV-A2110
3-phase, 200 15 3G3RV-A2150
3G3IV-PFAN001042 2
VAC 18.5 3G3RV-A2185
22 3G3RV-B2220
3G3IV-PFAN001039 2
30 3G3RV-B2300
37 3G3RV-B2370
3G3IV-PFAN001049 2
45 3G3RV-B2450
55 3G3RV-B2550
3G3IV-PFAN001052 2
75 3G3RV-B2750
90 3G3RV-B2900
3G3IV-PFAN000111 2
110 3G3RV-B211K
0.4 3G3RV-A4004
0.75 3G3RV-A4007 No Fan -
1.5 3G3RV-A4015
2.2 3G3RV-A4022
3.7 3G3RV-A4037 3G3IV-PFAN001041 1
5.5 3G3RV-A4055
7.5 3G3RV-A4075
11 3G3RV-A4110
3G3IV-PFAN001042 2
15 3G3RV-A4150
3-phase, 400 18.5 3G3RV-A4185
VAC 22 3G3RV-B4220
3G3IV-PFAN001039 2
30 3G3RV-B4300
37 3G3RV-B4370
45 3G3RV-B4450 3G3IV-PFAN001044 2
55 3G3RV-B4550
75 3G3RV-B4750
3G3IV-PFAN001052 2
90 3G3RV-B4900
110 3G3RV-B411K
132 3G3RV-B413K 3G3IV-PFAN000111 2
160 3G3RV-B416K

Refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection for the Fan Unit replacement procedure.

9-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Separately Installed Options

The separately installed options include Scaling Meters and Analog Operators.

n Scaling Meters
A Scaling Meter is attached to a multi-function analog output from the Inverter and is used to display rota-
tional speeds of motors, line speeds, etc., in physical units.

Models and Application

The standard models of Scaling Meters are listed in the following table.

Model No. Control Power Supply Display

K3TJ-V111R Red LED
100 to 200 VAC
K3TJ-V111G Green LED
K3TJ-V116R 24 VDC, isolated Red LED
K3TJ-V116G (See note.) Green LED
Note The power supply circuit is isolated from the input circuits.

Standard Specifications
The standard specifications of the Scaling Meters are listed below.

K3TJ-V11o Specifications
Sampling Period 2 times/s
Display Refresh Cycle 2 times/s
Measurement Averaging Methods Simple average or moving average
Number of Samples for Averaging 1, 2, 4, or 8 samples
Max. No. of Display Digits 4 digits (-1999 to 9999)
Display 7-segment LEDs, character height: 14.2 mm
Decimal Point Display User-set using function selection switch and up/down keys.
Shifting and scaling are user-set using function selection switch and up/down
Scaling Method
keys.
Scaling Range -1999 to 9999
Zero Limit Range 0 to 99 digits
Overrange Values Flashing display
Zero Suppression Supported
External Controls Present value hold (by short-circuiting terminal on front panel)
*
Protective Structure (conforming to Front panel display: IP51
IEC standards) Case: IP20
Terminal section: IP00
Memory Protection Non-volatile memory

IP51 requires that theoptional K32-L49SC Drop-proof Cover be used. The protective structure is IP50 without it.

9-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Example
A wiring example for a Scaling Meter is shown below.

MCCB
3-phase Inside Inverter
power
supply Inverter
Analog output

Analog
monitor

Dimensions
The dimensions of a Scaling Meter are given below.

Recommended Panel
Cutout Dimensions

Display LED Size

Weight: 200 g

9-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

n Analog Operators: Standard with Steel Panels or Small in Plastic

An Analog Operator allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by
analog references from a remote location (50 m max.)

3G3IV-PJV0P96@ 3G3IV-PJV0P95@
Analog Operator Analog Operator
(standard steel panels) (small, plastic)

Models and Application

The standard models of Analog Operators are listed in the following table.

Frequency Meter
Model No.
Specifications
3G3IV-PJVOP961 DCF-6A, 3 V, 1 mA, 75 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP962 DCF-6A, 3 V, 1 mA, 150 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP963 DCF-6A, 3 V, 1 mA, 220 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP951 TRM-45, 3 V, 1 mA, 60/120 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP952 TRM-45, 3 V, 1 mA, 60/120 Hz

Dimensions
The dimensions of an Analog Operator are given below.

Front panel mounting space

Case
mounting
Mounting taps
Panel cutout hole
Rubber bushing

Weight: 1.8 kg Panel Cutout

Standard Analog Operator with Steel Panels

Front
panel
mounting
space

Panel
cutout
hole

Mounting taps

Weight: 0.8 kg Panel Cutout

Small Plastic Analog Operator

9-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Braking Unit
A Braking Unit is used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor. It is not
required with Inverters of 18.5 kW or less.

BRAKING UNIT

May cause injury or electric

shock.
Please follow the instructions in in

operation.
Disconnect all power before opening
front cover of unit. Wait 3 minutes
until DC Bus capacitors discharge.
Use proper grounding techniques.

Models and Application

The standard models of Braking Units are listed in the following table.

Inverter Braking Unit

Min. Resistance*
Voltage Max. Applicable Motor
Model No. Qty Used. (Ω)
Class Capacity (kW)
0.4 48
0.75 48
1.5 48
2.2 16
3.7 16
Built-in
5.5 16
7.5 9.6
11 9.6
15 9.6
200-V Class
18.5 9.6
22 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 1 6.4
30 3G3IV-CDBR2015B 2 9.6
37 3G3IV-CDBR2015B 2 9.6
45 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 2 6.4
55 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 2 6.4
75 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 3 6.4
90 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 4 6.4
110 3G3IV-CDBR2022B 5 6.4
0.4 96
0.75 96
1.5 64
2.2 64
3.7 32
Built-in
5.5 32
7.5 32
11 20
15 20
18.5 19.2
400-V Class
22 3G3IV-CDBR4030B 1 19.2
30 3G3IV-CDBR4030B 1 19.2
37 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 1 12.8
45 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 1 12.8
55 3G3IV-CDBR4030B 2 19.2
75 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 2 12.8
90 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 2 12.8
110 3G3IV-CDBR4030B 3 19.2
132 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 3 12.8
160 3G3IV-CDBR4045B 4 12.8

The minimum resistance is the minimum value per Braking Unit except for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less, in which case it the minimum value per Inverter.

9-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Dimensions
The dimensions of a Braking Unit are given below.

Up
Mounting direction

Four, M4
mounting
holes

Three, wire pullout holes

(with 22-mm-dia. rubber bushings)

9-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Braking Resistor Unit
A Braking Resistor Unit is used to absorb the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration
time (use rate: 10% ED). A 10% ED means that the 10% of the operating cycle time can be used to control
braking (deceleration time).

3G3IV-PLKEB@

Models and Application

The standard models of Braking Resistor Units are listed below.

Inverter Braking Resistor Unit

Applicable
Resistor
Motor Approx Braking
Voltage Class Model No. Specifications Qty Used
Capacity Torque (%)
(per Unit)
(kW)
0.4 3G3IV-PLKEB20P7 70 W, 200 Ω 1 220
0.75 3G3IV-PLKEB20P7 70 W, 200 Ω 1 125
1.5 3G3IV-PLKEB21P5 260 W, 100 Ω 1 125
2.2 3G3IV-PLKEB22P2 260 W, 100 Ω 1 120
3.7 3G3IV-PLKEB23P7 390 W, 40 Ω 1 125
5.5 3G3IV-PLKEB25P5 520 W, 30 Ω 1 115
7.5 3G3IV-PLKEB27P5 780 W, 20 Ω 1 125
11 3G3IV-PLKEB2011 2400 W, 13.6 Ω 1 125
15 3G3IV-PLKEB2015 3000 W, 10 Ω 1 125
200-V Class
18.5 3G3IV-PLKEB2015 3000 W, 10 Ω 1 125
22 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 1 125
30 3G3IV-PLKEB2015 3000 W, 10 Ω 2 125
37 3G3IV-PLKEB2015 3000 W, 10 Ω 2 100
45 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 2 120
55 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 2 100
75 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 3 110
90 3G3IV-PLKEB2022 4800 W, 6.8 Ω 4 120
110 3G3IV-PLKEB2018 4800 W, 8 Ω 5 100
0.4 3G3IV-PLKEB40P7 70 W, 750 Ω 1 230
0.75 3G3IV-PLKEB40P7 70 W, 750 Ω 1 130
1.5 3G3IV-PLKEB41P5 260 W, 400 Ω 1 125
2.2 3G3IV-PLKEB42P2 260 W, 250 Ω 1 135
3.7 3G3IV-PLKEB43P7 390 W, 150 Ω 1 135
5.5 3G3IV-PLKEB45P5 520 W, 100 Ω 1 135
7.5 3G3IV-PLKEB47P5 780 W, 75 Ω 1 130
11 3G3IV-PLKEB4011 1040 W, 50 Ω 1 135
15 3G3IV-PLKEB4015 1560 W, 40 Ω 1 125
18.5 3G3IV-PLKEB4018 4800 W, 32 Ω 1 125
400-V Class
22 3G3IV-PLKEB4022 4800 W, 27.2 Ω 1 125
30 3G3IV-PLKEB4030 6000 W, 20 Ω 1 125
37 3G3IV-PLKEB4037 9600 W, 16 Ω 1 125
45 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 1 125
55 3G3IV-PLKEB4030 6000 W, 20 Ω 2 135
75 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 2 145
90 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 2 100
110 3G3IV-PLKEB4030 6000 W, 20 Ω 3 100
132 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 4 140
160 3G3IV-PLKEB4045 9600 W, 13.6 Ω 4 140

9-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Dimensions
The dimensions of a Braking Resistor Unit are given below.

Model No. Dimensions (mm)

Voltage Dimensions Weight
3G3IV- Diagram Mounting
Class A B C D (kg)
PLKEBo Screws
20P7 1 105 275 50 260 M5 × 3 3.0
21P5 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 4.5
22P2 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 4.5
23P7 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 5.0
25P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 × 4 7.5
200-V Class
27P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 × 4 8.5
2011 2 266 543 246 340 M8 × 4 10
2015 2 356 543 336 340 M8 × 4 15
2018 2 446 543 426 340 M8 × 4 19
2022 2 446 543 426 340 M8 × 4 19
40P7 1 105 275 50 260 M5 × 3 3.0
41P5 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 4.5
42P2 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 4.5
43P7 1 130 350 75 335 M5 × 4 5.0
45P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 × 4 7.5
47P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 × 4 8.5
400-V Class 4011 2 266 543 246 340 M8 × 4 10
4015 2 356 543 336 340 M8 × 4 15
4018 2 446 543 426 340 M8 × 4 19
4022 2 446 543 426 340 M8 × 4 19
4030 2 356 956 336 740 M8 × 4 25
4037 2 446 956 426 740 M8 × 4 33
4045 2 446 956 426 740 M8 × 4 33

Mounting screw

Mounting screw

Dimensions Diagram 2
Dimensions Diagram 1

9-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Braking Resistors
A Braking Resistor consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time (use
rate: 3% ED). A 3% ED means that the 3% of the operating cycle time can be used to control braking (decel-
eration time).

Models and Application

The standard models of Braking Resistors are listed below.

Inverter Braking Resistor Abbrevi-

Max. Appli- ated Brak-
Voltage cable Motor Resistor Qty ing Torque
Model No.
Class Capacity Specifications Used (3%ED)
(kW) (%)
0.4 1 220
3G3IV-PERF150WJ201 150 W, 200 Ω
0.75 1 125
200-V Class 1.5 3G3IV-PERF150WJ101 150 W, 100 Ω 1 125
2.2 3G3IV-PERF150WJ700 150 W, 70 Ω 1 120
3.7 3G3IV-PERF150WJ620 150 W, 62 Ω 1 100
0.4 1 230
3G3IV-PERF150WJ751 150 W, 750 Ω
0.75 1 130
400-V Class 1.5 3G3IV-PERF150WJ401 150 W, 400 Ω 1 125
2.2 3G3IV-PERF150WJ301 150 W, 300 Ω 1 115
3.7 3G3IV-PERF150WJ201 150 W, 400 Ω 1 110*

Application rate: 2%ED

Dimensions
The dimensions of aBraking Resistor are given below.

9-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

n Digital Operator Connection Cable

Connected the Inverter to a Digital Operator in a remote locations. Both 1-m and 2-m Cables are available.

Models and Application

Model No. Specifications

3G3IV-PCN126 Cable length: 1 m
3G3IV-PCN326 Cable length: 3 m

9-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n DC Reactor
A DC Reactor is used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter. It is more effective than and can be used
in combination with an AC Reactor. It is also used to increase the power factor.

Models and Application

The standard models of DC Reactors are listed below.

Inverter DC Reactor
Max. Appli-
Rated Rated
Voltage cable Motor Inductance Loss
Model No. Voltage Current
Class Capacity (mH) (W)
(V) (A)
(kW)
0.4/0.75 3G3HV-PUZDAB5.4A8MH 5.4 8 8
1.5 to 3.7 3G3HV-PUZDAB18A3MH 18 3 18
5.5/7.5 3G3HV-PUZDAB36A1MH 36 1 22
200-V Class 3G3HV- DC800
11/15 72 0.5 29
PUZDAB72A0.5MH
3G3HV-
18.5 90 0.4 45
PUZDAB90A0.4MH
3G3HV-
0.4/0.75 3.2 28 9
PUZDAB3.2A28MH
3G3HV-
1.5 to 2.2 5.7 11 11
PUZDAB5.7A11MH
3G3HV-
3.7 12 6.3 16
PUZDAB12A6.3MH
400-V Class DC800
3G3HV-
5.5/7.5 23 3.6 27
PUZDAB23A3.6MH
3G3HV-
11/15 33 1.9 26
PUZDAB33A1.9MH
3G3HV-
18.5 47 1.3 42
PUZDAB47A1.3MH

9-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Dimensions
The dimensions of a DC Reactor are given below.

Model Dimensions (mm)

Dimensions Weight
3G3HV- Diagram H W W1 D D1 D2 t d1 d2 (kg)
PUZDABo o
5.4A8MH 1 53 85 74 60 32 - 0.8 M4 - 0.8
18A3MH 2 76 86 60 72 55 80 1.2 M4 M5 2.0
36A1MH 2 93 105 64 92 80 90 1.6 M6 M6 3.2
72A0.5MH 2 93 105 64 112 100 105 1.6 M6 M8 4.9
90A0.4MH 2 117 133 86 105 80 120 1.6 M6 M8 6.5
3.2A28MH 1 53 85 74 60 32 - 0.8 M4 - 0.8
5.7A11MH 1 60 90 80 60 32 - 0.8 M4 - 1.0
12A6.3MH 2 76 86 60 72 55 80 1.2 M4 M5 2.0
23A3.6MH 2 93 105 64 92 80 90 1.6 M6 M5 3.2
33A1.9MH 2 93 105 64 102 90 95 1.6 M6 M6 4.0
47A1.3MH 2 100 115 72 115 90 125 1.6 M6 M6 6.0

2 mounting holes
App. screws: d2

2 mounting holes
App. screws: d1
4 mounting holes
App. screws: d1

Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2

9-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n AC Reactor
An AC Reactor is used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter or when the power supply capacity is
greatly larger than the Inverter’s capacity. It is also used to increase the power factor. Select the AC Reactor
from the following table according to the motor capacity.

Models and Application

The standard models of AC Reactors are listed in the following table.

Inverter AC Reactor
Max. Appli-
Voltage cable Motor Current Inductance Loss
Model No.
Class Capacity (A) (mH) (W)
(kW)
0.4 3G3IV-PUZBAB2.5A4.2MH 2.5 4.2 15
0.75 3G3IV-PUZBAB5A2.1MH 5 2.1 15
1.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB10A1.1MH 10 1.1 25
2.2 3G3IV-PUZBAB15A0.7MH 15 0.71 30
3.7 3G3IV-PUZBAB20A0.53MH 20 0.53 35
5.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB30A0.35MH 30 0.35 45
7.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB40A0.265MH 40 0.265 50
200-V Class 11 3G3IV-PUZBAB60A0.18MH 60 0.18 65
15 3G3IV-PUZBAB80A0.13MH 80 0.13 75
18.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB90A0.12MH 90 0.12 90
22 3G3IV-PUZBAB120A0.09MH 120 0.09 90
30 3G3IV-PUZBAB160A0.07MH 160 0.07 100
37 3G3IV-PUZBAB200A0.05MH 200 0.05 110
45 3G3IV-PUZBAB240A0.044MH 240 0.044 125
55 3G3IV-PUZBAB280A0.038MH 280 0.038 130
0.4 3G3IV-PUZBAB1.3A18.0MH 1.3 18.0 15
0.75 3G3IV-PUZBAB2.5A8.4MH 2.5 8.4 15
1.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB5A4.2MH 5 4.2 25
2.2 3G3IV-PUZBAB7.5A3.6MH 7.5 3.6 35
3.7 3G3IV-PUZBAB10A2.2MH 10 2.2 43
5.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB15A1.42MH 15 1.42 50
7.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB20A1.06MH 20 1.06 50
400-V Class 11 3G3IV-PUZBAB30A0.7MH 30 0.7 65
15 3G3IV-PUZBAB40A0.53MH 40 0.53 90
18.5 3G3IV-PUZBAB50A0.42MH 50 0.42 90
22 3G3IV-PUZBAB60A0.36MH 60 0.36 90
30 3G3IV-PUZBAB80A0.26MH 80 0.26 95
37 3G3IV-PUZBAB90A0.24MH 90 0.24 110
45 3G3IV-PUZBAB120A0.18MH 120 0.18 130
55 3G3IV-PUZBAB150A0.15MH 150 0.15 150

9-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Wiring Example
A wiring example for an AC Reactor is shown below.

AC reactor
MCCB
Motor

Inverter

Dimensions
The dimensions of a DC Reactor are given below.

Model Dimen- Dimensions (mm)

Weight
3G3IV sions
A B B1 C D E F H J K L M (kg)
-PUZBABoo Diagram
2.5A4.2MH 120 71 - 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4 2.5
5A2.1MH 120 71 - 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4 2.5
1
10A1.1MH 130 88 - 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4 3
15A0.71MH 130 88 - 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4 3
20A0.53MH 130 88 114 105 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M5 3
30A0.35MH 130 88 119 105 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M5 3
40A0.265MH 130 98 139 105 50 75 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M6 4
60A0.18MH 160 105 147.5 130 75 85 160 25 M6 10 7 M6 6
80A0.13MH 180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M8 8
90A0.12MH 2 180 100 150 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M8 8
120A0.09MH 180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M10 8
160A0.07MH 210 100 170 175 75 80 205 25 M6 10 7 M10 12
200A0.05MH 210 115 182.8 175 75 95 205 25 M6 10 7 M10 15
240A0.044MH 240 126 218 215±5 150 110 240 25 M6 8 7 M10 23
280A0.038MH 240 126 218 215±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M12 23
1.3A18.0MH 120 71 - 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4 2.5
2.5A8.4MH 120 71 - 120 40 50 105 20 M6 10.5 7 M4 2.5
5A4.2MH 130 88 - 130 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M4 3
1
7.5A3.6MH 130 88 - 130 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M4 3
10A2.2MH 130 88 - 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4 3
15A1.42MH 130 98 - 130 50 75 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4 4
20A1.06MH 160 90 115 130 75 70 160 25 M6 10 7 M5 5
30A0.7MH 160 105 132.5 130 75 85 160 25 M6 10 7 M5 6
40A0.53MH 180 100 140 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M6 8
50A0.42MH 180 100 145 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M6 8
60A0.36MH 2 180 100 150 150 75 75 180 25 M6 10 7 M6 8.5
80A0.26MH 210 100 150 175 75 80 205 25 M6 10 7 M8 12
90A0.24MH 210 115 177.5 175 75 95 205 25 M6 10 7 M8 15
120A0.18MH 240 126 193 205±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M10 23
150A0.15MH 240 126 193 205±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M10 23

M: Terminal M: Terminal Nameplate

Nameplate

J: 4 mounting bolts Mounting hole detail

J: 4 mounting bolts
Mounting hole detail

Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2

9-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives (3G3RV-PFS@, by Schaffner)
When conformance to the EMC Directives in the EC Directives is required, always use one of these Filters.
The Filter is connected between the Inverter’s power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and the power
supply.
There are holes for mounting the Noise Filters to Inverters on the top of the Noise Filters. Use these holes to
secure the Noise Filters to the Inverters.

Models and Application

The standard models of Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives are listed in the following table.

Inverter Input Noise Filter for EMC Directives

Max. Applicable Rated Cur- Weight Dimensions
Voltage Class Model No. Diagram
Motor Capacity (kW) rent (A) (kg)
0.4
0.75 10 3G3RV-PFS5972-10-07 1.1
1.5
1
2.2 18 3G3RV-PFS5972-18-07 1.3
3.7
35 3G3RV-PFS5973-35-07 1.4
5.5
7.5
60 3G3RV-PFS5973-60-07 3 2
3-phase, 200 VAC 11
15
100 3G3RV-PFS5973-100-07 4.9 3
18.5
22
130 3G3RV-PFS5973-130-35 4.3 5
30
37 160 3G3RV-PFS5973-160-40 6 6
45
240 3G3RV-PFS5973-240-37 11 7
55
0.4
0.75
10 3G3RV-PFS5972-10-07 1.1
1.5
2.2 1
3.7
4.0 18 3G3RV-PFS5972-18-07 1.3
5.5
7.5
3-phase, 400 VAC 35 3G3RV-PFS5972-35-07 2.1 2
11
15
60 3G3RV-PFS5972-60-07 4 3
18.5
22
70 3G3RV-PFS5972-70-52 3.4 4
30
37
45 130 3G3RV-PFS5972-130-35 4.7 5
55

Wiring Example
A wiring example for an Input Noise Filter for EMC Directives is shown below.

Inverter
Noise filter Clamp core
MCCB

3-phase 200 VAC

Single-phase 200 VAC
3-phase 400 VAC

9-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Dimensions
The dimensions of an Input Noise Filter for EMC Directives are given below.

M5 (Inverter mounting holes x 4)

M6 (Inverter mounting holes x 4)

Dimensions Diagram 1
Dimensions Diagram 2

M5 (Inverter mounting holes x 4)

Dimensions Diagram 3 Dimensions Diagram 4

Dimensions Diagram 5 Dimensions Diagram 6

Dimensions Diagram 7

9-23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Simple Input Noise Filter
A Simple Input Noise Filter reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce
noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply line. Connected the Filter to the power supply input
side.

Models and Application

The standard models of Simple Input Noise Filters listed in the following table.

Inverter Simple Input Noise Filter

Max. Applicable Rated
Voltage
Motor Capacity Model No. Qty Current
Class
(kW) (A)
0.4 3G3EV-PLNFD2103DY 1 10
0.75 3G3EV-PLNFD2103DY 1 10
1.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2103DY 1 10
2.2 3G3EV-PLNFD2153DY 1 15
3.7 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 1 30
200-V Class 5.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2203DY 2 40
7.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 2 60
11 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 3 90
15 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 3 90
18.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 4 120
22 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 4 120
0.4 3G3EV-PLNFD4053DY 1 5
0.75 3G3EV-PLNFD4053DY 1 5
1.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4103DY 1 10
2.2 3G3EV-PLNFD4103DY 1 10
3.7 3G3EV-PLNFD4153DY 1 15
5.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4203DY 1 20
7.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 1 30
400-V Class
11 3G3EV-PLNFD4203DY 2 40
15 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 2 60
18.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 2 60
22 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 3 90
30 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 3 90
37 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 4 120
45 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 4 120

9-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Wiring Example
A wiring example for a Simple Input Noise Filter is shown below.

Input Noise Filter Inverter

MCCB
IN
R R U R U

S S V S V IM
T T W T W
E

Dimensions
The dimensions of a Simple Input Noise Filter are given below.

Dimensions
Model Dimensions Weight
Diagram Mounting
3G3EV- W D Hmax A A' B (kg)
Screws
M4 × 4
PLNFD2103DY 120 80 55 108 - 68 0.2
20 mm
M4 × 4
PLNFD2153DY 1 120 80 55 108 - 68 0.2
20 mm
M4 × 4
PLNFD2203DY 170 90 70 158 - 78 0.4
20 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD2303DY 170 110 70 - 79 98 0.5
20 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD4053DY 170 130 75 - 79 118 0.3
30 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD4103DY 170 130 95 - 79 118 0.4
30 mm
2
M4 × 6
PLNFD4153DY 170 130 95 - 79 118 0.4
30 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD4203DY 200 145 100 - 94 133 0.5
30 mm
M4 × 6
PLNFD4303DY 200 145 100 - 94 133 0.6
30 mm

Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2

9-25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Input Noise Filter
An Input Noise Filter reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise
flowing from the inverter into the power supply line. Connected the Filter to the power supply input side.

E
L1 L2
+
L3
SL11
EN133200 LINE

MADE
IN SWITZ
ERLAN
FN 258L D
- 100 -
480VA 35
100A@ C / 50 - 60Hz
50ßC
/ - 25ß
+ 85ßC

LOAD
9713
L1Õ
L2Õ
L3Õ
E

Models and Application

The standard models of Input Noise Filters are listed in the following table.

Inverter Input Noise Filter

Max. Applicable
Voltage
Motor Capacity Model No. Qty Rated (A)
Class
(kW)
5.5 3G3IV-PFN258L4207 1 42
7.5 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 1 55
11 3G3IV-PFN258L7534 1 75
15 3G3IV-PFN258L10035 1 100
18.5 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 1 130
22 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 1 130
200-V Class 30 3G3IV-PFN258L18007 1 180
37 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 1 250
45 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 1 250
55 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 1 300
75 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 2 500
90 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 2 500
110 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 2 600
11 3G3IV-PFN258L4207 1 42
15 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 1 55
18.5 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 1 55
22 3G3IV-PFN258L7534 1 75
30 3G3IV-PFN258L10035 1 100
37 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 1 130
400-V Class 45 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 1 130
55 3G3IV-PFN258L18007 1 180
75 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 1 250
90 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 1 300
110 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 1 300
132 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 2 500
160 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 2 500

Wiring Example
Wiring for an Input Noise Filter is the same as that for a Simple Input Noise Filter.

9-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Dimensions
The dimensions of an Input Noise Filter are given below.

Dimensions Dimensions (mm) Weight

Model 3G3IV- Diagram A B C D E F G H J (kg)
PFN258L4207 329 300 325 185 70 M6 45 314 4-M5 2.8
1
PFN258L5507 329 300 353 185 80 M6 55 314 4-M5 3.1
PFN258L7534 329 300 377 220 80 M6 55 314 4-M5 4
PFN258L10035 2 379 350 436 220 90 M10 65 364 4-M5 5.5
PFN258L13035 439 400 486 240 110 M10 80 414 4-M5 7.5
PFN258L18007 3 438 400 480 240 110 M10 80 413 4-M5 11
PFN359L25099 - - - - - - - - - 16
4
PFN359L30099 - - - - - - - - - 16

J (mounting screw)

J (mounting screw)

Dimensions Diagram 1
Dimensions Diagram 2

J (mounting screw)

Dimensions Diagram 3 Dimensions Diagram 4

9-27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 n Output Noise Filter
An Output Noise Filter controls noise generated by the Inverter so it does not enter the power supply. It is con-
nected to the motor output side.

Models and Application

The standard models of Output Noise Filters are listed in the following table.

Inverter Output Noise Filter

Max. Applicable Inverter Rated
Voltage
Motor Capacity Capacity No. Qty Current
Class
(kW) (kVA) (A)
0.4 1.2 3G3IV-PLF310KA 1 10
0.75 1.6 3G3IV-PLF310KA 1 10
1.5 2.7 3G3IV-PLF310KA 1 10
2.2 3.7 3G3IV-PLF310KA 1 10
3.7 5.7 3G3IV-PLF320KA 1 20
5.5 8.8 3G3IV-PLF350KA 1 50
7.5 12 3G3IV-PLF350KA 1 50
11 17 3G3IV-PLF350KA 2 100
15 22 3G3IV-PLF350KA 2 100
200-V Class
18.5 27 3G3IV-PLF350KA 2 100
22 32 3G3IV-PLF350KA 3 150
30 44 3G3IV-PLF350KA 3 150
37 55 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 2 220
45 69 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 2 220
55 82 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 3 330
75 110 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 4 440
90 130 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 4 440
110 160 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 5 550
0.4 1.4 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
0.75 1.6 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
1.5 2.8 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
2.2 4 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
3.7 5.8 3G3IV-PLF310KB 1 10
5.5 9.5 3G3IV-PLF320KB 1 20
7.5 13 3G3IV-PLF320KB 1 20
11 18 3G3IV-PLF335KB 1 35
15 24 3G3IV-PLF335KB 1 35
18.5 30 3G3IV-PLF345KB 1 45
400-V Class
22 34 3G3IV-PLF375KB 1 75
30 46 3G3IV-PLF375KB 1 75
37 57 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 1 110
45 69 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 1 110
55 85 3G3IV-PLF375KB 2 150
75 110 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 2 220
90 140 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 3 330
110 160 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 3 330
132 200 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 4 440
160 230 3G3IV-PLF3110KB 4 440

Connect the Filters in parallel when connecting more than one Filter, and use a relay terminal block to balance the current.

9-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Options and Peripheral Devices

Wiring Example
A wiring example for an Output Noise Filter is shown below.

Inverter Output Noise Filter

Dimensions
The dimensions of an Output Noise Filter are given below.

Model G H Weight
Terminal A B C D E F
3G3IV- (Diameter) (Diameter) (kg)
PLF310KA TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.5
PLF320KA TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.6
PLF350KA TE-K22 M6 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 × 4.5 4.5 2.0
PLF310KB TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.5
PLF320KB TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.6
PLF335KB TE-K5.5 M4 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 × 4.5 4.5 0.8
PLF345KB TE-K22 M6 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 × 4.5 4.5 2.0
PLF375KB TE-K22 M6 540 320 480 300 340 240 9 × 6.5 6.5 12.0
PLF3110KB TE-K60 M8 540 340 480 300 340 240 9 × 6.5 6.5 19.5

9-29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 10
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also pro-
vides lists of parameters.

Inverter Application Precautions ................................ 10-2

Motor Application Precautions ...................................10-5
Wiring Examples........................................................10-7
Parameters ..............................................................10-14

10

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Inverter Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting, and handling Inverters.

K Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.

nInstalling Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase capacitor. Excessive peak current can
destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power sup-
ply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200-V class Inverters of 22 to 110 kW and 400-V class Inverters of 22 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.

DC or AC reactor
Power supply Required
capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Not required

Inverter capacity (kVA)

Fig 10.1

nInverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.

nInitial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when start-
ing using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a
somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the inverter.

nEmergency Stop
Although the Inverter's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop
immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emer-
gency stop.

nOptions
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by OMRON.
Never connect any other devices to these terminals.

10-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Inverter Application Precautions

K Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.

nInstallation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, airborne matter, dust, and other contami-
nants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel
space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not
install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.

nInstallation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.

K Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.

nUpper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz (depends on the car-
rier frequency). Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set
upper limits. (The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 60 Hz.)

nDC Injection Braking

The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.

nAcceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD2/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera-
tion or deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase
the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter. 10

10-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.

nWiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.

nMagnetic Contactor Installation

Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing
so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more
than one time every 30 minutes.

nMaintenance and Inspections

After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before
performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.

10-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Motor Application Precautions

Motor Application Precautions

This section provides precautions for motor application.

K Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor

When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a
commercial power supply. Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard
motor.

nLow-speed Range
Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore,
the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a motor not made by OMRON. If
100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special inverter or vector motor.

nInstallation Withstand Voltage

If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must
be considered. Contact your dealer for details.

nHigh-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing
durability. Contact your dealer for details.

nTorque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when oper-
ated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the
motor to set a proper V/f pattern.

nVibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. (A parameter can be set to select low carrier,
PWM modulation control as well.) When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the
same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.

Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System 10

Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed
mode. If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function
to skip any frequency resonating the machine.

Unbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (60 Hz or more).

nNoise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same as when the
motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is
operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).

10-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.

nPole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an
appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used. Before changing the
number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or over-
current protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.

nSubmersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use
a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.

nExplosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with
the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.

nGearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low-speed range may result in burning. If
the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.

nSynchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control. If a group of synchronous motors is individually
turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.

nSingle-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.

K Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)

If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low-speed range. The power transmission mechanism will
make noise and the service life and durability will be reduced if the motor is operated at a speed higher than 60
Hz.

10-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Examples

Wiring Examples
This section provides wiring examples to connect a Braking Unit and other peripheral devices to the main
circuits, examples of wiring a transformer to Inverter I/O, and other aspects of Inverter wiring.

K Using a Braking Resistor Unit

This example shows wiring for a Braking Resistor Unit.
3G3RV-A2004 to 3G3RV-A2185 (200-V class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)
3G3RV-4004 to 3G3RV-A4185 (400-V class Inverters of 0.4 to 18.5 kW)

Braking Resistor overheating contacts

(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
A sequence is required to turn DC Reactor to
OFF the power supply for the ther- improve input
mal overload relay trip contacts of power factor
the Braking Resistor Unit. (Optional) Braking Resistor Unit *3

Short-circuit bar

3-phase power MC Motor

R/L1 U/T1
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz
or 380 to 460 V S/L2 V/T2
50/60 Hz T/L3 W/T3
Inverter

200-V class Inverters: Ground to

Overload relay trip contact 100
max., 400-V class Inverters:
of Braking Resistor Unit Ground to 10 Ω max.)

* 1. A transformer is not required for 200-V class

* 2. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and
+ 2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 3. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 and
Fault contacts using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the
deceleration time if this setting is not changed.

Fig 10.2

K Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit

This example shows wiring for a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit.
3G3RV-A2220, 3G3RV-A2300 (200-V class Inverters of 22 kW, 30 kW)

DC Reactor to Braking Unit Braking Resistor Unit*2

improve input (Optional) (Optional)
A sequence is required to turn power factor Level
OFF the power supply for the (Optional) detector
thermal overload relay trip con-
tacts of the Braking Resistor
Unit. Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
Short-circuit bar
MCCB 10
Motor
3-phase power R/L1 U/T1
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
Inverter

Overload relay trip contact Ground to 100
max.

of Braking Resistor Unit

* 1. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and + 2 when

connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 2. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 and using a
Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time
Fault contacts if this setting is not changed.
Forward Run/Stop
Forward run command (forward run when ON)
Reverse Run/Stop
Reverse run command (reverse run when ON)
Braking Unit
External fault

Fig 10.3

10-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Using Braking Units in Parallel
This example shows wiring for using two Braking Units in parallel.

A sequence is required to turn OFF the Thermal

power supply for the thermal overload relay Thermal protector
trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit. protector
Brak- Brak-
ing ing
Resis- Resis-
tor Unit tor Unit

detector
Level
Braking Unit 2

Thermal switch Thermal switch

MCCB
Motor
R/L1 U/T1
3-phase power Inverter
200 to 220 V 50 Hz S/L2 V/T2
200 to 230 V 60 Hz
T/L3 W/T3
Cooling fan

Overload relay trip contact Ground to 100
max.

of Braking Resistor Unit

Fault contacts Fault contact output

Forward run com-
Forward Run/Stop mand (forward run
when ON)
Reverse Run/Stop
Reverse run com-
Braking Unit mand (reverse run
when ON)
External fault

* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to Resistor Unit. The motor may
not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.

Fig 10.4

10-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Examples

K Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel

This example shows wiring for using three Braking Resistor Units in parallel.

Thermal Thermal Thermal

protector protector protector
Braking Braking Braking
Resistor Resistor Resistor
A sequence is required to turn OFF the Unit Unit Unit
power supply for the thermal overload relay
trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.

detector
Level
Braking Unit

Thermal switch

MCCB
Motor
R/L1 U/T1
3-phase power Inverter
380 to 480 V S/L2 V/T2
50/60 Hz W/T3
T/L3
Cooling fan
Voltage
setting

Overload relay trip contact Ground to 10
max.

of Braking Resistor Unit

Fault contact output

Fault contacts
Forward run com-
Forward Run/Stop mand (forward run
when ON)
Reverse Run/Stop
Reverse run com-
mand (reverse run
Braking Unit when ON)

External fault

* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to Resistor Unit. The motor may
not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.

Fig 10.5
10

10-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Using an Analog Operator
This example shows wiring for using an Analog Operator. The Analog Operator model number is 3G3IV-
PJVOP95o or 3G3IV-PJVOP96o.
This example shows wiring for the 3G3RV-A2075 (200-V class Inverters of 7.5 kW)

Short-circuit bar
(Standard)

MCCB
Motor
R/L1 U/T1
3-phase power
S/L2 Inverter V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
3G3IV-PJVOP-95•o,
C-96•o Analog Operator

Forward run command Ground to 100
max.

(forward run when closed)
Reverse run command
(reverse run when closed)

Multi-function contact inputs

Sequence common (0 V)

Shield terminal

Speed setting power (15 V, 20 mA)

Master speed (0 to 10 V, 20 kΩ)

Master speed (4 to 20 mA, 250 Ω)

Multi-function contact
output (Default: Running
signal)

Fault contact output

Open collector 1 (Default:
Zero speed signal)

Multi-function Multi-function open-

analog output Open collector 2 (Default: collector output 48 V,
Frequency meter Speed agreement signal) 50 mA max.
Multi-function
analog output
(Default: Output Multi-function output
frequency) common

Fig 10.6

10-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Examples

K Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode
with an Internal Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control card to NPN as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN tran-
sistor for an input signal (0-V command and sinking mode) and an internal +24-V power supply.

MCCB

Motor
3-phase power

Inverter

Ground

Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop

External fault

Fault reset
Multi-function
contact inputs
Multi-step
Factory
speed setting 1
settings
Multi-step
speed setting 2
Jog frequency
selection CN5 (NPN setting)

Shield
terminal

Master speed pulse train

Pulse train input
0 to 32 kHz 3 k
Frequency setting High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
adjustment

Frequency Frequency setting power

External setter +15 V 20 mA
frequency 0 to +10 V
references Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V (20 k )
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 )
0 to 10 V (20 k ) input
10

Fig 10.7

10-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 K Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode
with an External Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control card to EXT as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN tran-
sistor for an input signal (0-V command and sinking mode) and an external +24-V power supply.

MCCB

Motor
3-phase power

Inverter

Ground

Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop

External fault

Fault reset
Multi-function
contact inputs
Multi-step
Factory
speed setting 1
settings
Multi-step
speed setting 2
Jog frequency
selection CN5 (EXT setting)

Shield
terminal

Pulse train input Master speed pulse train

Frequency setting 0 32 kHz 3 k
adjustment High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input

Frequency
setter Frequency setting power
External +15 V 20 mA
frequency 0 to +10 V
references Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V (20 k )
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250
0 to 10 V (20 k ) input

Note:
When using an external +24-V power supply for
a sequence connection for a PNP tansistor
input signal, set the EXT as shown at the right. CN5 (EXT setting)
External
+24 V

Fig 10.8

10-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Wiring Examples

K Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs

This example shows wiring for contact outputs and open collector outputs.
The following example is for the 3G3RV-A2075 (200-V class Inverter for 7.5 kW).

MCCB

Motor

3-phase power
Inverter

Ground

Ammeter scale adjustment resistor

Multi-function analog output 2

-10 to +10 V 2 mA
Default: Ouput current,
0 to +10 V
Frequency meter scale adjustment resistor

Multi-function analog output 1

-10 to +10 V 2 mA
Default: output frequency,
0 to +10 V

Sequence

Surge
absorber

Error contact output

250 VAC max.
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VDC, 1 A max.

Multi-function output
30 VDC max.
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VDC, 1 A max. Flywheel
(Default: RUN) diode

48 VDC max.

Flywheel
diode

48 VDC max.
Open collector 1
Flywheel
(Default: zero speed)
diode

Open collector 2 10
(Default: Freq agree)

Multi-function
open collector output
48 VDC 50 mA max.

Sequence external power

supply

Fig 10.9

10-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameters
Factory settings are given in the following table. These settings are for a 200-V class Inverter of 0.4 kW
set to factory set control method (open loop vector control).

Table 10.1 Parameters

Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
No. Name tory No. Name tory
ting ting
Setting Setting
Language selection for digital PID feedback command loss detec-
A1-00
operator display 1*1 b5-14
tion time
1.0
A1-01 Parameter access level 2 b5-15 PID sleep function operation level 0.0
A1-02 Control method selection 0*1 b5-16 PID sleep operation delay time 0.0
Acceleration/deceleration time for
A1-03 Initialize 0 b5-17 0.0
PID reference
A1-04 Password 0 b5-18 PID set point selection 0
A1-05 Password setting 0 b5-19 PID set point 0.0
A2-01 to
User setting parameters - b6-01 Dwell frequency at start 0.0
A2-32
b1-01 Reference selection 1 b6-02 Dwell time at start 0.0
b1-02 Operation method selection 1 b6-03 Dwell frequency at stop 0.0
b1-03 Stopping method selection 0 b6-04 Dwell time at stop 0.0
b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation 0 b8-01 Energy-saving mode selection 0
b1-06 Read sequence input twice 1 b8-02 Energy-saving gain 0.7*4
Operation selection after switching
b1-07
to remote mode
0 b8-03 Energy-saving filter time constant 0.50*5
Run command selection in pro-
b1-08 0 b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient *6
gramming modes
Zero speed level (DC injection Power detection filter time con-
b2-01 0.5 b8-05 20
braking starting frequency) stant
b2-02 DC injection braking current 50 b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter 0
b2-03 DC injection braking time at start 0.00 C1-01 Acceleration time 1 10.0
b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop 0.50 C1-02 Deceleration time 1 10.0
b3-01 Speed search selection 2*2 *3 C1-03 Acceleration time 2 10.0
b3-02 Speed search operating current 120*2 C1-04 Deceleration time 2 10.0
b3-03 Speed search deceleration time 2.0 C1-05 Acceleration time 3 10.0
b3-05 Speed search wait time 0.2 C1-06 Deceleration time 3 10.0
b4-01 Timer function ON-delay time 0.0 C1-07 Acceleration time 4 10.0
b4-02 Timer function OFF-delay time 0.0 C1-08 Deceleration time 4 10.0
b5-01 PID control mode selection 0 C1-09 Deceleration stop time 10.0
b5-02 Proportional gain (P) 1.00 C1-10 Accel/decel time setting unit 1
Accel/decel time switching fre-
b5-03 Integral (I) time 1.0 C1-11 0.0
quency
S-curve characteristic time at
b5-04 Integral (I) limit 100.0 C2-01 0.20
acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at
b5-05 Derivative (D) time 0.00 C2-02 0.20
acceleration end
S-curve characteristic time at
b5-06 PID limit 100.0 C2-03 0.20
deceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at
b5-07 PID offset adjustment 0.0 C2-04 0.00
deceleration end
b5-08 PID primary delay time constant 0.00 C3-01 Slip compensation gain 0.0*3
b5-09
PID output characteristics selec-
0 C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay 2000*2
tion time
b5-10 PID output gain 1.0 C3-03 Slip compensation limit 200
Slip compensation selection during
b5-11 PID reverse output selection 0 C3-04 0
regeneration
Selection of PID feedback com- Output voltage limit operation
b5-12 0 C3-05 0
mand loss detection selection
PID feedback command loss detec-
b5-13 0 C4-01 Torque compensation gain 1.00
tion level

10-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameters

Table 10.1 Parameters (Continued)

Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
No. Name tory No. Name tory
ting ting
Setting Setting
Torque compensation primary
C4-02
delay time constant 200*2 d6-01 Field weakening level 80
C4-03 Starting torque value (forward) 0.0 d6-02 Field frequency 0.0
C4-04 Starting torque value (reverse) 0.0 E1-01 Input voltage setting 200*7
C4-05 Starting torque time constant 10 E1-03 V/f pattern selection F
C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1 0.20 E1-04 Max. output frequency 60.0
200.0
C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1 0.200 E1-05 Max. voltage *2 *7

C5-03 ASR proportional (P) gain 2 0.02 E1-06 Base frequency 60.0 *2
C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2 0.050 E1-07 Mid. output frequency 3.0*2
C5-05 ASR limit 5.0 E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage 15.0*2 *7
C6-01 CT/VT selection 1 E1-09 Min. output frequency 1.5*2
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection 6*6 E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage 9.0*2 *7
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit 15.0 *6 E1-11 Mid. output frequency 2 0.0*9
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit 15.0 *6 E1-12 Mid. output frequency voltage 2 0.0*9
Carrier Frequency Proportional
C6-05
Gain
00 E1-13 Base voltage 0.0*10
d1-01 Frequency reference 1 0.00 E2-01 Motor rated current 1.90 *6
d1-02 Frequency reference 2 0.00 E2-02 Motor rated slip 2.90 *6
d1-03 Frequency reference 3 0.00 E2-03 Motor no-load current 1.20 *6
d1-04 Frequency reference 4 0.00 E2-04 Number of motor poles 4
d1-05 Frequency reference 5 0.00 E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance 9.842*6
d1-06 Frequency reference 6 0.00 E2-06 Motor leak inductance 18.2 *6
d1-07 Frequency reference 7 0.00 E2-07 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 0.50
d1-08 Frequency reference 8 0.00 E2-08 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 0.75
Motor iron loss for torque compen-
d1-09 Frequency reference 9 0.00 E2-10
sation 14 *4
d1-10 Frequency reference 10 0.00 E2-11 Motor rated output 0.40 *4
d1-11 Frequency reference 11 0.00 E3-01 Motor 2 control method selection 0
Motor 2 max. output frequency
d1-12 Frequency reference 12 0.00 E3-02
(FMAX) 60.0 *2
d1-13 Frequency reference 13 0.00 E3-03 Motor 2 max. voltage (VMAX) 200.0*2
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency
d1-14 Frequency reference 14 0.00 E3-04 60.0
(FA)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
d1-15 Frequency reference 15 0.00 E3-05
(FB) 3.0 *2
Motor 2 mid. output frequency
d1-16 Frequency reference 16 0.00 E3-06
voltage 1 (VC) 15.0 *7
Motor 2 min. output frequency
d1-17 Jog frequency reference 6.00 E3-07
(FMIN) 1.5 *2 10
Motor 2 min. output frequency
d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit 100.0 E3-08
voltage (VMIN) 9.0 *7
d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit 0.0 E4-01 Motor 2 rated current 1.90 *6
d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit 0.0 E4-02 Motor 2 rated slip 2.90 *6
d3-01 Jump frequency 1 0.0 E4-03 Motor 2 no-load current 1.20 *6
Motor 2 number of poles (number
d3-02 Jump frequency 2 0.0 E4-04 4
of poles)
d3-03 Jump frequency 3 0.0 E4-05 Motor 2 line-to-line resistance 9.842*6
d3-04 Jump frequency width 1.0 E4-06 Motor 2 leak inductance 18.2 *6
Frequency reference hold function
d4-01
selection
0 E4-07 Motor 2 rated capacity 0.40 *6
d4-02 + - Speed limits 10 F1-01 PG constant 600

10-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 10.1 Parameters (Continued)
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
No. Name tory No. Name tory
ting ting
Setting Setting
Operation selection at PG open cir-
F1-02
cuit (PGO)
1 H1-04 Terminal S6 function selection 4 (3)*8
Operation selection at overspeed
F1-03
(OS)
1 H1-05 Terminal S7 function selection 6 (4)*8
F1-04 Operation selection at deviation 3 H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 select 0
Terminal P1 function select (open
collector)
F1-05 PG rotation 0 H2-02 1
Terminal M3-M4 function select
(contact)
Terminal P2 function select (open
PG division rate (PG pulse moni- collector)
F1-06 1 H2-03 2
tor) Terminal M5-M6 function select
(contact)
Integral value during accel/decel
F1-07 0 H3-01 Signal select terminal A1 (voltage) 0
enable/disable
F1-08 Overspeed detection level 115 H3-02 Gain (terminal A1) 100.0
F1-09 Overspeed detection delay time 1.0 H3-03 Bias (terminal A1) 0.0
Excessive speed deviation detec- Multi-function analog input termi-
F1-10 10 H3-08 2
tion level nal A2 signal level selection
Excessive speed deviation detec- Multi-function analog input termi-
F1-11 0.5 H3-09 0
tion delay time nal A2 function selection
F1-12 Number of PG gear teeth 1 0 H3-10 Gain (terminal A2) 100.0
F1-13 Number of PG gear teeth 2 0 H3-11 Bias (terminal A2) 0.0
F1-14 PG open-circuit detection time 2.0 H3-12 Analog input filter time constant 0.00
F4-01 Channel 1 monitor selection 2 H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching 0
F4-02 Channel 1 gain 1.00 H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM) 2
F4-03 Channel 2 monitor selection 3 H4-02 Gain (terminal FM) 1.00
F4-04 Channel 2 gain 0.50 H4-03 Bias (terminal FM) 0.0
F4-05 Channel 1 output monitor bias 0.0 H4-04 Monitor selection (terminal AM) 3
F4-06 Channel 2 output monitor bias 0.0 H4-05 Gain (terminal AM) 0.50
Analog output signal level for
F4-07 0 H4-06 Bias (terminal AM) 0.0
channel 1
Analog output signal level for
F4-08 0 Analog output 1 signal level selec-
channel 2 H4-07 0
tion
F5-01 Not used 0
Analog output 2 signal level selec-
F5-02 Not used 1 H4-08 0
tion
F5-03 Not used 2 H5-01 Slave address 1F
F5-04 Not used 4 H5-02 Communication speed selection 3
F5-05 Not used 6 H5-03 Communication parity selection 0
Stopping method after communi-
F5-06 Not used 37 H5-04 3
cation error
Communication error detection
F5-07 Not used 0F H5-05 1
selection
F5-08 Not used 0F H5-06 Send wait time 5
F5-09 Not used 0 H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF 1
DeviceNet fault operation selec-
F6-01 1 H6-01 Pulse train input function selection 0
tion
Communications external fault
F6-02 0 H6-02 Pulse train input scaling 1440
input detection method selection
Communications external fault
F6-03 1 H6-03 Pulse train input gain 100.0
input operation selection
F6-04 Not used 0 H6-04 Pulse train input bias 0.0
Display unit selection for current
F6-05 0 H6-05 Pulse train input filter time 0.10
monitor
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection 24 H6-06 Pulse train monitor selection 2
H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection 14 H6-07 Pulse train monitor scaling 1440
H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection 3 (0)*8

10-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Parameters

Table 10.1 Parameters (Continued)

Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
No. Name tory No. Name tory
ting ting
Setting Setting
L1-01 Motor protection selection 1 L7-03 Forward regenerative torque limit 200
L1-02 Motor protection time constant 1.0 L7-04 Reverse regenerative torque limit 200
Alarm operation selection during Protect selection for internal DB
L1-03 3 L8-01 0
motor overheating resistor
Motor overheating operation selec-
L1-04 1 L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 95
tion
Motor temperature input filter time Operation selection after overheat
L1-05 0.20 L8-03 3
constant pre-alarm
Input open-phase protection selec-
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection 0 L8-05 0
tion
Momentary power loss ridethru Output open-phase protection
L2-02
time 0.1*6 L8-07
selection
0
L2-03 Min. baseblock time 0.1 L8-09 Ground protection selection 1
L2-04 Voltage recovery time 0.3 L8-10 Cooling fan control selection 0
L2-05 Undervoltage detection level 190*7 L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time 60
L2-06 KEB deceleration time 0.0 L8-12 Ambient temperature 45
OL2 characteristics selection at
L2-07 Momentary recovery time 0*11 L8-15
low speeds
1
Frequency reduction gain at KEB
L2-08 100 L8-18 Soft CLA selection 1
start
Stall prevention selection during Hunting-prevention function selec-
L3-01 1 N1-01 1
accel tion
L3-02 Stall prevention level during accel 120 N1-02 Hunting-prevention gain 1.00
Speed feedback detection control
L3-03 Stall prevention limit during accel 50 N2-01 1.00
(AFR) gain
Stall prevention selection during Speed feedback detection control
L3-04 1 N2-02 50
decel (AFR) time constant
Stall prevention selection during Speed feedback detection control
L3-05 1 N2-03 750
running (AFR) time constant 2
Stall prevention level during run- High-slip braking deceleration fre-
L3-06 120 N3-01 5
ning quency width
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level 0.0 N3-02 High-slip braking current limit 150
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width 2.0 N3-03 High-slip braking stop dwell time 1.0
Speed agreement detection level
L4-03 0.0 N3-04 High-slip braking OL time 40
(+/-)
Speed agreement detection width
L4-04 2.0 o1-01 Monitor selection 6
(+/-)
Operation when frequency refer-
L4-05 0 o1-02 Monitor selection after powerup 1
ence is lost
Frequency reference for loss of fre- Frequency units of reference set-
L4-06 80.0 o1-03 0
quency reference ting and monitor
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts 0 o1-05 LCD brightness 3
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/dis- 10
L5-02 Auto restart operation selection 0 o2-01 1
able
STOP key during control circuit
L6-01 Torque detection selection 1 0 o2-02 1
terminal operation
L6-02 Torque detection level 1 150 o2-03 Parameter initial value 0
L6-03 Torque detection time 1 0.1 o2-04 kVA selection 0*6
Frequency reference setting
L6-04 Torque detection selection 2 0 o2-05 0
method selection
Operation selection when digital
L6-05 Torque detection level 2 150 o2-06 0
operator is disconnected
L6-06 Torque detection time 2 0.1 o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting 0
Cumulative operation time selec-
L7-01 Forward drive torque limit 200 o2-08 0
tion
L7-02 Reverse drive torque limit 200 o2-09 Factory use -

10-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Table 10.1 Parameters (Continued)
Fac- Fac-
Set- Set-
No. Name tory No. Name tory
ting ting
Setting Setting
o2-10 Fan operation time setting 0 T1-02 Motor output power 0.40
Fault trace/fault history initializa-
o2-12
tion
0 T1-03 Motor rated voltage 200.0*7
o3-01 Copy function selection 0 T1-04 Motor rated current 1.90 *6
o3-02 Read permitted selection 0 T1-05 Motor base frequency 60.00
T1-00 Motor 1/2 selection 1 T1-06 Number of motor poles 4
T1-01 Autotuning mode selection 0 T1-07 Motor base speed 1750
* 1. Not initialized. (Japanese standard specifications: A1-01 = 1, A1-02 = 2)
* 2. The factory setting will change if the control method is changed. The factory settings given above are for V/f with PG control.
* 3. Factory setting depends on the control method (A1-02).
* 4. For V/f with PG control: 1.0
* 5. For Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more: 2.00
* 6. Setting range and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
* 7. Setting for 200-V class Inverters. For 400-V class Inverters, double the value.
* 8. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
* 9. The contents is ignored if the setting is 0.0.
* 10.E1-13 will have the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
* 11.If the set value is 0, acceleration will be to the speeds for the acceleration times (C1-01 to C1-08)
* 12.The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output. (The value given is for a 200-V class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)

10-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Index

Symbols CPU internal A/D converter error (CPF04), 7-7

CPU internal A/D converter error (CPF05), 7-7
+/- speed, 6-68 CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault (CPF09), 7-7
crimp terminal, 2-14, 2-54

Numerics
2-wire sequence, 6-12 D
3-wire sequence, 6-13 daily inspection, 8-2
DC reactor, 2-22

A deceleration stop, 6-18

detecting motor overspeed, 6-146
AC reactor, 2-22
detecting PG open circuit, 6-146
acceleration and deceleration times, 6-19
Digital Operator, 3-2
Advanced Programming Mode, 3-5, 3-9
Digital Operator Communications Error 1 (CPF00), 7-6
Analog Opertor, 10-10
Digital Operator Communications Error 2 (CPFO1), 7-6
ASIC internal RAM fault (CPF07), 7-7
Digital Operator Connection Fault (OPR), 7-6
ASIC version fault (CPF10), 7-7
Digital Operator display functions and levels, 5-3
auto restart external outputs, 6-59
Drive Mode, 3-5, 3-7
autotuning, 4-11
dwell function, 6-22
Autotuning Mode, 3-5, 3-12

E
B
EEPROM error (CPF03), 7-7
Baseblock circuit error (CPF02), 7-7
EEPROM write error (ERR), 7-12
Braking Resistor, 2-26
electromagnetic switch (MC), 2-23
Braking Resistor Unit, 2-26, 10-7
Excessive Speed Deviation (DEV), 7-5, 7-9
Braking Unit, 2-26, 10-7
External error detected for Communications Card other than
SI-K2 (EFO), 7-9
external error function, 6-71
C External fault (input terminal 3) (EF3), 7-6
common specifications, 9-4 External fault (input terminal 4) (EF4), 7-6
Communications on Standby (CALL), 7-10 External fault (input terminal 5) (EF5), 7-6
Communications Option Card A/D converter error (CPF20), External fault (input terminal 6) (EF6), 7-6
7-7
External fault (input terminal 7) (EF7), 7-6
Communications Option Card DPRAM error (CPF23), 7-7
External fault input from Communications Option Card
Communications Option Card model code error (CPF22), 7- (EF0), 7-6
7
Communications Option Card self diagnostic error (CPF21),
7-7 F
control circuit terminals for Asian models, 2-29
FJOG/RJOG commands, 6-70
control circuit terminals for European models, 2-37
Forward/Reverse Run Commnads Input Together (EF), 7-8
Control Fault (CF), 7-5
frequency reference, 6-6
Control method selection error (OPE06), 7-11
frequency reference adjustment, 6-27
control methods, 4-10
Fuse Blown (PUF), 7-2
Control Power Fault (UV2), 7-3
Cooling Fin Overheating (OH), 7-3, 7-8

Index-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index

G motor protection operation time, 6-49

motor rotation direction, 6-51
Ground Fault (GF), 7-2 motor torque detection, 6-43
ground wiring, 2-25 multi-function analog input, 6-40
grounding, 2-23 Multi-function analog input selection error (OPE07), 7-11
Multi-function input selection error (OPE03), 7-11

H multi-step speed operation, 6-10

High-slip Braking OL (OL7), 7-5

hunting prevention function, 6-38 N
noise filter, 2-24

I no-load operation, 4-16

Incorrect Inverter capacity setting (OPE01), 7-11

inductive noise, 2-24 O
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault (UV3), 7-3 open-loop vector control, 4-10
installation site, 1-9 Operation Errors, 7-11
Installed Braking Resistor Overheating (RH), 7-4 Option Card Communications Error (BUS), 7-10
Internal Braking Transistor Fault (RR), 7-4 Option Card connection error (CPF06), 7-7
Inverter input voltage, 6-130 Option Card selection error (OPE05), 7-11
Inverter modes, 3-5 Option Communications Error (BUS), 7-6
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm (OH2), 7-8 options and peripheral devices, 9-5
Inverter Overload (OL2), 7-4 Output Open-phase (LF), 7-3
Overcurrent (OC), 7-2

J Overspeed (05), 7-5

Overspeed (O5), 7-9
jump frequency function, 6-29
Overtorque 1 (OL3), 7-9
Overtorque 2 (OL4), 7-9

L Overtorque Detected 1 (OL3), 7-4

Overtorque Detected 2 (OL4), 7-4
loaded operation, 4-16

M P
parameter access levels, 4-17
magnetic contactor, 2-22
parameter descriptions, 5-2
Main Circuit Overvoltage (OV), 7-2, 7-8
Parameter selection error (OPE08), 7-11
Main Circuit Undervoltage (UV), 7-8
Parameter setting error (OPE011), 7-12
Main Circuit Undervoltage (UV1), 7-3
Parameter setting range error (OPE02), 7-11
Main Circuit Voltage Fault (PF), 7-3
parameters
maintenance and inspection, 8-1
acceleration/deceleration (C1), 5-19
molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), 2-21 analog inputs (H3), 5-49
motor constant parameters, 6-127 analog monitor cards (F4), 5-41
Motor Overheating (OH3), 7-8 carrier frequency (C6), 5-25
Motor Overheating Alarm (OH3), 7-4 communications option cards (F6), 5-44
copy function (o3), 5-73
Motor Overheating Fault (OH4), 7-4
DC injection braking (b2), 5-12
Motor Overload (OL1), 7-4

Index-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index

dwell functions (b6), 5-17 PG Disconnection Detected (PGO), 7-5

energy saving (b8), 5-18 PG is disconnected (PGO), 7-9
fault history (U3), 5-80 PG pulse setting, 6-144
fault restart (L5), 5-62
PG rotation direction, 6-144
fault trace (U2), 5-79
PG Speed Control Card, 2-48, 6-144
field weakening (d6), 5-31
hardware protection (L8), 5-65 PID control applications, 6-117
high-slip braking (N3), 5-69 PID control selection error (OPE09), 7-11
hunting prevention function (N1), 5-67 PID Feedback Reference Lost (FBL), 7-5
initialize mode (A1), 5-9 PID Feedback Reference Lost (FbL), 7-10
jump frequencies (d3), 5-29
power ON, 4-4
monitor select (o1), 5-69
motor 2 setup (E4), 5-37
motor 2 V/f pattern (E3), 5-35
motor autotuning (T), 5-73
Q
motor overload (L1), 5-56 Quick Programming Mode, 3-5, 3-8
motor setup (E2), 5-33
motor slip compensation (C3), 5-22
multi-function analog outputs (H4), 5-52 R
multi-function digital inputs (H1), 5-45
radio noise, 2-25
multi-function digital outputs (H2), 5-47
rated current, 6-48
multi-function selections (o2), 5-71
not used (F5), 5-43 RS-422A/485 communications, 6-76
operation mode selections (b1), 5-11 RS-422A/485 Communications Error (CE), 7-6, 7-10
PG option setup (F1), 5-38 run command, 6-12
PID control (b5), 5-15
power loss ridethrough (L2), 5-57
preset reference (d1), 5-27 S
pulse train I/O (H6), 5-54
S-curve characteristics, 6-22
reference detection (L4), 5-61
reference frequency hold (d4), 5-30 setting number of gear teeth between PG and motor, 6-145
reference limits (d2), 5-29 setting PG pulse monitor output dividing ratio, 6-146
RS-422A/485 communications (H5), 5-53 slip compensation function, 6-34
S-curve acceleration/deceleration (C2), 5-21 speed control with PG, 6-143
speed control (ASR) (C5), 5-24 speed feedback detection function, 6-39
speed feedback protection control functions (N2), 5-68
stall prevention, 6-23, 6-25, 6-43
speed search (b3), 5-13
standard connection diagrams, 2-20
stall prevention (L3), 5-59
status monitor parameters (U1), 5-75 standard Inverter specifications, 9-2
timer function (b4), 5-14 stopping methods, 6-14
torque compensation (C4), 5-23 straight solderless terminal, 2-30
torque detection (L6), 5-63 straight solderless terminals, 2-38, 2-54
torque limits (L7), 5-65
surge absorber, 2-22
user-set parameters (A2), 5-10
switching monitors when the power supply is ON, 6-136
V/f pattern (E1), 5-31
parameters settable in quick programming mode, 5-4
password, 4-17 T
password setting, 6-141
teminal block configuration, 2-6
periodic inspection, 8-2
thermal relay, 2-24
periodic maintenance of parts, 8-2
tightening torque, 2-14, 2-29, 2-54
PG (encoder) pulse, 2-55

Index-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Index

timer function, 6-116

torque compensation, 6-36
torque limit function, 6-40
trial operation, 4-1
Troubleshooting, 7-1, 7-15

U
Undertorque 1 (UL3), 7-9
Undertorque 2 (UL4), 7-9
Undertorque Detected 1 (UL3), 7-5
Undertorque Detected 2 (UL4), 7-5

V
V/f control with PG, 4-10
V/f control without PG, 4-10
V/f data setting error (OPE10), 7-12
V/f pattern setting, 6-129, 6-130
Verify Mode, 3-11

W
watchdog timer fault (CPF08), 7-7
wire sizes, 2-14, 2-29, 2-37
wiring, 2-1

Index-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Revision History

Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. I532-E1-1

Revision Code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to
the previous version.
Revision code Date Revised content
1 July 2001 Original production

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine